Home

WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer User`s Manual

1. 13 426 13 I am O o oocom 010 0 0 Joolooloalal kh N o CS a _ 222 N 000 S0 oe0 Gc 4 O bo i Ooooh 5 i E o N Dimensions with the JIS rack mount kit 480 1 460 Rear View 00 Uy 32 427 28 9 OBS me o0o0o00000 IS IS ooo Soo B 2200 Dlessod O 900 oo eq oo 6 oOo jo _ jogja 000 oo e0 Fc 5 erea o Dimensions with the EIA rack mount kit 481 1 0 4 465 oooga 28 9 IS IS ogo Cee 000 BlocscoD DlecooD Of oojoo o joo oo oo oojo o Soom s D 177 0 3 Rack mount attachment plane Rack mount attachment plane Unit mm Unless otherwise specified tolerance is 3 however tolerance is 0 3 mm when below 10 mm 12 18 IM 760301 01E Appendix Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions Measurement Fu
2. 4 Press the Mode soft key to display the Mode menu 5 Press the Real Time soft key to select the real time mode The store reservation time menu appears 6 Press the Real Time Control soft key to display the Real Time Control dialog box 7 Press the cursor keys to select one of the reservation year month date hour minute and second boxes for specifying when the storage operation will start Store Start 8 Press SET to display the entry box 9 Press the cursor keys to set the year month date hour minute or second that you selected in step 7 10 Press SET or ESC to close the box 11 Repeat steps 7 to 10 to set the year month date hour minute and second 12 Press the cursor keys to select one of the reservation year month date hour minute and second boxes for specifying when the storage operation will end Store End 13 Repeat steps 8 to 11 to set the year month date hour minute and second R Wode fade Manual menses Real Time Ft gt Count 100 P 100 r M setting eae setting Real Time Control a gt gt inu E aA Store Item 4 Store Item poate W List Item List Item List Item H 7 Store Count store Guini Store Count e Turning ON OFF the Alert Indication for Internal Memory Initialization 1 2 S M t Ini Al OFF Mode Btore Recall j _ Press
3. Securely connect the power cord to the power connector of the instrument 3 3 and the power outlet Set supply voltage within the permitted range 3 3 Check the display settings 10 6 Check that the fuse is not blown 11 5 The displayed data is not correct Check that the ambient temperature and humidity are within the 3 2 specifications Check that noise is not affecting the measurement 3 1 3 5 Check the wiring of the measurement cable 3 8 to 3 11 Check the wiring system 3 8 to 3 11 4 1 Check that the line filter is turned OFF 4 8 Check the measurement period settings 4 7 Check the FAQ at the following URL http www yokogawa com tm Power cycle the instrument 3 4 Keys do not work Check the REMOTE indicator If the REMOTE indicator is ON press the LOCAL key to turn it OFF Check that key lock is OFF 10 7 Perform a key test If it fails servicing is required 11 3 Triggering does not work Check the trigger conditions 6 4 Check that the trigger source is being applied 6 4 Unable to make harmonic measurements Check the PLL source settings Check that the PLL source input signal is within the specifications _ Unable to print on the built in printer The printer head may be damaged or worn out Servicing required Unable to recognize the medium Check the format of the medium If necessary format the medium 9 2 The medium may be damaged
4. e Selecting the Voltage Mode 2 Press VOLTAGE RANGE MODE to select one of the modes from RMS to RMEAN 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select the voltage mode of all elements e Selecting the Current Mode 4 Press CURRENT RANGE MODE to select one of the modes from RMS to RMEAN 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 to select the current mode of all elements Explanation The voltage and current modes can be selected from the following four modes RMS True rms value MEAN Rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value e DC Simple average e RMEAN Rectified mean value The initial setting is RMS For the method of computing the voltage and current in each mode see appendix 1 When the independent setting of input elements is OFF the element switches according to the wiring system To measure the RMS and MEAN of voltage simultaneously use the user defined function For details see section 5 4 The voltage and current mode selections are invalid in wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode and IEC harmonic measurement mode In this case the total value of the rms values of each order in the range between the maximum and minimum values of the measured order specified in the harmonic measurement option menu is displayed The voltage and current mode selections are invalid in voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement mode IM 760301 01E 5 9 JUBWIDINSeD JOMOd 5 3
5. File List Path PC_Card pct Space 128212992 hyte File Name Size Date Attribute Ta Cpc_card 1 x gt 2004705722 00 52 0003 27309 2004 05 22 00 54 R7 0000 27309 2004 05 22 00 53 R f Load D Property in Save Filter Item A Load Exec 7 Utility e Selecting the File to Be Loaded 7 Press the cursor keys to select the file e Executing the Load Operation 8 Press the Load Exec soft key The selected file is read from the directory indicated in Path At the same time the Load Exec soft key changes to the Abort soft key e Aborting the Load Operation 9 Press the Abort soft key The load operation is aborted At the same time the Abort soft key changes to the Load Exec soft key Load Menu Load Menu gt 7 Proper ty Property Filter Filter Item All te All Ty Load Exec IM 760301 01E 9 25 e eq Buipeo7 pue Burnes el 9 5 Loading Setup Parameters e Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box The procedure is the same as that given inin Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 e Viewing the Properties The procedure is the same as that given inin Viewing the Properties in section 9 6 Explanation The setup parameters saved using the WT3000 can be loaded e Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory
6. To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENTRANGE E operation press ESC OO located above the soft O G Qa fress In the procedural A CY explanation below the MEASURING ae phrase press the cursor e en MODE AUTO mone AUTO keys may be used This INPUT INFO phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT orme and character strings For numeri l WAVE UIP s a aig UPDATE HOLD toca details on the procedures s see section 3 14 WP q a gt rum ore CAL a MG mem f FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG srr I LOWER ITEM OWER FOR USER SET O AL 1 Press FORM to display the Trend Form menu If the trend display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM 2 Press the cursor keys to set the time axis When the display of scale values is turned ON see section 6 8 the times at the left end fixed to 0 s and the right end of the screen are displayed in the lower left corner and lower right corner of the screen respectively Format Single 3s div EJ trend t div Clear Trend Exec 7 8 IM 760301 01E 7 4 Setting the Time Axis Explanation Set the time axis in terms of T div time per grid Set the time per divisi
7. Select this key to display the window on the right Version 2 00 or later Press the soft key Each time the soft key is pressed the temporarily stored strings are displayed in the entry box of the keyboard in order When the eight strings that are temporarily stored are displayed the most recent string is displayed again If there are characters already in the entry box they are overwritten with the recalled string Correct the recalled equation according to steps 1 to 4 in Entering the Equation and Temporarily Storing It described above and enter it The string is temporarily stored in the internal memory IM 760301 01E 3 29 sjuowainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 14 Entering Values and Character Strings Moves the cursor upward Moves the cursor downward UMN E1 m INSERT s Switches between upper case and lower case f a Deletes the character before the entry position Switches between insert and overwrite mode Recalls the temporarily stored string AGGIE faa z i Enters the string Entering the Unit File Name and Comment the server name user name password and e mail address etc for Ethernet communication The figure below shows the keyboard that appears when entering the file name or comment File names and comments can be temporarily held in the internal memory so that they can be used in other file n
8. ITEM LOWER ITEM FORM LOWER FORM USER USER SET ELEMENT O ALL CAL INTEG OREMOTE e Turning ON OFF the Independent Setting 1 Press WIRING to display the Wiring menu 2 Press the Element Independent soft key to select ON or OFF Wiring Setting Formula Compensation fi Element Independent PEF oN 4 Measure Selecting Independent Setting of Input To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 4 4 IM 760301 01E 4 2 Selecting Independent Setting of Input Elements Explanation In the wiring system settings you can select whether to set the measurement range or synchronization source of input elements in the same wiring unit collectively or independently Turning ON OFF the Independent Setting of Input Elements For example assume that the wiring system on a model with three input elements is set as follows Input elements 1 to 3 Three phase four wire system 8P4W Input elements 1 to 3 are assigned to a single wiring unit XA e ON The measurement range or synchronization source can be set independently for each input element included in the wiring unit e OFF The
9. To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC OO located above the soft 00 a CD reys evemenr In the procedural ALL Cv CY explanation below the MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor ais ien Coe ea MODE keys may be used This INPUT INFO phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Onewore and character strings For uumeric wave vie some RRE roo details on the procedures see section 3 14 ww e ri v l ITEM FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG gran SHIFT LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL A ry y 1 Press INTEG to display the Integ menu 2 Press the Integ Set soft key to display the Integ Set menu c Q Q gt rr e Selecting the Normal Integration Mode 3 Press the Mode soft key to display the Mode menu 4 Press the Normal soft key to select the integration mode Continuous Inte Mode Normal Timer Setting R Normal gt gt R Continuous Auto Cal Auto Cal PFF ON PFF ON K M D A Output D A Output Rated Time Rated Time IM 760301 01E 5 35 JUSWIDINSeD JOMOd 5 12 Setting the Manual Integration Setting the Integration Timer 5 Press the Timer Setting soft key to display the Timer Setting dialog bo
10. Input element 2 to 4 CPU Input element 1 Loos Qsce eee eee aes Se Bae oS Se Se Se ae Se BS 4 eee shee seed Voltage input circuit K 84 inch i Volt meas input circuit Element LCD u ovv gt 2 0 l lt AD i 2to4 i Line 1 l d filter rT Te psp _ RGB output Rae ree a ann wren ae ae he ae eee ae ae a esi so Sea ais aes f Element 1 option i Freq meas input circuit Pulse HH i zero cross trans i Freien detection remer l Keys i O l i filter I Input peak detection circuit Peak L I GP IB PN 8 an te AR a ht ot tt een es at es ee detection reee e Delta eS See Se Caan e DSP urrent input circuit i gt option a PC card 0O A D 74 1 Line oO AS T filter zero cross Pulse RS 232 Frequency _ o detection tans i MATH DSP _ option filter Peak former option detection Built in printer Sa a ei ag ae ee ee ee si option Motor input circuit option De 0 0 8 A D Isolator H D A e Line O F filter zero cross Isolator option detection Peak K USB port PC detection Motor option DSP D iire O O A D j _ USB port peripheral eq l O device option filter zero cross Isolator gt ep detection Ethernet Peak i detection option Input Signal Flow and Process The input elements 1 through 4 consist of a voltage input circuit and a current input circuit The input circuits are mutually isolated They are
11. MENU DISPLAY numeri wave ITEM amp ELEMENT uur S Q A all RATE HOLD OREMOTE LOCAL WPiq TIME FU FI n SINGLE CAL ITEM FORM LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER evewenr USER SET O AL INTEG SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Config soft key to display the Config menu Setting Key Lock 3 Press the Key Lock soft key to select ON or OFF Setting Shift Lock 3 Press the Shift Lock soft key to select ON or OFF System Overview Remote Control Message Language ENG Menu Language Font Gothic IM 760301 01E 10 11 suonouny 19410 10 7 Setting the Key Lock and Shift Lock Function Explanation e Key Lock If key lock is turned ON all keys except the power switch MISC key ESC key and the 5th soft key from the top are disabled When key lock is ON the word Lock is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen Note Key lock ON OFF setting is held even when the power is turned OFF e Tu
12. O t Input terminal 1 Input terminal2 Wiring Example of a Three Phase Three Wire System Three Voltage Three Current System 3P3W 3V3A Using VT and CT R SOURCE LOAD 0 He D 2 2 mn i Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 Input terminal 3 Wiring Example of a Three Phase Four Wire System 3P4W Using VT and CT SOURCE LOAD zion o oe m on T e Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 Input terminal 3 aa Note ____ For the relationship between the wiring systems and the method of determining the measured values or computed values see Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions IM 760301 01E 3 23 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 12 Setting the Date Time Procedure a AVG scarna une FuTeR MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER SYNC SOURCE O NULL yam set measure CURSOR MENU STORE SET HELP a MENU DISPLAY are ITEM pone e FORM ITEM amp ELEMENT save WP q Wig Fun OREMOTE Le l SINGLE USER ELEMENT CAL re Eq LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SE
13. LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL UPDATE RATE HOLD CAL INTEG LOCAL ser To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Displaying the Relation Table of Elements and Measurement Ranges 1 Press SHIFT WIRING INPUT INFO The relation table of measurement ranges input filters transformation ratios scaling factors and other parameters are displayed for each element Displaying the Relation Table of Rotating Speeds and the Input Ranges of Torque 2 Press PAGE io display the list of motor settings A relation table of the rotating speed and the input range filter scaling factor unit and synchronization source of torque number of poles frequency measurement source and other parameters is displayed 1 Displayed only on models with the motor evaluation function motor version Displaying the Relation Table of Trend Targets and Measurement Functions 2 Press PAGE to display the list of trend settings The relation table of trend targets and measurement functions is displayed Displaying the Relation Table of D A Output Channels and Measurement Functions 2 Press PAGE io dis
14. N Explanation Zero Level Compensation This function is used to create a zero input condition using the internal circuit of the instrument and setting the level at that point to zero level Zero level compensation must be performed to meet the specifications of this instrument see chapter 12 e Pressing CAL executes the zero level compensation e Zero level compensation is automatically performed after changing the measurement range or input filter Note e For making accurate measurements it is recommended that zero level compensation be performed after warming up the instrument for at least 30 minutes In addition the ambient temperature needs to be within the specifications see chapter 12 and stable Ifthe measurement range and input filter are not changed over a long period of time the zero level may change due to the changes in the environment surrounding the instrument It is recommended that zero level compensation be performed in this case e There are functions that automatically perform zero level compensation during integration See section 5 13 suonouny 19410 IM 760301 01E 10 1 10 2 NULL Function Procedure Explanation A DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Sio A numeri WAVE U 1 P S a UPDATE l HOLD Locau Cursor keys WPiq lt gt TIME FU FI n SINGLE __ CAL o l ITEM Form USER evewenr INTEG sarr am LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL a AA Sc
15. Input either one Motor evaluation Motor version Internal memory Pi Store numeric data and waveform display data Recall numeric data and waveform display data gt Built in printer option Print screen image data numeric data list p dagoooo Numeric data Waveform display data Screen image data Store data PC card E USB keyboard option O m oog E oog mmj OOO o OOO 0000000090000 Ethernet interface option Screen image USB memory option numeric data list GP IB interface L RS 232 interface option A Ethernet interface option USB interface option RGB video signal Setup parameters Numeric data VGA output option Waveform display data Image signal Screen image data D A output option Output the measured values as analog voltage Network printer CRT Recorder IM 760301 01E uondioseg jeuonounes 2 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram Block Diagram
16. Item Specifications Rated supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 264 VAC Rated power supply frequency 50 60 Hz Permitted supply voltage frequency range 48 to 63 Hz Maximum power consumption when using the printer 150 VA The instrument can use a 100 V or a 200 V system for the power supply Check that the voltage supplied to the instrument is less than or equal to the maximum rated voltage of the provided power cord see page iii before using it Power cord included in the package IM 760301 01E 3 4 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch Items to Be Checked before Turning ON the Power e Check that the instrument is installed properly See section 3 2 Installing the Instrument e Check that the power cord is connected properly see section 3 3 Connecting the Power Supply Location of the Power Switch The power switch is located in the lower left corner of the front panel Turning the Power Switch ON OFF The power switch is a push button Press the button once to turn it ON and press it again to turn it OFF l Be OFF Lo L L Power ON Operation When the power switch is turned ON the self test starts automatically When the self test completes successfully the display shows the screen that was displayed immediately before the power switch was turned OFF Note If the instrument does not operate as described abov
17. Item Specifications Note Connector type BNC connector Common to master and slave I O level TTL Common to master and slave Output logic LJ negative logic falling edge Applies to the master Measurement start delay time 1 us 1 sample interval Applies to the master Output hold time Low level 500 ns or more Applies to the master Input logic LJ negative logic falling edge Applies to the slave Minimum pulse width Low level 500 ns or more Applies to the slave Input delay time During HOLD ON Applies to the slave 1 us 1 sample interval During HOLD OFF Applies to the slave Within 63 ns 1 sample period Note The master and slave conditions in which synchronized measurement is not possible are as follows The data update rate differs between the master and slave During real time integration mode or real time store mode Carry out the hold operation according to the procedure below during synchronized measurement Hold ON Turn the hold function ON from the WT3000 set to master Hold OFF Turn the hold function OFF from the WT3000 set to slave Output Circuit for the External Start Signal and Time Chart 5 V 5 V es 10 A 100 Q NW Start output A signal V V Measurement start delay time Measurement start Start output signal Output hold time IM 760301 01E 10 15 suoljoun y 48410 10 9 Master Slave Synchronization Measurement e Inpu
18. FFT Points Number of FFT Waveform Data Points 200 k 100 000 points 1 DC 20k 10 000 points 1 DC e Selecting the Waveform e When the data type is set to Binary or ASCII the waveform that is displayed on the screen is saved e When the data type is Float the waveform of the input signal selected from the following is saved Only the input signals of the installed elements are applicable for the selection For models with the motor evaluation function motor version the input signals of Speed and Torque are also selectable items IM 760301 01E 9 17 ejyeq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes el 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data Numeric Data Waveform Sampling Data e Executing the Save Operation The save operation may take several seconds to several hours depending on the number of waveforms to be saved the data type the number of waveform sampling data points determined by the data update rate and the data transfer rate to the save destination medium The save operation takes a long time when there are many waveforms to be saved the data update rate is slow and the number of waveform sampling data points is large The measurement stops while the data is being saved The measurement resumes when the save operation completes or is aborted To execute the save operation when the data update rate is 20 s and the display is held execute a single measurement once and carry out the save operation after the d
19. IM 760301 01E uondioseg jeuonounes 2 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Functions The selectable displays and main functions of each measurement mode are given below For a list of selectable functions see appendix 10 Measurement Mode Option s i Voltage Normal Measurement Wide Panawidih IEC Harmonic Waveform Fluctuation Harmonic Computation and Flicker Cycle by Cycle IG6 G5 IG6 G6 Harmonics Numeric Yes Limit Limit Waveform Trend No No Bar graph Display Vector Waveform computation FFT Flicker Cycle by Cycle Data update rate Integration Motor D A Delta computation 1 The rms values of the voltage or current are the total of the specified harmonic components not the values that include all frequency components 2 Can be monitored using the IEC harmonic measurement software 3 Fixed to 2s Differences in the Harmonic Measurement of Each Measurement Mode In IEC harmonic measurement mode limitation is placed on a portion of the functions of the WT3000 as compared with the harmonic measurement in normal measurement mode due to the measurement conditions and constraints in the standard For details see the table above During the development or inspection of a device you can use the harmonic measurement in normal measurement mode to measure simultaneously the rms voltage the rms current the
20. Note e After wiring the wiring system must be selected See section 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System e The thick lines on the wiring diagrams are the sections where the current flows Use appropriate wires that are suitable for the current Wiring Example of a Single Phase Two Wire System 1P2W If four input elements are available four single phase two wire systems can be set up See section 3 7 for details on which wiring system below should to be selected SOURCE LOAD U SOURCE LOAD Y Input terminal SOURCE LOAD I O O U eH SOURCE LOAD Input terminal Wiring Example of a Single Phase Three Wire System 1P3W If four input elements are available two single phase three wire systems can be set up elements 1 and 2 and elements 3 and 4 SOURCE LOAD N O O SOURCE LOAD Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 IM 760301 01E 3 15 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 9 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement for Direct Input Wiring Example of a Three Phase Three Wire System 3P3W If four input elements are available two three phase three wire systems can be set up elements 1 and 2 and elements 3 and 4 p SOURCE LOAD z O NT Se a SOURCE Loa D D C a Input Cam 1 Input Cam 2 Wiring Example of Three Phas
21. Sync Measure aster Slave 5 26 IM 760301 01E 5 9 Setting the Equations for Apparent Power Reactive Power and Corrected Power Explanation e Selecting the Equations for Apparent Power and Reactive Power The equations for apparent power and reactive power can be selected from three types For details see section 2 5 e TYPE 1 Method Used by Normal Mode of Conventional WT Series Power Meters Active power for three phase four wire system PX P1 P2 P3 Apparent power for three phase four wire system SE S1 S2 S3 U1xl1 U2xl2 U3xl3 Reactive power for three phase four wire system Q Q1 Q2 Q3 e TYPE 2 Active power for three phase four wire system PX P1 P2 P3 Apparent power for three phase four wire system S S1 S2 S3 U1xl1 U2xl2 U3xl3 Reactive power for three phase four wire system Q3 Sx PS e TYPE 3 Method Used by Harmonic Mode on the WT1600 and PZ4000 This computing equation can be selected on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option The harmonic measurement must be performed correctly For details on harmonic measurement see chapter 7 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Active power for three phase four wire system PX P1 P2 P3 Apparent power for three phase four wire system sy 4 py QF Reactive power for three phase four wire system Q Q1 Q2 Q3 Note There are limitatio
22. Torque cursor Path J j Max Wave C2 X F 8 Oms Math2 Cursor Path Max M wave c1 E 2 0ms wave c2 X i 8 Oms J 6 24 IM 760301 01E 6 9 Cursor Measurement Explanation For functional details see section 2 6 e ON OFF A cursor can be placed on the displayed waveform to measure and display the value at any point It can be used to measure the voltage and current of various sections of the waveform and the data on the horizontal axis X axis e ON Performs cursor measurement e OFF Does not perform cursor measurement e Item under Measurement Select the target waveform for the cursor measurement from below The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements U1 11 U2 12 U3 13 U4 14 Speed Torque Math1 and Math2 1 Applicable only to products with the motor evaluation function motor version 2 Applicable only to products with the advanced computation G6 option Math waveforms are displayed only in waveform computation mode e Measured items e Y Vertical value of cursor Y axis value e Yx Vertical value of cursor x Y axis value e AY The difference between the Y axis values of cursor and cursor x e X X axis value of cursor from the left end of the screen e Xx X axis value of cursor x from the left end of the screen e AX The difference between the X axis values of cursor and cursor x e 1 AX Reci
23. File Name and Comment A file name must be assigned Comments are optional e You cannot save data to a file name that already exists in the same directory overwriting not allowed Number and Types of Characters That Can Be Used Item Number of Characters Characters That Can Be Used File name 1 to 8 characters 0 9 A Z _ parentheses minus sign Comment 0 to 25 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces Auto Naming Function When Auto Naming is turned ON files with a four digit number from 0000 to 2499 are automatically created when saving the data You can specify a common name up to 4 characters specified through File Name that is placed before the number Initializing Clearing the Internal Memory The storage operation can be executed only when the internal memory is cleared e lf you are performing the first storage operation after turning ON the power switch there is no need to clear the internal memory Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Specify the type of files to be displayed Item Displays only the numerical data and waveform display data files in the selected directory e All Displays all the files in the selected directory IM 760301 01E eea paiojs y Burnes pue eeg Buljjesey pue Buros fe 8 5 Saving the Stored Data e Properties Displays the following information about the selected file filename extension th
24. IM 760301 01E 7 13 Aejdsig pualy si 7 7 Selecting the Display Interpolation and Graticule and Turning ON OFF the Scale Value and Waveform Label Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENTRANGE Erea operation press ESC OO located above the soft OO keys V CY In the procedural explanation below the MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor wane COED e move auro MODE AUTO keys may be used This PUT RO phrase refers to the procedures for selecting 00 items and entering values BA DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT oroe and character strings For E isu stalls on the procedures Ca gt OTHERS WPigi Fur SINGLE TIME n aM ITEM f ronm USER ELEMENT INTEG LOWER ITEM OWER FORM USER SET O AL e x 0 lt ao Ts Press FORM to display the Trend Form menu If the trend display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM 2 Press the Display Setting soft key to display the Disp Setting menu e Selecting Whether to Interpolate the Display 3 Same as the procedure given in Selecting Whether to Interpolate the Display in section 6 7 e Changing the Graticule 3 Same as the procedure given in Changing the Graticule in section 6 7 e Turning ON OFF the Scale Value Disp
25. unit Cov Function 4 FF _ON Expression UNNCES unit CaA Expression UMN CE4 Function 5 unit Expression UCE1 ORT user petined F1 F5 User Defined F6 F10 User Defined F11 F15 User Defined F16 F20 5 12 IM 760301 01E 5 4 Setting the User Defined Function e Setting the Unit 5 Press the cursor keys to select Unit 6 Press SET A keyboard appears 7 Use the keyboard to set the unit For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings e Setting the Equation 8 Press the cursor keys to select Expression 9 Press SET A keyboard appears 10 Use the keyboard to set the equation For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings User Defined Function F1 F5 User Defined Function F1 F5 Function 1 Expression Function 2 Expression Function 3 Expression Function 4 Expression Function 5 Expression Explanation FF Unit UCE1 ORT UMN E1 INSERT CAPS CAPS 2 a AIOE TTT LI cM DG a a PL FEST Pst Per e OT PFF m ORT FF _ON unit Cv C mman Function 5 uit CO Expression UCET ORT IEICE fo 2 Ei An equation can be created by combining the measurement function symbols Us
26. Fixed_ _User_ Wave Mapping Wave Mapping Trigger Display Settings Torque Tor que Math2 Math2 g it 6 16 IM 760301 01E 6 6 Waveform Display on Divided Windows Explanation The screen can be evenly divided and the waveforms can be assigned to the divided windows e Selecting the Number of Divisions Select the number of divisions of the screen from the choices below Single No division e Dual 2 divisions e Triad 3 divisions Quad 4 divisions The number of displayed points in the vertical direction of one divided window varies depending on the number of divisions as follows Single 432 points Dual 216 points Triad 144 points Quad 108 points e Waveform Mapping e Auto The waveforms that are turned ON see section 6 1 are assigned to the divided windows in order by element numbers in the order voltage U current 1 Speed Torque Math1 and Math2 1 Applicable only to products with the motor evaluation function motor version 2 Applicable only to products with the advanced computation G6 option Math waveforms are displayed only in waveform computation mode e Fixed The waveforms are assigned in order by element number in the order voltage U and current I to the divided windows regardless of whether or not the display is turned ON Speed is displaye
27. OTHERS menu Same as left Execute PRINT PRINT menu FORM menu LOWER FORM menu a jo o 3 3 Execute RESET Same as left a jo o 3 3 SHIFT ON SHIFT OFF ITEM menu LOWER ITEM menu UPDATE RATE menu Same as left WIRING menu Execute INPUT INFO Execute WAVE Same as left Execute EXT SENSOR SENSOR RATIO menu SYNC SOURCE menu Execute NULL Execute SINGLE Execute CAL IN lt x lt sl lt lelalmo mlolvlol zlelrljale OlalNioalalaljolm ain lt x se lt lo e lo OO IN IO AP wim s4IN MM x jg lt jo tH 0 0 Enter Execute Set Same as left Enter Same as left Execute Set Same as left Esc Execute Esc Same as left Escape Same as left Execute Esc Same as left Back Space Back Space Same as left Tab Space Bar Space Same as left MISC menu Same as left Execute HELP Caps Lock Same as left IM 760301 01E Appendix 9 Key Assignments of the USB Keyboard Ctrl Key Held Down on the USB Keyboard U RANGE up Same as left Shift ON on Shift on the Shift ON on the WT3000 USB Keyboard the WT3000 Select Soft key1 Same as left Select Soft key1 Same as left U RANGE down Same as left Select Soft key2 Same as left Select Soft key2 Same as left Execute U MO
28. SUOI IPUOD JUSWaINSeS y gt 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range for Direct Input The combinations of the actual voltage and current ranges and the power range are listed below according to the table on the previous page when the voltage or current range of each element is set to the same range The table shows the active power range unit W The same ranges are set for apparent power unit VA and reactive power unit var Just replace the unit with VA or var when looking at the tables e When the crest factor see section 4 6 is set to 3 Active Power Range of Each Element Current Voltage Range V Range A 15 0000 30 0000 60 0000 100 000 150 000 300 000 600 000 1000 00 5 00000m 75 000 mW 150 000 mW 300 000 mW 500 000 mW 0 75000 W 1 50000 W 3 00000 W 5 00000 W 10 0000m 150 000 mW 300 000 mW 600 000 mW 1 00000 W 1 50000 W 3 00000 W 6 00000 W 10 0000 W 20 0000m 300 000 mW 600 000 mW 1 20000 W 2 00000 W 3 00000 W 6 00000 W 12 0000 W 20 0000 W 50 0000m 0 75000 W 1 50000 W 3 00000 W 5 00000 W 7 5000 W 15 0000 W 30 0000 W 50 0000 W 100 000m 1 50000 W 3 00000 W 6 00000 W 10 0000 W 15 0000 W 30 0000 W 60 0000 W 100 000 W 200 000m 3 00000 W 6 00000 W 12 0000 W 20 0000 W 30 0000 W 60 0000 W 120 000 W 200 000 W 500 000m 7 5000 W 15 0000 W 30 0000 W
29. Efficiency Compensation In the efficiency equation n A B the compensation value Err in the table below is subtracted from denominator B according to the element or wiring unit included in numerator A Element or Wiring Unit Compensation Err Element Err U xU RUxsf l xl xRIxsf A B Err XErr total of Err of all elements included in U Measured voltage rms mean r mean or dc depending on the voltage mode is the element number l Measured current rms mean r mean or dc depending on the current mode is the element number Ru Input resistance 10 MQ of the voltage input terminal Ri Input resistance 5 5 mQ of the current input terminal sf Scaling factor for power is the element number Example PZA n where YA Element 1 and 2 B Element 3 and 4 PIB The efficiency compensation for above PXA PEB U1 x U1 Ry x sf1 11xI1 x Ry x sf1 U2 x U2 Ry x sf2 12 x 12 x R x sf2 n Compensation for the Two Wattmeter Method The computation below is performed on the element or wiring unit wired to 3P3W 3V3A Example When elements 1 2 and 3 are set to 3P3W 3V3A Computation step 1 Calculation of compensation values e Power Compensation SP The average of u n 1 u n 2 3 x i n 1 i n 2 i n 3 e Watt hour total Compensation SWP WP of u n 1 u n 2 3 x i n 1 i n 2 i n 3 e Watt hour Compensation SWP WP
30. Function Unit Harmonics OR2 to OR100 UPHI UPHI E1 OR3 Yes No No No Yes IPHI IPHI E1 OR3 Yes No No No Yes Z E1 0R3 RS E1 0R3 XS E1 0R3 RP E1 0R3 XP E1 0R3 UHDF UHDF E1 0R3 IHDF IHDF E1 0R3 PHDF PHDF E1 OR3 UTHD UTHD E1 ITHD ITHD E1 PTHD PTHD E1 UTHF UTHF E1 ITHF ITHF E1 UTIF UTIF E1 ITIF ITIF E1 HVF HVF E1 HCF HCF E1 PHIU1U2 PHIU1U2 E5 PHIU1U3 PHIU1U3 E5 PHIU1I1 PHIU1I1 E5 PHIU112 PHIU112 E5 PHIU113 PHIU113 E5 Example E1 to E4 E5 or E6 ORT ORO OR1 User Defined Function None or space None or space None or space None or space None or space None or space None or space None or space None or space None or space None or space None or space None or space None or space None or space None or space None or space None or space None or space App 46 IM 760301 01E Appendix 13 Parameters in the Operands of User Defined Functions MAX hold Measurement Function User Defined Function Left Parameter in or Parameter in Right Parameter in Wiring Element Unit Order Fundamental wave Normal Value ne or Total Value ne Harmonics Example E1 to E4 E5 or E6 O
31. IM 760301 01E JUSWIDINSeD JOMOd 5 1 Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the Displayed Items e Selecting from the Menu 4 Press ITEM to display the Numeric menu Selecting the Item to Be Changed Press the Item No soft key Press the cursor keys to select the item to be changed The item to be changed is highlighted On Changing the Measurement Function 7 Press the Function soft key to display the measurement function selection box 8 Press the cursor keys to select any of the measurement functions starting with None 9 Press SET The symbol for the selected measurement function and the numeric data are displayed at the highlighted position e Changing the Element Wiring Unit 10 Press the Elemeni z soft key to display the element wiring unit selection box 11 Press the cursor keys to select any of the elements wiring units starting with Elementi 12 Press SET The symbol for the selected element number or wiring unit and the numeric data are displayed at the highlighted position This completes the procedure for changing the displayed items using the menu For details on changing the harmonic order of the measurement functions of harmonic measurement see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Numeric 4 Numeric 4 S Item No S Item No 1 1 J a S Function 4 Function None u 1 P s Q A u L N ou i FreqU Fregi z Rs ooe pse
32. Outer case Grounding Shielded case of the current measurement circuit For example we will consider the case when one side of the power source and the outer case are grounded In this case two current flows can be considered load current i_ and the current that flows through the stray capacitance ics iL flows through the current measurement circuit then through the load and returns to the power source shown with a dotted line ics flows through the current measurement source through the stray capacitance and then through the earth ground of the outer case and returns to the power source shown with a dot dash line Therefore the current measurement circuit ends up measuring the sum of iL and ics even though it wants to measure only ic ics is the amount of error in this case If the voltage applied to Cs is Vcs common mode voltage then ics can be found using the following equation Because the phase of ics is ahead of the voltage by 90 the effects of ics on the measurement accuracy increases as the power factor gets smaller ics Vcs x 2af x Cs LOAD When measuring high frequencies as in this instrument this error ics cannot be ignored By connecting the current input terminal of the instrument to the side that is close to the earth potential of the power source SOURCE Vcs becomes approximately zero and very little ics flows IM 760301 01E App
33. PFF ON i D A Output Rated Time e Integrating in Normal Integration Mode or Repetitive Integration Mode e Starting the Integration 11 Press INTEG to display the Integ menu 12 Press the START soft key The START indicator to the right of the INTEG key illuminates and the integration is started Holding the Integration 13 Press HOLD The HOLD key illuminates and the numeric data display is held Integration continues e Releasing the Hold Operation 14 Press HOLD while the values are held The HOLD key turns OFF and the numeric data display is updated In the hold condition the display can be updated by carrying out single measurements by pressing SINGLE e Stopping the Integration 15 Press the STOP soft key The START indicator turns OFF and the STOP indicator illuminates The integration time and integration value are held If you press STOP before the time specified by the integration timer is reached and then press START integration continues up to the time specified by the integration timer If the time specified by the integration timer elapses in the normal integration mode the START indicator turns OFF and the STOP indicator illuminates The integration time and integration value are held If the time specified by the integration timer elapses in the repetitive integration mode the integration time and integration value are automatically reset and the integration is repeated until STOP is pressed
34. Procedure Saving the Screen Image Data CAUTION Do not remove the PC card or USB memory or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the PC card or USB memory is blinking This can damage the PC card or USB memory or destroy the data on the it fa Cursor keys a MOTOR FREQ TE SET FILTER hamser measure prvc sourcg CURSOR O NULL mace save STORE MENU p STORE SET MENU DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT OREMOTE NUMERIC WAVE r ITEM FORM U I P sone WP q USER evemenr UPDATE RATE HOLD SINGLE CAL INTEG LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL LOCAL a EJI To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press SHIFT IMAGE SAVE MENU to display the Image Save menu e Selecting the Data Format 2 Press the Format soft key to display the Format menu 3 Press any soft key from TIFF BMP Post Script PNG and JPEG to select the data format e Selecting the Color Mode Selectable only when the data format is set to T
35. Selecting the Computing Equation for Apparent Power and Reactive Power For procedures see section 5 9 There are three types of powers active power reactive power and apparent power In general each type is defined by the following equations Active power P UICOS escceeeeseeeeesneeteseeeeeeeeeenneetenaneeteneees 1 Reactive power Q UISING ce eeeceeeeceeteeeeeeeeneeteeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeatens 2 Apparent power S Ul ooo eee eceeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeseeeseaeeeeeteaeeeeeeeas 3 where U rms voltage I rms current and Phase between voltage and current For three phase power it is the sum of the powers of each phase In addition these power values are related as follows Apparent power S active power P reactive power 4 These definitions apply only for sine waves The measured values for apparent power and reactive power vary for distorted waveform measurement depending on which definitions above are combined for the computation Because the equations for deriving the power for distorted waveforms are not defined none of the equations can be said to be more correct than the other Therefore the WT3000 provides three equations for determining the apparent power and reactive power Because active power is derived directly from the sampled data errors resulting from different definitions do not occur such as in the apparent power and reactive power e TYPE 1 The Method Used by Normal Mode
36. Unable to save data to the selected medium If necessary format the storage medium 9 2 Check the free space on the medium Remove unnecessary files as 9 2 necessary or use a new medium Unable to set or control the instrument via the communication interface Check that the GP IB address or the parameter settings of the serial interface satisfy the specifications Check that the interface satisfies the electrical and mechanical specifications 1 See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E 2 See the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760301 17E IM 760301 01E Ey uonsedsu pue ooueuajuley HunooysajqnoiL 11 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Error Messages There are cases in which error messages are displayed on the screen during operation This section describes the meanings of the messages and their corrective actions The messages can be displayed either in English or Japanese see section 3 17 If the corrective action requires servicing contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs In addition to the error messages listed below there are communication error messages These messages are described in the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760301 17E Error in Execution Code Message Corrective Action Reference Section 11 Cannot measure PLL frequency Check input level
37. Viewing the Properties in section 9 6 IM 760301 01E 9 11 ejyeq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes el 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data Numeric Data Waveform Sampling Data Explanation CAUTION Do not remove the storage medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or is blinking Doing so can damage the storage medium or destroy the data on the medium Setup parameters waveform display data numeric data and waveform sampling data can be saved e Limitation on the Data Save Function by Measurement Modes There are limitations on the data save function depending on the measurement mode as follows Measurement Mode and Options g Voltage Normal Wige Bandwidth IEC Harmonic Waveform Fluctuation Cycle by Cycle Measurement Harmonic Computation Saved Item and Flicker G6 G5 None G6 G6 FL Harmonics Setup parameters Setup Waveform data Wave Numeric data Numeric Waveform sampling data Acquisition Yes Can be saved No Cannot be saved 1 FFT waveforms are saved as waveform sampling data Acquisition 2 If an item that is not measured or computed in the respective measurement mode is selected NAN data is saved e Saving Setup Parameters Select Setup from the File Item menu to save setup parameters e Setup Parameters That Are Saved The setup parameters of each key existing at the time of the save operat
38. character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press SHIFT STORE STORE SET to display the Store Set menu 2 Press the Mode soft key to select Store 3 Press theStore Setting soft key to display the Store Setting menu e Setting the Store Count 4 Press the cursor keys to set the store count _e Mode Etore Recall Cmr to File Init Memory Alert Msi OFF BN Memory D Store Set Mode Etore Recall Store to priam C to i iLe tore etting Memory to File Init Memory Alert Ms OFF Fe Store Setting M Mode Manual f am hm n Interval Setting 4 Store Item Numeric 4 List Item r Optimize Store Count IM 760301 01E 8 7 eea paiojs y Burnes pue eeg Buljjesey pue Buros eo 8 3 Setting the Store Count Store Interval Store Reservation Time and Alert Indication of Internal Memory Initialization e Checking the Maximum Store Count and Optimizing the Store Count 5 Press the Optimize Store Count soft key The Optimize Store Count dialog box appears and the maximum store count is displayed If the store count specified in step 4 is greater than the maximum store count proceed to step 6 Otherwise proceed to step 12 6 Press the cursor keys to select Maximum Store Count 7 Press SET to display the entry box 8 Press the cursor keys to set the store
39. e When a wiring unit is configured the measurement range is decreased on all input elements in the wiring unit when the range decrease condition above of all input elements in the wiring unit is met Note When non periodic pulse waveforms are applied during auto range the range may not remain constant If this happens use the fixed range setting 4 8 IM 760301 01E 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range for Direct Input e Power Range The measurement ranges power ranges of active power P apparent power S and reactive power Q are as follows Wiring System Power Range 1P2W single phase two wire voltage range x current range 1P3W single phase three wire voltage range x current range x 2 3P3W three phase three wire when the voltage and current ranges on the corresponding elements are set to the same range 3P3W 8V3A three voltage three current 3P4W three phase four wire voltage range x current range x 3 when the voltage and current ranges on the corresponding elements are set to the same range When the result of the equation voltage range x current range exceeds 1000 W VA or var the displayed unit changes to kW kVA or kvar e The display resolution is 600000 Note Because the voltage and current ranges switch independently according to range increase and decrease conditions in auto range mode different power ranges may be set for the same power value IM 760301 01E
40. 13 3 Pz W P1 P2 P1 P2 P3 Sii Blaak S1 S2 ei S2 Visi S2 S3 S1 S2 S3 TYPE3 PX QX TYPE1 Q1 Q2 Q1 Q2 Q3 Qs var TYPE2 SX PX TYPE3 Q1 Q2 Q1 Q2 Q3 Pc W Pc1 Pc2 Pci Pc2 Pc3 Continues to the next page App 2 IM 760301 01E Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions Table 3 3 che e Method of Determination Equation Measurement For details on the symbols in the equation see the Note on page App 3 A Single phase Three phase Three phase three wire three voltage Three phase Wiring system two wire 1P3W three wire 3P3W three current 3P3W 3V3A four wire 3P4W WP WP1 WP2 WP1 WP2 WP3 WP Wh WP gt WP 1 WP 2 WP 1 WP 2 WP 3 WP WP 1 WP 2 WP 1 WP 2 WP 3 qz qi q2 q1 q2 q3 5 q Ah q q 1 q 2 q 1 q 2 q 3 z q q 1 q 2 q 1 q 2 q 3 2 aon n 7 Sz n Time WSZ VAh n 1 S X n is the nth apparent power function N is the number of data updates N L Q2 n Time WQx varh n 1 QxX n is the nth reactive power function N is the number of data updates aE z 7 cos Note u n denotes the instantaneous voltage sampled data of the voltage signal i n denotes the instantaneous current sampled data of the current signal AVGI computes the average on the sampled data in the brackets over the measurement period There are two ways of computing the a
41. 5 Y axis conversion equation for each waveform Y axis value VResolution x raw data VOffset 6 Data type ISn n byte signed integer lUn n byte unsigned integer FSn n byte signed real number FUn n byte unsigned real number Bm m bit data IM 760301 01E App 15 x pu ddy Appendix 4 Power Basics Power Harmonics and Power RLC of AC Circuits This chapter describes the basics of power harmonic and RLC of AC circuits Electrical energy is converted into other types of energy for use such as in the form of heat for electrical heaters and furnaces turning force for motors and light for fluorescent lamps or mercury lamps Electric power refers to the work that electricity performs on these types of loads expressed in terms of the quantity per unit time The unit is watts W and electric energy that performs 1 joule of work in 1 second equals 1 W DC Power DC power P W is determined by the product of the applied voltage U V and the current A that flows P Ul W In the example below this amount of electric energy is retrieved from the power supply and consumed by resistance R Q every second iI Alternating Current AC Normally the power supplied by the power company is alternating current and the waveform is sinusoidal The size of alternating current can be expressed in terms of the instantaneous value maximum value rms value and mean value Normally it is expressed in terms of t
42. AG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL AC TOTOR FREG the soft keys SET FILTER HAM SET SINCSOURCE In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the j Oe cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE mace save STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 prt msc herr MENU 1 Press FILE to display the File menu 2 Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List dialog box appear 3 Press the Function soft key to display the Function menu File M File Item 4 ay 4 Function Setup Copy eo All Set D Property Filter item AL Attribute A 1 utitity i Dest Dir 5 E Load 9 37 IM 760301 01E ejeq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes eo 9 9 Renaming Files or Directories and Creating Directories Renaming a Directory or File 4 Press the Rename soft key to display the Rename menu Funct ion Delete Ea Rename MakeDir Format Attribute K Dest Dir e Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory 5 The procedure is the same as that given inin Selecting the Storage Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Direc
43. At the same time the Memory to File Exec soft key changes to an Abort soft key e Aborting the Save Operation 20 Press the Abort soft key to abort the save operation At the same time the Abort soft key changes to a Memory to File Exec soft key femory to File File List ath PC_Card Power Space 127776768 byte File Name Size Date Attribute la i pc_card 1 NetWork 1 con File Name TEST 2005705724 13 07 lt Power_T3 2005705724 13 00 lt Power_T2 2005705724 13 00 lt Power_T1 2005 05 24 12 58 Property Memory to File Exec e Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box 11 Press the Filter soft key to select Item or All e Viewing the Properties 11 On the File List dialog box press the cursor keys to select the file 12 Press the Property soft key to display the file property window 13 Press ESC to close the file property window femory to File File Name DATAOOOO csv g pc_card File Size 2307 byte File Name DATA NetWork Date Time 2005704712 15 39 g Property DATA0000 C Attribute R W item AIT Comment Memory to Memory to File Exec File Exec 8 16 IM 760301 01E 8 5 Saving the Stored Data When Saving Data through a Store and Save Operation Sequence 4 Press the File setting soft key to display the File setting menu e Selecting the Data Type
44. Element Object Elementi U V Zoom x1 U Position 0 000 1 V Zoom x1 I Position 0 000 FORM for Wave Format Single Time div 5 ms Trigger Mode Auto Source U1 Slope Rise Level 0 0 Display Setting Interpolate Line Graticule Grid Scale Value On Label Off Wave Mapping Mode Auto User Setting U1 0 11 0 U2 1 12 1 U3 2 13 2 U4 3 14 3 Speed 0 Torque 0 Math1 1 Math2 1 ITEM for Bar displayed on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option Bar Item No Function Element 1 2 3 U I P Elementi Elementi Elementi IM 760301 01E App 5 x pu ddy Appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data Item Setting FORM for Bar displayed on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option Format Single Start Order 1 End Order 100 ITEM for Trend Trend Display On T1 to T8 Trend Items Trend Object Ti Function U Element Elementi Order Trend Scale Trend Object Ti Scaling Auto Upper Scale 1 000E 02 Lower Scale 1 000E 02 FORM for Trend Trend Format Single Trend T div 3 s div Display Setting Common to Form for Wave FORM for Vector displayed on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option Object Numeric U Mag Mag XA On 1 000 1 000 ITEM for MATH displayed on models with the advanced computation G6 option Wave
45. INPUT INFO DISPLAY ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE DO OO faze MEASURING ITEM amp ELEMENT CURRENT RANGE MEASURING SENSOR RATIO 1808 AUTO OREMOTE a ITEM numeric WAVE FORM wie S Q A USER UPDATE POAT HOLD men CAL INTEG ELEMENT OWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL Q 9o D gt r SHIFT 1 Press ITEM to display the Trend Items menu If the trend display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT ITEM LOWER ITEM 2 Press the Trend Items soft key to display the Trend Items menu Trend Items K Trend Display 7 Frequency Meas Item Trend Scale To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Aejdsig pu L ss IM 760301 01E 7 5 7 3 Selecting the Trend Display Target e Selecting the Item to Be Set 3 Press the Trend Object soft key 4 Press the cursor keys to select a value between T1 and T16 e Selecting the Measurement Function 5 Press the Function soft key The measurement function selection box appears 6 Press the cursor ke
46. If any hardware peak over range is detected during the measurement of all cycles a number between 4 to 7 is recorded for the data of all cycles of that input signal e Saving the Waveform Sampling Data Select Acquisition from the File Item menu to save waveform sampling data Data acquired at the WT3000 s sample rate 200 kS s IM 760301 01E 9 15 ejyeq Duipeo pue Burnes el 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data Numeric Data Waveform Sampling Data e Relationship between the Waveform Sampling Data That Can Be Saved and Measurement Modes There are limitations on waveform sampling data that can be saved depending on the measurement mode as indicated below Measurement Mode Waveform Display Data Waveform Computation FFT Speed Torque Math12 Math2 2 1 Applicable only to products with the motor evaluation function motor version 2 Applicable only to products with the advanced computation G6 option e Selecting the Data Type Select the data type from below The extension is automatically added e Binary e The following two files are created in the directory e Waveform display data file wvf e ASCII header file hdr e Waveform display data is saved in binary format e For details on the ASCII header file see appendix 3 e Neither file can be loaded into the WT3000 e ASCII e Saved in ASCII format e The file can be used o
47. Limitation on Modifying the Settings during Integration When the integration is in progress settings of some functions cannot be changed as shown below Integration Operation Condition Integration Reset Integrating Integration Suspended START indicator OFF ON OFF STOP indicator OFF OFF ON Function Wiring system Yes No No Measurement range Yes No No Scaling Yes No No Filter Yes No No Averaging Yes No No Synchronization source Yes No No Hold Yes Yes Yes Single measurement Yes Yes Yes Data update rate Yes No No Display mode Yes Yes Yes Integration mode Yes No No Displayable Displayable Integration timer Yes No No Displayable Displayable Integration start Yes No Yes Integration stop No Yes No Integration reset Yes No Yes Store excludes integration Yes Yes Yes synchronization mode Printer Yes No Yes Zero level crossing Yes No No Null Yes No No e Yes Settings can be modified e No Settings cannot be modified e Starting integration in auto range mode switches the measurement range to fixed range mode Limitation on the Waveform Display Function during Integration The trigger function see section 6 3 for waveform display does not work while integration is in progress or is suspended Therefore the signal level of the waveform display at the left end of the screen may not be stable 5 34 IM 760301 01E 5 12 Setting the Manual Integration Procedure
48. MENU DISPLAY women WAVE ITEM amp ELEMENT U I P save Setting the Numeric Data and Waveform Display Data to Be Stored UPDATE RATE HOLD WPlq TIME l FU FI n SINGLE ITEM FORM LOWERITEM LOWER FORM USER Eeen USERSET ALL CAL INTEG OREMOTE cS To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press SHIFT STORE STORE SET to display the Store Set menu 2 Press the Mode soft key to select Store 3 Press theStore Setting soft key to display the Store Setting menu e Selecting the Item to Be Stored 4 Press the Store Item soft key to display the Store Item menu 5 Press any soft key from Numeric to Numeric Wave to select the stored item e If you select Numeric the stored item is the numeric data Proceed to Selecting the Numeric Data to Be Stored on the next page e If you select Wave the stored item is the waveform display data Proceed to Selecting the Waveform Data to Be Stored on page 8 5 e If you select Numeric Wave the stored item is both the numeric data and the waveform display data Proceed to Selecting the Numeric Data and W
49. SANG App 17 x pu ddy Appendix 4 Power Basics Power Harmonics and RLC of AC Circuits e Wiring Three Phase AC Power and Load Generally the power lines are connected using star wiring or delta wiring on three phase power supplies and loads Star wiring Delta wiring R R A A e Vector Display of Three Phase AC Power or Load Generally the voltage of each phase of a three phase AC power or load is offset by 120 Below is an illustration of a three phase AC power using vectors The voltage of each phase is called the phase voltage and the voltage between each phase is called the line voltage Phase voltage Line voltage T S If the power or load is connected in a delta wiring configuration and no neutral line is present the phase voltage cannot be measured In this case the line voltage is measured In addition the line voltage is sometimes measured when measuring a three phase AC power using two single phase wattmeters called the two wattmeter method If the magnitude of the phase voltage of each phase is equal and each phase is offset by 120 the line voltage is V3 times the phase voltage and the phase is offset by 30 Below is a vector representation of the relationship between the phase voltage and line current of a three phase AC voltage or load whose current phase is lagging the voltage phase by 0 App 18 IM 760301 01E Appendix 4 Power Basics Power Harmonics and RLC of AC Circu
50. Selecting the Frequency Measurement Source Procedure ELEMENT O OO ALL INPUT INFO VOLTAGE RANGE MEASURING DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT CURRENT RANGE Came Bisel RATIO A Ww wone AUTO numeri l WAVE OTHERS U I P S Q A WP q Fur USER PRE eo sor CAL INTEG ELEMENT ITEM FORM mi LOWER FORM USER SET O Al 1 Press ITEM to display the Numeric menu N dialog box Only the input signal of installed elements are displayed Press the cursor keys to select Freq1 or Freq2 Press SET A box used to select the frequency measurement source appears Press the cursor keys to select the input signal for measuring the frequency Press SET to confirm the frequency measurement source oon PR Numeric 4 S Item No 1 4 Function u Frequency Meas Itel M Element7 Element 1 To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Press the Frequency Meas Item soft key to display the Frequency Meas Item Freq 1 Te Freq 2 Eng Frequency M
51. Setting ge Cet uk pk Frequ Freq zk Rsk GXstk Rp xp Pe Quhdf kK thdf kK OPhdf k jUthd ithd Pthd uthf Oithf Outif Mitit Obvet het u peak u peak I peak I peak cfu cti we Owe w q q Or W Store Item l Time ws Owa 1 2 3 opi 4F1 AF2 AF3 AF4 i uj C dui uk G eui 1i tui 1j i 1k speed Torque SyncSp Slip Pm F1 Or OF G4 Ors Or6 GF GFs Oro F10 OF 11 F 12 0 F 13 0 F 14 0 F 15 0 F 16 0 F 17 F 18 0 F 19 0 F20 Optimize Store Count e Selecting Only the Items That Are Preset 7 Press the cursor keys to select Preset1 or Preset2 8 Press SET The buttons to the left of all the elements and measurement functions that are specified in Preset1 or Preset2 are highlighted indicating that the items will be stored Items set to Preset1 Items set to Preset2 List Ite Preset GJAll ON GJAII OFF Preset1 Preset2 Preset GJAII ON All OFF Preset1 Preset2 Elem Elem 1 Elem 2 Elem 3 Elem 4 Func gu Quad wi Oi wep ptk gs stk a atk SA ACK Gok uo p gFrequ Freq Rsk Xstk GRptk xp Pc Quhdf kK thdf kK OPhdf kI lUthd ithd o Pthd uthf Gjithf utif Gitit bv het ialuepeak u peak I peak I peak cfu cti WP j WP a q Or Time ws wa 71 2 23 0r AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 ui uj ui uk Gl ui 1i ui 1j Qeuvi ik speed Torque Syncsp Slip Pm F1 F2 OFr Or4 r5 Olr GF GFs F9 F10 OF 11 0 F 12 0 F 13 0 F 14 0
52. Trend C1 k Trend C2 X 5 Trend Cursor Setting n IM 760301 01E Aejdsig pualy ss 7 8 Cursor Measurement e Turning ON OFF Cursor Measurement 3 Press the Trend Cursor soft key to select ON or OFF If ON is selected the result of the cursor measurement is displayed Trend Cursor BEF o jf T1 TrendC2 Trace Te EJ Trend c1 Trend c2 X 5 e Selecting the Target Trend for Cursor Measurement Selecting the Target Trend for Cursor 4 Press the TrendC1 Trace soft key A box used to select the target trend appears 5 Press the cursor keys to select a value between T1 and T16 6 Press SET to confirm the new target trend Selecting the Target Trend for Cursor x 4 Press the TrendC2 Trace soft key A box used to select the target trend appears 5 Press the cursor keys to select a value between T1 and T16 6 Press SET to confirm the new target trend e Moving the Cursors 7 Press the Trend C1 Trend C2 x soft key to set the cursor target to Trend C1 Trend C2 x or both Trend C1 and Trend C2 x e If you select Trend C1 the position of cursor can be moved e If you select Trend C2 x the position of cursor x can be moved e If you select both Trend C1 and Trend C2 x the two cursors can be moved without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specified by Trend C1 changes 8 Press the cursor keys t
53. e Direct input Approx 5 5 mQ approx 0 03 u H e External sensor input Input resistance Approx 1 MQ input capacitance Approx 40 pF Instantaneous maximum allowable input 1s or less Voltage Peak value of 2500 V or RMS value of 1500 V whichever is less Current 2 A input element e Direct input Peak value of 9 A or RMS value of 3 A whichever is less e External sensor input Peak value less than or equal to 10 times the measurement range Current 30 A input element e Direct input Peak value of 150 A or RMS value of 50 A whichever is less e External sensor input Peak value less than or equal to 10 times the measurement range Continuous maximum allowable input Voltage Peak value of 1600 V or RMS value of 1100 V whichever is less Current 2 A input element e Direct input Peak value of 6 A or RMS value of 2 2 A whichever is less e External sensor input Peak value less than or equal to 5 times the measurement range Current 30 A input element e Direct input Peak value of 90 A or RMS value of 33 A whichever is less e External sensor input Peak value less than or equal to 5 times the measurement range IM 760301 01E 12 1 suoleoyioeds Ey 12 1 Input Section 12 2 Display Item Specifications Continuous maximum 1000 Vrms common mode voltage 50 60 Hz Influence from common When 1000 Vrms is applied with the voltage input terminals shorted and current input terminals o
54. e Selecting the Number of Displayed Items 2 Press FORM to display the Numeric Form menu 3 Press any of the soft keys from 4 Items 8 Items 16 Items All Items Single List and Dual List to select the number of displayed items Only on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option 4 Items 8 Items 16 Items All Items Single List Dual List SEERAD There are three methods to select the item to change measurement function and element wiring unit Select using the function select keys Select using the user defined function select key USER key Select from the menu IM 760301 01E 5 1 Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the Displayed Items Changing Using the Function Select Keys The display of measurement functions of U I P S Q A WP q TIME FU Fl and n and the element wiring unit can be changed using function select keys e Selecting the Item to Be Changed 4 5 Press ESC to clear the Numeric Form menu Press the cursor keys to select the item to be changed The item to be changed is highlighted e Changing the Measurement Function 6 Press the U I P S Q A b WP q Time or FU FI y function select key to select the displayed measurement function Press the key corresponding to the measurement function you wish to display The display switches each time the key is pressed as follows U gt gt P gt original dis
55. gt scauna mereen ava MOTOR FREQ EA MEASURE vnc SOURCE SOR O NULL FE _ mes store MENU STORE SET print msc MENU er DISPLAY numeri WAVE ITEM amp ELEMENT l U I P S Q A o UPDATE RATE HOLD WPlq l TIME FU FI n SINGLE ITEM FORM LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER l ELEMENT USERSET O ALL CAL INTEG OREMOTE so oer To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu e Selecting the Equation for Apparent Power and Reactive Power 2 Press the S Q Formula soft key to display the S Q Formula menu 3 Press one of the soft keys from Type1 Type2 Type3 to select the equation for apparent power Displayed only on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option User Defined Function Pc Formula M Sampling Frequency Auto Phase 180 Lead Lag Sync Measure Measure User Defined i Phase 180 Lead La
56. measurement mode 821 Attempt made to start flicker measurement Wait for the initialization to finish and the WT3000 while flicker initialization is not finished to become ready Then start the measurement 822 Attempt made to start flicker measurement Reset the flicker measurement wait for the while flicker measurement is in progress or initialization to finish and start the measurement result of flicker judgement is displayed 823 Cannot change during CAL Wait until CAL is completed 10 1 824 Attempt made to initialize flicker Reset the flicker measurement and then execute measurement while flicker measurement is initialization in progress or resultof flicker judgement is displayed 825 Cannot change limit settings while flicker Can be changed only when the measurement is measurement is in progress reset or while the judgement result is being displayed 826 Cannot be set or executed when flicker Reset the flicker measurement measurement is not reset 827 Illegal math expression Input a correct computing equation 5 4 828 Cannot start flicker measurement when all Perform judgement or move the observation period periods of dmax measurement are finished if necessary and measure again 829 Cannot judge flicker measurement until all Perform judgement after the dmax measurement of periods of dmax measurement are finished all observation periods is finished 830 Cannot move peri
57. 10 6 IM 760301 01E 10 5 Selecting the Screen Brightness Procedure Explanation fa Cursor keys ae amp DOA scaunc merren _ave_ MO TOR FREQ SET FILTER NUL CURSOR F _ mes store MI ENU STORE SET print msc er MENU DISPLAY numeri WAVE ITEM amp ELEMENT uur S Q A all RATE HOLD OREMOTE LOCAL WPlq TIME FU FI n SINGLE CAL ITEM FORM LOWER FORM LOWER ITEM ELEMENT O AL USER USER SET INTEG SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Config soft key to display the Config menu 3 Press the cursor keys to select a value between 1 and 3 System Overview Initialize Settings Remote Control Date Time Selftest Message Language ENG Menu Language ENG Shift Lock ON Selecting the Screen Brightness Select the screen brightness in the range of 1 to 3 The darkest setting is 1 and the brightest setting is
58. 2 Sample rate represents the number of data points that are sampled within 1 s For example at a sample rate of 200 kS s 200000 data points are sampled every second e Types of Measurement Functions Measurement Functions on Each Input Element The following 22 measurement functions are available For details related to the determination of measurement function data see Appendix 1 U voltage Urms Umn Udc Urmn current Irms Imn Idc Irmn P active power S apparent power Q reactive power A power factor phase difference fU fl also expressed as fU FreqU and fl Freql measures the frequencies of up to two voltage current signals U pk U pk maximum minimum values of voltage I pk I pk maximum minimum values of current CfU Cfl crest factor of voltage current Pc Corrected Power 3 The frequencies of voltage and current on all input elements can be measured on models with the frequency measurement add on option Measurement Functions of Wiring Units 2A and B Functions The following 14 measurement functions are available For details related to the determination of measurement function data see Appendix 1 Ux voltage average Urmsz Umnz Udcz Urmnz I current average Irmsz Imnz Idcx Irmnz P sum of active powers S sum of apparent powers Q sum of reactive powers A power factor average p phase difference average Pc sum of corrected powers Efficienc
59. 9 6 Specifying the File to Be Displayed Displaying File Properties and Selecting File Attributes Explanation e Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory The explanation is the same as that given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory in section 9 3 Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box You can specify the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box Item The list of files corresponding to the file type Setup Wave or Numeric that is specified for File Item in the File menu in the selected directory is displayed All The list of all the files in the selected directory is displayed Properties Displays the following information about the selected file filename extension the file size the date the file was saved the attribute the comment etc Selecting the File Attribute Select the file attribute of each file from the following Note R W Read and write R Read only Cannot write to the file or delete the file You cannot change a directory attribute The number of directories and files that can be displayed in the file list is 2500 If the number of directories and files in a directory exceeds 2500 the file list randomly displays 2500 of the directories and files Files that do not have an archive attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not remove the archive attribute of the files saved by the WT3000 using your PC Up to 41 characters can
60. C lt gt oTHeRs Weg Fun sma CAL Ge f ITEM FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG SHIFT 0 e S ee scarna neruTen AVG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above VOOR FREQ the soft keys HRM SET measure nesom In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the CURSOR O NULL fs P cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE mace save STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 print msc HELP MENU Note Check that it is okay to initialize the settings before actually initializing the settings You cannot set the settings back after initialization It is recommended that the setup parameters be saved see section 9 3 before initialization Press MISC to display the Misc menu Press the Initialize Settings soft key An Alert dialog box appears Press the cursor keys to select OK Press SET to execute the initialization To cancel the initialization select Cancel in step 3 and press SET ONS Real ly AIl Settings will be initialized Remote Do you want to execute Control OK Cancel g Date Time Selftest 3 26 IM 760301 01E
61. ELEMENT LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL Setting the Equation for Efficiency ile 2 3 6 Press WIRING to display the Wiring menu Press the n Formula soft key to display the n Formula dialog box Press the cursor keys to set the numerator or denominator of the efficiency equation from 11 to n4 Press SET A box used to select the parameters for computing the efficiency appears Press the cursor keys to select the parameter for computing the efficiency To set the sum of multiple parameters to the numerator or denominator in the equation select Udef1 or Udef2 Press SET to confirm Setting the Parameters for Computing the Efficiency 1 2 3 4 Press the cursor keys to set the operand of the equation to Udef1 or Udef2 Press SET A box used to select the computation parameter appears Press the cursor keys to select the computation parameter Press SET to confirm Wiring N Formula Wiring Setting Element C 41320 2130 330 421 C 1p2w 1 E 1P2Ww 1 1p2w1 1P2W 1 Compensation Element Independent PFF ON 4 Measure 5 20 IM 760301 01E 5 7 Setting the Equation for Efficiency Explanation An efficiency equation can be created by combining the measurement function symbols Using the numeric values of the measurement functions the energy conversion efficiency of the
62. FoRM USER ELEMENT INTEG sur y LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL 1 Press FORM to display the Wave Form menu If the waveform display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM 2 Press the Display Setting soft key to display the Disp Setting menu e Turning ON OFF the Scale Value Display 3 Press the Scale Value soft key to select ON or OFF e Turning ON OFF the Waveform Label 3 Press the Label soft key to select ON or OFF Wave For Wave Form Format M Format Single Single fa Time div Time div Sms Sms g i Trigger Trigger K Display gt Settings K Wave Mapping IM 760301 01E 6 21 Aejdsiq uuozaneM al 6 8 Turning ON OFF the Scale Value and Waveform Label Explanation e Turning ON OFF the Scale Value Display You can select whether or not to display ON OFF the upper and lower limits of the vertical axis and the values at the left and right ends of the horizontal axis time axis see section 6 3 of each channel ON Displays the scale values e OFF Does not display the scale values e Turning ON OFF the Label Display You can select whether to display waveform labels input signal names e ON Displays the label name OFF Does not display the label name Upper limit E Ear Waveform label Lower limit Eff 2 0 eae ia aw Time a
63. JOMOd 5 11 Integration Holding Starting and Stopping the Integration When the display is held the display of the integration result and communication output are held The integration operation continues regardless of whether the hold function is ON or OFF The relationship between the hold function and the start and stop operations is as follows If the integration is started while the display is held the display and communication output do not change When the hold function is released OFF or a single measurement by pressing SINGLE is made the integration result at that point is displayed or output via communications on HOLD OFF Display value Dotted line is the integration value Integration time START STOP RESET If the integration is stopped while the display is held the display and communication output values do not change from the held values When the hold function is released OFF or a single measurement by pressing SINGLE is made the integration result at the point when integration is stopped is displayed or output via communications ON HOLD SINGLE Single measurement T I I aor 1 1 I Display value_ Dotted line is the integration value Integration time 1 START STOP RESET e Sample Rate and Valid Frequency Range for Integration The sample rate is approximately 200 kHz The voltage current signal fr
64. LOWER FORM USER SET O AL LOCAL 1 Press ITEM to display the Trend Items menu If the trend display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT ITEM LOWER ITEM 2 Press the Trend Scale soft key to display the Trend Scale menu Trend Items eT rend Object K Trend Display 4 Scaling Manual gt Upper Scale Trend Items i Trend Scale 1 000E 0 gt gt Lower Scale 1 000E 0 K Frequency Meas Item To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 7 10 IM 760301 01E 7 5 Setting the Scale e Selecting the Target Trend to Be Scaled 3 Press the Trend Object soft key 4 Press the cursor keys to select a value between T1 and T16 e Selecting Auto Scaling or Manual Scaling 5 Press the Scaling soft key to select Auto or Manual e Setting the Upper Limit during Manual Scaling 6 Press the Upper Scale soft key 7 Press the cursor keys to set the upper limit e Setting the Lower Limit during Manual Scaling 6 Press the Lower Scale soft key 7 Press the cursor keys to set the lower limit SEE Trend Scale Ealrend Object Trend Scale Eltre
65. Same as the explanation in Auto Naming Function in section 9 3 Note ___ The number of directories and files that can be displayed in the file list is 2500 If the number of directories and files in a directory exceeds 2500 the file list randomly displays 2500 of the directories and files e If you change the extension of the file such as on a PC the file can no longer be loaded e Files that do not have an archive attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not remove the archive attribute of the files saved by the WT3000 using your PC e Up to 41 characters can be displayed in the path If the path exceeds 41 characters is displayed at the end of the character string e File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COM9 and LPT1 to LPT9 IM 760301 01E 9 23 ejyeq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes el 9 5 Loading Setup Parameters CAUTION Do not remove the PC card or USB memory or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the PC card or USB memory is blinking This can damage the PC card or USB memory or destroy the data on the it n it Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Sak 4 women WAVE U 1 P sono VEDAT ro Loca Cursor keys SD CAL v ITEM FORM USER Eeen INTEG swe z LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM
66. Speed rotating speed Torque Pm motor output mechanical power SyncSp synchronous speed Slip and the measurement functions of harmonic measurement for details see chapter 7 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displayed on models with the motor version Example The True Rms Value of the Voltage of Element 1 Urms1 L Element 1 True rms value Voltage Simple Average of the Current of the Elements Combined by Wiring Unit A ldcltA function of wiring unit ZA Simple average Current e Selecting the Display Mode Select the display format of the numeric data from below no data is displayed in places where the measurement function is not selected or where no numeric data is present e Displaying the Numeric Data on the Entire Screen Press the NUMERIC key to display the numeric data on the entire screen Displaying Numeric Data by Dividing the Display into Halves Split Display e Numeric Wave The numeric data and waveform are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on setting the waveform display see section 4 2 and chapter 9 e Numeric Trend The numeric data and trend are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on setting the trend display see section 4 5 and chapter 10 e Numeric Bar This mode is selectable only on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option The numeric data an
67. The waveform sampling data is also called acquisition data or raw wave data Waveform display data Waveform display data on the WT3000 screen 1002 points When displaying waveforms on the WT3000 data points are displayed in horizontal rasters along the time axis The number of rasters is 501 Each raster contains two points of waveform display data The two data points are the maximum and minimum values of the waveform data in each raster Therefore the number of waveform display data points the number of points displayed on the screen is 1002 for an input signal Extraction of the waveform display data from the waveform sampling data p p compression Let us consider an example when a 2 Hz sine wave is measured at the data update rate of 1 s To display this waveform on the WT screen the number of data points is converted from approximately 200 000 to 1002 501 pairs of maximum and minimum values Thus two points a pair of waveform display data is derived from approximately 400 points of waveform sampling data This conversion is called p p peak peak compression The compression rate of p p compression varies depending on the data update rate and the horizontal scale time axis of the WT waveform display Waveform sampling data A D converted data mane lt Waveform display data WT screen 0 Number of data points Approx 200 000 p p compression Compresses approximately 400 points of waveform s
68. The LCD screen may contain 0 02 defects with respect to the total number of pixels 12 2 IM 760301 01E 12 3 Measurement Functions Measurement Items Related to Normal Measurement Measurement Functions Determined for Each Input Element For details on the determination and equations of measurement functions see appendix 1 Item Symbol and Meaning Voltage V Urms true rms value Umn rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value Udc simple average Urmn rectified mean value Current A Irms true rms value Imn rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value Idc simple average Irmn rectified mean value Active power W P Apparent power VA S Reactive power var Q Power factor A Phase difference 0 Frequency Hz fU FreqU voltage frequency fl Freql current frequency Two frequencies from the fU and fl of all installed elements can be measured simultaneously On the model with the frequency measurement add on option the fU and fl of all elements can be measured simultaneously The display of signals that are not selected shows no data Voltage max and min V U pk Voltage maximum U pk Voltage minimum Current max and min A l pk Current maximum I pk Current minimum Crest factor CfU Voltage crest factor Cfl Current crest factor Corrected Power W Pc Applicable standard IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 I
69. e Compensation for the Two Wattmeter Method In the two power wattmeter method an error results when current flows through the neutral line This function computes the current the flows through the neutral line for measurements using the two wattmeter method with a three phase three wire 3V3A system and adds the compensation value to the measured power For details see appendix 8 This function can be set on models with the delta computation option Note If the current input is an external sensor input EXT and the wiring compensation is U I wiring wiring compensation is not performed This is because the instrumental loss of the current measurement is unknown If the current input is an external sensor input EXT efficiency compensation is not performed This is because the instrumental loss of the current measurement is unknown Efficiency compensation and two wattmeter method compensation are not performed in wide bandwidth harmonic measurement and IEC harmonic measurement modes on models with the advanced computation G6 option Wiring compensation efficiency compensation and two wattmeter method compensation are not performed in voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement and cycle by cycle measurement modes Settings for these compensation functions are invalid 5 24 IM 760301 01E 5 9 Setting the Equations for Apparent Power Reactive Power and Corrected Power Procedure fa Cursor keys Ce
70. e Resetting the Integration 16 Press the RESET soft key The STOP indicator turns OFF the integration time and integration value are reset and the display shows no data IM 760301 01E 5 39 JUSWIDINSeD JOMOd 5 13 Setting the Normal Integration and Repetitive Integration Explanation Integ Set Inter Start Stop Reset For functional details see section 2 6 To perform integration the integration mode and integration time must be set before starting the operation e Selecting the Normal Integration Mode or Repetitive Integration Mode In this mode the integration time is set in relative time and the integration is performed over the specified time This mode consists of the following two types e Normal Integration Mode The integration time is set in relative time The integration is stopped after the specified time elapses when the maximum integration time of 10000 hours is exceeded when STOP is pressed or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value see section 5 11 The integration time and value are held at that point e Repetitive Integration Mode Continuous Integration The integration time is set in relative time When the specified time elapses the operation is automatically reset and restarted Integration is repeated until STOP is pressed When the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value
71. e When the data update rate is 250 ms 500 ms 1 s or 2 s The measurement period is within the data update interval Measurement Functions of Harmonic Measurement The measurement period is the first 9000 points from the beginning of the data update interval at the harmonic sampling frequency FFT The measurement period is over the number of FFT points 200 000 points or 20 000 points at a sampling frequency of 200 KHz Thus the measurement period is as follows Number of Computed Points Measurement Period 200 000 1s 20 000 100 ms 2 8 IM 760301 01E 2 3 Measurement Conditions Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems For procedures see section 4 1 Wiring System There are five wiring systems available on the WT3000 1P2W Single phase two wire system 1P3W Single phase three wire system 3P3W Three phase three wire system 3P4W Three phase four wire system 3P3W 8V3A Three voltage three current system In this manual the symbolic expression 3P3W is used to indicate both three phase three wire system and three voltage three current system To differentiate between the two three voltage three current system is expressed as 3P3W 3V3A Limitations are placed on the wiring systems that can be selected depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument Wiring Unit A wiring unit refers to a set of two or three input elements o
72. procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Selecting the Real Time Normal Integration Mode R Normal and Real Time Repetitive Integration Mode R Continuous Press the Mode soft key to display the Mode menu Press either the R Normal or R Continuous soft key to select the integration 3 4 Inte mode Timer Setting Auto Cal PFF ON 4 D A Output Rated Time D A Output Rated Time IM 760301 01E 5 41 JUBWIDINSeD JOMOd 5 14 Setting the Real Time Integration and Real Time Repetitive Integration e Setting the Integration Timer 5 Press the Timer Setting soft key to display the Timer Setting dialog box 6 Press the cursor keys to select the hour minute or second box 7 Press SET to display the entry box 8 Press the cursor keys to set the hour minute or second that you selected in step 6 Press SET or ESC to close the box 10 Repeat steps 6 to 9 to set the hour minute and second o Integ Set i Mode R Normal Timer Setting _ _ Real Time Control Timer Settin ooo Lo oa m Timer Setting Cooo00 C00 Coo Auto Cal PFF ON g D A Output Rated Time e Setting the Reservation Time 11 Press the Real Time Control soft key to display the Real Time Control dialog box 12 Pr
73. respectively is not located at the upper and lower limits of the screen as shown in the following figure Set the position by paying attention to the zoom factor The following figure shows an example when the crest factor is set to 3 300 Vpk 4 r 4 r e eee 300 Vpk 1 1 r 1 r 77 r 57 r 5 100 e E a E bodes hig oe a a ee ee 255 Vpk 150 Vpk 1 150 Vpk Move the position by 25 a ae 150 Vpk 150 Vpk 1 1 facies Range displayed on the screen 300 Vpk i 300 Vpk 100 naaa ener es 100 rae oem Note To expand and view a section of the waveform we recommend the following procedure 1 Set the zoom factor to 1 2 Move the vertical position so that the desired section of the waveform is at the center position according to the procedure described in this section 3 Set the vertical zoom factor 6 14 IM 760301 01E 6 6 Procedure VOLTAGE RANGE MEASURING DISPLAY D CURRENT RANGE ITEM amp ELEMENT MEASURING SENSOR RATIO 1808 AUTO OREMOTE WAVE ITEM FORM wie S Q A USER ELEMENT UPDATE POAT HOLD wa CAL INTEG LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM _ USER SET O ALL c Q Q gt rr SHIFT tlie Press FORM to display the W
74. screen image data SAVING Of ceceeeseeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeteeees 9 20 SOMOM we strc oe Fes ma aeaea Pd ste aaia toes AEE aa ester ears 5 4 self test 2 38 11 7 Soltos a bein his ein ei ails 11 7 SENSOR RATIO nessa canscivavigvanivionditinadiieendieie 4 13 Serab visi Citadel een i A Ae 2 37 SOURGSOt 2cc ctosecdasisncerassicecebees 9 31 9 34 settings that cannot be initialized cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 27 setup parameter list 0 eee eee eee eee eee eeeeeteaeeneeees 3 39 setup parameters loading Of cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 24 setup parameters SAVING Of eee eee eee eeeeeeneeeneeeee 9 12 SHIFT key Shih OO Rearea ee Bese ae hat et tee 10 11 simple average eee eeeseeseeceseesseeseeeeseseneneseeseeees 5 9 App 1 single Single List esenea anria navei as 5 7 single measurement ssssseeersssreererresrnsererrnsenserrrensenrreae 2 14 SMTP client function 00 cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeneeeaeenee 2 36 SNT P Seren saeia RAA Tai 3 25 Soft Key sparo TUSE acain sia Ned eea irei ana spare parts split display Storage enVironMent ssssesseseerieriesiierrerirerrerrnrnerrerrne 12 16 temperature coefficient Test Exec Test Item TOXECOION ic ci5c sata cecvased cots cons teasdinusideovs wash enotaakiuacs 10 9 10 10 TF enini asii aaite E E EEEE 9 23 time lag Time div MOr ACCUTACY iesise ataia 12 11 Timer S
75. the integration time and value are held e Setting the Integration Timer e The time in units of hour minute second can be set in the following range 00000 00 00 to 10000 00 00 Note If the integration timer is set to 00000 00 00 in normal integration mode the integration is performed in manual integration mode see section 2 6 and 5 14 For a description of starting stopping and resetting the integration and other items see section 5 11 Note Integration cannot be started stopped or reset in measurement modes other than normal measurement mode 5 40 IM 760301 01E 5 14 Setting the Real Time Integration and Real Time Repetitive Integration Procedure ELEMENT OO OO ELEMENT ALL VOLTAGE RANGE MEASURING WIRING COC eH move auTo CURRENT RANGE MEASURING CeCe Jen MODE EXT SENSOR NSOR RATIO o fii To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the INPUT INFO 0 DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT WPiq TIME Furi SINGLE ITEM 1 2 LOWER ITEM FORM LOWER FORM USER USER SET ELEMENT INTEG ha O ALL 2 Press INTEG to display the Integ menu Press the Integ Set soft key to display the Integ Set menu
76. the total value of each harmonic component is substituted The measured data for the frequencies of input signals that are not specified for the frequency measurement are set to NAN no data If the voltage or current mode is not RMS the data of CfU or Cfl is set to NAN no data If there are no integrated values because integration is not performed the data is set to NAN no data The data is set to NAN no data also for integration time The motor version MV is required The delta computation option DT is required The advanced computation option G6 or the harmonic measurement option G5 is required to measure the items related to harmonics and impedance 10 For other items that do not have numeric data the data is set to NAN no data 11 Can be used on WT3000s with firmware version 3 01 or later For details see section 5 4 App 44 IM 760301 01E Appendix 13 Parameters in the Operands of User Defined Functions The parameters that can be specified in the operands of user defined functions are as follows Left Parameter in or Parameter in Right Parameter in Order Fundamental Wave Measurement User Defined Function Function Element Wiring Normal Value Unit Harmonics or Total Value DC OR2 to OR100 U E1 OR3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes URMS URMS E1 UMN UMN E1 I E1 0R3 P P E1 0R3 S S E1 0R3 Q Q E1 0R3 LAMBDA LAMBDA
77. u1 4 300 Iover Trq Flicker Complete 2 00 00 Count m 17 2 Interval mex Oils 10m 0s Element 1 Volt Range 300 50Hz Element1 Judgement Pass Un u1 0 23077kv Total Judgement Pass Freq u1 49 998 Hz Element1 dc dmaxl d t Ems Pst Pit 3 30 4 00 500 1 00 0 65 3 3004 N 12 0 0 60 Pass 0 Pass 0 37 Pass 1 1 94 Pass 0 0 0 0 44 Pass 0 0 0 0 48 Pass 0 0 0 0 41 Pass 0 0 0 0 48 Pass 0 0 0 0 46 Pass 0 0 1 1 45 Pass 0 0 0 0 54 Pass 0 0 0 0 43 Pass 0 0 0 0 57 Pass 0 0 0 1 17 0 0 Pass 0 30 Pass Cycle by Cycle Measurement See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E The voltage current power and other parameters for each cycle of the AC input signal can be measured on models with the cycle by cycle measurement CC option Cycle by Cycle Mode Uover Spd 11 4 500m4rms Trq CBC Complete Sync Source u1 Cycle Count 100 No FreglHzl ui Ly 11 al P1 W S1 val 1 50 000 100 380 f 572 547m 53 1891 57 4721 2 49 975 100 354 569 683m 53 2064 57 1700 3 50 000 100 434 570 109m 53 3339 57 2586 4 50 000 100 423 568 562m 53 1483 57 0965 5 49 988 100 390 568 144m 53 0864 57 0358 6 49 975 100 387 l 571 923m 53 1613 57 4137 7 50 000 100 415 568 813m 53 1918 57 1171 8 49 988 100 407 569 107m 53 2024 57 1422 9 50 000 100 410 568 581m 53 1674 57 0912 10 49 963
78. 0 2 of reading f lt 45 Hz Add 0 5 of reading When the cut off frequency is 5 5 kHz f s 66 Hz Add 0 2 of reading 66 Hz lt f s 500 Hz Add 0 5 of reading When the cut off frequency is 50 kHz f lt 500 Hz Add 0 2 of reading 500 Hz lt f lt 5 kHz Add 0 5 of reading Conditions for detecting lead and lag Lead and lag are detected correctly when the voltage and current signals are both sine waves the amplitude is greater than or equal to 50 greater than or equal to 100 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the measurement range the frequency is between 20 Hz and 10 kHz and the phase difference is between 5 and 175 Temperature coefficient Add 0 02 of reading C in the range 5 to 18 C or 28 to 40 C One year accuracy Add reading error of accuracy at 6 months x 0 5 to the accuracy at 6 months Accuracy when the crest factor is set to 6 Same as the accuracy when the crest factor is 3 after doubling the measurement range 12 6 IM 760301 01E 12 4 Accuracy Power Accuracy Item Specifications Accuracy accuracy at 6 months Conditions Same as the conditions for voltage and current Frequency Accuracy reading error measurement range error DC e Voltage input e Current of a 30 A input element from direct input 0 05 of reading 0 1 of range e Current of a 2 A input element from direct input 0 05 of reading 0 1 o
79. 0000 W 90 0000 W 180 0000 W 300 000 W 450 000 W 900 000 W 1800 000 W 3 00000 kW 2 00000 90 0000 W 180 0000 W 360 000 W 600 000 W 900 000 W 1800 000 W 3 60000 kW 6 00000 kW 5 00000 225 000 W 450 000 W 900 000 W 1500 000 W 2 25000 kW 4 50000 kW 9 00000 kW 15 00000 kW 10 0000 450 000 W 900 000 W 1800 000 W 3 00000 kW 4 50000 kW 9 00000 kW 18 00000 kW 30 0000 kW 20 0000 900 000 W 1800 000 W 3 60000 kW 6 00000 kW 9 00000 kW 18 00000 kW 36 0000 kW 60 0000 kW 30 0000 1350 000 W 2 70000 kW 5 40000 kW 9 00000 kW 13 50000 kW 27 0000 kW 54 0000 kW 90 0000 kW 4 10 IM 760301 01E 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range for Direct Input When the crest factor is set to 6 Active Power Range of Each Element Current Voltage Range V Range A 7 5000 15 0000 30 0000 50 0000 75 000 150 000 300 000 500 000 2 50000m 18 7500 mW 37 5000 mW 75 000 mW 125 000 mW 187 500 mW 375 000 mW 0 75000 W 1 25000 W 5 00000m 37 5000 mW 75 000 mW 150 000 mW 250 000 mW 375 000 mW 0 75000 W 1 50000 W 2 50000 W 10 0000m 75 000 mW 150 000 mW 300 000 mW 500 000 mW 0 75000 W 1 50000 W 3 00000 W 5 00000 W 25 0000m 187 500 mW 375 000 mW 0 75000 W 1 25000 W 1 87500 W 3 75000 W 7 5000 W 12 5000 W 50 0000m 375 000 mW 0 75000 W 1 50000 W 2 50000 W 3 75000 W 7 5000 W 15 0000 W 25 000
80. 0000000E 00 1 0000000E 00 1 0000000E 00 VOffset 0 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 VDataType FS4 FS4 FS4 FS4 VUnit V A V A VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VillegalData VMaxData 9 000000e 02 3 000000e 03 3 000000e 03 1 500000e 02 VMinData 9 000000e 02 3 000000e 03 3 000000e 03 1 500000e 02 HResolution 2 0000000E 05 2 0000000E 05 2 0000000E 05 2 0000000E 05 HOffset 0 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 HUnit sec sec sec sec Date 2001 06 30 2001 06 30 2001 06 30 2001 06 30 Time 07 03 03 07 03 03 07 03 03 07 03 03 Group2 TraceNumber 4 BlockNumber 1 TraceName U3 13 U4 14 BlockSize 1002 1002 1002 1002 VResolution 1 0000000E 00 1 0000000E 00 1 0000000E 00 1 0000000E 00 IM 760301 01E App 13 xipueddy Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VillegalData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit Date Time Group3 TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VillegalData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit Date Time Privatelnfo ModelVersion 0 0000000E 00 FS4 V 3 000000e 03 3 000000e 03 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 06 30 07 03 03 2 1 Speed 1002 1 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 FS4 rpm 2 000000e 01 2 000000e 01 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 200
81. 01 i 1 57 V 1 At tars Input element settings mg ment e Measurement range u2 100Vrms gt 12 1Arms see section 4 3 e Wiring system Irms1 0 5 6 54 8 Teta see section 4 1 A e Voltage Current mode 13 1Arms see section 5 2 Element4 100 rms is 53 119 w ge __ Motor Spd 20 Trq 20V Measurement range of motor input motor version 0 92862 aert gais Integration setting status see section 5 11 Data update count see section 5 1 Date time see section 3 11 Displays Other than Values O L Over range display Displayed if the measured value exceeds 140 of the measurement range O F Overflow display Displayed if the measured or computed result cannot be displayed using the specified decimal position or unit No data display Displayed if a measurement function is not selected or if no numeric data is present E r ror Error display Displayed such as when the measured value is outside a given range 1 10 IM 760301 01E Chapter 2 Functional Description 2 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram System Configuration Power supply Load Motor pE Current VT cT sensor y Torque Revolution Voltage Current Input either one External clock input gt Master slave Measurement sync signal start stop Setup parameters i Input element _ meter sensor
82. 1 Element7 _ f Xs Rp Xp Uhdf thdf Phdf Uthd Element 1 Element 1 Ithd Pthd Uthf Ithf Utif Itif hvf Order Element 2 O hcf U peak U peak I peak I peak cfu cfl Element 3 Element 4 Reset Items Exec ZA ZB Pe Time uP P WP q q Reset Items Exec Frequency Meas Item q ws wo m1 n2 23 24 AF1 F2 AF3 4F4 ui uj ui uk i li v Frequency Meas Item Page Scrolling the Display 15 Press PAGE W or PAGE A to scroll the page Press PAGE W to display the next page Press PAGE A to display the previous page Jumping to the Last or First Page 16 Press SHIFT PAGE YW W or SHIFT PAGE A A to jump the page Press SHIFT W W to display the last page Press SHIFT A A to display the first page IM 760301 01E 5 1 Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the Displayed Items e Resetting the Order of the Displayed Items 1 Press ITEM to display the Numeric menu 2 Press the Reset Items Exec soft key An Alert dialog box appears 3 Press the cursor keys to select OK or Cancel 4 Select OK and press SET to reset the order of the displayed items on all pages If you select Cancel and press SET the order of the displayed items are not reset Element7 Tert id Really Element 1 Numeric Items will be initialized Do you want to execute Reset Items Exec i Frequency Meas Item Explanation A display example is shown below Displayed when
83. 100 328 l 571 212m 53 0456 57 3085 11 50 013 100 383 569 012m 53 2195 57 1190 12 49 988 100 404 569 590m 53 2449 57 1893 13 49 988 100 419 568 745m 53 1938 57 1129 14 49 988 100 425 H 571 397m 53 1492 57 3827 15 50 000 100 463 568 506m 53 1801 57 1140 16 49 988 100 426 568 047m 53 1140 57 0465 17 49 988 100 421 568 742m 53 1842 57 1138 18 49 963 100 373 H 572 551m 53 1713 57 4686 19 50 013 100 463 569 249m 53 2619 57 1884 20 49 988 100 434 568 199m 53 1188 57 0665 Pacey 175 IM 760301 01E 2 34 2 11 Saving and Loading Data and Other Functions Storing and Recalling For procedures see chapter 8 The numeric data and waveform display data can be stored in the internal memory The data is stored at the data update rate or a specified time interval to the internal memory Data stored to the internal memory can be saved on a PC card The data that is saved to the PC card cannot be recalled Saving and Loading from the Storage Medium For procedures see chapter 12 The WT3000 comes standard with a PC card drive A USB port peripheral devices is also available as an option The numeric data waveform display data waveform sampling data screen image data and setup parameters can be saved to a PC card or USB memory The saved setup parameters can be loaded as necessary The screen image data can be pasted to documents on a word processing application PC card USB
84. 2 Elem 3 Elem 4 Quid wi Oi Osio wa Sato Oeo wwo e Rstk xs k G RpCk Quhdf Ck G ihdf Ck O Phdt kK Gjuthd ji thd uthf Oithf G utif Oitif Oh Qlu peak U peak I peak I peak cfuU Owe Ow Oq qr WO yn2 3 r 4F1 4F2 AF3 ara jeui uj eui uk Gldui 1i Gleui 1j speed Torque syncSp Slip jp WA F requ xptk ptk BAG Freq pc pthd het cf Or we i Time ws 1 eui ik pm r1 OF G3 G4 Gs Or 6 G7 F8 F9 F10 OF 11 0 F 12 0 F 13 0 F 14 0 F 15 0 F 16 0 F 17 0 F 18 C F 19 F20 Preset AII ON AII OFF Preset1 Preset2 Elem Func Elem 1 Elem 2 Elem 3 Elem 4 u Quw itk stk a atk Oro ww so OFrequ Rstk xs k GIRp k xpik CUhdt O Ihdf k OPhdt k Uthd I thd uthf Oithf utit Oitit be Qlu peak U peak I peak I peak cfuU up Wae w a Sqr B1 Time ws gw a1 2 3 r4 AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 ui uj Gsui uk eui 1i Geui 1j ui Ik speed Torque SyncSp Slip Pm r1 OF G3 G4 Gs OFE G7 Sirs F9 F10 OF 11 0 F 12 0 F 13 0 F 14 0 F 15 0 F 16 0 F 17 0 F 18 C F 19 0 F20 9 8 IM 760301 01E 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data Numeric Data Waveform Sampling Data e Setting the Items One at a Time 6 Press the cursor keys to select the element or measurement function that you wish to specify 7 Press SET When the button to the left of the selected element or measurement function is highlighted the numeric data o
85. 2 Can be set on models with the advanced computation G6 option 3 For details see section 7 1 in the Extension Function User s Manual IM760301 51E 5 18 IM 760301 01E 5 6 Measuring the Average Active Power Explanation The average active power is specified using the user defined function as follows Integrated power Average active power __________ g P Elapsed time of integration For example to determine the average active power of element 1 the equation of the user defined function is set as follows WH E1 TI E1 3600 The unit of TI is seconds S For the procedure of setting equations see section 5 4 IM 760301 01E 5 19 zu W INSLE N JOMOd 5 7 Procedure Setting the Equation for Efficiency ELEMENT O VOLTAGE RANGE To exit the menu during operation press ESC CURRENT RANGE OO ALL located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the INPUT INFO DI Cy MEASURING DeO ITEM amp ELEMENT phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For SPLAY OREMOTE numeric l WAVE OTHERS ITEM Form details on the procedures see section 3 14 U I P S Q A WP q Fur USER PRE eo sor CAL INTEG LOCAL
86. 2 Setting the Numeric Data and Waveform Display Data to Be Stored Explanation Store Setting List Item amp Wave Trace Mode List Item Preset GA ON AI OFFOPreset1OPreset2 Elem Func fi N O 11 F 120F 1300F 1140F 1506F 1600F 170F 180F 190F20 st Item amp Wave Trace Wave Trace ut 11 Qu2 G12 Ou3 013 us O14 i speed Torque I Manual elem 1 elem 2 Elem 3 GeElem 4 gu Quad wi Oi wp pk gs Ost wa lock A BACK wo Oek wo pk gFrequ Fregi ztk Rsk xs k GRpCk xp k pe Quhdf Gk O ihdf Ck O Phdt k uthd Githd Gpthd uthf Oithf Cutit Gitit hf bet QlU peak u peak 0 I peak O I peak cfu cfi owp o we Ow Interval Setting i Time us Owa a1 n2 23 Or AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 ui uj Geui uk Geui 1i Geui 1j tui ik speed Torque SyncSp Slip pm G1 r2 r3 OF4 Ors Or 6 Gr rs Sry S10 Store Item Numer ictWave e Store Count e Selecting the Items to Be Stored Select the item to be stored from the following Numeric Numerical data are stored Wave Waveform display data are stored Numeric Wave Numeric data and waveform display data are stored Selecting the Numeric Data to Be Stored Select the items for storing the numeric data Installed elements and wiring units are applicable for the selection The items to be stored can be selected from the items that are indicated in Measurement Function Types during Normal M
87. 25 x pu ddy Appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period The measurement period must be set properly to make correct measurements on this instrument There are two cases for setting of the measurement period depending on the data update rate When the data update rate is set to 50 ms 100 ms 5s 10 s or 20s The measurement period must be set e When the data update rate is set to 250 ms 500 ms 1s or2s The measurement period does not have to be set Details of each case are given below When the Data Update Rate Is Set to 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or 20s The WT3000 detects the period of the selected input signal using the frequency measurement circuit see section 2 1 The measurement period is the integer multiple of this period The WT3000 determines the measured values by taking the average of the sampled data in the measurement period The selected input signal for defining the measurement period is called synchronization source Thus the measurement period is automatically set inside the WT3000 by specifying the synchronization source This computation method is referred to as Average for the Synchronous Source Period ASSP This method is effective for short data update rates and for efficient measurement of low frequency signals Select the signal to be the synchronization source from the choices below U1 11 U2 12 U3 13 U4 14 Ext Clk external clock or None The selectable items vary depending on the inst
88. 3 IM 760301 01E 10 7 suonouny 19410 10 6 Setting the Display Color a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Onenote A fumer WAVE U I P same CRE HOLD LOCAL C lt gt oTHeRs Weg Fun save CAL GE ITEM FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG SHIFT 0 e S ee Scatna ine FTE NG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above NOTOR FREQ the soft keys SET FILTER ow In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the 2 cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE mace save STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 print msc HELP MENU 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu system Overview Initialize Settings Remote Control Date Time Setting the Graphic Color e Selecting Default or User 3 Press the Graph Color soft key to display the Graph Color menu 4 Press the cursor keys to select Default or User Graph Color AT fea Mode Default L User Color 7 D A Output Items 10 8 IM 760301 01E 10 6 Setting the Display Col
89. 4 24 PVG WYP E E 4 24 B Page ar QIAN ccsicsccssicsececsccssseescoceesscessevovseesccerssecccteasccnastecceersess 2 32 Binary DIOCK diagram reiii aiaiai ces cedateeasiaaticnstics 2 2 BM ENEP E E A TT 9 23 Built i ol dla meereverrrenerrrteett er emrererrrec reenererrrerrrre et rere rr ttre 2 36 C Page CA E E E E AEAN 10 1 CAPAC TY sissioni idiin plania App 22 Gil Sasranagara R 5 6 character strings entry Of esesseseesrrerierierrrerinrresrrerners 3 28 Clear Trend EX6 zioa einna araa a aaa Aasaia 7 16 clearing the internal Memory ssesessesesisereerierreerrerrerrenrn 8 12 ote 0 arsaa 9 20 9 23 comment 8 15 9 10 9 19 9 21 CONMIG niaaa 10 5 10 7 10 11 GC OMUNUOUS Kiasia ceacesecsavsceeorncuce seach sedeavetvasnceeelvtsteces 5 41 continuous integration 5 40 5 44 CODY rasa te cc E TE E E TTE 9 33 copy destination 2 9 35 Copy EXEC n se wi 9 35 COPY SOUICO osoisesrtiys suie einser aa 9 33 corrected pOWEF c eee 2 19 5 6 corrected power equation for s sssssserierrerrerrrerresrrereens 5 26 Crest TACO eiiiai 2 11 4 18 5 6 App 17 CU O E A fini tentindniadi arlene 4 16 current oft dg 0 ina 0 eanna aS EE E rete ER 5 6 Current input terminal oo cece eee eee eeeeeeeeeneees 3 14 current mode Current range Setting Of eeeesssssesseeeseeeseesenneseeesenes 4 6 CURSOR aridin annetaan Eei aeaa Ei A Tan cursor measurement CursOn Path menee
90. 40 C and the relative humidity is between 20 and 80 RH 3 2 IM 760301 01E 3 2 Installing the Instrument Installation Position Desktop Place the instrument on a flat even surface as shown in the figure below If the instrument is installed in a horizontal position rubber stoppers can be attached to the feet to prevent the instrument from sliding Two sets four pieces of rubber feet are included in the package Rack Mount To rack mount the instrument use the rack mount kit that is sold separately Part Name Model Note Rack mount kit 751535 E4 For EIA Rack mount kit 751535 J4 For JIS An outline of the attachment procedures is given below For details regarding the attachment procedures see the instructions that are included with the rack mount kit 3 2 3 a Remove the handles from each side of the instrument Remove the four feet from the bottom of the instrument Remove the two plastic rivets and the four seals covering the rack mount attachment holes on each side of the instrument near the front Places seals over the feet and handle attachment holes Attach the rack mount kit Mount the instrument on the rack When rack mounting the instrument allow at least 20 mm of space around the inlet and vent holes to prevent internal overheating Make sure to provide adequate support from the bottom of the instrument But do not block the inlet or vent holes in the process
91. 51E Various computations can be performed on the waveform data of the input signal on models with the advanced computation G6 option For example the waveform data of the voltage and current input signals can be multiplied together to display the waveform of instantaneous power Waveform of voltage U1 Waveform of current 11 N J n 1 500 A ur 160 0 U Mri 300 0 Waveform of active power P1 U1 x l1 Ex Te aa rs aa a 0 000s lt lt 1002 iee gt gt 50 000 FFT See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E The power spectrum of the input signal can be displayed through FFT fast Fourier transform on models with the advanced computation G6 option This is useful when you wish to check the frequency distribution of the input signal bs TS00 A Waveform of current I1 p n 1 500 0 000s lt lt 1002 tee gt gt 50 000e lt 1001 D gt 70 0000 7 000 FT 1 000 A dos Scale Power spectrum waveform of current l1 IM 760301 01E 2 33 uondioseq jeuonoune4 2 10 Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker and Cycle by Cycle Measurements Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker Measurement Expansion Function User s Manual 1M760301 51E Voltage fluctuation and flicker measurements conforming to IEC61000 3 3 can be performed on models with the voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement FL option Flicker Mode Uover Spd
92. 7 300 Vpk 900 Vpk 1 1 grid 1 div 1 grid 1 div 75V 225V Horizontal Time Axis For procedures see section 6 3 Set the horizontal time axis by specifying the time per grid 1 division The time axis can be set in 1 2 or 5 steps in the range up to the point in which the time corresponding to one screen is equal to the data update rate For example if the data update rate is 500 ms the time per division can be changed in the order 0 5 ms 1 ms 2 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms and 50 ms This allows the time of one screen to be changed in the order 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms 50 ms 100 ms 200 ms and 500 ms 1 grid 1 div 10 ms 1 grid 1 div 20 ms 100 ms A p 200 ms Observation time Observation time 2 24 IM 760301 01E 2 7 Waveform Display Note Waveform sampling data and waveform display data the number of displayed points on the screen The waveform sampling data and waveform display data are both measured data of the waveform but they differ as described below Waveform sampling data Data derived by making an A D conversion of the input signal The A D conversion rate is approximately 200 kS s on the WT3000 Therefore if the data update rate is set to 1 s the number of waveform sampling data points in a single measurement is approximately 200 000 for an input signal see the figure below
93. A display example is shown below The horizontal axis is expressed in terms of time as shown below The trend value in the hold condition see section 4 11 is the same as the numeric data when HOLD is pressed When hold is released the trend that was held is displayed YOKOGAWA_ Trend For TT vet 16 49 4 Format Displayed trend target measurement function upper limit Single Trend 1 div 30s div Clear Trend Exec Displayed trend target measurement function lower limit Ti usi 103 8 00 00 00 lt e 1002 tee gt gt 00 05 00 Time at the right end of the screen Time at the left end of the screen time span of the screen fixed to 0 s e Number of data points displayed in the range from the left to the right end of the screen e When P P is displayed trend is displayed using P P compression see sections 2 7 and 2 8 e Selecting the Display Mode Select the trend display format from the choices below e Displaying the trend on the entire screen Press the Trend soft key to display the trend on the entire screen e Displaying the trend by dividing the display into halves split display e Numeric Trend The numeric data and trend are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on how to set the numeric data display see section 3 15 and chapter 5 Wave Trend The waveform and trend are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on how to set the w
94. Compensation function Efficiency compensation Compensates for the instrumental loss during efficiency computation Wiring compensation Compensates for the instrumental loss due to wiring 2 Wattmeter Method Compensation Selectable on models with the delta computation option Scaling Set the current sensor transformation ratio VT ratio CT ratio and power factor in the range of 0 0001 to 99999 9999 when inputting the external current sensor VT or CT output to the instrument Input filter Specify a line filter or a frequency filter See section 12 1 Averaging Measurement Functions of Normal Measurement Select exponential average or moving average e Exponential average Select the attenuation constant from 2 4 8 16 32 and 64 e Moving average Select the average count from 8 16 32 64 128 and 256 Measurement Functions of Harmonic Measurement e Exponential average Select the attenuation constant from 2 4 8 16 32 and 64 Data update rate Select from 50 ms 100 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s 10s and 20s Display update rate Same as the data update rate Exceptions are listed below The display update interval of numeric display 4 8 and 16 items is 250 ms when the data update rate is 50 ms or 100 ms e The display update interval of numeric display ALL Single List and Dual List is 500 ms when the data update rate is 50 ms to 250 ms The display update rate of the trend display bar graph
95. FILTER TOQUONCY sieescriverciessecsccuscinsuremectgecb ces toceustenedivenesaseusernsunedsees frequency filter ae Frequency Meas Item occ eee eece cee eeeeseseeeeeeneeeeaes 5 10 frequency measurement eee ee eee eeee eee eeeeeeneeeeeeees 5 10 front panel FEP cliont fUnction ccecccecei secs ceeds a geen teens 2 36 Li E EEEE ATAA EE Neusasenasceesnetsetcvscetebeayt E T Function function select keys sessessessserierisrresirerinrrnerrerrnrirerrnrensre fundamental component ss sssseseesserrerrerreerrerrrereerees fundamental frequency re fundamental wave 0 0 ccc cee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaees App 21 TUSC sd ore dese cecciiowtecetetechavan Secu tel ceteva dnd rendaeats v 11 10 12 16 f se rating 5 oust cee eraen ara aaaeei oe tadan AES 11 10 G Page Gothi sioaren hniena E 10 5 GP Bnr aaan R A i 2 37 Graph Color oo eeeeceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 10 8 graphic color 10 8 10 10 QFALICUIG Ss a seraa pon dest tc aah ae eaaa oA aaia i 6 18 6 19 H Page handling precautions sessssesseerieeireriesirerrerrrrreerrerreeresrens 3 1 harmonic component App 21 harmonic distortion factor App 21 harmonic measurement cee ee cee eee eee eeeee tees teeeeeeeeaees 2 6 harmonic order icc cc otiskcicessesctoccesissnsuicpearesineestepenseesnapeces App 21 MARMONICS aiii eaaa aiaia aiae Saee App 21 higher harmonic wvcceciececececvecerceovencenvevertcasceveca
96. G5 option corresponds to the harmonic measurement in normal measurement mode in the explanation of the G6 option 2 Select either one IM 760301 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Suffix Code Example 30 A input elements installed to input elements 1 and 2 motor version UL CSA standard power cord built in printer option and 20 channel D A output option 760302 02 MV D B5 DA e No Instrument Number When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the instrument please give them the instrument number Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC This product complies with the WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC marking requirement The affixed product label see below indicates that you must not discard this electrical electronic product in domestic household waste Product Category With reference to the equipment types in the WEEE directive Annex 1 this product is classified as a Monitoring and Control instrumentation product Do not dispose in domestic household waste To return unwanted products contact your local Yokogawa Europe B V office IM 760301 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Standard Accessories The standard accessories below are supplied with the instrument Item Model Quantity Note Part No Power cord One of the following power cords is included according to the suffix code on the previous page A1006WD 1 UL CSA
97. IM 760301 01E 3 3 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 3 Connecting the Power Supply Before Connecting the Power Supply To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the warnings below A WARNING Connect the power cord only after confirming that the voltage of the power supply matches the rated electric power voltage for the instrument Connect the power cord after checking that the power switch of the instrument is turned OFF To prevent electric shock or fire always use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA e Make sure to perform protective grounding to prevent the possibility of electric shock Connect the power cord to a three prong power outlet with a protective earth terminal e Do not use an extension cord without protective earth ground Otherwise the protection function will be compromised e Use an AC outlet that complies with the power cord provided and securely connect the protective grounding If such an AC outlet is unavailable and protective grounding cannot be furnished do not use the instrument Connecting the Power Cord 1 Check that the power switch is OFF 2 Connect the power cord plug to the power connector on the rear panel Use the power cord that comes with the package 3 Connect the plug on the other end of the power cord to the outlet that meets the conditions below The AC outlet must be of a three prong type with a protective earth ground terminal
98. J MakeDir Format Attribute Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory 5 The procedure is the same as that given inin Selecting the Storage Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 9 3 Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box 6 The procedure is the same as that given inin Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 Viewing the Properties 7 The procedure is the same as that given inin Viewing the Properties in section 9 6 Selecting the File Attribute 8 The procedure is the same as that given inin Selecting the File Attribute in section 9 6 Creating a Directory 9 Press the cursor keys to select the storage medium or a directory 10 Press the Dir Name soft key A keyboard appears 11 Use the keyboard to enter the directory name For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings MakeDir File List H Fu Path PC_Card pct Space 128133120 byte File Name Size Date Attribute 2004705722 00 52 2004705722 02 37 R 2004 05 22 00 54 R 2004 05722 00 53 R Pc21 m INSERT CAPS EDDDED fu 2 IM 760301 01E 9 39 e eq Buipeo pue Burnes el 9 9 Renaming Files or Directories and Creating Directories Explanation e Selecting the Storag
99. Manual IM760301 51E The distortion factor can be computed on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option You can select one of two equations available for computing the distortion factor 2 20 IM 760301 01E 2 6 Integration The WT3000 can integrate the active power watt hour the current ampere hour the apparent power volt ampere hour and the reactive power var hour During integration the measured and computed values of normal measurements can be displayed in addition to the watt hour current hour volt ampere hour var hour and integration time Measurement Functions of Integration e Measurement Functions on Each Input Element The following nine types of numeric data can be determined For details related to the determination of measurement function data see Appendix 1 WP watt hour sum of positive and negative watt hours WP positive watt hour consumed WP negative watt hour returned to the power supply regenerated energy q current hour sum of positive and negative current hours q positive current hour consumed q negative current hour returned to the power supply WS volt ampere hour WQ var hour and Time integration time e Measurement Functions of wiring units 2A and B Functions The following eight types of numeric data can be determined For details related to the determination of measurement function data see Appendix 1 WPz s
100. Math Display On V Zoom amp Position Math Setup Math1 Expression Scale Center Scale div Unit Label Math2 Expression Scale Center Scale div Unit Label Constant K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 Common to ITEM for Wave Common to ITEM for Wave U1 l1 Auto 0 0000E 00 2 5000E 01 WwW Math1 ABS U1 Auto 0 0000E 00 2 5000E 01 V Math2 1 0000E 00 2 0000E 00 3 0000E 00 4 0000E 00 5 0000E 00 6 0000E 00 7 0000E 00 8 0000E 00 FORM for MATH displayed on models with the advanced computation G6 option Common to FORM for Wave ITEM for FFT displayed on models with the advanced computation G6 option FFT1 Display FFT1 Object FFT1 Label FFT2 Display FFT2 Object FFT2 Label On FFT U1 FFT1 On FFT I1 FFT2 App 6 IM 760301 01E Appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data Item Setting FORM for FFT displayed on models with the advanced computation G6 option Format Single FFT Points 20k Trigger Common to FORM for Wave Display Setting Interpolate Common to FORM for Wave Graticule Common to FORM for Wave Scale Value Common to FORM for Wave Spectrum Type Line FFT Window Rect Disp Start 0 Disp End 10000 Vertical Scale Log ITEM for flicker displayed on models with the voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement FL option Display Elem Elementi Limit Settings Judgement dc ON dmax ON d t ON Pst ON Plt ON Limit dc 3 30
101. Measurement Mode Display Normal measurement mode Normal Mode Wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode Wide Band Harmonics IEC harmonic measurement mode IEC Harmonics Mode Waveform computation mode Math Mode FFT mode FFT Mode Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker Measurement Mode Flicker Mode Cycle by Cycle Measurement Mode Cycle by Cycle Mode 1 Can be set only on models with the advanced computation G6 option 2 Can be set only on models with the voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement FL option 3 Can be set only on models with the cycle by cycle measurement CC option Note When waveforms are displayed in normal measurement mode the measurement mode indication is set to Normal Mode Trg For details see section 6 1 There are two methods to switch the measurement mode One is to use the DISPLAY key and the other is to use the HRM SET key e Switching between Normal Measurement Wide Bandwidth Harmonic Measurement IEC Harmonic Measurement Waveform Computation FFT Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker Measurement and Cycle by Cycle Measurement Modes Press the DISPLAY key the black arrow in the figure below Measurement mode measurement mode Keys HRM SET key OTHERS soft key IEC Harmonics OTHERS soft key Flicker FFT Mode OTHERS soft key FFT Wide Bandwidth Harmonic Mode NUMERIC DISPLAY keys wave OTHERS soft key Bar Trend Vector Waveform computation Cycl
102. Numeric Trend Numeric Math and Numeric FFT to select the display mode 1 Displayed only on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic 2 Displayed only to products with the advanced computation G6 option measurement G5 option Others Trend Vector Numeric Wave 7 Numeric Bar Next If wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode is enabled on models with the advanced computation G6 option switch to normal measurement mode For the Numeric Trend 173 Others Wave Bar Wave Trend Bar Trend Press the Next1 3 soft key gt procedure see section 3 16 IEC Harmonics Next 27 Hle S Press the Next2 3 soft key gt Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Others Numeric Math IM 760301 01E 5 1 zu W INSLE N JOMOd 5 1 Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the Displayed Items The following procedures are given as typical examples in which the display mode is set to Numeric numeric data on the entire screen
103. ON Zero level compensation is automatically performed every hour while integration is in progress e OFF Zero level compensation is not automatically performed while integration is in progress Note When integration auto calibration is ON and zero level compensation is in progress the power or current value measured immediately before is integrated IM 760301 01E 5 45 zu W INSL IN JOMOd Chapter 6 Waveform Display 6 1 Procedure Waveform Display VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE SENSOR RATIO D MEASURING DISPLAY MEASURING E Guen MODE ITEM amp ELEMENT AUTO EKO OREMOTE rumen amp ITEM USER FORM wie S Q A ELEMENT UPDATE FDATI HOLD men CAL INTEG Q 9 D gt r SHIFT LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL Displaying the Waveform on the Entire Screen 1 Press WAVE to display the waveform screen If wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode is enabled on models with the advanced computation G6 option switch to normal measurement mode For the procedure see section 3 16 To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings Fo
104. RMS Urms and its numeric data are displayed e When the S Q A pkey WP q TIME key or FU FI y key is pressed the measurement function also switches in order similar to the U I P key 1 6 IM 760301 01E 1 2 Setup Menu Display Key and Execution Key USER Key See section 5 1 Each time the USER key is pressed the measurement function of the displayed item at the cursor switches to the preset user defined measurement function and the numeric data of the selected measurement function is displayed The above operation is carried out when numeric data is displayed and the menu is not displayed or the ITEM key has been pressed Up to four measurement functions can be preset user defined e After displaying the user defined measurement functions the measurement function that was displayed before the USER key was pressed is shown Only the measurement function switches SHIFT USER USER SET Key See section 5 1 Displays a menu for registering defining the measurement functions that you wish to display when the USER key is pressed ELEMENT Key See section 5 1 Each time the ELEMENT key is pressed on models with four input elements installed the input element or wiring unit of the displayed item at the cursor switches in the following order 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 4 gt XA gt 2B gt 1 and so on The numeric data of the selected input element or wiring unit is displayed The above operation is carried
105. Remove the power cord from the power connector 3 Insert the tip of a flat blade screw driver in the dented section of the fuse holder on the power connector side turn it in the direction of the arrow and pull out the fuse holder 4 Remove the blown fuse that is attached to the tip of the fuse holder 5 Attach a new fuse to the fuse holder and push the fuse holder back in the original place Fuse holder 11 10 IM 760301 01E 11 6 Recommended Replacement Parts The three year warranty applies only to the main unit of the instrument starting from the day of delivery and does not cover any other items or expendable items items which wear out The replacement period for expendable items varies depending on the conditions of use Refer to the table below as a general guideline Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer to have parts replaced Parts Name Recommended Replacement Period Built in printer Under normal usage 200 rolls of printer paper part No B9316FX LCD backlight 3 years Cooling fan 3 years Backup battery 3 years Lithium battery IM 760301 01E 11 11 Ey uonsedsu pue eoueuajuey HunooysajqnoiL Chapter 12 Specifications 12 1 Input Section Item Specifications Input terminal type Voltage Plug in terminal safety terminal Current e Direct input Large binding post e Current sensor input Isolated BNC connector Input format Voltage Floating inp
106. Rotating Speed of Motor Evaluation Function Motor Version and Input Ranges of Torque Page 2 Displayed only on models with the motor evaluation function motor version Motor Element Settings Speed Torque Pm Scaling 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 Unit rpm Nm W Sense Type Analog Analog Tanalog Auto Range off off Range 20v 20v Line Filter off off Sync Source None None Pulse Range Upper 10000 0000 50 0000 Lower 0 0000 50 0000 Rated Upper 50 0000 15000Hz Lower 50 0000 5000kz Pulse N Tsyne Spal Pole Source e Relation Table of Trend Targets and Measurement Functions Page 3 Trend Settings T 9 Urms2 d d d d d d da g e Relation Table of D A Output Channels and Measurement Functions Page 4 Displayed only on models with the D A output option D A Output Settings 3 40 IM 760301 01E 3 18 Selecting the Message Language a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Sia A numeri WAVE l U LIP S Qia s call HOLD Ca gt OTHERS l wegl FU FI n smote 0 G TIME o ITEM FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above SHIFT scaunc merren ave OA the soft keys SET FILTER HRM SET MEASURE In the procedural explanation belo
107. User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays the screen that shows the numeric data e Pressing the ITEM key explained later while showing the numeric data opens a menu for changing the displayed items e Pressing the FORM key explained later while showing the numeric data opens a menu for changing the number of displayed items For harmonic measurement G6 or G5 option a list showing the measured values for each harmonic order can also be selected WAVE Key See section 3 15 and 6 1 to 6 8 Displays the screen that shows the waveform e Pressing the ITEM key explained later while showing the waveform opens a menu for selecting the displayed waveform or a menu for zooming the waveform e Pressing the FORM key explained later while showing the waveform opens a menu for setting the time axis of the displayed waveform the trigger for displaying the waveform on screen the number of divided waveform display windows the assignment of waveforms to the divided windows etc OTHERS Key See section 3 15 7 1 to 7 6 and 7 8 For details on bar graphs or vector displays option see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for selecting the screen that shows the trend bar graph vector IEC harmonic measurement waveform computation FFT voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement and cycle by cycle measurement 1 Only on models with the G6 or G5 option 2 Only on models with the G
108. V UMN E2 Function3 Off V UMN E3 Function4 Off V UMN E4 Function5 Off V U E1 ORT Function6 Off A E1 ORT Function7 Off V U E1 ORT Function8 Off A I E1 ORT Function9 Off V U E1 ORT Function10 Off A E1 ORT Function 1 Off V U E1 ORT Function12 Off A I E1 ORT Function13 Off V U E1 ORT Function14 Off A I E1 ORT Function15 Off V U E1 ORT Function16 Off A I E1 ORT Function17 Off V U E1 ORT Function18 Off A I E1 ORT Function19 Off V U E1 ORT Function20 Off A I E1 ORT Max Hold Off App 4 IM 760301 01E Appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data Item Setting S Q Formula Type1 Pc Formula IEC76 1 1976 P1 and P2 of IEC76 1 1993 P1 0 5000 P2 0 5000 Sampling Frequency Auto Phase 180 Lead Lag Sync Measure Master SYNC SOURCE Element Object Elementi Element2 Element3 Element4 Sync Source l1 12 13 14 UPDATE RATE Update Rate 500 ms EAMP HOLD Hold Off INTEGRATOR Integrator Status Reset status Integ Set Mode Normal Timer Setting 00000 00 00 Integ Start 2006 01 01 00 00 00 Integ End 2006 01 01 01 00 00 Auto Cal Off D A Rated Time 00001 00 00 displayed when the optional D A output is installed ITEM for Numeric Item No 1 Function U Element Element1 Order Frequency Meas Item U1 l1 FORM for Numeric Numeric Form 4 Items ITEM for Wave Wave Display On V Zoom amp Position U1 to 14 Speed Torque
109. W 600 000 W 1000 000 W 1 00000 30 0000 W 60 0000 W 120 0000 W 200 000 W 300 000 W 600 000 W 1200 000 W 2 00000 kW 2 00000 60 0000 W 120 0000 W 240 000 W 400 000 W 600 000 W 1200 000 W 2 40000 kW 4 00000 kW 5 00000 150 000 W 300 000 W 600 000 W 1000 000 W 1 50000 kW 3 00000 kW 6 00000 kW 10 00000 kW 10 0000 300 000 W 600 000 W 1200 000 W 2 00000 kW 3 00000 kw 6 00000 kW 12 00000 kW 20 0000 kW 20 0000 600 000 W 1200 000 W 2 40000 kW 4 00000 kW 6 00000 kW 12 00000 kW 24 0000 kW 40 0000 kW 30 0000 900 000 W 1 80000 kW 3 60000 kW 6 00000 kW 9 00000 kW 18 0000 kW 36 0000 kW 60 0000 kW Active Power Range of the Wiring Unit with 3P4W Wiring System Current Voltage Range V Range A 15 0000 30 0000 60 0000 100 000 150 000 300 000 600 000 1000 00 5 00000m 225 000 mW 450 000 mW 900 000 mW 1500 000 mW 2 25000 W 4 50000 W 9 00000 W 15 00000 W 10 0000m 450 000 mW 900 000 mW 1800 000 mW 3 00000 W 4 50000 W 9 00000 W 18 00000 W 30 0000 W 20 0000m 900 000 mW 1800 000 mW 3 60000 W 6 00000 W 9 00000 W 18 00000 W 36 0000 W 60 0000 W 50 0000m 2 25000 W 4 50000 W 9 00000 W 15 00000 W 22 5000 W 45 0000 W 90 0000 W 150 0000 W 100 000m 4 50000 W 9 00000 W 18 00000 W 30 0000 W 45 0000 W 90 0000 W 180 0000 W 300 000 W 200 000m 9 00000 W 18 00000 W 36 0000 W 60 0000 W 90 0000 W 180 0000 W 360 000 W 600 000 W 500 000m 22 5000 W 45 0000 W 90 0000 W 150 0000 W 225 000 W 450 000 W 900 000 W 1500 000 W 1 00000 45
110. When the reservation time for starting the integration is reached the START indicator changes to illumination and the integration is started e Holding the Integration 21 Press HOLD The HOLD key illuminates and the numeric data display is held Integration continues e Releasing the Hold Operation 22 Press HOLD while the values are held The HOLD key turns OFF and the numeric data display is updated In the hold condition the display can be updated by carrying out single measurements by pressing SINGLE e Stopping the Integration 23 Press the STOP soft key The START indicator turns OFF and the STOP indicator illuminates The integration time and integration value are held If you press STOP before the time specified by the integration timer is reached and then press START integration continues up to the time specified by the integration timer If the reservation time for stopping the integration is reached in the real time normal integration mode the START indicator turns OFF and the STOP indicator illuminates The integration time and integration value are held If the time specified by the integration timer elapses in the real time repetitive integration mode the integration time and integration value are automatically reset and the integration is repeated until STOP is pressed or when the reservation time for stopping the integration is reached e Resetting the Integration 24 Press the RESET soft key The STOP indicator t
111. aa coal conssabsncastanysteeed key test D keyboard test L Page VAD Olas es eA eve teva teem wel oa keene ven Neds ne ARMS ace EEE 6 21 line filter 4 22 4 23 ListsMOm soian isan eed Saal ean 8 4 9 8 LOA RENTERNE EE EEE 9 25 Load Exec we 9 25 Lower Scale wa 7 11 LPR client TUNCtiON siiis saai 2 36 Index 2 IM 760301 01E Manual sisipin daaa a aa SENEE R ISESE manual integration manual integration mode manual scaling 0 Maslo cers tacereceshereceveeveincececve fast A EEE TES master slave synchronization measurement 0 10 14 master slave synchronized measurement MAX ets eeese cepcestdene stldveds cd ceacdens ineeie G Nua ERTAN tastes MAX Old iieiea an iera re aa a EERE maximum display MEAN sess ciscsiseiscisessecvinetsttestsvcaresiccinaniatscsrssicautereiiueneeases MEASURE ccccccccssccecsseceesseeceesseecceseeceseeecessaeeeesaeeeesaee measurement function symbols meaning of measurement functions determination Of 006 Measurement Method cccccccccceessteeeeeeeesessseeeeeeeseesaes 12 9 measurement mode 2 3 3 34 Measurement Period c cece eeeeeee eee eereeeee 4 19 App 26 measurement range eeeseceeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeetseeeeeees 2 10 4 6 media Media M O cciscesecstssassecsuseesavecasiesesscceitesetecesctaasedsesesdaesnyscaseses MOM ONY sisirin ras
112. all power units used in the computation are the same For example the efficiency over elements or wiring units with mixed power units of W watt and J joule cannot be computed correctly e Limitations on the Efficiency Computation by Measurement Modes Efficiency cannot be computed in wide bandwidth harmonic measurement IEC harmonics measurement voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement and cycle by cycle measurement modes IM 760301 01E 5 21 JUBWIDINSeD JOMOd 5 8 Setting the Wiring Efficiency and Two Wattmeter Method Compensations CAL v mem FORM user evemenr INTEG srr LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL a AA 1 Press WIRING to display the Wiring menu DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT ea Furm OREMOTE SINGLE 2 To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC OO located above the soft DE D Ca e In the procedural hs Cv CY explanation below the MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor G AUTO MODE AUTO keys may be used This wone mone phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Press the Compensation soft key to display the Compensation dialog box e Selecting the Wiring Compensation 3 Press the cu
113. and average value of a sinusoidal alternating current are related as shown below Crest factor and form factor are used to define the tendency of the AC waveform Maximum value Crest factor crest factor Siaevalla Rms value Form factor form factor Average wel Vector Display of Alternating Current In general the instantaneous value of voltage and current is expressed with the following equations Voltage u Umsinat Current i Imsin wt p The time offset between the voltage and current is called a phase difference and is called a phase angle This time difference is mainly caused by the load to which the power is supplied In general the phase difference is zero when the load consists of only resistance If the load consists of inductance coiled object the current lags the voltage If the load consists of capacitance the current leads the voltage When the current lags the voltage When the current leads the voltage u Vector display is used to easily convey the size and phase relationships between the voltage and current The upward direction on the vertical axis is the reference anda positive phase angle is represented by an angle in the counterclockwise direction Normally a dot is placed above the symbol representing the quantity when explicitly indicating that it is a vector The size of the vector represents the rms value When the current lags the voltage When the current leads the voltage A
114. and minimum currents l pk and I pk e ON The measurement functions above are multiplied by the VT ratio CT ratio and power factor e OFF The measurement functions above are not multiplied by the VT ratio CT ratio and power factor The output values of the VT and CT are displayed directly as numeric data e Setting the VT Ratio VT The VT ratio can be set in the range of 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Setting the CT Ratio CT The CT ratio can be set in the range of 0 0001 to 99999 9999 e Setting the Power Factor SF Scaling Factor The power coefficient SF can be set in the range of 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Note e Ifthe result of multiplying the VT ratio CT ratio or power coefficient scaling factor to the measured value exceeds 9999 99M the display frame of the numeric data will display OF e For the list of the VT CT and power factor of all input elements see section 3 17 Displaying the Setup Parameter List When the scaling function is OFF VT CT and power factor are displayed as 1 0000 in the list To correctly compute the power and efficiency of functions set the power factors of all elements so that all power units used in the computation are the same For example the efficiency over elements or wiring units with mixed power units of W watt and J joule cannot be computed correctly Unify the power unit to W or J IM 760301 01E 4 17 SUOI IPUOD JUSWaINSeS y gt 4 6 Selecting the Cre
115. and spaces File name 1 to 8 characters 0 9 A Z _ parentheses minus sign Comment 0 to 25 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard Server name 0 to 40 characters User name 0 to 40 characters Password 0 to 40 characters E mail address 0 to 40 characters and spaces Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces the character cannot be entered consecutively Note File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COM9 and LPT1 to LPT9 IM 760301 01E 3 31 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 15 Entering Character Strings on the USB Keyboard On models with the USB port peripheral device option you can connect a USB keyboard and enter file names comments and so on USB PERIPHERAL Connector Use a USB cable to connect the USB keyboard to the USB PERIPHERAL connector on the left side of the front panel There are two USB PERIPHERAL connectors ports Port1 1 CA 2 H 3 H 4 q Port2 TT fa q q q Pin No Signal Name 1 VBUS 5V 2 Data 3 D Data 4 GN
116. as left Select Soft key2 Select Soft key3 Same as left Same as left Select Soft key2 Select Soft key3 Same as left Same as left Execute U AUTO Same as left Select Soft key4 Same as left Select Soft key4 Same as left I RANGE up Same as left Select Soft key5 Same as left Select Soft key5 Same as left RANGE down Execute MODE Same as left Same as left Select Soft key6 Select Soft key7 Same as left Same as left Select Soft key6 Select Soft key7 Same as left Same as left Execute AUTO Same as left Execute U I P Same as left Execute S Q i gt Same as left Execute WP q TIME Same as left Same as left Execute FU FI n Same as left Same as left Execute PRINT PRINT menu Execute IMAGE SAVE IMAGE SAVE menu Insert Insert ON Same as left Home Execute USER USER SET menu PageUp Execute PAGE PREVIOUS Execute PAGE FIRST Execute PAGE PREVIOUS Execute PAGE FIRST Delete Same as left ELEMENT ALL Execute PAGE NEXT Execute PAGE LAST Execute PAGE NEXT Execute PAGE LAST Cursor to the right Same as left Cursor to the right Same as left Cursor to the right Same as left Cursor to the left Same as left Cursor to the left Same as left Cursor to the left Same as left Cursor down Same as left Move soft keyboard Cursor
117. cycle by cycle measurement Measurement functions of normal measurement see section 2 2 e Measurement functions of the motor evaluation function motor version e Measurement functions of harmonic measurement option For cycle by cycle measurement mode Measurement functions of cycle by cycle measurement See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E The following data is saved in the places where numeric data does not exist when saving the numeric data e For ASCII files Characters NAN INF INF ERROR or blank 1 Measurement functions that are displayed as blank such as the Oth dc and 1st order values of pU and 9l For Float files Ox7FCO0000 0x7F800000 OxFF800000 or OxFFFFFFFE When saving the cycle by cycle measurement data information indicating whether peak over range occurred during the measurement is recorded to the right of the voltage U current 1 speed and torque data values using a number between 0 and 7 There are two methods for detecting peak over range detection by data and detection by hardware The peak over range information that is recorded is a combination of these detection results See below Peak over range detection by hardware Did not occur Occurred Peak over range data did not occur 0 4 Positive peak over range data occurred 1 5 Negative peak over range data occurred 2 6 Positive and negative peak over range data occurred 3 7 Note
118. e Selecting the files one at a time Press the Set Reset soft key to place an asterisk mark to the left of the files one at a time e Selecting the files at once Press the All Set soft key to place asterisk marks to the left of the selected file names at once There are three methods in selecting the files at once If you select a file and press the All Set soft key asterisk marks are placed by the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory e If you select a directory and press the All Set soft key asterisk marks are placed by the selected directory and all the files in the directory Ifyou select a storage medium and press the All Set soft key asterisk marks are placed by all the directories and files in the selected storage medium Note Data that is deleted cannot be recovered Be sure you erase the correct files e You can delete directories if there are no files in them Ifthe file attribute see section 9 6 is R you cannot delete the file e If an error occurs while deleting multiple files the files after the error occurrence are not deleted The number of directories and files that can be displayed in the file list is 2500 If the number of directories and files in a directory exceeds 2500 the file list randomly displays 2500 of the directories and files Files that do not have an archive attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not remove the archive attribute of th
119. e When the power switch of the instrument is turned ON do not apply a signal that exceeds the following values to the voltage or current input terminals When the instrument is turned OFF turn OFF the circuit under measurement For a description of other input terminals see the specifications of each module in chapter 12 Instantaneous Maximum Allowable Input 1 s or less Voltage Input Peak value of 2500 V or RMS value of 1500 V whichever is less Current Input Direct Input 2 A input element Peak value of 9 A or RMS value of 3 A whichever is less 30 A input element Peak value of 150 A or RMS value of 50 A whichever is less External Sensor Input Peak value less than or equal to 10 times the range Continuous Maximum Allowable Input Voltage Input Peak value of 1600 V or RMS value of 1100 V whichever is less Current Input Direct Input 2 A input element Peak value of 6 A or RMS value of 2 2 A whichever is less 30 A input element Peak value of 90 A or RMS value of 33 A whichever is less External Sensor Input Peak value less than or equal to 5 times the range CAUTION e Use measurement cables that have adequate margins of withstand voltage and current capacity with respect to the voltage or current being measured It should also have proper ratings that are suited to the measurement Example When making measurements on a current of 20 A use copper wires that have a conductive cross sectional are
120. elements Pressing only the ELEMENT key again enables individual input elements to be configured A Key and W Key See section 4 3 and 4 4 Selects the voltage range the current range or the current sensor range The selected range is enabled when the AUTO key is not turned ON manual range function AUTO Key See section 4 3 and 4 4 When the AUTO key is pressed and the AUTO indicator illuminates the auto range function is enabled The voltage range current range and current sensor range are automatically switched according to the amplitude of the input electric signal Pressing the AUTO key again turns OFF the AUTO indicator and enables the manual range function EXT SENSOR Key See section 4 4 When the EXT SENSOR key is pressed and the EXT SENSOR indicator illuminates the current sensor range for measuring the current sensor output on the WT3000 can be selected using the amp or W key in the CURRENT RANGE section Pressing the EXT SENSOR key again turns OFF the EXT SENSOR indicator and enables the selection of the current range for direct input SHIFT EXT SENSOR SENSOR RATIO Key See section 4 4 Displays a menu for setting the current sensor transformation ratio for each input element These transformation ratios are used to convert the current sensor output to current IM 760301 01E 1 3 syed JO suolouny pue sowen f 1 2 Setup Menu Display Key and Execution Key 7 Ea e e a ee o a A al e
121. entry position Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter all the characters After entering all the characters select ENT on the keyboard and press SET The string is confirmed and the keyboard disappears At the same time the equation is temporarily stored in the internal memory e When the equation is not correct and an error message is displayed it is still stored in the memory Up to five equations can be stored After five equations have been stored a new equation overwrites the oldest equation Recalling the Temporarily Stored Equation The procedure varies depending on the WT3000 firmware version as follows Version 1 0x Select on the keyboard and press SET A window opens and the temporarily stored equation is displayed Select the equation you wish to recall and press SET The selected equation appears in the entry box on the keyboard If there are characters already in the entry box they are overwritten with the recalled equation Correct the recalled equation according to steps 1 to 4 in Entering the equation and temporary storage described above and enter it At this point the equation is temporarily stored in the internal memory The temporary memory is cleared when the power is turned OFF The window displaying the equation that is stored in the memory UCE1 0RT UCE1 0RT m INSERT ZEURE CELLENE E esr RMS E1 Brace x T gt RMSCE3 a E IRMS E1 2 RMS EZ T FA aaa IRMS E2
122. exceeds 100 mA cannot be connected simultaneously to the two ports Port1 L 1 J 2 l 3 H 4 H Port2 o o o H Pin No Signal Name 1 VBUS 5V 2 D Data 3 D Data 4 GND Ground Compatible USB Storage Devices USB memories USB Mass Storage Class can be used on the WT3000 Connecting the USB Memory Connect the USB memory directly to the WT3000 without going through a USB hub You can connect the USB memory regardless of whether the power switch on the WT3000 is ON or OFF supports hot plugging When the power switch is ON the USB memory is detected and enabled approximately six seconds after it is connected An ID number 2 or greater is automatically assigned to the detected USB memory Note Do not connect USB devices other than a USB keyboard or a USB memory to the USB PERIPHERAL connector e The WT3000 has two USB PERIPHERAL ports However USB devices whose maximum consumption current exceeds 100 mA cannot be connected simultaneously to the two ports CAUTION Do not remove the USB memory or turn OFF the power when the USB memory is being accessed If you do the data on the USB memory may be destroyed e An access icon is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen while the USB memory is being accessed General Handling Precautions of USB Memories For the general handling precautions of the USB memory read
123. for a Model with Four Input Elements Installed When the order of the numeric data is reset the measurement function data are displayed in the order given in the next table For details on each display see section 5 1 as well as sections 1 1 and 7 1 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E 4 Item Display Display Page 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 U1 U2 U3 U4 UZA UZB WP1 ni l1 12 13 14 IZA XB WP2 Speed P1 P2 P3 P4 PXA PXB WP3 Torque A1 A2 A3 a4 AZA AXB WP4 Pm 8 Item Display 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 i 12 13 14 IZA IZB qi n2 P1 P2 P3 P4 PZA PXB WP2 n3 S1 S2 s3 S4 SZA SZB q2 n4 Qi Q2 Q3 Q4 QZA QZB WP3 Speed 1 Torque 1 SyncSp fU FreqU 1 Pm 1 16 Item Display 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 U1 U2 U3 U4 UZA WP1 WP3 F1 i 12 13 14 IZA WP 1 WP 3 F2 P1 P2 P3 P4 PZA WP 1 WP 3 F3 S1 S2 s3 S4 SEXA qi q3 F4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 QEZA q 1 q 3 ni A1 A2 A3 a4 AZA q 1 q 3 n2 1 2 p3 04 pzA WS1 WS3 n3 Pc1 Pc2 Pc3 Pc4 PctA wai WQ3 n4 fU FreqU 1 fU FreqU 2 fU FreqU 3 fU FreqU 4 UZB WP2 WP4 Speed fl Freql 1 fl Freql 2 fl Freql 3 fl Freql 4 IZB WP 2 WP 4 Torque U pk1 U pk2 U pk3 U pk4 PZB WP 2 WP 4 SyncSp 1 U pk1 U pk2 U pk3 U pk4 SZB Slip l pk1 l pk2 l pk3 l pk4 QZB Pm l pk1 l pk2 l pk3 l pk4 AXB CfU1 CfU2 CfU3 CfU4 zB Cfl1 Cfl2 CfI3 Cfl4 Pc B IM 760301 01E App 11
124. in reverse Same as left Cursor down Same as left Cursor up Same as left Ctrl Key Held Down on the USB Keyboard Numeric Shift ON on Keypad the WT3000 Move soft keyboard Cursor forward Same as left Cursor up Same as left Shift on the USB Keyboard Num Lock I Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Cursor down Same as left Move soft keyboard Cursor in reverse Cursor down Execute PAGE NEXT Cursor to the left Execute PAGE LAST Same as left Cursor to the left Execute PAGE NEXT Cursor to the left Cursor to the right Same as left Cursor to the right Cursor to the right Cursor up Same as left Move soft keyboard Cursor forward Cursor up Execute PAGE PREVIOUS Execute PAGE FIRST Execute PAGE PREVIOUS Insert ON Delete IM 760301 01E App 39 x pu ddy Appendix 10 Measurement Modes and Functional Limitations The following measurement modes can be used on models with the advanced computation G6 voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement FL or cycle by cycle measurement CC option The functions that can be used in each measurement mode are as follows Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker Normal Wide Bandwidth Measurement Harmonic Waveform Measurement Mode Computation IEC Harmonic G6 G5 Option None _ G6 G6 G6 Harmonics Numeric Wa
125. indicating that all items will be stored Deselecting All the Items at Once Press the cursor keys to select All OFF Press SET The highlighting of the buttons to the left of all the signals are cleared indicating that all items will not be stored ON Store Setting K Mode Manual Count 100 all on all OFF u u u2 12 u3 13 ua 14 speed Torque Interval Setting Store Item Wave Wave Trace Optimize Store Count Setting the Items One at a Time 7 Press the cursor keys to select the input signal you wish to set 8 Press SET When the button to the left of the selected input signal is highlighted the input signal will be stored If the highlighting of the button is cleared the input signal will not be stored Selecting the Numeric Data and Waveform Data to Be Stored This operation is valid if the stored item was set to Numeric Wave in step 5 6 Press the List Item amp Wave Trace soft key to display the List Item amp Wave Trace dialog box 7 Select the numeric data to be stored according to steps 7 and 8 in Selecting the Numeric Data to Be Stored on page 8 4 8 Select the waveform data to be stored according to steps 7 and 8 in Setting the Items One at a Time under Selecting the Waveform Data to Be Stored described above eea paiojs y Burnes pue eeg Buljjesey pue Bunos fe 8
126. is turned OFF To retain the data save the data to the storage medium before turning off the power H no data is stored in places where there is no numeric data e Ifthere are no integrated values because integration is not performed no data is stored no data is also stored in places where there is no integration time e The maximum order for which the harmonic data is saved is the maximum harmonic order to be measured that is specified in the harmonic measurement option menu no data is stored for harmonic orders without data e To store waveform display data set the display mode to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Bar or Wave Trend and display the waveform on the screen If the display mode is not set to one of these modes NAN is stored for the waveform data e While the storage operation is in progress you cannot change the PLL source the equation for distortion scaling averaging filter integration mode integration timer or the store interval In addition you cannot change the auto print settings or execute auto print e If you hold the display by pressing HOLD while the storage operation is in progress the value that is present when HOLD is pressed is stored e If the store interval is 00 00 00 and you hold the display by pressing HOLD the storage operation stops IM 760301 01E 8 13 eea paiojs y Burnes pue eeg Bulyjesey pue Buros fe 8 5 Procedure Saving th
127. measurement functions of harmonic measurement option are derived in the following manner The voltage signal input to the A D converter is converted to digital values at a sampling frequency that is determined by the PLL source signal The measured value of each item of harmonic measurement is derived by performing an FFT based on the converted digital values using the DSP 2 2 IM 760301 01E 2 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Functions Measurement Modes The normal measurement mode on the WT3000 allows you to measure voltage current power etc If the advanced computation G6 option is installed measurements can be performed in a mode specific to each of the functions listed below in addition to the normal measurement mode Switch the measurement mode according to your application Normal Measurement Mode Normal Mode This mode is used to measure voltage current power and integrated values If the G6 option is installed harmonic measurement as well as bar graph and vector displays become available in normal measurement mode 1 Equivalent to the G5 harmonic measurement option This harmonic measurement does not conform to IEC61000 3 2 e Wide Bandwidth Harmonic Measurement Mode Wide Band Harmonics Mode G6 Option Harmonic measurement up to 50 order can be performed on a signal with a 1 kHz fundamental frequency Use this mode for harmonic measurement of signals whose fundamental frequency is highe
128. measurement range or synchronization source of input elements 1 to 3 is set to the same setting This is convenient in that the settings of the measurement range and synchronization source of all input elements included in the wiring unit can be done simultaneously when measuring a three phase device SUOI IPUOD JUSWaINSeS y gt Settings That Are Matched between Input Elements When the Independent Setting of Input Elements Is Turned OFF e Measurement range including auto range ON OFF e Voltage Current mode e Synchronization source setting Settings That Can Be Set Independently Even When the Independent Setting of Input Elements Is Turned OFF Scaling value VT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient e Input filter line filter and frequency filter These settings can be set independently for each input element regardless of whether the independent setting of input elements is turned ON OFF If a wiring unit ZA or B is specified and the independent setting of input elements is changed from ON to OFF the measurement range and synchronization source settings of each input element are changed as follows The measurement range is set to the maximum range on all input elements included in the wiring unit The external sensor input range has precedence over the direct input range for the current range e The voltage current mode and auto range settings are changed to match the settings of the input element with the maximum m
129. mode e Values are substituted into URMS and UMN according to the voltage current mode as follows Voltage mode MEAN DC URMS Yes No UMN Yes e If the voltage and current modes are set to RMS and UMN is assigned for the user defined function Urms Umn Irms and P can be measured simultaneously If the voltage and current modes are set to MEAN and URMS is assigned for the user defined function Urms Umn Imn and P can be measured simultaneously e Urms Umn Irms and Imn cannot be measured simultaneously e The substituted value of TI is the same regardless of which element symbol E1 to E4 is set in TI The unit of TI is seconds S e Functions 1 to 4 efficiency 2 are displayed as percentages as indicated by the equations given in appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions However ETA1 to ETA4 described in this section are displayed as ratios Example n1 80 ETA1 0 8 The U1 of PHIU1U2 represents the voltage signal of the element whose element number is the smallest in the wiring unit ZA or B For example if input elements 2 3 and 4 are assigned to wiring unit ZA PHIU1U2 is the phase difference between the voltage signal of input element 2 and that of input element 3 IM 760301 01E JUSWIDINSeD JOMOd 5 4 Setting the User Defined Function e The user defined functions allow you to determine physical values other than those o
130. of u n 1 u n 2 3 x i n 1 i n 2 i n 3 e Watt hour Compensation SWP WP of u n 1 u n 2 3 x i n 1 i n 2 i n 3 u n and i n are instantaneous voltage and current sampled data of voltage and current signals respectively Computation step 2 Add the compensation value to the measured value e SP SP SP xsf e SWP SWP SWP xsf e SWP SWP SWP xsf e SWP SWP SWP xsf sf Scaling factor of the first element in the wiring unit element 1 in this example Note This function can be set only when the wiring system is set to 3P3W 3V3A on models with the delta computation option IM 760301 01E App 35 x pu ddy Appendix 9 Key Assignments of the USB Keyboard 104 Keyboard US Ctrl Key Held Down on the USB Keyboard AVG menu Soft Keyboard Displayed on the WT3000 Key Shift ON on Shift on the the WT3000 USB Keyboard A Shift ON on the WT3000 Execute STORE STORE SET menu SCALING menu MOTOR SET menu Execute HOLD Same as left Execute ELEMENT Execute ELEMENTALL FILE menu Same as left INTEG menu Same as left 5 Q o ajo jojo HRM SET menu Same as left J Q o jajo jojo Execute IMAGE SAVE IMAGE SAVE menu Z O n ms o o o x x LINE FILTER menu FREQ FILTER menu MEASURE menu CURSOR Execute NUMERIC Same as left
131. of Conventional WT Series Power Meters The apparent power of each phase is calculated using equation 3 and the reactive power of each phase is calculated using equation 2 The results are summed to derive the power Active power for three phase four wire system P P1 P2 P3 Apparent power for three phase four wire system SE S1 S2 S3 U1xl1 U2xl2 U3xl3 Reactive power for three phase four wire system Q Q1 Q2 Q3 s1x y U1xI1 P124 82xV U2x12 P2 4 83xV U3x13 P3 However the sign for s1 s2 and s3 is positive when the current leads the voltage and negative when the current lags the voltage e TYPE2 The apparent power of each phase is determined from equation 3 and the results are added to derive the three phase apparent power The three phase reactive power is calculated from the three phase apparent power and three phase active power using equation 4 Active power for three phase four wire system P P1 P2 P3 Apparent power for three phase four wire system S S1 S2 S3 U1xl1 U2xl2 U3xI3 Reactive power for three phase four wire system QX 4 Sx _ Px 2 18 IM 760301 01E 2 5 Computation TYPE 3 The Method Used by Harmonic Measurement Mode on the WT1600 and PZ4000 The reactive power of each phase is calculated directly using equation 2 The three phase apparent power is calculated using equation 4 This computing equation can be selected on models with t
132. of files corresponding to the file type Setup Wave or Numeric that is specified for File Item in the File menu in the directory selected in step 5 is displayed f you select All the list of all the files in the directory selected in step 5 is displayed e Viewing the Properties 7 On the File List dialog box press the cursor keys to select the file 8 Press the Property soft key to display the file property window 9 Press ESC to close the file property window elete Function L Delete M Function z Delete Property Delete File Name 0001 SET File Size 27309 byte Date Time 2004 05 21 17 53 Attribute RAW Set Reset Set Reset HEE All Set all Set j Property p Property Filter are 2 Iter all Item BIT Attribute Attribute Delete Exec i Delete Exec e Selecting the File Attribute 10 Press the cursor keys to select the file 11 Press the Attribute soft key The attribute of the selected file changes to R or R i Delete File List M Function Path PC_Card pct Space 124030976 byte Delete File Name Size Date Attribute pc_card 1 Set Reset con gt 2004705721 17 46 0001 27309 2004 05 21 17 53 R 0000 27309 2004705721 17 50 R All Set EE K Property Filter a Attribute Delete Exec E 9 28 IM 760301 01E
133. on Numeric Keypad Same as left the USB Keyboard Shift ON on the WT3000 Move soft keyboard Cursor forward Soft Keyboard Displayed on the WT3000 Shift on the USB Keyboard Same as left Cursor up Same as left Shift on the USB Keyboard Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Cursor down Same as left Move soft keyboard Cursor in reverse Cursor down Execute PAGE NEXT Execute PAGE LAST Execute PAGE NEXT Cursor to the left Same as left Cursor to the left Cursor to the left Cursor to the right Same as left Cursor to the right Cursor to the right Cursor up Execute PAGE PREVIOUS Same as left Same as left Move soft keyboard Cursor forward Cursor up Execute PAGE PREVIOUS Insert ON DELETE IM 760301 01E App 37 xipueddy Appendix 9 Key Assignments of the USB Keyboard 109 Keyboard Japanese Key Shift ON on Shift on the the WT3000 USB Keyboard A Ctrl Key Held Down on the USB Keyboard AVG menu Soft Keyboard Displayed on the WT3000 Other Shift ON on the WT3000 Execute STORE STORE SET menu SCALING menu MOTOR SET menu Execute HOLD Same as left Execute ELEMENT Execute ELEMENTALL FILE menu Same as left INTEG menu Same as left sje jajo jojo HRM SET menu Execute IMAGE SAVE
134. out when numeric data is displayed and the menu is not displayed or the ITEM key has been pressed Only the input element or wiring unit switches The input element or wiring unit that is displayed varies depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the WT3000 or the selected wiring system SHIFT ELEMENT ALL Key See section 5 1 If the ALL indicator is illuminated by pressing the SHIFT ELEMENT ALL key on models with four input elements installed each time the ELEMENT key is pressed the input elements or wiring units displayed on one page switches in the following order 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 4 gt XA gt B gt 1 and so on The numeric data of the selected input elements or wiring units is displayed If the SHIFT ELEMENT ALL key is pressed again the ALL indicator turns OFF and the function for switching the input elements or wiring units displayed on one page is released The above operation is carried out when numeric data is displayed and the menu is not displayed or the ITEM key has been pressed Only the input element or wiring unit switches The input element or wiring unit that is displayed varies depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the WT3000 or the selected wiring system MEASURE Key See section 5 4 to 5 6 5 9 5 10 10 3 and 10 9 Displays a menu for setting the user defined functions setting the MAX hold function setting the average active power
135. pue eeg Buljjesey pue Bunos e IM 760301 01E 8 1 8 1 Setting the Store Mode Explanation To store data parameters such as the store mode the store count the store interval and the store reservation time must be specified before executing the operation This section explains the store mode For the procedure on how to set the store count the store interval and the store reservation time see section 8 2 for the procedure on how to start the storage operation see section 8 4 Limitations on the Storage Function by Measurement Modes There are limitations on the setting and execution of the storage operation in measurement modes other than normal measurement mode Normal Measurement Mode There are no limitations on the storage function Wide Bandwidth Harmonic Measurement Mode The store mode cannot be set to integration synchronization mode Integ Sync because the integration function is not available If you switch from normal measurement mode to wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode with the store mode set to integration synchronization mode the store mode is set to manual If Store Item is set to Wave NAN is stored for the waveform data This is because the waveform display function is not available Measurement Modes in Which the Storage Function Cannot Be Used e IEC harmonic measurement mode e Waveform computation mode e FFT mode e Voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement mode Cycle by cycle mea
136. s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for setting the harmonic measurement function Storing Recalling Data Saving Loading Data and Printing on the Built in Printer camc mert EEE jme J e E KEA MENU STORE SET i MENU STORE Key See section 8 4 Starts or stops the store operation or clears the internal memory SHIFT STORE STORE SET Key See section 8 1 to 8 3 8 5 and 8 6 Displays the store and recall setup menu FILE Key See section 9 1 to 9 3 and 9 5 to 9 9 Displays a menu for formatting the external storage medium saving loading setup parameters saving measured data changing file attributes deleting files copying files renaming directories files creating directories etc IMAGE SAVE Key See section 9 4 Saves the screen image data 1 8 IM 760301 01E 1 2 Setup Menu Display Key and Execution Key Other Functions SHIFT IMAGE SAVE MENU Key See section 9 4 Displays a menu for setting the file name data format color mode data compression and comment shown on the display when saving the screen image data PRINT Key See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Prints the screen image data or numeric data list SHIFT PRINT MENU Key See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays menu for setting the print destination setting the print format setting the comment setting t
137. setting the computing equation for apparent reactive power setting the computing equation for corrected power selecting the display format of phase difference selecting the sampling frequency setting the master slave synchronized measurement and so on SHIFT MEASURE CURSOR Key See section 6 9 and 7 7 For details on bar graphs option see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for measuring values with cursors when waveforms trends or bar graphs harmonic measurement option are displayed IM 760301 01E 1 7 syed JO suonouny pue sowen e 1 2 Setup Menu Display Key and Execution Key Integration D A Output Option Motor Evaluation Motor Version and Harmonic Measurement Option peg Cone Cor om PR Gee oe re EE ee ce ea Ce el es eo SHIFT a a MOTOR ma e a O INTEG Key See section 5 11 to 5 14 For details on the rated time of integrated D A output option see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for setting the integration mode integration timer reservation time integration auto calibration integration start stop reset and rated time of integrated D A output option SHIFT SCALING MOTOR SET Key See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for setting the motor evaluation function HRM SET Key See the Expansion Function User
138. standard power cord Maximum rated voltage 125 V Maximum rated current 7 A A1009WD 1 VDE standard power cord Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A A1054WD 1 BS standard power cord Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A A1024WD 1 AS standard power cord Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A A1064WD 1 GB standard power cord CCC compatible Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A Power fuse A1463EF 1 250 V 6 3 A time lag Attached to the fuse holder Rubber feet A9088ZM 2 Two pieces in one set Two sets provided Current input B9318FX 1 With four attachment screws protective cover Safety terminal 758931 See Same number as the number of installed input elements adapter set right 760301 1 set with 1 hexagonal socket wrench 760302 2 sets with 1 hexagonal socket wrench 760303 3 sets with 1 hexagonal socket wrench 760304 4 sets with 1 hexagonal socket wrench Printer roll B9316FX 2 For the built in printer paper Provided only with option B5 36 pin A1005JD 1 For D A output connector Provided only with option DA User s Manual Vol 1 3 IM760301 01E 1 This manual Communication IM760301 17E Interface User s Manual Vol 2 3 1 CD ROM CD ROM part number B9318ZZ Printed manuals can be purchased separately Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E 1 Provided on models with su
139. the integration status the displays shown in the following table are available TimeUp When integration continues up to the time specified by the integration timer it automatically stops The integration status in this condition is considered TimeUp status e Error The WT3000 stores and holds the integration result even when a power failure occurs while integration is in progress When the power recovers the integration result calculated up to the point when the power failure occurred is displayed with the integration operation stopped The integration status in this condition is considered Error status Displayed when the integration time is set to a value other than 0 Displayed when ready A amp change items PAGE _ Elementi a u1 100Vrms Element1 Urms1 q 14 s00mmear u1 100vrms V 11 500mAmea z Element2 2 U2 100vrms _ Element2 B 12 500mAmean U2 100Vrms 1 12 500mAmean mn Al _ Element3 A U3 100Vrms _ Element3 g m 5 13 soomamean U3 100Vrms 13 500mAmea 6 _ Element4 _ P1 u4 100V rms _ Element4 7 14 500mAmean u4 100V rms W 14 500mAmea 8 Motor Spd 20V Motor 9 Trq 20V 5 Spd 20V S1 Elapsed time 14 20v v _Integ Stop 46 5455 VA jmtogiston of integration _integ Ready 0 00 13 Start Time Integration start Timer Integration 2004 12 01 0 10 00 00 00 00 reservation time timer IM 760301 01E 5 31 JUBWIDINSeD
140. the operation This section explains the start and stop operations of storage For the procedure on how to set the store mode see section 8 1 for the procedure on how to set the store count the store interval and the store reservation time see section 8 2 e Display Related to Storage When the storage operation is in the start or stop state the storage state and store count are displayed at the upper left of the screen Storage state Store count sanie abo e Starting the Storage Operation The storage operation starts according to various conditions depending on the store mode see section 8 1 For details see the procedural explanation The storage operation can be executed only when the internal memory is cleared e If you are performing the first storage operation after turning ON the power switch there is no need to clear the internal memory e Stopping the Storage Operation The storage operation can be forcibly stopped using the STORE key e The storage operation stops automatically according to various conditions depending on the store mode For details see the procedural explanation e Initializing Clearing the Internal Memory To start the storage operation again after stopping the operation the internal memory must be cleared e Retaining the Stored Data The data stored to the internal memory cannot be retained by the internal lithium battery The data in the internal memory is lost when the power to the WT3000
141. the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element to select the target element e Setting the External Current Sensor Transformation Ratio 3 Press the cursor keys to set the transformation ratio ATT Element 1 i Cmv7ad 10 000 Element 2 mA 10 0000 Element 3 Cmv7a 10 0000 K Element 4 Cmv7a 10 0009 IM 760301 01E 4 13 SUOI IPUOD JUSWaINSeS y gt 4 4 Setting the Measurement Range When Using the External Current Sensor Explanation The output of current sensors that output voltage such as shunts and clamps can be input to the current sensor input connector of an element and measured When using a current sensor that outputs current set the transformation ratio as a CT ratio see section 4 5 e Display Position of the Target Element and Specified Range It is the same as section 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input e Selecting the External Current Sensor Input Connector To measure the current using the input signal from the external current sensor input connector EXT SENSOR must be selected EXT SENSOR key illuminated by pressing EXT SENSOR and then the external current sensor range must be specified e Selecting the External Current Sensor Range Two types of range settings are available fixed and auto e Fixed Range e When the crest factor is set to 3 Select 50 mV 100 mV 200 mV 500 mV 1V 2V 5V or 10 V e When the crest fac
142. you select Float in step 5 When the data type is set to Binary or ASCII the waveform that is displayed on the screen is saved 6 Press the Save soft key to display the Save Menu 7 Press the Trace soft key to display the input signal selection box 8 Press the cursor keys to select any of the elements wiring units starting with U1 9 Press SET to select the input signal to be saved Proceed to step 12 on page 9 10 File Item Wave Data Type utility Save Menu File List Set File Name Save Exec IM 760301 01E e eq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes el 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data Numeric Data Waveform Sampling Data Selecting the Numeric Data Selecting the Type of Numeric Data to Be Saved for Measurement Modes Other Than Cycle by Cycle Press the Data Type soft key to select ASCII or Float 4 Note The data type is fixed to ASCII for the cycle by cycle measurement e Selecting the Numeric Data to Be Saved 5 NoD N D Press the List Item soft key to display the List Item dialog box Selecting All Items at Once Press the cursor keys to select All ON Press SET The buttons to the left of all the elements and measurement functions are highlighted indicating that all items will be saved Deselecting All Items at Once Press the cursor keys to select All OFF Press SET The highlighting of the buttons to th
143. 0 00000 W 15 0000 W 30 0000 W 60 0000 W 100 0000 W 250 000m 3 75000 W 7 50000 W 15 0000 W 25 0000 W 37 5000 W 75 0000 W 150 000 W 250 000 W 500 000m 7 50000 W 15 0000 W 30 0000 W 50 0000 W 75 0000 W 150 000 W 300 000 W 500 000 W 1 00000 15 0000 W 30 0000 W 60 0000 W 100 0000 W 150 000 W 300 000 W 600 000 W 1000 000 W 2 50000 37 5000 W 75 0000 W 150 000 W 250 000 W 375 000 W 750 000 W 1 50000 kW 2 50000 kW 5 00000 75 0000 W 150 000 W 300 000 W 500 000 W 750 000 W 1 50000 kW 3 00000 kW 5 00000 kW 10 0000 150 000 W 300 000 W 600 000 W 1000 000 W 1 50000 kW 3 00000 kW 6 00000 kW 10 00000 kw 15 0000 225 000 W 450 000 W 900 000 W 1 50000 kW 2 25000 kW 4 50000 kW 9 00000 kW 15 0000 kW Active Power Range of the Wiring Unit with 3P4W Wiring System Current Voltage Range V Range A 7 5000 15 0000 30 0000 50 0000 75 000 150 000 300 000 500 000 2 50000m 56 2500 mW 112 5000 mW 225 000 mW 375 000 mW 562 500 mW 1125 000 mw 2 25000 W 3 75000 W 5 00000m 112 5000 mW 225 000 mW 450 000 mW 750 000 mW 1125 000 mW 2 25000 W 4 50000 W 7 50000 W 10 0000m 225 000 mW 450 000 mW 900 000 mW 1500 000 mW 2 25000 W 4 50000 W 9 00000 W 15 00000 W 25 0000m 562 500 mW 1125 000 mW 2 25000 W 3 75000 W 5 62500 W 11 25000 W 22 5000 W 37 5000 W 50 0000m 1125 000 mW 2 25000 W 4 50000 W 7 50000 W 11 25000 W 22 5000 W 45 0000 W 75 0000 W 100 000m 2 25000 W 4
144. 0 Hz 60 2 11 PRINT MENU applies to models with the built in printer option Print to Print Format Built in Hard Copy D A Output applies to models with the D A output option Item No Function 1 U 2 3 P 4 S 5 Q 6 7 f 8 fU 9 fl 10 to 20 Element S Order Range Mode Element 1 Fixed Element 1 Fixed Element 1 Fixed Element 1 Fixed Element 1 Fixed Element 1 Fixed Element 1 Fixed Element 1 Fixed Element 1 Fixed Fixed IM 760301 01E App 9 x pu ddy Appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data Settings That Are Not Initialized through Initialization MISC Initialize Settings Item Setting MISC Remote Control Device GP IB GP IB Address 1 RS232 displayed on models with the RS232 communication option Baud Rate 19200 Format 8 No 1 Rx Tx No No Terminator Cr Lf Date Time Display On Type Manual Config Message Language ENG Menu Language ENG Alphabet Font Gothic LCD Brightness 2 Key Lock Off Shift Lock Off Crest Factor CF3 Graph Color Mode Default Text Color Mode Preset 1 Settings that are not initialized through initialization MISC Initialize Settings Initialized when the RST command is sent from the communication interface App 10 IM 760301 01E Appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data Example of the Display Order of Numeric Data Example
145. 0 W 100 000m 0 75000 W 1 50000 W 3 00000 W 5 00000 W 7 5000 W 15 0000 W 30 0000 W 50 0000 W 250 000m 1 87500 W 3 75000 W 7 5000 W 12 5000 W 18 7500 W 37 5000 W 75 000 W 125 000 W 500 000m 3 75000 W 7 5000 W 15 0000 W 25 0000 W 37 5000 W 75 000 W 150 000 W 250 000 W 1 00000 7 5000 W 15 0000 W 30 0000 W 50 0000 W 75 000 W 150 000 W 300 000 W 500 000 W 2 50000 18 7500 W 37 5000 W 75 000 W 125 000 W 187 500 W 375 000 W 0 75000 kW 1 25000 kW 5 00000 37 5000 W 75 000 W 150 000 W 250 000 W 375 000 W 0 75000 kW 1 50000 kW 2 50000 kW Q 10 0000 75 000 W 150 000 W 300 000 W 500 000 W 0 75000 kW 1 50000 kW 3 00000 kW 5 00000 kw 2 15 0000 112 500 W 225 000 W 450 000 W 0 75000 kW 1 12500 kW 2 25000 kW 4 50000 kW 7 5000 kW g Active Power Range of the Wiring Unit with 1P3W 3P3W or 3P3W 3V3A Wiring System S Current Voltage Range V 9 Range Ss A 7 5000 15 0000 30 0000 50 0000 75 000 150 000 300 000 500 000 2 50000m 37 5000 mW 75 0000 mW 150 000 mW 250 000 mW 375 000 mW 750 000 mW 1 50000 W 2 50000 W S 5 00000m 75 0000 mW 150 000 mW 300 000 mW 500 000 mW 750 000 mW 1 50000 W 3 00000 W 5 00000 W o 10 0000m 150 000 mW 300 000 mW 600 000 mW 1000 000 mw 1 50000 W 3 00000 W 6 00000 W 10 00000 W 25 0000m 375 000 mW 750 000 mW 1 50000 W 2 50000 W 3 75000 W 7 50000 W 15 0000 W 25 0000 W 50 0000m 750 000 mW 1 50000 W 3 00000 W 5 00000 W 7 50000 W 15 0000 W 30 0000 W 50 0000 W 100 000m 1 50000 W 3 00000 W 6 00000 W 1
146. 000800980000 608000000080000 IM 760301 01E There are also inlet holes on the Inlet holes See section 3 2 bottom panel 1 2 1 2 Setup Menu Display Key and Execution Key Setting the Measurement Conditions ae VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE ALL S S COOH move auto CEH mone AuTO INPUT INFO WIRING Key See sections 4 1 4 2 5 7 and 5 8 Displays a menu for selecting the wiring system selecting independent setting of input elements setting the computing equation for efficiency setting the wiring compensation setting the efficiency compensation etc When the wiring compensation or efficiency compensation is enabled the COMPEN indicator illuminates SHIFT WIRING INPUT INFO Key See sections 3 16 and 4 1 Displays a list of conditions for receiving voltage current signals and acquiring the signals as data such as the wiring system of each input element wiring unit measurement range input filter scaling and synchronization source ELEMENT Key See section 4 1 and 4 2 e Selects the input element for setting the measurement range The selected input element switches each time the ELEMENT key is pressed Input elements that are assigned to the same wiring unit in the wiring system selection are selected simultaneously SHIFT ELEMENT ALL Key See section 4 1 and 4 2 Collectively sets the voltage range or current range of all installed input
147. 000V 30a 48 32 OK Ok 2 Contral Element4 1000V 30a 2005 12 15 14 49 04 OK OK 5 Motor 20v 20v 2005 12 15 14 49 38 OK OK Date Time gt KKKKKKKKKKK Options gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt E Advanced Calculation G6 Y es Harmonics IEC HrmMATH FFT D Built in Printer 7B5 Yes 5 4 Delta Calculation DT ves Config Add on Freq Measure FQ Yes DA Output DA Yes 2004 12 27 15 10 32 OK OK VGA Output twil yves D Ser ial RS 232 C2 No USB port PC 7c12 es Selftest Ethernet vc7l ves Mac Address 000064_826_007 pe USB Per ipheral UcSl es a Link Date 2006 01 11 Wed 12 34 gt Next Product ID 7SnYVW2V N aza pe O 5 Explanation Displaying the System Conditions You can check the model firmware version element configuration and installed options IM 760301 01E 11 9 11 5 Replacing the Power Fuse A WARNING To prevent the possibility of fire only use a fuse with the specified rating voltage current and type e Be sure to turn OFF the instrument and unplug the power cord before replacing the fuse e Never short the fuse holder Fuse Rating The power fuse used on this instrument is specified as follows Maximum rated voltage 250 V e Maximum rated current 6 3 A e Type Time lag e Standard UL VDE certified Part number A1463EF Replacement Procedure Replace the power fuse according to the procedure below 1 Turn OFF the power switch 2
148. 1 08 30 07 03 03 1 01 0 0000000E 00 FS4 A 1 500000e 01 1 500000e 01 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 06 30 07 03 03 Torque 1002 1 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 FS4 Nm 2 000000e 01 2 000000e 01 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 08 30 07 03 03 0 0000000E 00 FS4 V 3 000000e 03 3 000000e 03 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 06 30 07 03 03 0 0000000E 00 FS4 A 1 500000e 01 1 500000e 01 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 06 30 07 03 03 Note The header file is a common file used by YOKOGAWA s measuring instruments Therefore data that is not required by the WT3000 0s is also included IM 760301 01E Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format e PubliciInfo Common Information FormatVersion Header file version No common to YOKOGAWA s header files Model Model name Endian Endian mode when saving data Big DataFormat Storage format of the binary waveform display data Trace GroupNumber The number of Group s indicated below TraceTotalNumber Total number of target waveforms DataOffset Start position of the binary waveform display data e Group1 Group Information TraceNumber Number of waveforms in this group BlockNumber Number of blocks in this group TraceName Name of each waveform BlockSize Number of data points in a single block of each waveform VResolution Value of coefficient VResolution of
149. 1E App 43 Appendix 12 Operands of User Defined Functions That Can Be Used in Each Measurement Mode Harmonics PTHD Phase angle PHIU1U2 of the PHIU1U3 fundamental component between PHIU112 phases PHIU1I3 Table 2 2 Measurement Mode Measurement Item Normal Wide Bandwidth Waveform Computation Measurement Harmonic IEC Harmonic UHDF IHDF PHDF UTHD ITHD UTHF ITHF UTIF ITIF HVF HCF PHIU1I1 User defined function MAX hold F1 F2 UMAX URMSMAX UMEANMAX IMAX PMAX SMAX QMAX UPPEAKMAX UMPEAKMAX IPPEAKMAX IMPEAKMAX Yes Can be measured or computed Limit The data is set to NAN no data if the harmonic order section of the equation is not set to ORT No 5 6 7 8 9 Cannot be measured or computed The maximum order for which the harmonic data is measured is the maximum harmonic order to be measured that is specified in the harmonic measurement option menu The data is set to NAN no data for harmonic orders without data If the harmonic order section of the equation is set to ORT the normal measurement value the value that includes all frequency components is substituted If the harmonic order section of the equation is set to ORT the total value
150. 2 Use the keyboard to set the file name For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings 23 Enter the Comment in a similar fashion 24 Press ESC to close the Save dialog box 2005704715 10 17 2005704715 10 16 utility 9 10 IM 760301 01E 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data Numeric Data Waveform Sampling Data Save Menu Save Menu 7 K File List Fi Auto Naming File Name C CAPS Comment gt Pe ola BUC DTETF G HE TTI KIL IME ecrSLINTOUPLQURUSTT UTY u x y ZC HES CeCILL g JEDO DEE Save Exec Sa e Executing the Save Operation 25 Press the Save Exec soft key The data is saved to the directory indicated by Pathe At the same time the Save Exec soft key changes to the Abort soft key e Aborting the Save Operation 26 Press the Abort soft key to abort the save operation At the same time the Abort soft key changes to the Save Exec soft key Save Menu Save Menu K File List File List g g File Name File Name Save Exec Abort e Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box The procedure is the same as that given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 e Viewing the Properties The procedure is the same as that given in
151. 3 of reading 66 Hz lt f lt 500 Hz Add 1 of reading When the cut off frequency is 50 kHz f s 500 Hz Add 0 3 of reading 500 lt f s 5 kHz Add 1 of reading Temperature coefficient Same as the temperature coefficient for voltage and current One year accuracy Add reading error of accuracy at 6 months x 0 5 to the accuracy at 6 months Accuracy when the crest Accuracy obtained by doubling the measurement range error for the accuracy when the crest factor factor is set to 6 is set to 3 Accuracy of Other Parameters and Computation Accuracy e Accuracy of apparent power S Voltage accuracy current accuracy Accuracy of reactive power Q Accuracy of apparent power 7 1 0004 22 4 1 A2 x100 Of range Accuracy of power factor A 2 1 0002 cosp cos sin influence from the power factor when A 0 100 1 digit when voltage and current is at rated input of the measurement range e Accuracy of phase difference p p cos i 0002 sin influence from the power factor when A 0 100 deg 1 digit when voltage and current is at rated input of the measurement range For the accuracy of frequency fU and fl see Frequency Measurement in section 12 5 Functions For the accuracy of measured values WP WP WP q q and q and the integration time see Integration in section 12 5 Functions For the accuracies of voltage current and power during h
152. 3 13 Initializing the Settings Explanation The values specified by the panel keys can be reset to the factory default values This is useful when you wish to clear previous settings or start the settings from scratch For details on the initial settings see appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data e Settings That Cannot Be Initialized Date Time settings Menu and message language settings Setting of the time difference from GMT when the Ethernet option is installed Designation of file to be displayed Filter File utility operation Function Settings related to the GP IB communication serial communication option USB communication option and Ethernet communication option e Initializing at Power Up If the power switch is turned ON while holding down RESET the WT3000 powers up using initial settings In this case Settings That Cannot Be Initialized as indicated above excluding the date and time are also initialized A message indicating that settings have been initialized is shown on the screen IM 760301 01E 3 27 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 14 Entering Values and Character Strings Entering Values After selecting the setup parameter with the SET key and soft keys the value can be changed using the cursor keys Use the left and right cursor keys to move along the digits and the up and down cursor keys to set the value of that digit Integ Set id Mod
153. 3 Selecting the Trend Display Target Explanation Set the item to be shown on the trend display You can set 16 lines of trends trend 1 T1 through trend 16 T16 e Selecting the Measurement Function The measurement functions that can be selected are the items that are indicated in Types of Measurement Functions during Normal Measurement of section 2 2 User Defined Function and Corrected Power of section 2 5 Measurement Functions of Integration Motor Evaluation Function Motor Version Delta Computation Option and Harmonic Measurement Option t in section 2 6 1 For details see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E e Selecting the Element Wiring Unit e You can select the element wiring unit from the choices below The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements Element1 Element2 Element3 Element4 XA and B If there are no elements that are assigned to the selected wiring unit there is no numeric data Thus the trend is not displayed For example if elements are assigned to XA and no elements are assigned to B then the trend of the measurement function for B is not displayed e Changing the Harmonic Order Applicable Only on Models with the Harmonic Measurement Option The measured order can be set to normal measured value or from dc Oth order up to 100th order Note For the meanings of the measurement function symbols that are dis
154. 3P3W 3V3A three voltage three current e The input element assignment to wiring units ZA and B is determined from the wiring system pattern This allows functions of voltage current active power apparent power reactive power power factor phase difference and other parameters to be determined For the relationship between the wiring system and the determination of the x function see appendix 1 e The following table shows the relationship between the number of installed elements the selectable wiring system patterns and the assignment of input elements to wiring units XA or B Installed input elements 1 Wiring system Pattern 1 Installed input elements Wiring system Pattern 1 1P2W 1 1P2W 2 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 2 Installed input elements 1P3W or 3P3W A 1 2 3 Wiring system Pattern 1 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 2 1P3W or 3P3 W 3V3A A 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 3 1P2W 1P3W or 3P3W 3V3A XA Wiring system Pattern 4 Installed input elements Wiring system Pattern 1 3P4W 1P2W or 3P3W 3V3A XA 1P2W 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 2 1P3W or 3P3W ZA 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 3 Wiring system Pattern 4 1P2W 1P2W P3W or 3P3W B 1P2W 1P3W or 3P3W ZA Wiring system Pattern 5 1P3W or 3P3W ZA 1P3W or 3P3W Wiring system Pattern 6 Wiring system Pattern 7 No
155. 50 0000 W 75 000 W 150 000 W 300 000 W 500 000 W 1 00000 15 0000 W 30 0000 W 60 0000 W 100 000 W 150 000 W 300 000 W 600 000 W 1 00000 kW 2 00000 30 0000 W 60 0000 W 120 000 W 200 000 W 300 000 W 600 000 W 1 20000 kW 2 00000 kW 5 00000 75 000 W 150 000 W 300 000 W 500 000 W 0 75000 kW 1 50000 kW 3 00000 kW 5 00000 kW 10 0000 150 000 W 300 000 W 600 000 W 1 00000 kW 1 50000 kW 3 00000 kW 6 00000 kW 10 0000 kW 20 0000 300 000 W 600 000 W 1 20000 kW 2 00000 kW 3 00000 kW 6 00000 kW 12 0000 kW 20 0000 kW 30 0000 450 000 W 0 90000 kW 1 80000 kW 3 00000 kW 4 50000 kW 9 0000 kW 18 0000 kW 30 0000 kW Active Power Range of the Wiring Unit with 1P3W 3P3W or 3P3W 3V3A Wiring System Current Voltage Range V Range A 15 0000 30 0000 60 0000 100 000 150 000 300 000 600 000 1000 00 5 00000m 150 000 mW 300 000 mW 600 000 mW 1000 000 mW 1 50000 W 3 00000 W 6 00000 W 10 00000 W 10 0000m 300 000 mW 600 000 mW 1200 000 mW 2 00000 W 3 00000 W 6 00000 W 12 00000 W 20 0000 W 20 0000m 600 000 mW 1200 000 mW 2 40000 W 4 00000 W 6 00000 W 12 00000 W 24 0000 W 40 0000 W 50 0000m 1 50000 W 3 00000 W 6 00000 W 10 00000 W 15 0000 W 30 0000 W 60 0000 W 100 0000 W 100 000m 3 00000 W 6 00000 W 12 00000 W 20 0000 W 30 0000 W 60 0000 W 120 0000 W 200 000 W 200 000m 6 00000 W 12 00000 W 24 0000 W 40 0000 W 60 0000 W 120 0000 W 240 000 W 400 000 W 500 000m 15 0000 W 30 0000 W 60 0000 W 100 0000 W 150 000 W 300 000
156. 50000 W 9 00000 W 15 00000 W 22 5000 W 45 0000 W 90 0000 W 150 0000 W 250 000m 5 62500 W 11 25000W 22 5000 W 37 5000 W 56 2500 W 112 5000W 225 000 W 375 000 W 500 000m 11 25000 W 22 5000 W 45 0000 W 75 0000 W 112 5000 W 225 000 W 450 000 W 750 000 W 1 00000 22 5000 W 45 0000 W 90 0000 W 150 0000 W 225 000 W 450 000 W 900 000 W 1500 000 W 2 50000 56 2500 W 112 5000 W 225 000 W 375 000 W 562 500 W 1125 000 W 2 25000 kW 3 75000 kw 5 00000 112 5000 W 225 000 W 450 000 W 750 000 W 1125 000 W 2 25000 kW 4 50000 kW 7 50000 kw 10 0000 225 000 W 450 000 W 900 000 W 1500 000 W 2 25000 kW 4 50000 kW 9 00000 kW 15 00000 kw 15 0000 337 500 W 675 000 W 1350 000 W 2 25000 kW 3 37500 kW 6 75000 kW 13 50000 kW 22 5000 kW IM 760301 01E 4 11 4 4 Setting the Measurement Range When Using the External Current Sensor To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC located above the soft keys Cy CY CY In the procedural explanation below the MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor wrna Cas iteand Coe H mone AUTO MODE AUTO keys may be used This INPUT INFO phrase refers to the procedures for selecting i items and entering values A DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Orewore and character strings For see section 3 14 WP q a gt WPa Fur
157. 5721 18 07 SET 2004705721 18 07 All Set SET 2004 05 21 18 07 All Reset 2004705721 17 53 Property Property f Filter Filter item ALI Item A Dest Attribute Attribute 4 Dir Dest Dir 9 34 IM 760301 01E 9 8 Copying Files Selecting the Copy Destination 12 Press the Dest Dir soft key The copy execution menu and the copy destination File List dialog box appear co Function z Copy Set Reset all Set BE Property Filter Item Bil Attribute il Dest Dir i Selecting the Copy Destination Storage Medium or Directory 13 The procedure is the same as that given inin Selecting the Storage Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 9 3 Executing the Copy Operation 14 Press the Copy Exec soft key All the copy source files with asterisk marks are copied Copy 4 Function Copy Attribute pc_card 1 Set Reset con gt 2004705721 17 46 0003 SET 27309 2004 05 21 18 07 R 0002 SET 27309 2004705 21 18 07 RY File List All Set Path PC_Card pc2 LSpace 123312128 byte File Name Size Date Attribute Pc_card 1 gt 2004 05 21 17 46 4 Property Attribute Copy Exec IM 760301 01E 9 35 e eq Buipeo7 pue Burnes 9 8 Copying Files Explanat
158. 6 option 3 Only on models with the FL option 4 Only on models with the CC option IM 760301 01E 1 5 syed JO suonouny pue sowen e 1 2 Setup Menu Display Key and Execution Key DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT vie save l omens werg ruven ITEM FORM USER Eeen Gam Gro LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL 7 camo rere ave ue ese rey CURSOR Oo e ITEM Key See section 5 1 6 4 6 5 7 2 7 3 and 7 6 For details on bar graphs and vector displays option see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for selecting the displayed items according to the display type selected with the NUMERIC WAVE or OTHERS key on the previous page e SHIFT ITEM LOWER ITEM Key See section 5 1 6 4 6 5 7 2 7 3 and 7 6 For details on bar graphs and vector displays option see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for selecting the displayed item on the bottom half of the display when two types of displays are displayed simultaneously on the top and bottom halves of the display using the setup menu shown with the OTHERS key on the previous page The menu configuration is the same as when the bottom half of the display is shown by itself full screen e FORM Key See section 5 1 6 2 6 3 6 6 to 6 8 7 4 7 5 and 7 8 For details on bar graphs and vector di
159. 601 Invalid file name Check the file name 9 3 9 4 602 No USB device or no storage media inserted Check the USB device connection and the 9 1 603 existence of a storage medium in the device 604 Media failure Check the storage medium 605 File not found Check the file name and the storage medium 606 Media is protected Set the disk s medium s write protect switch to OFF 607 Media was removed while accessing Check the storage medium 608 File already exists 9 3 609 610 Contains invalid characters 9 3 611 Media full Delete unnecessary file s or use another disk 9 2 to 9 7 612 613 Cannot delete a directory if there are files Delete all the files in the directory to be deleted 9 7 in the directory 614 File is protected 9 6 615 Physical format error Reformat the medium If the same error occurs 9 2 the instrument is probably unable to execute a format on this medium 616 File system failure Check using another disk If the same message to 620 still appears maintenance service is required 621 File is damaged Check the file 622 File system failure Check using another disk If the same message to 641 still appears maintenance service is required 643 Media failure Check the medium to 653 655 File system failure Check using another disk If the same message to 664 still appears maintenance service is required 665 Cannot load this file format File was stored on other models or other vers
160. 91 D 22 046 7 _integ Reset Time fU1 4 1004 wz Update 27 Data update count e The data update count is displayed under Update in the lower left corner of the screen e Press HOLD to hold the data update count Press HOLD again to release e When the value exceeds 65535 it returns to 0 e The data update count is reset to 0 if the power is turned OFF or a setting such as the measurement range or filter is changed IM 760301 01E 5 5 JUSWIDINSeD JOMOd 5 1 Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the Displayed Items Measurement Functions of Normal Measurement e Symbol and Meaning of the Displayed Measurement Functions U voltage Urms Umn Udc Urmn current Irms Imn Idc Irmn P active power S apparent power Q reactive power A power factor phase difference fU fl or freqU freq voltage current frequency U pk U pk voltage maximum minimum l pk I pk current maximum minimum CfU Cfl voltage current crest factor Pc corrected power WP watt hour sum of positive and negative watt hours WP positive watt hour consumed WP negative watt hour returned to the power supply q ampere hour sum of positive and negative ampere hours q positive current hour consumed q negative current hour returned to the power supply WS volt ampere hour WQ var hour Time integration time m1 to n4 efficiency F1 to F20 user defined functions AF1 to F4 delta computation option
161. D Ground Keyboards That Can Be Used The following keyboards conforming to USB Human Interface Devices HID Class Ver1 1 can be used e When the USB keyboard language is English 104 keyboard e When the USB keyboard language is Japanese 109 keyboard Select either keyboard in section 3 19 Note e For USB keyboards that have been tested for compatibility contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Do not connect USB devices other than a USB keyboard or a USB memory to the USB PERIPHERAL connector e The WT3000 has two USB PERIPHERAL ports However USB devices whose maximum consumption current exceeds 100 mA cannot be connected simultaneously to the two ports Connection Procedure Connect the USB keyboard to the WT3000 directly using a USB cable as shown below You can conneci disconnect a USB cable at any time regardless of the power ON OFF state of the WT3000 supports hot plugging Connect the type A connector of the USB cable to the WT3000 connect the type B connector to the keyboard When the power switch is ON the keyboard is detected and enabled approximately six seconds after it is connected USB keyboard USB connection o0o000g000 o000 000000000000 0000 0 0 000 0000 o00020000 0000 p ooonpnnnqnogjooog 3 32 IM 760301 01E 3 15 Entering Character Strings on the USB Keyboard Note Connect the keyboard directly without goi
162. DE Same as left Select Soft key3 Same as left Select Soft key3 Same as left Execute U AUTO Same as left Select Soft key4 Same as left Select Soft key4 Same as left RANGE up Same as left Select Soft key5 Same as left Select Soft key5 Same as left RANGE down Same as left Select Soft key6 Same as left Select Soft key6 Same as left Execute MODE Same as left Select Soft key7 Same as left Select Soft key7 Same as left Execute AUTO Execute U I P Same as left Same as left Execute S Q i gt Same as left Execute WP q TIME Same as left Same as left Execute FU FI n Same as left Same as left Execute PRINT PRINT menu Execute IMAGE SAVE IMAGE SAVE menu Insert ON Same as left Execute USER USER SET menu Execute PAGE PREVIOUS Execute PAGE FIRST Execute PAGE PREVIOUS Execute PAGE FIRST End ELEMENT ALL Same as left Page Down Execute PAGE NEXT Execute PAGE LAST Execute PAGE NEXT Execute PAGE LAST gt Cursor to the right Same as left Cursor to the right Same as left Cursor to the right Same as left Cursor to the left Same as left Cursor to the left Same as left Cursor to the left Same as left Same as left Move soft keyboard Same as left Cursor in reverse Cursor down Same as left ra Al Cursor down aN Cursor up Ctrl Key Held Down
163. E a Ww MI ITEM amp ELEMENT EASURING SENSOR RATIO EKO OREMOTE uumeri WAVE one l ITEM FORM wie S Q A USER ELEMENT LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL e Displaying Trends 1 Press OTHERS to display the Others menu 2 Press any of the soft keys from Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend and Bar Trend to select the display mode measurement G5 option If wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode is enabled on models with the advanced computation G6 option switch to normal measurement ec Q 9 D gt r SHIFT Displayed only on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic mode For the procedure see section 3 16 Trend Vector Numeric Wave il Numeric Bar Numeric Trend vz i Press the Next 1 3 soft key gt Wave Bar Wave Trend al Bar Trend IEC Harmonics H Next a To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Aejdsig pualy E IM 760301 01E 7 1 7 1 Trend Display Explanation
164. E 2 27 uondiioseqg jeuonounes 2 7 Waveform Display Zooming Vertically on the Waveform For procedures see section 6 5 Each displayed waveform can be expanded or reduced vertically by the zoom factor in the range of 0 1 to 100 The waveform is zoomed around the zero input line 300 Vpk Input zero lines 300 Vpk When the zoom factor is doubled ase De Ra ce et a E lie as ree ee ae a EE EEEREN Vertical Position of the Waveform For procedures see section 6 5 The displayed position of the waveform can be moved vertically to the desired position such as when you wish to view the mutual relationship between the voltage and current waveforms or when the section of the waveform you wish to view goes out of the display frame 100 100 Move the position by 50 gt Move the position by 50 ONF Np 2 28 IM 760301 01E 2 7 Waveform Display Split Display of the Waveform and Assignment of Waveforms For procedures see section 6 6 The screen can be evenly divided and the waveforms can be assigned to the divided windows The screen can be divided into up to four windows This function is useful when there are many waveforms on the screen You
165. E Aejdsiq uuozaneM al 6 4 Setting the Trigger e Selecting the Trigger Mode 3 Press the Mode soft key to select Auto or Normal Wave Form K M Single S Time div Format Trigger Mode Normal Wave Mapping Selecting the Trigger Source 3 4 Press the Source soft key A trigger source selection box appears Press the cursor keys to select any of the elements wiring units starting with U1 Press SET to confirm the new trigger source Wave Form M Format Single Time div Ruto Normal Ext Clk Wave Mapping e Selecting the Trigger Slope 3 Press the Slope soft key to select f or Ft e Setting the Trigger Level 3 Press the cursor keys to set the trigger level Wave Form Wave Form Format Format Single Single S Time div S Timezdiv Sms Sms Trigger Trigger Mode Normal Slope A amp ft Wave Mapping Mode Normal Wave Mapping 6 8 IM 760301 01E 6 4 Setting the Trigger Explanation A For functional details see section 2 7 A trigger is a cue used to display the waveform on the screen The trigger is activated when the specified trigger condition is met At this point the waveform is ready to be displayed on the screen e Selecting the Trigger Mode Trigger mode specifies the conditions for updating the screen display Y
166. E1 0R3 PHI PHI E1 0R3 FU FU E1 FI FI E1 UPPK UPPK E1 UMPK UMPK E1 IPPK IPPK E1 IMPK IMPK E1 CFU CFU E1 CFI CFI E1 PC PC E1 ETA1 ETA1 None or space ETA4 ETA4 None or space WH WH E1 Yes WHP WHP E1 Yes WHM E1 AH E1 AHP E1 AHM E1 SH E1 QH E1 TI E1 Example E1 to E4 E5 or E6 ORT ORO OR1 e The following measurement functions can also be specified on models with the motor evaluation function motor version SPEED SPEED None or space TORQUE TORQUE None or space PM PM None or space SLIP SLIP None or space SYNC SYNC None or space xipueddy e The following measurement functions can also be specified on models with delta computation option DELTA1 DELTA1 None or space DELTA2 DELTA2 None or space DELTA3 DELTA3 None or space DELTA DELTA None or space IM 760301 01E App 45 Appendix 13 Parameters in the Operands of User Defined Functions e The measurement functions below can be computed on models with the advanced computation or harmonic measurement option Left Parameter in or Parameter in Right Parameter in Order Normal Value De Fundamental or Total Value Wave Measurement User Defined Function Wiring Element
167. EC76 1 1993 Integration Time Integration time WP Sum of positive and negative watt hours WP Sum of positive P consumed watt hour WP Sum of negative P watt hour returned to the power supply q Sum of positive and negative ampere hours q Sum of positive ampere hour q Sum of negative ampere hour WS Volt ampere hour WQ Var hour However the ampere hour is integrated by selecting Irms Imn Idc or Irmn through the current mode setting IM 760301 01E 12 3 suoleoioeds Ey 12 3 Measurement Functions Measurement Items Related to Normal Measurement Measurement Functions Functions Determined for Each Wiring Unit 2A and B For details on the determination and equations of functions see appendix 1 Item Symbol and Meaning Voltage V Urmsz true rms value Umnz rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value Udcz simple average Urmnx rectified mean value Current A Irmsz true rms value Imn rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value Idcz simple average Irmnz rectified mean value Active power W Pz Apparent power VA sz Reactive power var Q Power factor AS Phase difference oS Corrected Power W Pc Applicable standard IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 IEC76 1 1993 Integration Time Integration time WPz Sum of positive and negative watt hours WP z Sum of positive P consumed watt hour WP Sum of negativ
168. ERS l aia FU FI n smote CAL ITEM FORM l USER Femen INTEG sHrr as LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL y canna merten AVG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above WOOR FREG the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the Or cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE J IMAGE save STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 print msc rer MENU Turning ON OFF the Maximum Hold Function of the Numeric Data Display 1 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu 2 Press the User Defined Function soft key to display the User Defined Function menu 3 Press the Max Hold soft key to select ON or OFF JUBWISINSBD JOMOd User Defined User Defined F1 FS User Defined F6 F10 g Pc Formula User Defined F114 F15 q User Defined F16 F20 4 Sampling Frequency Auto Max Hold PEF oN IET N E 180 Lead Lag Sync Measure IM 760301 01E 5 17 5 5 Setting MAX hold Explanation Maximum Hold This function enables the maximum value of the numeric data to be held e The item to be held at the maximum
169. F 15 0 F 16 0 F 17 F 180 F 19 0 F20 Elem gjElem 1 Elem 2 Elem 3 Elem 4 Func GWU Quid OI Oitk Op s stk Ga atk A Ge Belk puo Pk OFrequ Ozio Rsk GXstk GRplk Oxplk Qluhdf kK O thdf kK Phdf k OlUthd G thd uthf jithf utif Gitit Obve Qu peak u peak I peak I peak Ec fu MP Wp w q qr i Time gus gua a2 a3 r AF2 AF3 AF4 eui uj ui uk Oui i1i ieui 1j tui ik speed Torque Syncsp slip Pm F1 F2 Or3 Or4 Ors Ore OF7 Ors Olr9 F10 F 11 0 F 1200F 13 0 F 14 0 F 15 0 F 16 0 F 1700F 18 C F 19 0 F20 Setting the Items One at a Time 7 Press the cursor keys to select the element or measurement function that you wish to specify 8 Press SET When the button to the left of the selected element or measurement function is highlighted the numeric data of the measurement function of the element will be stored When the highlighting of the button is cleared the numeric data of the measurement function of the element will not be stored 8 4 IM 760301 01E 8 2 Setting the Numeric Data and Waveform Display Data to Be Stored Selecting the Waveform Display Data to Be Stored This operation is valid if the stored item was set to Wave or Numeric Wave in step 5 6 Press the Wave Trace soft key to display the Wave Trace dialog box Selecting the Items at Once 7 Press the cursor keys to select All ON 8 Press SET The buttons to the left of all the signals are highlighted
170. For other handling precautions of the VT or CT follow the information that comes with the VT or CT that you are using IM 760301 01E 3 21 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 11 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the VT CT Note After wiring the wiring system must be selected See section 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System The thick lines on the wiring diagrams are the sections where the current flows Use appropriate wires that are suitable for the current Make sure you have the polarities correct when making the connections Otherwise the polarity of the measurement current will be reversed and correct measurements cannot be made Be especially careful when connecting the clamp type current sensor because it is easy to reverse the connection The scaling function can be used to transform the input signal to data that correspond to direct measurements For the setup procedure see section 4 5 Setting the Scaling Function When Using the VT CT Note that the frequency and phase characteristics of the VT or CT affect the measured data For safety reasons this section indicates wiring diagrams in which the common terminals of the secondary side of the VT or CT are grounded However the necessity of grounding and the grounding location ground near the VT or CT or ground near the power meter vary depending on the object being measured To measure the apparent power and power factor more accurate
171. HIU113 On WT3000s with firmware versions 3 01 or later user defined functions F1 to F19 can be set F1 F1 F2 F2 F3 F3 F4 F4 F5 F5 F6 F6 F7 F7 F8 F8 F9 F9 F10 F10 F11 F11 F12 F12 F13 F13 F14 F14 F15 F15 F16 F16 F17 F17 F18 F18 F19 F19 5 14 IM 760301 01E 5 4 Setting the User Defined Function Setting the Operand Parameters There are two types of operands with parameters Setting Operands with Two Parameters Set a symbol representing the element in the left parameter and the order in the right parameter For example set the parameters as in E1 OR2 e Symbols representing elements E1 to E4 Elements 1 to 4 E5 and E6 XA and B Symbols representing orders ORT Normal measured value or total value ORO po OR1 Fundamental wave OR2 to OR100 Harmonics 1 A normal value or total value requires the G6 option is substituted depending on the measurement mode 2 Requires the G5 or G6 option Setting Operands with a Parameter Set a symbol representing the element You do not have to set the order For example set the parameter as in E1 For the symbols that can be set in the parameters of each operand see appendix 13 e Values Substituted in Operands Urms Umn Udc or Urmn is substituted into U according to the specified voltage mode Irms Imn Idc or Irmn is substituted into I according to the specified current
172. IFF BMP PNG or JPEG in step 3 4 Press the cursor keys to select Color Reverse white background Gray grayscale or OFF e Turning ON OFF the Data Compression Selectable only when the data format is set to BMP in step 3 and the color mode is set to Color Reverse or Gray in step 4 5 Press the Compression Color soft key to select ON or OFF Image Save K Format TIFF QS ele Comment File List 4 File Name Image Save JPEG File Name For BMP Image Save M Format BHP color Color Compression FF ON Y Ue 4 File List 4 File Nate 9 20 IM 760301 01E 9 4 Saving the Screen Image Data Setting Comments 6 Press the Comment soft key A keyboard appears 7 Use the keyboard to enter the comment For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings M Format Image Save TIFF AHE ECEE ee Tela le c DIET ELIN LOTE IIRI MEDAD A E j Comment File List i File Name CAPS EDEDED e Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory 8 Press the File List soft key to display the File List dialog box 9 The procedure is the same as that given inin Selecting the Storage Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 9 3 10 Press ESC to close the File List dialog box Ima
173. IM760301 51E section 3 10 Current input terminal Used to connect current measurement cables See sections 3 8 3 9 and 3 11 Torque signal input connector motor version Receives signals from torque meters when evaluating motors See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Revolution signal input connector motor version Receives signals from revolution sensors when evaluating motors See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E External start signal output connector Used when performing master slave synchronized measurement See section 10 8 Power connector See section 3 3 Power fuse See section 11 5 RGB video signal VGA output connector option Outputs image signals See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E D A output connector option Outputs numeric data that has been converted to analog DC voltage See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E IM 760301 01E syed JO suonouny pue sowey gt Top Panel 1 1 Front Panel Rear Panel and Top Panel Outlet holes See section 3 2 Handle 12938025 2020 02 209090909090909 289030908020808 0802080908020209 8 808080808 8 80899 X 88093 960 0889 f 8 8 930 080393 o 0889 i 1 120849 D0202 8080 0808 P l i i i i l o o 020 880 o 3680 0080s heed o 80800980 o d o d 880 o 880 o 090 08 880 8 88280800 0090808 8828080 0088808 808
174. If the asterisk to the left of the file name disappears the file will not be deleted Proceed to step 12 Path PC_CardNPC1 Space 123836416 byte File Name Size Date Attribute File List Delete 4 Function Delete ry pc_card J Set Reset con gt 2004705721 17 46 0001 27309 2004705721 17 53 R 0000 27309 200470521 17 50 R 7 AIT Set g Proper ty Filter Item AJ Attribute Delete Exec HE Selecting the Files to Be Deleted at Once 9 10 11 Delete Delete M Function File List 4 Function path PC_Card pct Delete Space 123797504 byte Delete File Name Size Date Attribute Press the cursor keys to select a file directory or storage medium Press the All Set soft key Asterisks appear to the left of the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory the selected directory and all the files in the directory or all the directories and files in the selected storage medium The corresponding items will be deleted At the same time the All Set key changes to the All Reset soft key Press the All Reset soft key Asterisks to the left of the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory the selected directory and all the files in the directory or all the directories and files in the selected storage medium disappear The corre
175. In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Aejdsig pu L ss IM 760301 01E 7 2 Selecting the Trend Data to Be Displayed e Turning ON OFF the Trend Display Collectively Displaying the Trends Collectively 3 Press the cursor keys to select All ON 4 Press SET All the buttons to the left of the trend symbols are highlighted and all the trend are displayed e Hiding the Trends Collectively 3 Press the cursor keys to select All OFF 4 Press SET The highlighting of all the buttons to the left of the trend symbols is cleared and the trends are no longer displayed e Turning ON OFF the Trend One at a Time 3 Press the cursor keys to select the trend symbol you wish to set 4 Press SET The button to the left of the selected trend symbol is highlighted and the corresponding trend is displayed If the highlighting of the button is cleared the trend is no longer displayed Explanation You can turn ON OFF the trend display from trend 1 T1 through trend 16 T16 You can assign measurement functions for which the trend is to be displayed to trend T1 to trend T16 by selecting the trend display target see section 7 3 7 4 IM 760301 01E 7 3 Procedure Selecting the Trend Display Target S
176. Items Wave Display V Zoom amp Position Element 3 0 00 7 S1 Zoom Element 4 x1 CI Position 0 00 0 00 Frequency Meas Item 6 12 IM 760301 01E 6 5 Zooming Vertically and Moving the Vertical Position Zooming in on the Voltage Waveform 5 Press the U V Zoom soft key 6 Press the cursor keys to set the zoom rate Moving the Voltage Waveform Position 5 Press the U Position soft key 6 Ifthe crest factor is set to 3 or 6 press the cursor keys to set the position in terms of a percentage with the value equal to measurement range x 3 or measurement range x 6 respectively taken to be 100 Zooming in on the Current Waveform 5 Press the I V Zoom soft key 6 Press the cursor keys to set the zoom rate Moving the Current Waveform Position 5 Press the I Position soft key 6 Ifthe crest factor is set to 3 or 6 press the cursor keys to set the position in terms of a percentage with the value equal to measurement range x 3 or measurement range x 6 respectively taken to be 100 V Zoom amp Pos Element Element 1 JW V Zoom U Position 0 00 IM 760301 01E Aejdsiq uuozaneM al 6 5 Zooming Vertically and Moving the Vertical Position Explanation Selecting the Target Element to Be Specified Only the installed elements are displayed The Element menu is displayed according to the element configuration of t
177. L Advanced Test Equipment Rentals e lished 1981 www atecorp com 800 404 ATEC 2832 WT300O Precision Power Analyzer USER S MANUAL YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 760301 01E th Edition Product Registration Thank you for purchasing YOKOGAWA products YOKOGAWA provides registered users with a variety of information and services Please allow us to serve you best by completing the product registration form accessible from our homepage http www yokogawa com tm PIM 103 01E Note Trademarks Revisions 5th Edition March 2007 YK Thank you for purchasing the WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer The WT3000 is an instrument capable of measuring parameters such as voltage current and power with high precision This user s manual contains useful information about the instrument s functions and operating procedures and lists the handling precautions of the WT3000 To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before beginning operation After reading the manual keep it in a convenient location for quick reference whenever a question arises during operation Three manuals including this one are provided as manuals for the WT3000 Please read all of them Manual Title Manual No Description WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer IM 760301 01E This manual Explains all functions and User s Manual procedures of the WT3000 excluding Vol 1 3 the expansion functions and communication
178. LEMENT USER SET O AL SINGLE CAL l LOCAL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press FILE to display the File menu 2 Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List dialog box appear 3 Press the Function soft key to display the Function menu 4 Press the Delete soft key to display the Delete menu M File Item Setup ae Utility Sz iF tion Delete 7 Set Reset all Set Filter iter all ia f Property D an Copy Rename MakeDir Format Attribute Delete Exec dil Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory 5 The procedure is the same as that given inin Selecting the Storage Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 9 3 IM 760301 01E 9 27 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes eo 9 6 Specifying the File to Be Displayed Displaying File Properties and Selecting File Attributes e Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box 6 Press the Filter soft key to select Item or All If you select Item the list
179. Measurement IEC Harmonic Measurement Waveform Computation FFT Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker Measurement and Cycle by Cycle Measurement Modes Enabling Normal Measurement or Wide Bandwidth Harmonic Measurement Mode e Numeric Display 1 Press NUMERIC to display numeric values e Waveform Display 1 Press WAVE The waveform is displayed in normal measurement mode The waveform is not displayed in wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode e Trend Bar Graph Vector and Split Displays 1 Press OTHERS to display the Others menu 2 Press a soft key to select the display mode The trend is not displayed in wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode e Enabling IEC Harmonic Measurement Waveform Computation FFT Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker Measurement or Cycle by Cycle Measurement Mode 1 Press OTHERS to display the Others menu 2 Press a soft key to select the measurement mode 3 34 IM 760301 01E 3 16 Switching the Measurement Mode and Display Trend Vector Numeric Wave Numeric Bar Numeric Trend EEL Explanation Next Vv Py Bar graph vie mar Waveform computation Trend pete Split display MESTIS Split display Vector Bar a FET FFT invents IEC harmonic EE Split display Flicker Voltage fluctuation Wave Split display and flicker Em al Cycle by cycle D Next ig Press the Next1 3 Press th
180. Mode Btore Recall Memory File Store Setting Memory to File Init Memory Alert Msi OFF FT Mode Btore Recall Store to Memory File ia eStore Setting Memory to File Init Memory Alert Ms OFF Fe 8 14 IM 760301 01E 8 5 Saving the Stored Data When Saving Data That Has Already Been Stored 4 Press the Memory to File soft key to display the Memory to File dialog box Selecting the Data Type for Saving the Data 5 Press the Data Type soft key to select ASCII or Float e Selecting the Storage Medium 6 Press the File List soft key to display the File List dialog box 7 Press the cursor keys to select the storage medium indicated by 8 Press SET to confirm the storage medium e Selecting the Save Destination Directory Perform this operation when directories are present on the medium 9 Press the cursor keys to select the save destination directory indicated by lt gt 10 Press SET to confirm the directory The selected storage medium directory is displayed in Path located above and to the left of the File List dialog box e Select lt gt and press SET to return to a higher level directory Store Set emory to File File List LPath PC_Card Power File List Space 127776768 byte File Name Size Date Attribute a pc_card 1 File Name NetWork 1 Cou S
181. Near strong magnetic field sources e Near high voltage equipment or power lines e Where the level of mechanical vibration is high e Onan unstable surface Note For the most accurate measurements use the instrument in the following environment Ambient temperature 23 5 C Ambient humidity 30 to 75 RH no condensation When using the instrument in a place where the ambient temperature is 5 to 18 C or 28 to 40 C add the temperature coefficient to the accuracy as specified in chapter 12 When installing the instrument in a place where the ambient humidity is 30 or below take measures to prevent static electricity such as using an anti static mat Condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where the ambient temperature is higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In this case let the instrument adjust to the new environment for at least one hour before using the instrument When storing the instrument avoid the following places e Where the relative humidity is 80 Where the level of mechanical vibration is or more high e In direct sunlight Where corrosive or explosive gas is present e Where the temperature is 60 C e Where an excessive amount of soot dust or higher salt and iron are present e Near a high humidity or heat source Where water oil or chemicals may splash It is recommended that the instrument be stored in an environment where the temperature is between 5 and
182. R2 to ORT OR100 OR1 Voltage UMAX UMAX E1 Yes Yes Rms voltage URMSMAX URMSMAX E1 Yes No Voltage mean UMEANMAX UMEANMAX E1 Yes No Current IMAX IMAX E1 Yes Active power PMAX PMAX E1 Yes Apparent power SMAX SMAX E1 Yes Reactive power QMAX QMAX E1 Yes Positive peak voltage UPPEAKMAX UPPEAKMAX E1 Yes Negative peak voltage UMPEAKMAX UMPEAKMAX E1 Yes Positive peak current IPPEAKMAX IPPEAKMAX E1 Yes Negative peak current IMPEAKMAX IMPEAKMAX E1 Yes 1 If ORT is specified for the parameter a normal value or total value requires G6 is substituted depending on the measurement mode 2 Requires G5 or G6 3 The parentheses cannot be omitted IM 760301 01E App 47 xipueddy Symbols Page E SE EENET E T A de doneteactees sence ET 5 6 Eoo nol e E E E E 5 20 Kea A AA A A N E 5 6 functions of normal measurement iste I POSHIOM iirinn basra enaar saakaan iania 6 13 MV ZOOM en a A E AA 6 13 U POSION isinasara ienen a EAEE ERE EESE 6 13 UFV ZOOM inea E E S 6 13 180 Lead Lag cies cfc ecise cedseen tena nedud 5 28 SEO AOQICOS ET 5 28 3P3W 3V3A 2A Compensation cceceeeeereeteeeeees 5 23 Woo hi beeen eee peer errr re ET 3 10 A Page Abort AC power accessories opt
183. SCII format The file can be used on your PC for analysis The file cannot be loaded into the WT3000 e Float Saved in 32 bit floating format The file cannot be loaded into the WT3000 Note The waveform display data that is saved on the WT3000 is not the sampled data acquired at the sample rate approximately 200 kS s of the WT3000 The waveform display data is waveform sampling data that has been P P compressed see the note in section 2 7 to a set of 1002 data points for displaying the waveform on the screen Waveform sampling data can be saved in waveform computation mode or FFT mode on models with the advanced computation G6 option IM 760301 01E 9 13 ejyeq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes el 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data Numeric Data Waveform Sampling Data e Extension and Data Size e During normal measurement Data Type Extension Data Size Bytes Binary WVF Approx 8K 4 x 1002 x Tw where Tw is the number of displayed waveforms HDR Approx 1 K condition when there is one displayed waveform ASCII CSV Approx 15 K condition when there is one displayed waveform Float FLD 4 x 1002 e Selecting the Waveform e When the data type is set to Binary or ASCII the waveform that is displayed on the screen is saved e When the data type is Float the waveform of the input signal selected from the following is saved e Only the input signals of the installed elements are applicable fo
184. SHIFT STORE STORE SET to display the Store Set menu Press the Init Memory Alert Msg soft key to select ON or OFF Store Set Mode Btore Recall Store to File Memory File M Store Setting D Memory to File etting emory o File t Memory ert 4 Init Memory Alert Ms OFF IM 760301 01E eea paos y Burnes pue eeg Buljjesey pue Bunos e 8 3 Setting the Store Count Store Interval Store Reservation Time and Alert Indication of Internal Memory Initialization Explanation To store data parameters such as the store mode the store count the store interval and the store reservation time must be specified before executing the operation This section explains the store count the store interval and the store reservation time For the procedure on how to set the store mode see section 8 1 for the procedure on how to start the storage operation see section 8 4 e Setting the Store Count e Set the value in the range of 1 to 999999 e lf the data being stored exceeds the internal memory size approx 30 MB of the store destination the storage operation stops before reaching the specified store count e Checking the Maximum Store Count and Optimizing the Store Count From the numeric data and waveform display data that are to be stored as specified in section 8 2 the maximum count that can be stored in the internal memory is calculated and displayed If you change the maxim
185. Same as left IMAGE SAVE menu sje l o jajo jojo LINE FILTER menu FREQ FILTER menu MEASURE menu CURSOR Execute NUMERIC Same as left nol OTHERS menu Execute PRINT Same as left PRINT menu 2 FORM menu LOWER FORM menu Execute RESET Same as left ja jo o 3 3 SHIFT ON SHIFT OFF ITEM menu LOWER ITEM menu UPDATE RATE menu Same as left WIRING menu Execute INPUT INFO Execute WAVE Same as left Execute EXT SENSOR SENSOR RATIO menu SYNC SOURCE menu Execute NULL Execute SINGLE Execute CAL InN lt lxls lt c alolIlo vjojzlzle x e ojojo jaj ajwj N N lt x Z lt c le lo ojojo Nj aojajaj v N N lt x Z lt c jejo Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left MISC Same as left Execute HELP jv ja j Caps Lock Caps Lock Same as left IM 760301 01E Appendix 9 Key Assignments of the USB Keyboard Ctrl Key Held Down on the USB Keyboard U RANGE up Shift ON on the WT3000 Same as left Select Soft key1 Soft Keyboard Displayed on the WT3000 Shift on the USB Keyboard Same as left Shift ON on the WT3000 Select Soft key1 Same as left U RANGE down Execute U MODE Same as left Same
186. T O AL To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Date Time soft key to display the Date Time dialog box e Turning ON OFF the Date Time Display 3 Press the cursor keys to select Display 4 Press SET to select ON or OFF e Setting the Date or Time Manually If the Ethernet interface option is installed proceed to step 5 If it is not proceed to step 7 5 Press the cursor keys to select Type 6 Press SET to set Type to Manual 7 Press the cursor keys to select the Date year month and day or Time hour minute second box 8 Press SET to display the entry box 9 Press the cursor keys to set the year month date hour minute or second that you selected in step 5 10 Press SET or ESC to close the box 11 Repeat steps 5 to 8 to set the entire year month date hour minute and second 12 Press the cursor keys to select Set 13 Press SET If ON was selected in step 4 the new date and time are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen If the procedure is aborted without pressing SET the new settings are not reflected on the display Misc System Overview If
187. The explanation is the same as that given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory in section 9 3 e Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box The explanation is the same as that given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 e Properties The explanation is the same as that given in Properties in section 9 6 Note An error occurs if a key other than the Abort key is pressed while saving or loading a file The number of directories and files that can be displayed in the file list is 2500 If the number of directories and files in a directory exceeds 2500 the file list randomly displays 2500 of the directories and files If you change the extension of the setup parameter file such as on a PC the file can no longer be loaded into WT3000 e Files that do not have an archive attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not remove the archive attribute of the files saved by the WT3000 using your PC Up to 41 characters can be displayed in the path If the path exceeds 41 characters is displayed at the end of the character string e File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COM9 and LPT1 to LPT9 Ifthe setup parameters that are saved to a file are loaded the key settings are changed to the l
188. Turning ON OFF the Integration Auto Calibration Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC OO located above the soft DO Ca e ELEMENT In the procedural Att v CV explanation below the MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor WIRING RMS MEAN _0 ue MODE en G MODE keys may be used This mA phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Orewore and character strings For Locau details on the procedures see section 3 14 T Furi sr 3 l TEM FORM USER cement i nre suet LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL A AA e c o e x H lt o 1 Press INTEG to display the Integ menu 2 Press the Integ Set soft key to display the Integ Set menu Turning ON OFF the Integration Auto Calibration 3 Press the Auto Cal soft key to select ON or OFF Inte Integ Set Mode Normal g Start Timer Setting Stop Reset EDE Auto Cal D A Output Rated Time Integ Set s Explanation Turning ON OFF Integration Auto Calibration Zero level compensation is normally performed when the measurement range or line filter is changed However zero level compensation can be automatically performed during integration e
189. USER SET O ALL t A A To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above MOTOR FREQ the soft keys SET FILTER hamser measure prne source In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the CURSOR O NULL cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and Fite fimacesave STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 MENU i Press FILE to display the File menu 4 File item Setup Load Save 4 Utility 9 24 IM 760301 01E 9 5 Loading Setup Parameters 2 Press the Load soft key The Load Menu and the File List dialog box appears e Selecting the Load Source Storage Medium 3 Press the cursor keys to select the load source storage medium indicated by 4 Press SET to confirm the storage medium e Selecting the Load Source Directory Perform this operation when directories are present on the medium 5 Press the cursor keys to select the load source directory indicated by lt gt 6 Press SET to confirm the directory The selected storage medium directory is displayed in Path located above and to the left of the File List dialog box e Select lt gt and press SET to return to a higher level directory File M File Item Load Menu Setup
190. User Defined Functions For procedures see section 5 4 Equations can be created defined by combining the measurement function symbols and operators The numeric data corresponding to the equation can then be determined The combination of a measurement function and element number U1 U E1 ORT for example constitutes an operand 20 equations F1 through F20 can be defined e Operator There are 11 operators ABS absolute value SQR square SQRT square root LOG logarithm LOG10 common logarithm EXP exponent and NEG negation e Number of Operands There can be up to 16 operands in one equation MAX Hold For procedures see section 5 5 Holds the maximum value of the numeric data The measurement function of which the maximum value is to be held is specified using the user defined function Setting the Average Active Power For procedures see section 5 6 The average active power can be computed on devices on which the power fluctuates such as an intermittent control device The computing equation for average active power is specified using the user defined function Setting the Computing Equation for Efficiency For procedures see section 5 7 By setting equations for n1 to n4 the input output efficiency of a device can be measured For example if the input power to a device is PEA and the output power is PEB the power conversion efficiency of the device can be computed by setting the equatio
191. Waveform label Lower limit Ci 24 ies sume Time at the right end of the screen Time at the left end of the screen Cursor Measurement For procedures see sections 6 9 and 7 8 The value at the crossing point of the waveform and cursor can be measured and displayed It can be used to measure the voltage and current of various sections of the waveform and the data on the horizontal axis X axis Cursor measurements are performed on the data that is displayed on the screen Cursors are the and x marks that are displayed on the screen The vertical value and the X axis value from the left end of the screen for each cursor can be measured In addition the difference in the vertical values and in the X axis values between the cursors can be measured Cursor Cursor x xe 7000 0us Measured value Xx 27 000ms ax 20 000ms 144x 50 000 Hz 2 30 IM 760301 01E 2 8 Trend Bar Graph and Vector Displays Trend display Trends of each measurement function bar graphs of harmonics of each order and vectors of the fundamental signal of each element when using the harmonic measurement option can be displayed The trends of all measurement functions that are measured during normal measurement and harmonic measurement are displayed Trend of voltage UI Trend of the frequency of voltage U1 00 00 00 lt lt 1002 tee gt gt 0 05 00 e Trend D
192. Within 20 of FS when FS 5 V Cable condition Same as the cable condition for emission above 1 Applies to products with CE marks For all other products contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 2 The Overvoltage Category is a value used to define the transient overvoltage condition and includes the impulse withs tand voltage regulation CAT II applies to electrical equipment that is powered through a fixed installation such as a wall outlet wired to a distribution board 3 Measurement Category II CAT II applies to electrical equipment that is powered through a fixed installation such as a wall outlet wired to a distribution board and measurement performed on such wiring 4 Pollution Degree applies to the degree of adhesion of a solid liquid or gas which deteriorates withstand voltage or surface resistivity Pollution Degree 1 applies to closed atmospheres with no or only dry non conductive pollution Pollution Degree 2 applies to normal indoor atmospheres with only non conductive pollution 5 Use cables of length 3 m or less 6 Annex A specifications Immunity test requirement for equipment used in industrial environment IM 760301 01E 12 17 suoleoyioeds Ey 12 13 External Dimensions TE RIE HE
193. a of 4 mm e Connecting cables may cause radio interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference 3 8 IM 760301 01E 3 5 Wiring Precautions Note e After wiring the wiring system must be selected See section 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System When measuring large currents voltages or currents that contain high frequency components take special care in dealing with mutual interference and noise when wiring Keep the measurement cables as short as possible to minimize the loss between the circuit under measurement and the instrument e The thick lines on the wiring diagrams shown in sections 3 9 to 3 11 are the sections where the current flows Use appropriate wires that are suitable for the current In order to make accurate measurements of the voltage of the circuit under measurement connect the cable to the circuit as closely as possible e In order to make correct measurements separate the measurement cables as far away from the earth ground wires and the instrument s case as possible to minimize the static capacitance to earth ground To measure the apparent power and power factor more accurately on an unbalanced three phase circuit it is recommended that a three voltage three current system using three phase three wire 3P3W 3V3A be used to make the measurement e If you supply current exceeding approximately 2 8 Arms to the 2 A input element the protection circuit activates a
194. a update rate 50 ms 100 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s 10 s and 20 s e Wide Bandwidth Harmonic Measurement Mode and IEC Harmonic Measurement Mode The data update rate setting is invalid The data update rate is determined automatically by the fundamental frequency of the PLL source and the number of periods of the PLL source used for the analysis e Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker Measurement Mode The data update rate is fixed to 2 s e Cycle by Cycle Measurement Mode The data update rate setting is invalid The data update rate is automatically determined by the fundamental frequency and the number of measurement cycles of the synchronization source Note In some cases the display update rate of the numeric data and waveform data that are displayed on the screen may take longer than the data update rate e The lower frequency limit of the AC signal that can be measured varies depending on the data update rate The measured value may not be stable if an AC signal of a frequency lower than the lower limit of measurement frequency see section 12 4 is measured The WT3000 automatically switches the method of computing the measured values according to the data update rate For details see appendix 7 The data update rate of the FFT is determined automatically from the number of FFT points For details see chapter 11 in the Extension Function User s Manual IM760301 51E The display update interval in waveform computatio
195. ace save STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 print msc Herr MENU e Selecting Master or Slave Mode 1 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu 2 Press the Syne Measure soft key to select Master or Slave Only a single master and a single slave can be specified User Defined Function M S Q Formula Type 1 Pe Formula M Sampling Frequency Auto Phase 1 doLa pen EN Sync Measure Master Slave S i W e Performing Synchronized Measurements Connect the external start signal input output connectors between the master and slave instruments using BNC cables sold separately e The slave instrument starts its measurement at approximately the same time as the start of the measurement on the master instrument The slave instrument stops its measurement at approximately the same time as the stop of the measurement on the master instrument 10 14 IM 760301 01E 10 9 Master Slave Synchronization Measurement Explanation With the master instrument outputting measurement start signal and the slave instrument receiving the signal synchronized measurement between two instruments is achieved External Start Signal Input Output Connector Connect the external start signal input output connectors on the rear panel between the master and slave instruments using BNC cables sold separately MEAS START AN
196. acter strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 PRINT _misc_ HELP MENU 1 Press SCALING to display the Scaling menu Turning ON OFF the Scaling Function 2 Press the Scaling soft key to select ON or OFF The SCALING key illuminates when ON is selected Setting the VT Ratio 3 Press the Scaling Item soft key to select VT Selecting the Target Element 4 Press one of the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element to select the target element 5 Press the cursor keys to set the VT ratio 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set the VT ratio for all elements a Element 2 1 0009 Element 3 1 0009 Element 4 1 0000 IM 760301 01E 4 15 SUOI IPUOD puswNSeaN gt 4 5 Setting the Scaling Function When Using VT CT e Setting the CT Ratio 3 Press the Scaling Item soft key to select CT e Selecting the Target Element 4 Press one of the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element to select the target element Press the cursor keys to set the CT ratio Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set the CT ratio for all elements aan Scalini Scaling E f Scaling Item vT SF Element 2 1 0000 Element 3 1 0000 Element 4 1 0000 e Setting the Power Coefficient 3 Press the Scaling Item soft key to select SF Scaling Factor e Selecting the Target E
197. age the instrument 4 20 IM 760301 01E 4 7 Setting the Measurement Period e Measurement Period When the data update rate is 50 ms 100 ms 5s 10 s or 20s You must set the measurement period The measurement period is set between the first point where the synchronization source crosses the level zero point center of the amplitude on the rising slope or falling slope within the data update period and the last point where the synchronization source crosses the level zero point center of the amplitude on the rising slope or falling slope within the update period If there is one or no zero crossing in the data update interval the measurement period is set equal to the data update interval For details see appendix 6 Data update interval Data update interval Measurement period Measurement period Synchronization 5 source AAA Rising edge zero crossing Falling edge zero crossing When the data update rate is 250 ms 500 ms 1s or2s You do not have to set the measurement period The measurement period is equal to the data update interval Note The measurement period for the numeric data of the maximum value Peak for voltage and current is the entire span within the data update period regardless of the settings above Therefore the measurement period for the measurement functions U pk U pk pk I pk CfU Cfl FfU and Ffl that are determined from the maximum value
198. al The measured values are determined by computing the average of all the sampled data in the data update interval through digital filtering This computing method is called Exponential Average for Measuring Period EAMP In this method the measurement period is not affected by the input signal period or the synchronization source setting Therefore the input signal period does not have to be detected In addition the measurement period always matches between all input elements It is recommended that this method be used when it is difficult to match the measurement period between the input and output signals such as in the aforementioned example of 3 Power Transformer with Single Phase AC Input and Three Phase AC Output In principle this method is superior in obtaining highly stable measured values because factors such as errors in period detection do not exist Exponential Average for Measuring Period yn Yn 1 L1 Xn n sampled data in the measurement period Yn Output value of the n exponential average in the measurement period Yn 1 Output value of the n 1 exponential average in the measurement period A Constant This equation is stacked several stages to derive the measured value The last value in the measurement period Yn is displayed as the measured value Data Update Rate and Averaging Method Setting the Measurement Period Computing Data update rate method Required Not required Re
199. al IM760301 51E For the procedure of changing the displayed items of the measurement functions of harmonic measurement see chapter 7 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E For details on the wiring units expressed as XA and ZB see section 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System If you supply current exceeding approximately 2 8 Arms to the 2 A input element the protection circuit activates The measured value may become 0 A but the input peak over range indicator at the top section of the screen illuminates in red 5 8 IM 760301 01E 5 2 Selecting the Voltage Current Mode RMS MEAN DC or RMEAN Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC OO located above the soft keys ELEMENT ALL In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This CV phrase refers to the ci MEASURING aN WIRING RMS MEAN DC H RMEANH d MODE AUTO INPUT INFO procedures for selecting items and entering values a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Orewoe and character strings For lt see section 3 14 lt gt weg Furi sr CAL Go ITEM FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG SHIFT y LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL Selecting the Target Element 1 Press ELEMENT to select the target element The corresponding element indicator above the key illuminates BOO
200. alled elements For the specifications of the Ext Clk external clock see section 12 7 For example if the synchronization source for input element 1 is set to 11 an integer multiple of the period of 11 becomes the measurement period By averaging the sampled data in this measurement period the WT3000 computes the measured values for input element 1 such as U1 11 and P1 e Deciding on Which Input Voltage or Current to Use for the Synchronization Source Select an input signal with stable input level and frequency with little distortion for the synchronization source Correct measured values can be obtained only if the period of the synchronization source signal is detected accurately To see whether the frequency of the synchronization source signal is being measured correctly display the frequency of the selected input signal on the WT3000 according to section 5 3 Selecting the Frequency Measurement Source The input signal whose measurement result is accurate and more stable is suitable for the synchronization source For example if a switching power supply is being measured and the distortion of voltage waveforms is smaller than current waveforms set the synchronization source to the voltage signal Voltage waveform Synchronization source setting Voltage signal Current waveform App 26 IM 760301 01E Appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period As another example if an inverter is being measured and the di
201. also isolated from the case The voltage signal that is applied to the voltage input terminal U is normalized using the voltage divider of the voltage input circuit and an operational amplifier OP AMP It is then input to a voltage A D converter The current input circuit is equipped with two types of input terminals a current input terminal I and a current sensor input connector EXT Either one can be used at any given time The voltage signal from the current sensor that is received at the current sensor input connector is normalized using the voltage divider and an operational amplifier OP AMP It is then input to a current A D converter The current signal that is applied to the current input terminal is converted to a voltage Then it is input to the current A D converter in the same fashion as the voltage signal from the current sensor The voltage signal that is input to the voltage A D converter or current A D converter is converted to digital values at an interval of approximately 5 u s The digital values are isolated by the pulse transformer and passed to the DSP In the DSP the measured values are derived based on the digital values The measured values are then transmitted to the CPU Various computed values are determined from the measured values These measured values and computed values are displayed as measurement functions of normal measurement output through a D A converter or output through communications The
202. ames and comments 1 Entering the File Name and Comment and Temporarily Storing Them Press the A and W cursor keys to select the desired character You can move the cursor quickly by holding down A or W to make the cursor skip You can also press the A and soft keys to move the cursor vertically Press SET to enter characters in the entry box If there are characters already in the entry box use the 4 and p cursor keys to select the entry position Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter all the characters After entering all the characters select ENT on the keyboard and press SET The string is confirmed and the keyboard disappears you can also press the ENT key to achieve the same result At the same time the confirmed string is temporarily stored in the internal memory Up to 8 sets of strings can be stored After eight strings have been stored a new string overwrites the oldest string Recalling the Temporarily Stored String Press the soft key Each time the soft key is pressed the temporarily stored strings are displayed in the entry box of the keyboard in order When the eight strings that are temporarily stored are displayed the most recent string is displayed again If there are characters already in the entry box they are overwritten with the recalled string Correct the recalled equation according to steps 1 to 4 in Entering the File Name and Comment and Temporarily Storing Them described above and enter it The string
203. ampling data to 2 points Extracts the maximum and minimum values and draws them in each raster 1s Turn display interpolation ON gt Vertical axis Time axis 501 rasters 500 Number of data points 1 002 501 pairs IM 760301 01E 2 25 uondioseqg jeuonoune4 2 7 Waveform Display Aliasing When the sampling rate is comparatively low with respect to the input signal frequency the harmonics contained in the signal are lost In this case some of the harmonics will appear at low frequencies due to the effects described by the Nyquist sampling theorem This phenomenon is called aliasing Aliasing signal Input signal Sampling point Retrieval of waveform display data The WT3000 retrieves waveform display data to the memory at a sampling rate of approximately 200 kS s The frequency that allows displaying of waveforms that are close to the input signal is up to approximately 10 kHz 2 26 IM 760301 01E 2 7 Waveform Display Trigger For procedures see section 6 4 A trigger is a cue used to display the waveform on the screen The trigger is activated when the specified trigger condition is met At this point the waveform is ready to be displayed on the screen Trigger Mode Trigger mode specifies the conditions for updating the screen display e Auto Mode If a trigger occurs wi
204. and understanding thoroughly the precautions given in sections 3 5 and 3 7 As necessary assemble the input terminal adapter see section 3 6 that is to be connected to the voltage input terminal in advance Set the measurement conditions Chapter 4 Harmonic meas gt bar graph vector IEC harmonic measurement Motor evaluation Delta computation Waveform computation FFT Voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement Cycle by cycle measurement b Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Display Measured Calculated Results Measured power Sections 5 1 to 5 10 Integration value Sections 5 11 to 5 15 Voltage Current gt Chapter 6 waveform Trend gt Chapter 7 Print on the built in printer D A output RGB video signal VGA output DF lt W Nore LUIE Jia ela Store to internal gt Chapter 8 memory eee Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Output via RS 232 Ethernet or USB communication eee Communication Interface User s Manual 1M760301 17E CD ROM Save to PC card gt Chapter 9 Output data via gt Communication Interface GP IB User s Manual communication IM760301 17E CD ROM IM 760301 01E Contents Checking the Contents of the Package eccccecceeseeeeceeeneeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeesaeeeeaeeseeseaeetsaeesieeeeeeeeaes ii Safety Precautions sisne a ea anal T edna eet aie teil eet vi Conventions Used in This Manual ccceec
205. ar Tea a Ea a aa 8 2 Setting the Numeric Data and Waveform Display Data to Be Stored eceeeeeeeees 8 3 Setting the Store Count Store Interval Store Reservation Time and Alert Indication of Internal Memory Initialization ec ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeteeeseeeeeaeens to Storing Data 4 ecied loi A E sec ecdend oe diszad adap TA andes 8 5 Saving the Stored Data Seinai git eis ace ape ted idee aici ee 8 6 Recalling the Stored Datta 00 eeeeeecececeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseaeeeaeeeaeessaeeeaeeseeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeaeees Chapter 9 Saving and Loading Data 9 1 PC Card and USB MemoTy cccceeceseceeseeeeeeeneeeeaeeeseeseaeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeseeeenaeessaeenaeeenaees 9 2 Formatting the Storage Media ec eecceeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeecaeeeeeseeeesaeeseaeesieeeeeeeneees 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data Numeric Data Waveform Sampling Data cccecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeseeseaeeseeeenaeessaeeeaeesseteeas 9 4 Saving the Screen Image Datta ecceesceeseeesseeeeeeeeneeseaeeeeeseaeeseeseaeesseeseaeesieeeeaeetaees 9 5 Loading Setup Parameters ccceeceseeceeseeeneeeeeeeeaeeeseeseaeesaeeceaeesaeessaeeseeeeeaeessaeenaeeenates 9 6 Specifying the File to Be Displayed Displaying File Properties and Selecting File ATINIDUTOS 3 tcoivieet eet ee eA Re 9 7 Deleting FeS niona a hacia ected ed eae tee eed 9 87 Copying Files acti nei ad AA iin eed a
206. armonic measurement the accuracies of rotating speed and torque and the accuracy of D A output see the respective sections in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E 12 8 IM 760301 01E 12 5 Functions Measurement Function and Measurement Conditions Item Specifications Measurement method Digital multiplier method Crest factor Select 3 or 6 when rated value of the measurement range is input 300 for the minimum effective input Measurement period Period used to determine and compute the measurement function The measurement period is set by the zero crossing of the reference signal synchronization source when the data update interval is 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or 20 s excluding watt hour WP as well as ampere hour q during DC mode Measured through exponential averaging on the sampled data within the data update interval when the data update interval is 250 ms 500 ms 1 s or 2 s For harmonic measurement G6 or G5 option the measurement period is from the beginning of the data update interval to 9000 points at the harmonic sampling frequency Wiring system Select the wiring system from the following 1P2W single phase two wire 1P3W single phase three wire 3P4W three phase four wire and 3P3W 3V3A three voltage three current However the selectable wiring systems vary depending on the number of input elements that are installed Measurement range See section 12 1
207. as removable disks cannot be partitioned You can select 1 or 2 for the number of partitions Not u m e Note that if you format a storage medium that has data stored on it all of the stored data are cleared e Ittakes a few seconds to format a PC card e Selecting the Storage Medium to be Formatted The explanation is the same as that given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory in section 9 3 IM 760301 01E ejeq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes el 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data Numeric Data Waveform Sampling Data Procedure fa Cursor keys 4 gt SAVES LNEFILTER AVG MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER rm set measure pme source CURSOR O NULL Fe mace save gi MENU STORE SET MENU DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT OREMOTE ITEM numeric WAVE FORM wie save USER Femen UPDATE EDAT HOLD soz CAL INTEG LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL LOCAL a To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press FILE to display the Fil
208. as steps 11 to 13 under Viewing Properties on page 8 16 Note ___ e Ifthe storage medium at the save destination does not exist when saving the stored data an error message is displayed and the save operation is aborted Since the data is stored in the internal memory in this case you can save the data stored to the memory by selecting Memory according to step 3 on page 8 13 and then carrying out the steps on pages 8 14 and 8 15 Because file operation cannot be carried out when integration is in progress do not execute the store and save operation sequence in integration synchronization mode Saving of stored data is also not possible when integration is in progress IM 760301 01E eea paiojs y Burnes pue eeg Buljjesey pue Buros eo 8 5 Saving the Stored Data Explanation Save destination medium Memory to File Exec Selecting the Data Type Select the data type from below The extension is automatically added e ASCII e Numerical data or waveform display data is saved in ASCII format e The file can be used on your PC for analysis e The file cannot be loaded into the WT3000 e Float e Numeric data or waveform display data is saved in 32 bit floating format e The file cannot be loaded into the WT3000 Extension and Data Size of the Numeric Data Data Type Extension Data Size Bytes ASCII CSV Approx 5 K condition number of elements 1 store item Presett store count 10 Float WTD When int
209. asure foncsoued CURSOR NULL F mes store MENU STORE SET print msc Herr MENU DISPLAY wumenic WAVE ITEM amp ELEMENT u 1 P sane l UPDATE RATE HOLD over WPlq TIME ruin SINGLE ITEM FORM LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER erevent USERSET O ALL CAL l INTEG OREMOTE sen Eq To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu 2 Press the Phase soft key to display the Phase menu 3 Press either the 180 Lead Lag or 360 degrees soft key to select the display format of the phase difference User Defined Function SQ Formula Type 1 K Pc Formula Sampling Frequency Measure i Function User Defined Type 1 M M S Q Formula Pc Formula M Sampling Auto Frequency 5 28 IM 760301 01E 5 10 Selecting the Display Format of the Phase Difference Explanation The phase difference f between the voltage and current indicates the position of the current phase wi
210. asurement Range for Direct Input Note The range is set in reference to the RMS value of the input signal For example if a 100 Vrms sinusoid is to be applied set the range to 100 V When measuring a signal other than a sine wave such as a distorted wave accurate measurements can be obtained by selecting the maximum measurement range that does not meet the conditions below The input peak over range indicator at the top center of the screen illuminates or blinks The measured values of the voltage and current indicate over range OL The peak over range indicator may not illuminate or blink in the following cases e If the pulse width is narrow and the peak value of the waveform cannot be acquired at the sampling rate of the WT3000 approximately 200 ks S Ifthe high frequency components of the pulse waveform attenuate due to the bandwidth limiting by the WT3000 measurement circuit and the waveform peak value is less than the peak over range detection level For the list of the range settings of all input elements see section 3 16 Displaying the Setup Parameter List You can change the measurement range with the list displayed Auto Range When AUTO is pressed the AUTO key illuminates and auto range is enabled The range switches automatically depending on the magnitude of the input signal as described below The different ranges used in the auto range are the same as those available for fixed range e Rang
211. ata update due to the single measurement is complete If you carry out single measurement while the display is held the waveform sampling data is overwritten If you execute the save operation while the data update by the single measurement is in progress and the waveform sampling data is being overwritten an error occurs and the file is not created If the speed or torque signal type of the motor evaluation function is set to pulse ERROR is saved for the waveform sampling data of that signal e Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory Media on which saving and reading is possible are displayed in the File List dialog box Currently selected medium and directory File List ath PC_Card Power Space 127328256 byte File Name Size Date Attribute tpc_card 1 L Network 1 rap gt 2005 05 24 13 07 lt Power_T3 gt 2005 05 24 13 00 lt Power_T2 gt 2005 05 24 13 00 lt Power_T1 gt 2005 05 24 12 58 WAVE_0003 WNF 48272 2005 05 24 13 18 RM WAVE_0002 WNF 48272 2005 05 24 13 18 R R7 R7 wave_0001 WWE 48272 2005 05 24 13 18 wave_0000 2005705724 13 18 Directory Save destination medium Display Example of Storage Media PC_Card PC card USB2 USB memory option with ID number 2 NetWork Network drive option see Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 515 9 18 IM 760301 01E 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data N
212. atna ine FILTER NG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above TOTOR FREQ the soft keys SET FILTER pncsca In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the hisi p cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE mace save STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 print msc Herr MENU e Activating the NULL Function 1 Press SHIFT SYNC SOURCE NULL The NULL indicator to the lower left of the key illuminates when the NULL function operates and the measured values are updated e Clearing the NULL Function 2 Press SHIFT SYNC SOURCE NULL when the NULL function is activated The NULL indicator turns OFF and the NULL function is released The NULL function can be used to subtract the DC offset while the external sensor or measurement cable is connected Execute the NULL function at no input condition opened current input terminal and shorted voltage input terminal e NULL Value The NULL values are set to the Udc and Idc values numeric data of the simple average of voltage current as well as speed and torque on models with the motor evaluation function when the input signal from the sensor i
213. ator 7 segment LED and at the upper right corner of the screen Example of the display at the upper right corner Element Voltage range Voltage mode Displayed when set to auto range Voltage u1 1000Vrms Auto Yokocawa Element1 U141000Vrms 11 30Arms Element2 U2 1000vrms Selecting the Target Element to Be Configured Only the indicators of installed elements illuminate sequentially When the independent setting of input elements is OFF the element switches for each wiring unit according to the wiring system Setting the Voltage and Current Ranges There are two types of ranges fixed and auto e Fixed Range The range is set in reference to the RMS value of the input signal e Voltage Range When the crest factor is set to 3 Select 15 V 30 V 60 V 100 V 150 V 300 V 600 V or 1000 V When the crest factor is set to 6 Select 7 5 V 15 V 30 V 50 V 75 V 150 V 300 V or 500 V e Current range 2 A input element When the crest factor is set to 3 Select 5 mA 10 mA 20 mA 50 mA 100 mA 200 mA 500 mA 1 A or 2 A When the crest factor is set to 6 Select 2 5 mA 5 mA 10 mA 25 mA 50 mA 100 mA 250 mA 500 mA or 1A 30 A input element When the crest factor is set to 3 Select 500 mA 1 A 2 A 5 A 10 A 20 A or 30 A When the crest factor is set to 6 Select 250 mA 500 mA 1 A 2 5 A 5 A 10 A or 15 A IM 760301 01E 4 7 SUOI IPUOD JUSWaINSeS y gt 4 3 Setting the Me
214. attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not remove the archive attribute of the files saved by the WT3000 using your PC Up to 41 characters can be displayed in the path If the path exceeds 41 characters is displayed at the end of the character string Directory names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COM9 and LPT1 to LPT9 9 40 IM 760301 01E Chapter 10 Other Functions 10 1 Zero Level Compensation Procedure z To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC O located above the soft OO GB revs evemenr In the procedural All Cv CY explanation below the TERSURNG MEASURING phrase press the cursor Ge G MODE AUTO GeCe ae MODE AUTO nera ot aa phrase refers to the procedures for selecting Q 9o D gt r items and entering values a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT oroe and character strings For Numeric f wave ue fsan UPDATE horo details on the procedures s e ma pud CE e see section 3 14 w amp v ITEM FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG SHIFT I 5 y LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL n Press SHIFT SINGLE CAL Zero level compensation is executed SINGLE
215. ave Form menu If the waveform display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM Selecting the Number of Screen Divisions 2 Press the Format soft key to display the Format menu 3 Press any of the keys from Single to Quad to select the number of windows Format Single Trigger Display Settings g Wave Mapping Wave Mapping Waveform Display on Divided Windows To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 IM 760301 01E 6 15 Aejdsiq uuozaneM al 6 6 Waveform Display on Divided Windows e Selecting the Waveform Mapping 4 5 ooN Press the Wave Mapping soft key to display the Wave Mapping dialog box Press SET to set the mode to Auto Fixed or User If you selected User proceed to step 6 Press the cursor keys to select the input signal you wish to set Press SET A box used to set the display position number appears Press the cursor keys to select a value between 0 and 3 Press SET to confirm the new display position Wave Form M Format Single Time div When Mode is Auto When Mode is User Sms Wave Mapping Mode Ruto
216. aveform Data to Be Stored on page 8 5 Setting Memory to File Init Memory Alert Msi OFF Fe Store Set Mode Btore Recall Store Setting Memory to File Init Memory Alert Msi OFF il Store Setting M Mode Manual Count 100 4 Interval Setting M Store Item Numeric M Optimize Store Count IM 760301 01E eea pa10 s y Burnes pue eeg Buljjesey pue Buros e 8 2 Setting the Numeric Data and Waveform Display Data to Be Stored e Selecting the Numeric Data to Be Stored This operation is valid if the stored item was set to Numeric or Numeric Wave in step 5 6 Press the List Item soft key to display the List Item dialog box e Selecting the Items at Once 7 Press the cursor keys to select All ON 8 Press SET The buttons to the left of all the elements and measurement functions are highlighted indicating that all items will be stored e Deselecting All the Items at Once 7 Press the cursor keys to select All OFF 8 Press SET The highlighting of the buttons to the left of all the elements and measurement functions are cleared indicating that all items will not be stored Store Setting 4 Mode Manual List Ite Count Preset All ON All OFFOPreset1 Preset2 100 Elem Elem 1 Elem 2 Elem 3 Elem 4 r Func gu Quad wi Oi wp Ptk Interval gs stk ga Gack SA ACK
217. aveform display see section 6 Bar Trend The bar graph and trend are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on how to set the bar graph display see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Note Trends are not displayed if wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode is enabled on models with the advanced computation G6 option 7 2 IM 760301 01E 7 2 Procedure DISPLAY ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE DO OO Ea CY MEASURING MEASURING GOC MODE ITEM amp ELEMENT SENSOR RATIO AUTO EROICE OREMOTE a ITEM numeric WAVE FORM wie S Q A USER UPDATE POAT HOLD men CAL INTEG ELEMENT OWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL Q 9o D gt r SHIFT 1 Press ITEM to display the Trend Items menu If the trend display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT ITEM LOWER ITEM 2 Press the Trend Display soft key to display the Trend Display dialog box Ten ems Trend Displai Trend Display all on all OFF t1r1 r2 Trend Items B13 T4 rs5 16 Trend Scale t1t 7 1rs 1rs 110 m 112 113 114 ms 116 q Frequency Meas Item Selecting the Trend Data to Be Displayed To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys
218. ay Modes on Models with the Advanced Computation G6 Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker Measurement FL or Cycle by Cycle Measurement CC Option Measurement Mode Display Mode IG6 Voltage Wide Bandwidth IEC Harmonic Waveform Fluctuation Harmonic Computation and Flicker Power measurement Numeric Waveform display Wave Trend display Trend Bar graph display Bar Vector display Vector Waveform computation display Math FFT display FFT Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker Cycle by Cycle Yes Selectable No Not selectable 1 The rms values of the voltage or current are the total of the specified harmonic components not the values that include all frequency components For details see chapter 7 in the Extension Function User s Manual IM760301 51E 2 The waveform can be monitored using the Harmonic Flicker Measurement Software sold separately 3 38 IM 760301 01E 3 17 Displaying the Setup Parameter List Procedure ELEMENT OO VOLTAGE RANGE OO Emen ALL S Ccowren X WIRING INPUT INFO 2 Explanation MEASURING CECO move avro DISPLAY CURRENT RANGE GOE H MODE ITEM amp ELEMENT MEASURING SENSOR RATIO 4 Ww OREMOTE numeric WAVE OTHERS l ITEM FORM wie S Q A 9 USER Ed ELEMENT
219. be displayed in the path If the path exceeds 41 characters is displayed at the end of the character string File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COMQ and LPT1 to LPT9 IM 760301 01E 9 29 ejeq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes el 9 7 Deleting Files CAUTION Do not remove the PC card or USB memory or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the PC card or USB memory is blinking This can damage the PC card or USB memory or destroy the data on the it Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Sm A UPDATE Pe keya women WAVE U 1 P sono RATE HOLD l LOCAL ae rar CAL v ITEM FORM USER Eeen INTEG swe T bs y LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL SCAUNG UNEFLTER To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above MOTOR FREQ the soft keys SET FILTER hamser measure prne source In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the CURSOR O NULL cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and Fite fimacesave STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 MENU Press FILE to display the File menu P
220. by setting the motor s number of poles Furthermore the active power and frequency that are measured by the WT3000 and the motor output can be used to compute the motor efficiency and the total efficiency For details see chapter 1 Motor Evaluation Function Motor Version in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Voltage Mode and Current Mode You can select equations for voltage U and current I from the following e Urms Irms True Rms Value These values are the true rms values of the voltage and current The instantaneous values over one period are squared and averaged Then the square root of the value is determined f t and T represent the input signal as a function of time and the period of the input signal respectively T Urms or Irms Li f t dt Th e Umn Imn Rectified Mean Value Calibrated to the Rms Value This function rectifies one period of the voltage or current signal determines the average and multiplies the result by a coefficient The coefficient is a value that when applied to a sinusoidal input signal gives the true rms value When the input signal is a distorted or is a DC waveform these values will differ from the true rms values f t and T represent the input signal as a function of time and the period of the input signal respectively T T 1 Umn or Imn T KO at 24 2 e Udc Idc Simple Average DC These are the average values over one period of the voltage and
221. can select the method of assignment from the choices below Auto The waveforms that are turned ON are assigned in order according to the element number to the divided windows voltage first and then current Fixed The waveforms are assigned in order by element number in the order voltage and current to the divided windows regardless of whether or not the display is turned ON User The waveforms can be assigned arbitrarily to the divided windows regardless of whether or not the display is turned ON Display Interpolation of the Waveform For procedures see section 6 7 The waveform display data can be connected linearly to display the waveform smoothly e Linear Interpolation Linearly interpolates between two points Interpolation OFF No interpolation is performed Only the data points are displayed Graticule For procedures see section 6 7 A grid or cross scale can be displayed on the screen You can also select not to display the grid or cross scale Displaying Scale Values For procedures see section 6 8 The upper and lower limits of the vertical axis and the values at the left and right ends of the horizontal axis time axis of each waveform can be turned ON or OFF IM 760301 01E 2 29 uondioseg jeuonounes 2 7 Waveform Display Displaying Waveform Labels For procedures see section 6 8 Waveform labels can be turn ON or OFF ur SOOT Upper limit f eo L
222. ced With the advanced computation option computation option Power measurement Urms1 numeric display 106 183 v Irms1 For the operating procedure See chapter 7 in the Expansion 566 992 mA see eer 5 aP Function User s Manual For a functional description IM760301 51E k 55 8659 w see2 4 7 0 92793 Waveform display For the operating procedure see chapter 6 For a functional description see 2 7 Trend display For the operating procedure see chapter 7 For a functional description see 2 8 Bar graph display See chapter 7 in the Expansion Bar graph display is not Function User s Manual possible IM760301 51E on z o E setae a Lc HON Suan i by bd 0 6545KVA Po A E 315 35 Map egis Estas Vector display wiz Be 58 ais 182 00 See chapter 7 in the Expansion Vector display is not possible Function User s Manual EN IM760301 51E lt 7 yasse A Tec Soa oz1z8kU Pz 554Zk PEN SaD oeotewa 3 0 S6o kwar RU 2342kvar 0 3549 D e2 249 22 w 22 1 The G5 harmonic measurement option is equivalent to the harmonic measurement in normal measurement mode Split Display The display is divided into top and bottom halves and two types of displays can be shown simultaneously IM 760301 01E 3 37 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 16 Switching the Measurement Mode and Display e Measurement Modes and Displ
223. ceneeeees App 21 holdir aceite Sheri E t een 2 14 4 29 horizontal AXIS siare iiiar aaie ea 2 24 E T cee ee TN N O A 5 6 IMAGE S VE niii e ee cone 9 20 inductance Fe initial SCtINGS siccccezs cance cosesarecedicencsasuvevetessech aa initialization creer Initialize Settings inlet holes 2 Riise hee a E N AREA ets NpUtfiltEr cicias crecscene ne cerenetncevcevsnvcsceesivestensteveceevnewerresbes INPUT INFO 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeee ae input signal flow and process 1 0 ee eee eee eceeteneeeeeees 2 2 input terminal connecting to ie installation condition cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 3 2 installation position ss seeesseeseesieeieererrnsirerinsrnsrrerrnerrerrnrnne 3 3 instantaneous value 5 35 5 38 5 41 5 45 Integ Set 5 35 5 38 5 41 5 45 Integ SYNC oaeee integration auto calibration integration hold is integration mode ce ceeseseeeseeseecssnesseeseeesesneneneteseeceaes integration reset eeseseceseeseeeseseeeseeseseeeseeseeesseneeetesees integration starting of se integration StOP oe ee eee cess eee eeeeteeeeeeeseaeeteaeeeatenaeee integration timer 0 0 eect eeeees internal memory initialization of ITSO OL ALS cress aches ovate ani ovecutencstecustitssecescacicensicsusstacert conten Interval Setting sesca item to be SAVED 00 eee cece eee eeneeeeae cena teaeetaeeseaeeeeneeeaeee Koy SOGCK cs me iosa aia
224. cifications Item Specifications Warm up time Approx 30 minutes Operating conditions Temperature 5to 40 C Humidity No condensation 20 to 80 RH when not using the printer 35 to 80 RH when using the printer Operating altitude 2000 m or less Installation location Indoors Storage environment Temperature 25 to 60 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH No condensation Rated supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage 90 to 264 VAC range Rated supply voltage 50 60 Hz frequency Permitted supply voltage 48 to 63 Hz frequency range Maximum power consumption 150 VA when using the built in printer External dimensions See section 12 13 Approx 426 mm W x 177 mm H x 459 mm D Excludes the handle and other projections Weight Approx 14 kg main unit 4 input elements and option installed Installation position Horizontal however the stand can be used Vertical position and stacking not allowed Battery backup Setup parameters and the internal time clock are backed up with lithium batteries Fuse Location Maximum Maximum Type Standard Rated Voltage Rated Current Power supply 250 V 6 3A Time lag UL VDEcertified Safety standard Complying standard EN61010 1 Overvoltage category Installation category CAT II Measurement category CAT II Pollution degree 24 12 16 IM 760301 01E 12 11 Gen
225. cified Only the indicators of installed elements illuminate sequentially When the independent setting of input elements is OFF the element switches according to the wiring system All elements can also be selected collectively Setting the Synchronization Source You can select which input signal will be the synchronization source the zero crossing point of the input signal to which the measurement period is synchronized for each element or all elements collectively Select the signal to be the synchronization source from the choices below The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements U1 11 U2 12 U3 13 U4 14 Ext Clk external clock and None Note If you specify no synchronization source by selecting None the entire sampled data within the data update interval is the data used to determine the numeric data When measuring DC signals this method can be used to prevent errors in the detection of the measurement period caused by noise e When Setting the Synchronization Source to Ext Clk Apply a clock signal to the external clock input connector EXT CLK on the rear panel according to the following specifications EXT CLK A Ext Clk Specifications Item Specifications Connector type BNC connector Input level TTL Input waveform 50 duty ratio rectangular wave CAUTION Applying a voltage outside the range of 0 to 5 V to the external clock input connector EXT CLK can dam
226. cker and Cycle by Cycle Measurements cceeeeeeees 2 34 Saving and Loading Data and Other Functions ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeteeeteeeeeeeeeaees 2 35 Chapter 3 Before Starting Measurements 3 1 3 2 A 3 3 3 4 A 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 19 Handling PreCautions icc csc cece a nee ite diese dnl ceva ghiv a aaa a laces cient 3 1 Installing the INStrUrment is ce ciecesdsccenceciesaienanacadeesagecesudastansictsnaascentscadeesice ssicesasecienaeaciens 3 2 Connecting the Power Supply cesceesceseeeeseeeeeaeeceeeeeaeeeseeeeaeeseeteaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeeeeteaees 3 4 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch ceeccesseeceeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeesaeessaeeseeeseaeeeaas 3 5 Wiring Precautions csi iicceinciind tee ei i ei ll a teed 3 7 Assembling the Adapter to Be Connected to the Voltage Input Terminal 00 3 10 Wiring for Making Accurate Measurement cceescceeeseeeeeeneeeesneeerenaeeeeeaeeesenaeerenaeees 3 12 Guide for Selecting the Method Used to Measure the Power ccccceeceeseseeeeeeretes 3 13 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement for Direct Input 0 ee eee eee eens 3 14 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the Current Sensor 0ee 3 17 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the VT CT osasse 3 21 Setting the Date Time ienes dasha eyed aa hes aa E aiid ide erect 3 24 Initializ
227. count to a value less than or equal to the maximum store count 9 Press SET or ESC to close the box 10 Press the cursor keys to select SET 11 Press SET 12 Press ESC to close the entry box ode Manual Count 100 z Interval Setting Optimize Store Count Maximum Store Count 584782 LSet 4 Store Item Numeric M List Item a j optimize Store Count P Setting the Store Interval 4 5 6 7 Press the Interval Setting soft key to display the Interval Setting dialog box Press the cursor keys to select the hour minute or second box Press SET to display the entry box Press the cursor keys to set the hour minute or second that you selected in step 5 For the procedures on how to enter values using the cursor keys see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings Press SET or ESC to close the box Repeat steps 5 to 8 to set the hour minute and second Store Setting K Mode Manual k gt Count 10 Interval Setting_ 4 Interval Setting M Store Item Numeric 4 List Item 8 8 IM 760301 01E 8 3 Setting the Store Count Store Interval Store Reservation Time and Alert Indication of Internal Memory Initialization e Setting the Store Reservation Time This operation is possible when the store mode is set to Real Time in section 8 1
228. creen are displayed in the lower left corner and lower right corner of the screen respectively Format Single Trigger Display Settings Wave Mapping To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 IM 760301 01E 6 5 Aejdsiq wiojonejy al 6 3 Setting the Time Axis Explanation For functional details see section 2 7 Set the time axis in terms of Time div time per grid The time axis can be set in 1 2 or 5 steps in the range up to the point in which the time corresponding to one screen is equal to the data update interval For example changing the time per division in the order 0 5 ms 1 ms 2 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms and 50 ms when the data update interval is 500 ms changes the time corresponding to one screen in the order 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms 50 ms 100 ms 200 ms and 500 ms 4 Format Single Time div Time div setting Sms e Number of data points displayed g in the range from the left to the right end of the screen Fests e When P P is displayed waveform Settings is displayed using P P compression see section 2 7 Trigger g u ETT Wave Mapping T 0005 e 1002 ee gt gt 50 0006 Time at
229. cs Harmonics refer to sine waves whose frequency is an integer multiple of the fundamental wave normally sine waves of commercial frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz excluding the fundamental frequency The input current that flows through the power rectification circuit phase control circuit and other circuits used in various electric and electronic equipment generate harmonic current or voltage on the power line When the fundamental and harmonic waves are combined distortion occurs in the waveform and interference sometimes occur in equipment connected to the power line Terminology Terminology related to harmonics is described below Fundamental wave fundamental component The sine wave with the longest period among the different sine waves derived from the periodic complex wave Or the sine wave that has the fundamental frequency within the components of the complex wave Fundamental frequency The frequency corresponding to the longest period in the periodic complex wave The frequency of the fundamental wave Distorted wave A wave that differs from the fundamental wave Higher harmonic A sine wave with frequency that is an integer multiple twice or greater of the fundamental frequency Harmonic component A waveform component with frequency that is an integer multiple twice or greater of the fundamental frequency Harmonic distortion factor The ratio of the rms value of the specified n order harmonic contained in the distorted
230. ct the sampling frequency User Defined Function SQ Formula Type 1 K Pe Formula N Sampl ing Frequency Auto pO Phase 180 Lead Lag Sync Measure aster Slave Measure User Defined Function M S Q Formula Type 1 g Pec Formula Clock A Clock B Clock C The frequency used to acquire the sampled data to compute the measurement functions can be selected e Auto Automatically switches the following Clock A B and C Clock A Samples at 183 823 kHz e Clock B Samples at 189 394 kHz Clock C Samples at 195 313 kHz Note e You can set the sampling frequency to Auto to prevent the measured data from becoming invalid due to aliasing section 2 7 If you wish to fix the sampling frequency select one of the frequency settings above The sampling frequency is automatically set to 200 kHz in waveform computation FFT voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement and cycle by cycle measurement modes 10 4 IM 760301 01E 10 4 Selecting the Display Font Procedure scauna funerurer ava MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER um set measure pme source CURSOR O NULL Ema SET MENU B O N System Overview Initialize Settings Remote Control pE Ea DISPLAY foe e ITEM FORM ITEM amp ELEMENT ER FU FI
231. cuits e Series RLC Circuit The equation below expresses the voltage relationship when resistance Rs Q inductance L H and capacitance C F are connected in series U y Urs UL Uc IRs IXt IXc I Rs XL Xc IRs Xs U 4 Xs I tan aJ Rs Xs ns i I Rs L NNN SF Urs UL ap Uc 2 U The relationship between resistance Rs reactance Xs and impedance Z is expressed as follows Xs XL Xc Z Rs Xs e Parallel RLC Circuit The equation below expresses the current relationship when resistance Rp Q inductance L H and capacitance C F are connected in parallel I V Ine IL lo ie 2 U U XL Xc Pa ay 1 olee ols IRPXP tan Re RP Xp a THM IRP a The relationship between resistance Rp reactance Xp and impedance Z is expressed zi Ic rc i L Rp as follows xipueddy XLXc P Xc XL ReXp a RP Xp Z App 23 IM 760301 01E Appendix 5 For Making Accurate Measurements Effects of Power Loss By wiring the circuit to match the load you can minimize the effect of the power loss on the measurement accuracy We will consider the current source SOURCE and load resistance LOAD below e When the Measurement Current Is Relatively Large Wire so that the voltage measurement circuit is connected to the load side The current meas
232. current measurement circuit of the instrument is 500 mQ and 5 5 mQ for the 2 A and 30 A input terminals respectively For example if the load resistance is 1 kQ then the effects on the measurement accuracy is 0 05 for the 2 A input terminal 500 mQ 1 kQ and 0 00055 for the 30 A input terminal 5 5 M9 1 K9 source T Joan U u l souno Loan gt T ie ee l I q Ww iia Q Q VY edocs ei WT3000 App 24 IM 760301 01E Appendix 5 For Making Accurate Measurements Effects of Stray Capacitance The effects of stray capacitance on the measurement accuracy can be minimized by connecting the current input terminal of the instrument to the side that is close to the earth potential of the power source SOURCE The internal structure of the instrument is as follows The voltage and current measurement circuits are each enclosed in shielded cases These shielded cases are placed inside the outer case The shielded case of the voltage measurement circuit is connected to the terminal of the voltage input terminal and the shielded case of the current measurement circuit is connected to the terminal of the current input terminal Because the outer case is insulated from the shield case stray capacitance Cs exists Cs is approximately 100 pF The current generated by this stray capacitance Cs will cause errors Shielded case of the voltage measurement circuit
233. current signal This function is useful when determining the average value of a DC input signal or a DC component that is superimposed on an AC input signal T 1 Udc or Idc L f t dt Tho e Urmn Irmn Rectified Mean Value This function rectifies one period of the voltage or current signal and determines the average 7 1 Urmn or Irmn 1 f t dt T Jo The WT3000 may use an averaging process through digital filter computation in addition to the averaging method using the equations above to derive the measured values of voltage U and current I For details see Data Update Interval on page 2 14 IM 760301 01E 2 7 uondioseqg jeuonounes 2 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Functions Measurement Period Measurement Functions of Normal Measurement The measurement period varies depending on the data update rate see section 2 3 as follows e When the Data Update Rate Is 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or 20 s ik 2 The measurement period is set between the first point where the reference input signal synchronization source crosses the level zero point center of the amplitude on the rising slope or falling slope within the data update interval and the last point where the synchronization source crosses the level zero point center of the amplitude on the rising slope or falling slope within the data update interval However the measurement period for determining the numeric data of the peak v
234. d 753 FTP Error Pwd Confirm the network settings and connection 754 FTP Error Cwd Confirm the network settings and connection 755 FTP Error Rm Confirm the network settings and connection 756 FTP Error List Confirm the network settings and connection 757 FTP Error Mkdir Confirm the network settings and connection 758 FTP Error Rmdir Confirm the network settings and connection 759 FTP Error Get Confirm the network settings and connection 760 FTP Error Put Confirm the network settings and connection 761 FTP Error GetData Confirm the network settings and connection 762 FTP Error PutData Confirm the network settings connection and disk capacity 763 FTP Error AppendData Confirm the network settings connection and disk capacity 764 FTP Error Client Handle Confirm the network settings and connection 765 FTP Error Others Confirm the network settings and connection 770 Failed to acquire time from SNTP server Confirm the network settings and connection 4 785 Cannot send data to a network printer Confirm the network settings and connection 786 Cannot send a mail Confirm the network settings and connection 797 Connecting to a NetDrive Wait until connection has been established 798 Failed to initialize network Confirm the network settings ne 799 The second time password input is different Please repeat the second time password input ne from the first t
235. d WARNING or CAUTION WARNING Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious or fatal injury to the user and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or damage CAUTION Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light injury _ to the user or damage to the instrument or user s data and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences Note Calls attention to information that is important for proper operation of the instrument On pages that describe the operating procedures in chapters 3 through 11 the following symbols displayed characters and terminology are used to distinguish the procedures from their explanations Follow the numbered steps All pro egures are written with inexperienced users in mind experienced users may not need to carry out all the steps Explanation This subsection describes the setting parameters and the limitations on the procedures It may not give a detailed explanation of the function For a detailed explanation of the function see chapter 2 Displayed Characters and Terminology Used in the Procedural Explanations Panel Keys and Soft keys Bold characters used in the procedural explanations indicate characters that are marked on the panel keys or the characters of the soft keys or menus displayed on the screen SHIFT Panel Key SHIFT key means you
236. d Function ITEM amp ELEMENT U 1 P sane l UPDATE RATE HOLD ores WPiq TIME Fun SINGLE ITEM FORM LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER evewenr USERSET O ALL CAL l INTEG OREMOTE a Eq To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu 2 Press the User Defined Function soft key to display the User Defined Function menu 3 Press any of the soft keys from User Defined F1 to F20 to select the user defined function to be assigned The User Defined Function dialog box opens e Turning ON OFF the User Defined Function Computation 4 Press the cursor keys to select the desired user defined function 5 Press SET to select ON or OFF User Defined Function H Pe Formula Sampling Frequency Auto Phase 180 Lead Lag Sync Measure Display example when the User Defined F1 F5 soft key is pressed User Defined Function F1 F5 Function 4 Unit Expression Function 2 FF _ON UMI Unit A Function 3 FF _ON Expression UMN CE2
237. d PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated For purposes of this manual the TM and symbols do not accompany their respective trademark names or registered trademark names Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders 1st Edition December 2004 2nd Edition June 2005 3rd Edition January 2006 4th Edition December 2006 5th Edition March 2007 All Rights Reserved Copyright 2004 Yokogawa Electric Corporation5 IM 760301 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument If some of the contents are not correct or missing or if there is physical damage contact the dealer from which you purchased them WT3000 Check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate on the side panel match those on your order o Mope O SUFFIX Po ey YOKOGAMA Made in Japan MODEL and SUFFIX Codes Model Item Suffix Code Description 760301 760302 760303 760304 Number of installed input elements 1 Number of installed input elements 2 Number of installed input elements 3 Number of installed input elements 4 The power supply specifications are 100 to 240 VAC on all of the above models Element configuration 01 30 A input element 2 A input element 30 A input element 2 A input element 30 A input element 2 A input element 30 A input element 2 A in
238. d as a positive value The value of QE may be negative because it is calculated from Q of each element including the sign For details on the measurement functions of the motor evaluation function see section 1 10 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E For details on the measurement functions of harmonic measurement see section 7 9 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E IM 760301 01E App 3 xipueddy Appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data Initial Settings Factory Default Example for a Model with Four Input Elements Installed The default settings vary depending on the number of installed input elements and the presence absence of options Item Setting RANGE 2 A input element 30 A input element U Range 1000 V 1000 V input Terminal Direct Direct Direct input Range 2A 30A External Sensor Range 10V 10V SENSOR RATIO 10 0000 mV A WIRING Wiring Setting 1P2W n Formula ni PZB PZA n2 PZA PZB n3 Off 1 n4 Off 1 Udef1 P1 None None None Udef2 P1 None None None Compensation Wiring Compensation Off Efficiency Compensation Off Element Independent Off AMeasure SCALING Scaling Off Scaling Item VT VT 1 0000 CT 1 0000 Scaling Factor 1 0000 LINE FILTER Off FREQ FILTER Off AVG Averaging Off Averaging Type Exp Exp Count 2 Lin Count 8 MEASURE User Defined On Off Unit Expression Function1 Off V UMN E1 Function2 Off
239. d bar graph of harmonics are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on how to set the bar graph display see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E 5 6 IM 760301 01E 5 1 Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the Displayed Items Selecting the Number of Displayed Items Select the number of numeric data items that are displayed simultaneously from the choices below 4 items When the display mode is Numeric Numeric Wave Numeric Bar and Numeric Trend four numeric data values are displayed in one column 8 Items e When the display mode is Numeric eight numeric data values are displayed in one column When the display mode is Numeric Wave Numeric Bar and Numeric Trend eight numeric data values are displayed in two columns 16 Items e When the display mode is Numeric Numeric Wave Numeric Bar 16 numeric data values are displayed in two columns All Items A table is displayed indicating the numeric data of items with measurement functions listed vertically and symbols indicating elements and wiring units listed horizontally The number of displayed items varies depending on the number of installed elements The displayed item cannot be changed independently using the ITEM key Switch the display by page scrolling e Single List When the display mode is Numeric 42 numeric data values for a single measurement function are displayed in two columns When th
240. d by averaging Measurement functions of normal measurement fU fl U pk U pk l pk l pk Time WP WP WP WPS WP S WP S and SyncSp models with the motor evaluation function e Measurement functions of harmonic measurement option pU k ol k pUi Uj pUi Uk pUi li PUi Ij and pUi Ik k harmonic order Measurement Functions of Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker Measurement Mode and Cycle by Cycle Measurement Mode Averaging is not performed The average setting is invalid 4 26 IM 760301 01E 4 10 Selecting the Data Update Rate Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE operation press ESC OO located above the soft OO D Ca fe paei Cv Cv In the procedural lanation below the es MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor GOE H MODE AUTO GOE eH MODE AUTO keys may be used This INPUT INFO phrase refers to the procedures for selecting A DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT gii ame matters a A TE and character strings For NUMERIC WAVE U 1 P s asa e HOLD end wave Lowe sane RR soe c Q Q gt rr details on the procedures see section 3 14 E 3 m CO aa CAL v l ITEM FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG SHIFT T y LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL 1 Press UPDATE RATE to display the Update Rate menu 2 Press the Update Rate Up Exec or Update Rate Down Exec sof
241. d in the top frame Torque is displayed in the 2nd frame from the top The following figure shows how the waveforms are displayed when all 4 elements are installed with the motor evaluation function motor version the number of division is 4 Quad display of U1 11 U2 12 U3 13 14 and Torque is ON and display of U4 and Speed is OFF Auto 11 13 Torque 2 Torque e User The waveforms can be assigned arbitrarily to the divided windows regardless of whether or not the display is turned ON You can select the display position from 0 to 3 The waveforms are assigned in order starting from number 0 from the top divided window User when the screen is divided into three windows with I1 Speed and Torque set to 0 1 and 3 respectively 11 Torque Displayed in order according to the specified number Aejdsiq wiojonejy l IM 760301 01E 6 17 6 7 Selecting the Display Interpolation and Graticule Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE Ereso operation press ESC OO located above the soft DO Ca e In the procedural ds Cv CY explanation below the MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor wane MODE AUTO keys may be used This INPUT INFO phrase refers to the procedures for selecting i items and entering values A DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT omme and character strings For ee e see s
242. d the following values to the power accuracy e 2 A input element 30 A input element 0 004 x I of reading 6 x I u A 0 00002 x 1 of reading 3 x I u A lis the current reading A The influence from self generated heat continues until the temperature of the shunt resistor inside the WT3000 lowers even if the current input changes to a small value When the data update interval is 50 ms add 0 1 of reading to all accuracy figures When the data update interval is 100 ms add 0 05 of reading to all accuracy figures All accuracy figures for 0 1 to 10 Hz are reference values The power accuracy figures for 30 kHz to 100 kHz when the voltage exceeds 750 V are reference values The power accuracy figures for 100 kHz to 1 MHz when the voltage V exceeds 2 2 x 104 f kHz are reference values The power accuracy figures for DC 10 Hz to 45 Hz and 400 Hz to 200 kHz when the current exceeds 20 A are reference values The power accuracy figures for 200 kHz to 500 kHz when the current exceeds 10 A are reference values The power accuracy figures for 500 kHz to 1 MHz when the current exceeds 5 A are reference values IM 760301 01E 12 7 suoleoyioeds Ey 12 4 Accuracy Item Specifications Effective input range Oto 130 of the power range see section 5 2 for DC measurement 130 of the power range for current measurement when the voltage and current are in the range of 1 to 130 of t
243. dard when the load that is connected to the potential transformer is extremely small the active power of the potential transformer that is measured needs to be compensated In such cases set the compensating equation and the coefficient IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 IEC76 1 1993 ee e bra UE po p 1 Umn ums Umn Umn Pc Corrected Power P Active power Urms True rms voltage Umn Voltage rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value P4 P2 Coefficient as defined in the applicable standard IM 760301 01E 2 19 uondioseg jeuonounes 2 5 Computation Phase Difference For procedures see section 5 10 The display format of the phase difference between the voltage and current of each element can be selected With the voltage of each element as a reference one format displays the phase difference using 360 in the clockwise direction and the other format displays lead up to 180 in the counterclockwise direction D and lag up to 180 in the clockwise direction G The phase difference of harmonic order 1 to 100 of the voltage and current on the harmonic measurement option is displayed using a 360 format ora 180 format no sign for lead and negative sign for lag Delta Computation See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Delta computation can be performed on models with the delta computation function option Equation for Distortion Factor See the Expansion Function User s
244. date rate of the sampled data that is used to determine the numeric data measured values such as voltage current and power HOLD Key See section 4 11 When the HOLD key is pressed and the HOLD indicator illuminates the measurement and display operation is aborted and the numeric data display is held Pressing the HOLD key again turns OFF the HOLD indicator and restarts the updating of the numeric data display SINGLE Key See section 4 11 If the SINGLE key is pressed while in the hold condition the measurement is performed once at the specified data update rate and the WT3000 returns to the hold condition 1 4 IM 760301 01E 1 2 Setup Menu Display Key and Execution Key Displaying the Measured Computed Results ELEMENT Ersson OO S S MEASURING MEASURING HOL RMS MEAN x move auto aid n Coe H MODE auto DISPLAY 5 eed Oe a la w ea lee MODE Key See section 5 2 Switches the voltage mode and current mode The mode can be set to true rms value RMS rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value MEAN simple average DC or rectified mean value RMEAN for the voltage mode and current mode separately NUMERIC Key See section 3 15 and 5 1 For details on the harmonic measurement G6 or G5 option see the Expansion Function
245. de Store Memory gt to File Memory to File Initialize Memory Exec Initialize Memory Exec F Init Memory Alert Msg Init Memory Alert Msg ON PEF ON Initializing Clearing the Internal Memory The procedure to clear the internal memory varies depending on the store mode This section describes the procedures when the store mode is recall For the procedures when the store mode is store see section 8 4 4 Press the Initialize Memory Exec soft key If the alert indication for internal memory initialization section 8 3 is ON the Alert dialog box appears Proceed to step 5 If the indication is OFF the data in the internal memory is cleared without displaying the Alert dialog box 5 Press the cursor keys to select OK or Cancel 6 Select OK and press SET to clear the data in the internal memory Select Cancel and press SET to not clear the data in the internal memory IM 760301 01E 8 21 eea paiojs oy Burnes pue eeg Buljjesey pue Buros eo 8 6 Recalling the Stored Data Store Set Mode Store Recall No K Memory File Explanation e Recalling the Data Real ly Store memory will be initialized Do you want to execute You can recall and display the stored numeric data or waveform display data There is a one to one relationship between the store count number see section 8 2 and the Recall No If you wish to recall the fi
246. device can be determined e Setting the Equation Four efficiency equations h1 to h4 can be defined by assigning the power of an element the power of a S function or the motor output as an operand To set the sum of multiple measurement function symbols in the operand of the equation an equation consisting of up to 4 terms can be created using Udef1 and Udef2 Equation Examples e Efficiency of a Single Phase Two Wire Input Single Phase Two Wire Output Device Given Input Power of element 1 P1 and Output Power of element 2 P2 Efficiency equation P2 P1 Input power P1 Converter Output power P2 Inverter etc e Efficiency of a Single Phase Two Wire Input Three Phase Three Wire Output Device Given Input Power of element 1 P1 and Output power of elements 2 and 3 PXA Efficiency equation P2A P1 Efficiency of a Three Phase Three Wire Input Three Phase Three Wire Output Device Given Input power of elements 1 and 2 PZA and Output power of elements 3 and 4 P B Efficiency equation PXB PZA e Efficiency of a Single Phase Two Wire Input Motor Given Input Power of element 1 P1 and Output Motor output Pm Efficiency equation Pm P1 e Efficiency of a Three Phase Three Wire Input Motor Given Input power of elements 1 and 2 PZA and Output Motor output Pm Efficiency equation Pm P2A Note ___ To correctly compute the efficiency set the power factor of all elements so that
247. dicates the relative time of cursor from the left end of the screen with the left end of the screen taken to be 0 s e Xx X axis value of cursor x from the left end of the screen Indicates the relative time of cursor x from the left end of the screen with the left end taken to be 0 s e AX The difference between the X axis values of cursor and cursor x e D Date and time at the cursor position Indicates the date and time year month date hour minute second of measurement Dx Date and time at the cursor x position Indicates the date and time year month date hour minute second of measurement Aejdsig pualy si Note kkk if immeasurable data exists is displayed in the measured value display area AY is measured even if the unit is different The result has no unit in this case IM 760301 01E 7 19 Chapter 8 Storing and Recalling Data and Saving the Stored Data 8 1 Setting the Store Mode a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Ondi A women WAVE UIP save UPDATE HOLD Locau Ca gt weg ruven SINGLE aUe ITEM FORM USER Eeen INTEG E LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL canne LINE FILTER NG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above MOTOR FREQ the soft keys SET FILTER HRM SET MEASURE J SINCSOURCEY In the procedural explanation below the ph
248. display and vector display is 1 s when the data update rate is 50 ms to 500 ms The display update interval of the waveform display is approximately 1 s when the data update rate is 50 ms to 1 s However it may be longer depending on the trigger setting Response time Data update rate x 2 at the maximum Only when displaying numeric values Hold Holds the data display Single measurement Executes one measurement during the hold condition Zero level Performs zero level compensation compensation Null IM 760301 01E 12 9 suoleoyioeds Ey 12 5 Functions Item Specifications Measurement mode Select from the following measurement modes Normal measurement mode e Wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode IEC harmonic measurement mode e Waveform computation mode FFT mode e Voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement mode Cycle by cycle measurement mode 1 Selectable on models with the advanced computation option 2 Selectable on models with the voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement option 3 Selectable on models with the cycle by cycle measurement option Frequency Measurement Item Specifications Measured item Select up to two of the frequencies of the voltage or current that is input to the input element For models with the frequency measurement add on option the frequencies of all voltages and currents applied to the input element are measu
249. dmax 4 00 d t 500 ms 3 30 Pst 1 00 Plt 0 65 Pit N value 12 FORM for flicker displayed on models with the voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement FL option Measurement Flicker Flicker Settings Object Elementi Un mode Auto Un Set 230 00 V Frequency 50 Hz Interval 10 min 00 sec Count 12 dmin 0 10 ITEM for cycle by cycle displayed on models with the cycle by cycle measurement CC option List Item No 1 2 3 4 5 Function Freq U P S Element Elementi Elementi Elementi Elementi Elementi Cursor No 1 FORM for cycle by cycle displayed on models with the cycle by cycle measurement CC option Sync Source U1 Sync Slope Rise Trigger Common with FORM for Wave Cycle Count 100 Time out 10 USER SET Function1 U peak Function2 U pea Function3 l peak Function4 l peak IM 760301 01E App 7 xipueddy Appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data tem Setting CURSOR for Wave Wave Cursor Wave C1 Trace Wave C2 Trace Cursor Path Wave C1 Wave C2 x Off U1 l1 Max 10 0 ms 40 0 ms CURSOR for Bar displayed on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 optionn Bar Cursor Off Bar C1 1 order Bar C2 x 15 order CURSOR for Trend Trend Cursor Off Trend C1 Trace T1 Trend C2 Trace T2 Trend C1 100 Trend C2 x 900 Cursor for MATH displayed on models with the advanced computation G6 optio
250. dress 2 36 IM 760301 01E 2 11 Saving and Loading Data and Other Functions GP IB Serial USB Communication See the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760301 17E The measured data can be transferred via the GP IB interface standard equipped the serial interface conforming to EIA 574 9 pin EIA 232 RS 232 option or the USB port option to a PC for analysis or an external controller can be used to control the instrument for making measurements aa Communication WT3000 interface O T J E L aa Le Eg Entering Values and Strings on the USB Keyboard For procedures see section 3 15 You can connect a USB keyboard to the USB port peripheral device option and enter file names comments and so on uondioseg jeuonounes SSSS66sqs55oq WT30C E popopppr20 0200 E D00000 000 pez 7 o Ea USB keyboard puw u D A Output Option See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E The numeric data can be output using a 5 V FS DC analog voltage A maximum of 20 items can be set RGB Video Signal VGA Output Option See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E The RGB video signal VGA Video Graphics Array can be output to an external monitor T
251. dv ee eit 9 9 Renaming Files or Directories and Creating Directories ceeceeseeseeeeeeeteeeeeneeeeeeees Chapter 10 Other Functions A Chapter 11 10 1 Zero Level Compensation eeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeeeaeeseeeteeeteaeeeeetaee 10 2 NUEL Function sists ane ade eee De 10 3 Selecting the Sampling Frequency cecceecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeseeseaeeeeeseieeseeeeeaes 10 4 Selecting the Display Font eceecceesceeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeecaeeeaeesaeesaeeseaeesseeseaeeseeseeeseeeeeaes 10 5 Selecting the Screen Brightness ccceeeceeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeessaeeeaeeseaeeseeeeaeenaee 10 6 Setting the Display Colom sareari e aeoeaio pez eae Eaa aE Ea ne Eaei RS 10 7 Setting the Key Lock and Shift Lock Function sssseseesseeseeseeesrerrerrrsirsinrsrnsinerrnsrnsenne 1 10 8 lel FUMGUOM P AE ET A E T 1 10 9 Master Slave Synchronization Measurement ceeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeteeeeeaeeteaeesas 1 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection 114 Troubleshooting A stenna a ie ates ve otra a aa 11 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions c cesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseeeeeeesnaeenaees IES Self Tesi a he act a aes Seve ed aa aa e a a a a aaa a 11 4 Checking the System Condition sseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeesneenttnerttttnsrnttttstnstnntenstnntnnstnstnnennnen 11 5 Replacing the Power Fuse eecceceseseeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeneee
252. e E FREQ FILTER ama SCALING Key See section 4 5 Displays a menu for setting the VT ratio CT ratio or power coefficient for each input element These coefficients are used to convert the VT CT output or the power derived from measuring the VT and CT outputs to the voltage current and power of the object being measured LINE FILTER Key See section 4 8 Displays a menu for setting the filter that is inserted into the measurement circuit within the WT3000 for each input element SHIFT LINE FILTER FREQ FILTER Key See section 4 8 Displays a menu for setting the filter that is inserted into the frequency measurement circuit within the WT3000 for each input element AVG Key See section 4 9 Displays a menu for setting the function that calculates the average of measured values SYNC SOURCE Key See section 4 7 e Displays a menu for setting the synchronization source for each wiring unit The synchronization source defines the period measurement period over which the sample data is acquired for determining the numeric data measured values such as voltage current and power e If all elements are selected with the SHIFT ELEMENT ALL key as explained on the previous page the synchronization source of all input elements can be set collectively UPDATE RATE Key See section 4 10 Displays a menu for selecting the acquisition interval data up
253. e Scaling Normal PFF ON Timer Spel Timer Setting a ouooa Lo0 Lo0 Couovo of cali Scaling Item FIL CT__SF Element 1 1 0000 Element 2 1 0000 Auto Cal PFF ON Element 3 1 0000 Element 4 1 0000 D A Output 7 Rated Time Note Some of the parameters that can be changed using the cursor keys are reset to their initial values when the RESET key is pressed M Entering Character Strings The equation for the user defined function units file names and comments can be entered using the keyboard that is displayed on the screen The cursor keys and SET are used to operate the keyboard to enter the character strings 3 28 IM 760301 01E 3 14 Entering Values and Character Strings Entering the Equation for the User Defined Function The figure below shows the keyboard that appears when setting the equation for the user defined function Long equations can be temporarily held in the internal memory so that it can be used in other equations 1 Entering the Equation and Temporarily Storing It Press the A and cursor keys to select the desired character You can move the cursor quickly by holding down A or W to make the cursor skip Long function names can be selected by pressing one key Press SET to enter characters in the entry box If there are characters already in the entry box use the 4 and p cursor keys to select the
254. e Three Wire Three Voltage Three Current System 3P3W 3V3A If four input elements are available one three phase three wire system three voltage three current system can be set up elements 1 2 and 3 or elements 2 3 and 4 R SOURCE LOAD LOAD Input terminal 1 Inputterminal 2 Input terminal 3 Wiring Example of a Three Phase Four Wire System 3P4W If four input elements are available one three phase four wire system can be set up elements 1 2 and 3 or elements 2 3 and 4 SOURCE LOAD z4 0J Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 Input terminal 3 Note ____ For the relationship between the wiring systems and the method of determining the measured values or computed values see Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions 3 16 IM 760301 01E 3 10 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the Current Sensor To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the precautions given in section 3 5 Wiring Precautions If the maximum current value of the circuit under measurement exceeds the maximum range of the current input terminal as described below an external sensor can be connected to the current sensor input connector in order to measure the current of the measurement circuit 2 Ainput elem
255. e Display Interpolation and GratiCule eceeeceeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeseeetseeeeeetees 6 18 Turning ON OFF the Scale Value and Waveform Label ccseseeeeeseeesseteeeeeeees 6 21 Cursor Measurement ssi aarti tieniiiven endl inated aiid er eia 6 23 Chapter 7 Trend Display 7 1 Trend Display iian hHd ieee eee eit ee eee 7 1 7 2 Selecting the Trend Data to Be Displayed ecceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeneeteaeeeeeeeeates 7 3 7 3 Selecting the Trend Display Target c cescecececeeeeeeeeeneeseeeseeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeaeesneeseeeeeeeennees 7 5 7 4 Setting the Time AXiS ec cece ceceeeneeeneeceeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeaeesseeseaeesaeeeeaeeeaeeseaeeseeseaeeseeeseaeesaaes 7 8 TS Setting the Scale isisisi heel weaned 7 10 7 6 Displaying Trends on Divided WiNdOWS eeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeneneeeenaeeeeeeeeseeneeeseneees 7 12 7 7 Selecting the Display Interpolation and Graticule and Turning ON OFF the Scale Value and Waveform Label ceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseaeseeeseaeeeeneraee 7 14 7 8 R staning UNE Trend soe iccceeccssAcaececcevacesnabcetaiecceteaaeleaiucvedugaedenssbe eaae Ea EEEE ESE ERa 7 16 7 9 Cursor Measurement cecceeceeeneeeeeeteaeeeeeeseeeeeseeeaeesseeseaeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeesaeeseaeeseeeeeaeete 7 17 IM 760301 01 xi Contents Chapter 8 Storing and Recalling Data and Saving the Stored Data 8 1 Setting the Store Mode aea aa aa e Ee a cdl e aa a Ee
256. e Increase e When the voltage current mode is RMS the measurement range is increased if the data of measurement function Urms or Irms exceeds 110 of the current measurement range e If the peak value of the input signal exceeds 330 or 660 of the current measurement range when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively the range is increased e If all the installed input elements are selected all the element indicators are illuminated the measurement range is increased on all input elements when the range increase condition above of any input element is met e When a wiring unit is configured the measurement range is increased on all input elements in the wiring unit when the range increase condition above of any input element in the wiring unit is met e Range Decrease When the voltage current mode is RMS the range is decreased if the data of the measurement function Urms or Irms is less than or equal to 30 of the measurement range and Upk and Ipk is less than or equal to 300 or 600 of the next lower range when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively 1 When the voltage current mode is MEAN DC or RMEAN the measurement functions are Umn and Imn Udc and Idc or Urmn and Irmn respectively e If all the installed input elements are selected all the element indicators are illuminated the measurement range is decreased on all input elements when the range decrease condition above of all input elements is met
257. e Keys and the Keyboard e Testing the Keys Press the Test Exec soft key Press a key on the front panel The test for the pressed key is executed Press the 4 or gt cursor key The indicator lights one by one each time an arrow key is pressed 8 Press ESC twice to exit from the key test NO e Testing the Keyboard 9 Press the Soft Key soft key A keyboard appears 10 Operate the keyboard Check that the characters entered on the keyboard are correctly displayed in the entry box of the keyboard For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings Selftest Selftest lt lt lt lt lt KeyBoard Test gt gt gt gt gt a m INSERT CAPS B a Goo Test Exec Memory Test Tests whether the internal ROM and RAM are operating correctly If Pass is displayed it is operating correctly If Failed is displayed contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer e System Tests the RAM in the CPU ACQ RAM Tests the RAM that stores the waveform sampling data acquisition data Testing the Keys and Keyboard e Tests whether the front panel keys are operating properly If the name of the key being pressed appears on the screen it is operating correctly e If the indicator turns ON OFF when the 4 or p cursor is pressed the keys are operating correctly To exit from the key test press ESC twice e Ifth
258. e List Item dialog box 11 Press the Save soft key to display the Save Menu 12 Press the File List soft key to display the File List dialog box e Selecting the Save Destination Medium 13 Press the cursor keys to select the storage medium indicated by 14 Press SET to confirm the storage medium e Selecting the Save Destination Directory Perform this operation when directories are present on the medium 15 Press the cursor keys to select the save destination directory indicated by lt gt 16 Press SET to confirm the directory The selected medium directory is displayed in Path located above and to the left of the File List dialog box CSc A File List W gt File Name File 4 File Item Numeric Data Type Bsc Float M List Item File List Path PC_Card Space 127346688 byte File Name Size Date Attribute pc_card 1 gt gt NetWork 1 2005704715 10 21 2005704715 10 20 2005704715 10 19 F fr x 2005704715 10 19 i 2005704715 10 18 S ave 2005 04 15 10 18 i F 2005704715 10 18 NS J k 2005 04 15 10 17 Ji 2005 04 15 10 17 Save Exec Setting the File Name and Comment 17 Press the File Name soft key to display the Save dialog box 18 Press the cursor keys to select Auto Naming 19 Press SET to select ON or OFF 20 Press the cursor keys to select File Name 21 Press SET to display the keyboard 2
259. e Medium and Directory The explanation is the same as that given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory in section 9 3 e Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box The explanation is the same as that given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 e Properties The explanation is the same as that given in Properties in section 9 6 e Selecting the File Attribute The explanation is the same as that given in Selecting the File Attribute in section 9 6 e Renaming a Directory or File The method for setting the name when renaming a directory or file is the same as the explanation given in File Name and Comment in section 9 3 e Creating Directories You can create a new directory on the storage medium The method for setting the name when creating a directory is the same as the explanation given in File Name and Comment in section 9 3 Note You cannot change a directory attribute Ifa file with the same name already exists in the same directory the file cannot be renamed e Ifa directory with the same name already exists in the same directory the directory cannot be created The number of directories and files that can be displayed in the file list is 2500 If the number of directories and files in a directory exceeds 2500 the file list randomly displays 2500 of the directories and files e Files that do not have an archive
260. e Next2 3 soft key soft key Switching the Display in Normal Measurement Mode or Wide Bandwidth Harmonic Measurement Mode Carry out the procedure given in Enabling Normal Measurement or Wide Bandwidth Harmonic Measurement Mode on the previous page Switching between Normal Measurement Mode and Wide Bandwidth Harmonic Measurement Mode 1 Press HRM SET to display the Harmonics menu 2 Press the Freq Band soft key to select Normal or Wide Freq Band jormal Wide PLL Source Up Exec PLL Source Down Exec Min Order 0 fl el Max Order 100 Thd Formula 1 Total Measurement Mode Indication The measurement mode is displayed at the upper left of the screen as shown below Normal Mode Measurement mode E amp change items Urms1 Irms1 P1 A Uover Spd 11 4 1A Ioveri m Trq Integ Reset 100 659 y 0 56433 4 52 596 w 0 92591 rms PAGE YOKOGAWA _ Element TOT OOT STON OTS TGIINST Tr u1 150Vrms 11 1Arms _ Element2 _ U2 150vrms 12___1arms _ Element3 U3 150vrms 13 1arms _ Element4 U4 150vrms I4 1Arms Motor Spd 20v Trq 20v _Integ Reset_ Time IM 760301 01E 3 35 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 16 Switching the Measurement Mode and Display Normal Measurement IEC Harmonic Voltage fluctuation Mode Measurement Mode and flicker
261. e P watt hour returned to the power supply q Sum of positive and negative ampere hours q Sum of positive ampere hour q Sum of negative ampere hour WSZ Integration of SX WQz Integration of Q For details on the measurement functions of motor evaluation see section 1 10 in the Expansion Function User s Manual For details on the measurement functions of harmonic measurement see section 7 9 in the Expansion Function User s Manual 12 4 IM 760301 01E 12 4 Accuracy Voltage and Current Accuracy Item Specifications Accuracy accuracy at 6 months Conditions Temperature 23 5 C Humidity 30 to 75 RH Input waveform Sine wave Common mode voltage 0 V Line filter OFF power factor 1 Crest factor 3 After warm up time has passed Wired condition after zero level compensation or measurement range change f is the frequency Frequency Accuracy reading error measurement range error DC e Voltage input 0 05 of reading 0 05 of range e Current sensor input Current of a 30 A input element from direct input Current of a 2 A input element 0 05 of reading 0 05 of range 2 u A from direct input 0 1 Hz lt f lt 30 Hz 0 1 of reading 0 2 of range 30 Hz lt f lt 45 Hz 0 03 of reading 0 05 of range 45 Hz lt f lt 66 Hz e Voltage input 0 01 of reading 0 03 of range e Current sensor input e Current of a 30 A input element fr
262. e Stored Data CAUTION Do not remove the PC card or USB memory or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the PC card or USB memory is blinking This can damage the PC card or USB memory or destroy the data on it fa Cursor keys 4 gt a MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER um set measure prne source CURSOR O NULL MENU STORE SET MENU DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT OREMOTE NUMERIC wave r ITEM FORM U I P sone WP q USER evemenr ea RATE HOLD SINGLE CAL INTEG LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL LOCAL ED To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press SHIFT STORE STORE SET to display the Store Set menu 2 Press the Mode soft key to select Store 3 Press the Store to soft key to select Memory or File If you selected Memory proceed to When Saving Data That Has Already Been Stored on the next page If you selected File proceed to When Saving Data through a Store and Save Operation Sequence on page 8 16
263. e by cycle Split display Mode measurement mode Split display Numeric FFT Wave FFT Numeric Wave Numeric Bar OTHERS soft key OTHERS soft key Numeric Trend Math Cycle by Cycle Wave Bar Split display Wave Ternd Numeric Math Bar Trend If you change from IEC harmonic waveform computation FFT voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement or cycle by cycle measurement mode to normal measurement wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode the measurement mode that was valid before changing to IEC harmonic waveform computation FFT voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement or cycle by cycle measurement mode is enabled For example if you change from wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode to IEC harmonic mode and then press NUMERIC wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode is enabled not normal measurement mode Switching between Normal Measurement Mode and Wide Bandwidth Harmonic Measurement Mode Press the HRM SET key and switch using the Harmonics menu the gray yellow in the figure above 3 36 IM 760301 01E 3 16 Switching the Measurement Mode and Display Explanation You can select the display on the WT3000 as indicated below On models with the advanced computation option you can select the measurement mode and display in addition to normal measurement mode as shown on the next page e Display Modes in Normal Measurement Mode Normal measurement mode Display mode Without the advan
264. e display is not correct contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer IM 760301 01E 11 4 Checking the System Condition a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Saudis 5 Mi numeri WAVE l U 1 P S a a 9 all HOLD LOCAL Ea FU FI n SINGLE CAL v ITEM FORM l USER evemenr INTEG LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL ry AA Scala ine FLTER l AVG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above MO TOR FREQ the soft keys SET FILTER In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the pees cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE imace save STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 print _wisc_ Her MENU 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the System Overview soft key to display the System Overview window e oa o G 2 g f System Overvie System e Overview Model WT3000 760304 04 MV Motor Version e A l Version 3 01 DSP 5 5 5 5 ASIC 3 6 1 2 1 Initialize lt lt lt lt Element Configuration gt gt gt gt Q Settings Type Calibration Date Status Element1 1000V 30a 2005 12 15 14 47 34 OK OK 4 Element2 1000V 30A 48 02 OK OK Remote Element3 1
265. e display mode is Numeric Wave Numeric Bar 22 numeric data values for a single measurement function are displayed in two columns Dual List e When the display mode is Numeric 22 numeric data values each for two measurement functions are displayed in each column e When the display mode is Numeric Wave Numeric Bar 11 numeric data values each for two measurement functions are displayed in each column 1 Displayed only on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option For the procedure of changing the displayed items on the Single List or Dual List see chapter 7 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E e no data is displayed in places where the measurement function is not selected or where no numeric data is present If Urms Umn Udc Urmn Irms Imn Idc or Irmn exceeds 140 of the measurement range overrange OL is displayed e P shows overrange OL if the measured values of either the voltage or current exceeds 140 of the measurement range Ifthe measured or computed result cannot be displayed using the specified decimal position or unit overflow OF is displayed If Urms or Irms is less than or equal to 0 3 when the crest factor is set to 3 less than or equal to 0 6 if the crest factor is set to 6 or Umn Urmn Imn or Irmn is less than or equal to 2 of the measurement range when the crest factor is set to 3 less than or equal to 4 if t
266. e file size the date the file was saved the attribute the comment etc Note The following data is stored in the places where numerical data does not exist when saving the stored numerical data For ASCII files Characters NAN INF INF ERROR or blank 1 Measurement functions that are displayed as blank such as the Oth dc and 1st order values of pU and ql For Float files Ox7FC00000 0x7F800000 OxFF800000 or OxFFFFFFFE The number of directories and files that can be displayed in the file list is 2500 If the number of directories and files in a directory exceeds 2500 the file list randomly displays 2500 of the directories and files Files that do not have an archive attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not remove the archive attribute of the files saved by the WT3000 using your PC Up to 41 characters can be displayed in the path If the path exceeds 41 characters is displayed at the end of the character string File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COM9 and LPT1 to LPT9 The maximum number of files that can fit in one directory is 2500 If you need to save more than 2500 files change the directory or move the existing files to another directory You can view the stored data saved in Float format WTD using the File Reader Software on you PC and con
267. e files saved by the WT3000 using your PC Up to 41 characters can be displayed in the path If the path exceeds 41 characters is displayed at the end of the character string 9 32 IM 760301 01E 9 8 Copying Files CAUTION Do not remove the PC card or USB memory or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the PC card or USB memory is blinking This can damage the PC card or USB memory or desiroy the data on the it Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Si A NUMERIC WAVE U I P save veo HOLD l LOCAL Cursor keys SD a CAL v ITEM FORM USER Eeen INTEG i LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O Al scana Meren ave To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above MOTOR FREQ Do S the soft keys SET FILTER hamser measure prvc sourcs In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the CURSOR O NULL cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and Fie fimcesave f STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 1 Press FILE to display the File menu 2 Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List dialog box appear 3 Press the Function soft key to display the Function menu 4 Press the Copy sof
268. e internal or external protective earth wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective earth terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard e Do Not Operate with Defective Protective Grounding or Fuse Do not operate the instrument if the protective earth or fuse might be defective Also make sure to check them before operation Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard Do Not Remove Covers The cover should be removed by YOKOGAWA s qualified personnel only Opening the cover is dangerous because some areas inside the instrument have high voltages Ground the Instrument before Making External Connections Securely connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or to an external control unit If you are going to touch the circuit make sure to turn OFF the circuit and check that no voltage is present ee IM 760301 01E vii Conventions Used in This Manual Safety Markings Subheadings Unit The following markings are used in this manual to the instrument This symbol appears on the instrument to indicate that the user must refer to the user s manual for special instructions The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the user s manual to identify those instructions In the manual the symbol is used in conjunction with the wor
269. e it is easy to reverse the connection To minimize error when using a shunt type current sensor note the following points when connecting the external sensor cable Connect the shielded wire of the external sensor cable to the L side of the shunt output terminal OUT e Minimize the area created between the wires connecting the current sensor to the external sensor cable The effects due to the line of magnetic force caused by the measurement current and noise that enter this area of space can be reduced Shunt type current sensor Area of space created by the connection wires External sensor cable B9284LK sold separately gt WT3000 OUT L Shielded wire For a shunt type current sensor connect it to the power earth ground side as shown in the figure below If you have to connect the sensor to the non earth side use a wire that is thicker than AWG18 conductive cross sectional area of approx 1 mm between the sensor and the instrument to reduce the effects of common mode voltage Take safety and error reduction into consideration when constructing an external sensor cable Power meter LOAD e gt Shunt type current sensor When the circuit under measurement is not grounded and the signal is high in frequency or large in power the effects of the inductance of the connection cable for the shunt type current sensor become large In this case use an isolation sensor CT DC CT or clamp C
270. e left of all the elements and measurement functions are cleared indicating that all items will not be saved File K File Item File Item Numeric Numeric Data Type Data Type Bsq Float K Save Utility Utility List Ite Preset AII ON GJAII OFF Preset1 Preset2 Elem 1 GElem 2 Elem 3 GlElem 4 Guar wi itk Ost Wa otk Beck uo Ee io Rsk xs k ORpCk uhdf Ck hdf k Phdf k Gluthd uthf Oithf utif Oitif Qlu peak U peak 0 1 peak I peak Owe Owe Ow q Ii Time us wo a1 r2 3 r4 4r1 r r ra gui uj gui uk gui 1i ui 1j speed Torque syncSp Slip Elem Func gu ws Cycle by cycle measurement eui ik Pm r1 F2 r3 G4 G5 OF6 Or Ors F9 F10 OF 11 F 12 0 F 13 0 F 14 0 F 15 0 F 16 0 F 17 F 18 0 F 19 0 F20 ptk GAG Freq pc p thd het cfi Or List Item CBC Preset A11 ON A11 OFF Elem Elem 1 CElem 2 Elem 3 G Elem 4 Func gjFreq gu gs o Speed Torque e Selecting Only the Items That Are Preset during Normal Measurement Only Press the cursor keys to select Preset1 or Preset2 Press SET The buttons to the left of all the elements and measurement functions that are specified in Preset1 or Preset 2 are highlighted indicating that 6 7 the items will be saved Items specified in Preset Items specified in Preset2 Elem Func Preset GJAl ON JAI OFFG Preset1 Preset2 Elem 1 Elem
271. e maximum order for which the harmonic data is saved is the maximum harmonic order to be measured that is specified in the harmonic measurement option menu no data is stored for harmonic orders without data To store waveform display data set the display mode to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Bar or Wave Trend and display the waveform on the screen If the display mode is not set to one of these modes NAN is stored for the waveform data IM 760301 01E 8 3 Reservation Time and Alert Indication of Internal Memory Initialization Procedure fa Cursor keys MV scaunc mercer _ ave MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER MEASURE CURSOR NULL Fue mees f store MENU STORE SET print msc HELP MENU DISPLAY numeri WAVE ITEM amp ELEMENT U I P save UPDATE RATE HOLD WPlq TIME l FU FI n SINGLE LOWER ITEM ITEM FORM LOWER FORM USER ELEMENT USERSET ALL CAL INTEG Setting the Store Count Store Interval Store OREMOTE cS EJ To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and
272. e menu e Selecting the Item to Be Saved 2 Press the File Item soft key to display the File Item menu 3 Press one of the soft keys from Setup to Numeric or Acquisition to select the item to be saved Select Acquisition to save the power spectrum waveform data in FFT mode Select Numeric to save the measured data of cycle by cycle measurement mode If you selected Setup proceed to step 11 under Executing Aborting the Save Operation on page 9 10 If you selected Wave proceed to Selecting the Waveform Display Data on the next page If you selected Numeric proceed to Selecting the Numeric Data on the 9 8 If Acquisition is selected proceed to Selecting the Waveform Sampling Data on page 9 9 Displayed only to products with the advanced computation G6 option 4 File Item Setup S T Load Utility Numeric Acquisition Save Utility 9 6 IM 760301 01E 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data Numeric Data Waveform Sampling Data Selecting the Waveform Display Data Selecting the Type of Waveform Display Data to Be Saved 4 Press the Data Type soft key to display the Data Type menu 5 Press any of the soft keys from Binary to Float soft key to select the data type File Item Wave Data Type ll utility Selecting the Input Signals to Be Saved The input signal selection box appears only when
273. e of the measured voltage or current from the table below For details on the wiring methods see the respective sections e Measurement Method of Voltage When the voltage is less When the voltage than or equal to 1000 V exceeds 1000 V Voltage Direct input See section 3 9 Direct input is not possible wiring VT voltage transformer See section 3 11 e Measurement Method of Current When the voltage is less than or equal to 1000 V When the current is less When the current When the voltage than or equal to 30A exceeds 30 A exceeds 1000 V When the current is When the current less than or equal to 2 A exceeds 2A Direct input See section 3 9 Direct input is not possible Shunt type current sensor Shunt type current See section 3 10 sensors cannot be used Current Clamp type current sensor voltage output type See section 3 10 wiring Clamp type current sensor current output type See section 3 11 CT current transformer See section 3 11 e Notes when Replacing Other Power Meters with the WT3000 In three phase three wire systems 3P3W and three phase three wire systems 83P3W 3V3A three voltage three current systems the wiring system may be different between the WT3000 and another product another digital power meter due to the differences in whether the reference voltage used to measure the line voltage see appendix 4 is of S phase or T phase To make correct measurement
274. e synchronization source of input elements 1 2 and 3 to the same signal To facilitate this sort of configuration the synchronization source setting on the WT3000 is linked to the wiring unit of the wiring system when the independent setting of input elements is OFF If the independent setting of input elements see section 4 2 is turned ON the synchronization source of each input element in the wiring unit can be set independently Data update interval Measurement period e gt Synchronization source Input signal U1 Input signal U2 Input signal U3 gt Synchronization source setup example Input element 1 Input element 2 U1 or l1 Input element 3 IM 760301 01E App 29 x pu ddy Appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period e Setting the Synchronization Period When Measuring the Efficiency of a Power Conversion Device Power Transformer with Single Phase Input and Single Phase Output If a device that converts single phase AC power to single phase DC power is measured with input elements 1 and 2 set the synchronization source of input elements 1 and 2 to the voltage or current on the AC power end In the example shown in the figure below set the synchronization source of input element 1 and 2 to U1 or 11 In effect the measurement periods of input element 1 input end and input element 2 output end match and the power conversion e
275. e that the frequency of the synchronous source signal is being measured correctly according to the procedures given in sections 5 1 and 5 3 For a description of the synchronous source see appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period When the Data Update Rate Is 250 ms 500 ms 1 s or 2 s Computation is performed using EAMP Exponential Average for Measuring Period on the sampled data within the data update interval to calculate the measured value The EAMP method sets the measurement period to be the entire data update interval Computation including exponential average is performed by applying digital filtering on the sampled data in this measurement period This method does not require the input signal period to be detected accurately Therefore you do not have to set the synchronization source IM 760301 01E App 33 x pu ddy Appendix 8 Compensation Function This function compensates for the loss caused by the wiring of each element The WT3000 has the following three types of correction functions to measure the power and efficiency with high accuracy Wiring Compensation Efficiency Compensation Compensation for the Two Wattmeter Method Wiring Compensation This function compensates for the loss caused by the wiring of each element U I This is used when the voltage measurement circuit is connected to the load side The measured voltage is determined by subtracting the voltage applied to the current te
276. e these functions in their computation are also affected by the averaging For details regarding the determination of each measurement function see appendix 1 e U I P S andQ AF1 to 4 models with the delta computation function e Torque speed and Pm models with the delta computation function A gt Cfu Cfl Pc q q q WS WQ n1 to n4 are computed from the averaged P and Q Slip is computed from the averaged speed Measurement Functions of Harmonic Measurement Option e Turning ON OFF Averaging e Harmonic Measurement in Normal Measurement Mode e If averaging is turned ON and the averaging type is Exp exponential averaging averaging is performed on the measurement functions of harmonic measurement option e If averaging is turned ON but the averaging type is Lin moving averaging averaging is not performed on the measurement functions of harmonic measurement option e Wide Bandwidth Harmonic Measurement Mode When averaging is turned ON exponential averaging is performed on the measurement functions of harmonic measurement e IEC Harmonic Measurement Mode When averaging is turned ON exponential averaging is performed on the measurement functions of harmonic measurement IM 760301 01E 4 25 SUOI IPUOD JUSWaINSeS y gt 4 9 Selecting the Averaging Function e Setting the Attenuation Constant Harmonic Measurement in Normal Measurement Mode If averaging is turned ON and the averaging type
277. e when the power switch is turned ON turn OFF the power switch and check the following points That the power cord is securely connected e That the correct voltage is coming to the power outlet see section 3 3 Connecting the Power Supply e That the fuse is not blown see section 11 5 Replacing the Power Fuse e If the power switch is turned ON while holding down RESET the setup parameters are initialized to their factory default values For the initial settings see appendix 3 13 If the instrument still does not work properly when the power switch is turned ON after checking these items contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs IM 760301 01E 3 5 sjuowainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 4 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch For Making Accurate Measurements Allow the instrument to warm up for at least 30 minutes after turning ON the power switch Perform zero level compensation after warm up see section 10 1 Performing Zero Level Compensation Shutdown Operation The setup parameters that exist immediately before the power switch is turned OFF are stored in memory The same is true when the power cord gets disconnected from the outlet The next time the power switch is turned ON the instrument powers up using the stored setup parameters Note A lithium battery is used to retain the setup parameters When the lithium battery voltage falls below a certain level a message is displayed on the
278. eas Ite Order Reset Items Exec la Frequency Meas Item Freq 1 Freq 2 5 10 IM 760301 01E 5 3 Selecting the Frequency Measurement Source Explanation You can select two of the input signals of the installed elements to measure the frequency However there is no need to specify the frequency measurement signals on the models with the frequency measurement add on option because frequencies of all elements can be measured Thus the Frequency Meas Item soft key does not appear even when ITEM is pressed The frequency measurement source selection is invalid in cycle by cycle measurement mode Note ___ If the frequency measurement is not stable such as due to noise try using the frequency filter as explained in section 4 8 e Frequency cannot be detected if the AC amplitude is small For details on the detection level for frequency measurement see section 12 5 The measured data for the frequencies of input signals that are not specified for the frequency measurement are shown as no data IM 760301 01E JUSWISINSeD JOMOd 5 4 Procedure scarna merren ave MOTOR FREQ S HRM SET MEASURE fsync sourci RSOR NULL rue mese store MENU STORE SET print msc Her MENU DISPLAY rumen WAVE Setting the User Define
279. easurement see section 2 2 Measurement Function Types for Motor Evaluation Function Motor Version see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E and Measurement Function Types for Harmonic Measurement Option see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Selecting the Waveform Display Data to Be Stored Select the items for storing the waveform display data Only the input signals of the installed elements are applicable for the selection For models with the motor evaluation function motor version the input signals of Speed and Torque are also selectable items Note There are limitations on the setting and execution of the storage operation in measurement modes other than normal measurement mode For details see section 8 1 For the meanings of the measurement function symbols that are displayed see section 2 2 Measurement Functions and Measurement Periods 2 5 Computation 2 6 Integration appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions and Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E For details on the wiring units expressed as XA and B see section 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System no data is stored in places where there is no numeric data If there are no integrated values because integration is not performed no data is stored no data is also stored in places where there is no integration time Th
280. easurement mode to normal measurement mode or wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode There are limitations on the setting and execution of the storage operation in measurement modes other than normal measurement mode To store waveform display data set the display mode to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Trend or Wave Bar2 and display the waveform on the screen For the setup procedure see section 6 1 1 Displayed only to products with the advanced computation G6 option 2 Displayed only on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option Starting the Storage Operation 1 Press SHIFT STORE STORE SET to display the Store Set menu 2 Press the Mode soft key to select Store 3 Press the Store to soft key to select Memory 4 Press STORE The storage operation starts according to the following conditions depending on the store mode see section 8 1 During manual mode Starts the storage operation When STORE is pressed the first storage operation is executed The STORE key illuminates and Store Start is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen During real time mode The WT3000 enters store ready state The STORE key blinks and Store Ready is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen When the reservation time for starting the storage operation is reached the first storage operation starts The STORE key illuminates and Store Start is displayed in the upper left c
281. easurement range If multiple input elements with maximum measurement range exist the settings of the input element with the smallest input element number takes precedence e The synchronization source setting is changed to match the setting of the input element with the smallest input element number among the input elements included in the wiring unit IM 760301 01E 4 3 Input Procedure Setting the Measurement Range for Direct ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE To exit the menu during operation press ESC SENSOR RATIO CURRENT RANGE located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the D MEASURING l WIRING INPUT INFO RMS MEAN FX DC RMEAN MODE AUTO MEASURING MODE phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the DISPLAY procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 ITEM amp ELEMENT E Furm OREMOTE SINGLE ITEM LOWER ITEM FORM LOWER FORM USER USER SET ELEMENT O AL CAL a r Selecting the Target Element 1 Press ELEMENT to select the target element The corresponding element indicator above of the ELEMENT key illuminates To select all elements press SHIFT ELEMENT ALL e Setting the Voltage Range 2 P
282. ect the input signal you wish to set 4 Press SET The button to the left of the selected input signal is highlighted and the corresponding waveform is displayed If the highlighting of the button is cleared the waveform of that input signal is no longer displayed Only the input signals corresponding to the installed elements are displayed The waveform display can be turned ON OFF for those input signals For models with the motor evaluation function motor version the waveform display for Speed and Torque input signals can be turned ON OFF through this procedure 6 4 IM 760301 01E 6 3 Procedure Setting the Time Axis VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE eer ALL D INPUT INFO a MEASURING DISPLAY MEASURING ITEM amp ELEMENT SENSOR RATIO 1808 AUTO OREMOTE numeric WAVE OTHERS ITEM FORM USER wie S Q A ELEMENT SINGLE CAL LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL UPDATE RATE HOLD INTEG c Q Q gt rr SHIFT tlie Press FORM to display the Wave Form menu If the waveform display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM 2 Press the cursor keys to set the time axis When the display of scale values is turned ON see section 6 8 the times at the left end fixed to 0 s and the right end of the s
283. ect the target waveform appears Press the cursor keys to select any of the elements wiring units starting with U1 Press SET to confirm the new target waveform Selecting the Target Waveform for Cursor x Press the Wave C2 Trace soft key A box used to select the target waveform appears Press the cursor keys to select any of the elements wiring units starting with U1 Press SET to confirm the new target waveform e Selecting the Movement Path of the Cursor 6 7 Press the Cursor Path soft key to display the Cursor Path menu Press any of the soft keys from Max to Mid to select the movement path Moving the Cursor 8 Press the Wave C1 Wave C2 x soft key to set the cursor target to Wave C1 Wave C2 x or both Wave C1 and Wave C2 x e If you select Wave C1 the position of cursor can be moved e If you select Wave C2 x the position of cursor x can be moved e If you select both Wave C1 and Wave C2 x the two cursors can be moved without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specified by Wave C1 changes Press the cursor keys to move the cursor Cursor Cursor Cursor Cursor Set u2 u3 u4 Speed Math1 Wave Cursor Wave Cursor PFF ON PFF ON WaveC1 Trace Wave Cursor Wave Cursor PFF o PE o WaveC1 Trace WaveC1 Trace ul ul ul M WaveC2 Trace WaveC2 Trace M WaveC2 Trace 11
284. ecting the minimum measurement range that does not meet the conditions below The input peak over range indicator at the top center of the screen illuminates or blinks The measured values of the voltage and current indicate over range OL e For the list of the ranges and transformation ratios of all input elements see section 3 17 Displaying the Setup Parameter List You can change the measurement range and the external current sensor transformation ratio with the list displayed However for input elements whose current measurement range is not set to external current sensor input range the change in the transformation ratio is not applied to the list display 4 14 IM 760301 01E 4 5 Setting the Scaling Function When Using VT CT Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Sm A NUMERIC WAVE UILIP sane UPDATE HOLD Loca C a gt oTHERs weg ruven SINGLE v rem FORM USER evemenr INTEG srr LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys Scaunc merrer _ave_ grr FREQ FILTER In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the CURSOR NULL cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE iuace save STORE J char
285. ection 3 14 WPiq gt TIME Furm SINGLE CAL ITEM FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL a AA z ale Press FORM to display the Wave Form menu If the waveform display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM 2 Press the Display Setting soft key to display the Disp Setting menu e Selecting Whether to Interpolate the Display 3 Press the Interpolate soft key to select or s Wave For Wave Form Format M Format Single Single fa Time div Time div Sms Sms g i Trigger Trigger H Display gt Settings g Wave Mapping 6 18 IM 760301 01E 6 7 Selecting the Display Interpolation and Graticule e Changing the Graticule 3 Press the Graticule soft key to select Ld Or Wave Form Format Single S Time div Sms q Trigger LDisp Settings Interpolate a fl Explanation For functional details see section 2 7 Selecting Whether to Interpolate the Display When there are less than 500 points of sampled data on the time axis the area between the display points rasters is no longer continuous This function interpolates between the points to display the waveforms You can select the measurement range from the foll
286. eee 2 20 5 6 5 28 App 17 phase difference display format Of eee eee eee 5 28 PING nainn sda ssdees cuted ar Ea 9 23 POSION aeriana ainai adair ais i a aeaiia 2 28 6 13 Post Script power coefficient Setting Of ccceeeeseeeeeeteeeteeeeeeeeeees 4 16 power consumption maximum 12 16 POW F CON sirisser irsinin ina iiaeaa EE ii power factor 5 6 App 20 POWO JUSO sccsicccsesteneciczecessscsvasesosiecseersseissccessseasensstereess 11 10 fotone e E E A ssasesanscnistesscstts App 24 power range 4 9 4 10 POWGSP SUPPIY is toserncticcrecakcne chs cred sassesskcrdeisdsatencorssabeadtrecadeacs 3 4 power switch turning ON OFF Of seeen 3 5 PreSe tl siesciscccscsececccsscssscecresesossecse Preset2 ELAI E E T A E 2 36 properties 8 16 9 28 PIODGIY o einstan narua re ENEE AEEA 8 16 9 28 protective grounding eee cece eee eeeeeteaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 3 4 rated supply voltage eee seeeseseeeeeseseeeseeseenereaneeaeeees 12 16 rated supply voltage frequency eee cece eee eeeeeeeeeees 12 16 reactive POWET ou eee eeee eects reactive power equation for eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeteeeees 5 25 Real Time ccceesseeeeeeeeeee 8 2 8 9 Real Time CONTI szsccccsevi052 sec soisin atni 5 42 8 9 real time normal integration mode 5 30 5 41 real time repetitive integration mode 5 30 5 41 far panel ori
287. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeaeeseeeesaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeeieeseaeeseeeeeaees viii Flow of Operation ca isiec EE ai ee tes eee aL loaded apie dhe ac a deb lagi asia hae ix Chapter 1 Names and Functions of Parts 1 1 1 2 1 3 Front Panel Rear Panel and Top Panel ccccccsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteseneeeeeeeeeeaaees 1 1 Setup Menu Display Key and Execution Key cccceeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeenaeens 1 3 Display Screen sesa ed Ndi ed eaten dni atleast aed 1 10 Chapter 2 Functional Description 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 System Configuration and Block Diagram ceccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeteaeeeeeeteatens 2 1 Measurement Modes and Measurement Functions cceesseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeseeeeeneeereneeees 2 3 Measurement Conditions cccceeseeseeeeseeeseeteaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeesaeenaeesaaeeeaeeseaeeeseeseaeeeeeteas 2 9 Power Measurement 22 isecccictctanjecestascieesci aanaeio ra paara hiep aidha esw Aasa EEA PEFEA E SRECA ESSES 2 15 COMPUTATION wis ceinen a a a al e a eee ted 2 17 No leee a EE EPA EET AE A T 2 21 Waveform Display fi e E ced een ee eid che a a aa a a a a ea aei a ec 2 24 Trend Bar Graph and Vector Displays cccceecceeeeeeeeeeeneeteaeeeeeeeeaeeseeeseaeessaeeeeeesaten 2 31 Waveform Computation and FFT ccesceseceeseeeeeceneeceeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesieeeeaeeseeeeeas 2 33 Voltage Fluctuation and Fli
288. eeeeeesaeeeeaneesesaeeneseaeesseeeesennenes 1 11 6 Recommended Replacement Parts c ceeesceeeeseeeeesneeeeeneeeseneeeessaeeeeeeeeseneeeeneaeeeee 1 xii IM 760301 01 Contents Chapter 12 Specifications TAr NAPUt SOCOM sce cc cece dca gecckie e oen eea E erea a aea ESTEA 12 1 12 2 Display oracino a a E aAa A a aAa cl EE Ea EEO EENE 12 2 12 3 Measurement Functions Measurement Items Related to Normal Measurement 12 3 12 4 ACCUrACY cieto iinan id raapi riia aa EA EEr EA R EANA EENE EEEa 12 5 125 RUMCUONS iiestes sazetdcescnhesseecs sabecececceancciena qetidaxaebdedsssdcapsteentietlagsdedseaguepusispsdeseetaasbiceteya eee 12 9 12 6 Input Output of the Master Slave Synchronization Signal c eee eee 12 13 12 7 External Clock INDUt eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeseeeseaeeeeeseaeeseeeseeete 12 13 12 8 Storage esta accident AeA einai enti tele 12 14 12 9 USB PERIPHERAL Interface 0 0 0 ecceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseaeeeaeeseaeeeeeeteaeeseaeeeaeete 12 14 12 10 GP IB Intefa tE ruini anea onlin eaten 12 15 12 11 Safety Terminal Adapter 20 0 2 eee eee eee cee eee tee tee see e eae saeseeenaeseeesoeseeseeeaetaees 12 15 12 12 General Specifications scstve ieck Aah sieteinthi de nadie add neds 12 16 12 13 External DIM nsions ssimic rar aniria aaan 12 18 Appendix Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions ceeeeeee App 1 A
289. eforms etc The cutoff frequency is selectable Frequency Filter The frequency filter is inserted into the frequency measurement input circuit and affects frequency measurements If the display update rate of the WT3000 is set to 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or 20 s it affects the detection of the measurement period for voltage current and power measurements see section 4 7 and appendix 6 In addition if the data update rate is as indicated above the frequency filter is also used to accurately detect the zero crossing see section 2 2 and appendix 6 The frequency filter is not inserted into the voltage current and power measurement input circuit Therefore the measured values include high frequency components even when the frequency filter is turned ON IM 760301 01E 2 3 Measurement Conditions Averaging For procedures see section 4 9 The averaging function is effective when reading of the numeric display is difficult due to fluctuations This occurs when the fluctuation of the power supply or the load is large or when the input signal frequency is low e Measurement Functions of Normal Measurement Two types exponential average and moving average are available e Exponential Average The numeric data can be exponentially averaged using a specified attenuation constant Averaging is performed according to the following equation Dn Dnt ot Mina Da 1 K Dn Displayed value that has been exponentially averaged n time
290. egration is not performed Approx 8 K 4xDn 16xnumber of storage operations When integration is performed Approx 4K 8xDn 16 16xTi xnumber of storage operations Dn Number of numerical data to be stored Number of measurement functionsx number of elements number of wiring units Ti Number of integration time to be stored Extension and Data Size of the Waveform Display Data File Data Type Extension Data Size Bytes ASCII CSV Approx 115 K condition when there is one waveform to be stored store count 10 Float WTD Approx 4K 8x1002xTw 16 xnumber of storage operations Tw is the number of waveforms to be stored Selecting the Medium and Directory The save destination medium and directory are displayed in the File List dialog box Currently selected medium and directory jemory to File ee Ne List Path PC_Card Power Space 127776768 byte File Name Size Date Attribute la A tpc_card J File Name NetWork 1 TEST r lt 2005 05 24 13 07 lt Power_T3 2005 05 24 13 00 lt Power_T2 2005 05 24 13 00 lt Power_T1 2005 05 24 12 58 g Property Filter all Directory Display Example of Storage Media PC_Card PC card USB2 USB memory option with ID number 2 NetWork Network drive option see Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 515 8 18 IM 760301 01E 8 5 Saving the Stored Data
291. egration time Auto stop Reset Abort Reset 1 Abort Restart Start Restart Integration i i value i i i i lt Time specified for the timer Integration i i time START STOP START STOP RESET START RESET 5 30 IM 760301 01E 5 11 Integration e Limitations on the Start Stop and Reset of Integration by Measurement Modes Integration cannot be started stopped or reset in measurement modes other than normal measurement mode Wide bandwidth harmonics measurement IEC harmonic measurement waveform computation FFT voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement and cycle by cycle measurement modes are available e Display Related to Integration Normal Mode Uover Spd U1 1000Vrms yoKocawa Integ Reset lover Trq Integ Reset 2 p Displays Reset when the Urms1 Page integrated value is reset and integration can be started 0 1 0778 me Integ Start Displays Start and the elapsed Stop time of integration when integration unt 1 6532 4 i 0 1650 w M 0 92619 Update 71 is in progress Reset Integ Stop Displays Stop and the elapsed time of integration when integration is aborted canceled or done TOTOOT ST OO TGSINST 1718 LLEEL Integ Set Integ Ready Displays Ready when ready in real time integration mode Note In addition to Reset Start Stop and Ready as displays for indicating
292. elect a fast data update rate To capture relatively low frequency signals select a slow data update rate The WT3000 automatically selects the computing method from the two averaging computations below according to the data update rate For details see appendix 7 e When the Data Update Rate Is 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or 20s Computation is performed using ASSP Average for the Synchronous Source Period on the sampled data within the data update interval to calculate the measured value However integrated power WP as well as integrated current q during DC mode are excluded This method requires the period of the assigned synchronous source signal to be detected accurately Check to see that the frequency of the synchronous source signal is being measured correctly according to the procedures given in sections 5 1 and 5 3 For a description of the synchronous source see appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period e When the Data Update Rate Is 250 ms 500 ms 1 s or 2s Computation is performed using EAMP Exponential Average for Measuring Period on the sampled data within the data update interval to calculate the measured value This method does not require the input signal period to be detected accurately Hold For procedures see section 4 11 The data display of each measurement function can be held The communication output data while the display is held is the held numeric data Single Measurement For procedures see
293. electable wiring systems vary depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 2 3 Measurement Conditions IM 760301 01E 3 17 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 10 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the Current Sensor Note After wiring the wiring system must be selected See section 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System The thick lines on the wiring diagrams are the sections where the current flows Use appropriate wires that are suitable for the current To measure the apparent power and power factor more accurately on an unbalanced three phase circuit it is recommended that a three phase three wire system three voltage three current system 3P3W 3V3A be used to make the measurement The current sensor input transformation function can be used to transform the input signal to data that correspond to direct measurements For the setup procedure see section 4 4 Setting the Measurement Range When Using the Current Sensor Note that the frequency and phase characteristics of the current sensor affect the measured data Make sure you have the polarities correct when making the connections Otherwise the polarity of the measurement current will be reversed and correct measurements cannot be made Be especially careful when connecting the clamp type current sensor becaus
294. ensor should have enough withstand voltage with respect to the voltage being measured Using a bare sensor is dangerous because you might accidentally come in contact with it e When using a shunt type current sensor as an external current sensor turn OFF the circuit under measurement Connecting or removing a sensor while the power is ON is dangerous When using a clamp type current sensor as an external current sensor have a good understanding of the voltage of the circuit under measurement and the specifications and handling of the clamp type sensor Then confirm that there are no shock hazards e For safety reasons when using the instrument on a rack mount furnish a switch for turning OFF the circuit under measurement from the front side of the rack After connecting the measurement cable attach the current input protection cover using the screws provided for your safety Make sure that the conductive parts are not exposed from the protection cover IM 760301 01E sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 5 Wiring Precautions e To make the protective functions effective check the following items before applying the voltage or current of the circuit under measurement e That the power cord provided with the instrument is used to connect to the power supply and the instrument is grounded e That the power switch of the instrument is turned ON e That the current input protective cover provided with the instrument is being used
295. ent When the maximum current exceeds 2 Arms 30 A input element When the maximum current exceeds 30 Arms Current sensor output type Inthe wiring example in this section a shunt type current sensor or a clamp type current sensor that outputs voltage can be used for an external current sensor When using the clamp type current sensor that outputs current see section 3 11 Connecting to the Input Terminal e Voltage Input Terminal The terminal is a 4 mm safety banana jack female Insert the safety terminal the conductive parts are not exposed into the voltage input terminal When using the 758931 Safety Terminal Adapter that comes with the package see section 3 6 e External Current Sensor Input Terminal Connect an external sensor cable with the BNC connector B9284LK sold separately to the external current sensor input connector Remove the measurement cable connected to the current input terminal Because the current sensor input terminal and the current input terminal are connected internally connecting both terminals simultaneously not only results in measurement errors but also may cause damage to the instrument In addition when the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current sensor input terminal do not touch the current input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems The s
296. equencies that are valid for the integration are as follows Integrated Item Valid Frequency Range for Integration Active power DC to 100 kHz Current When integrating Ims DC lower limit of frequency determined by the data update rate to 100 kHz When integrating Imn DOC lower limit of frequency determined by the data update rate to 100 kHz When integrating Idc DC to 100 kHz When integrating Imn DC lower limit of frequency determined by the data update rate to 100 kHz 5 32 IM 760301 01E 5 11 Integration Display Resolution The maximum display resolution of the integration value is 999999 When the integrated value reaches 1000000 counts the decimal point shifts automatically For example if 0 001 mWh is added to 999 999 mWh the display shows 1 00000 Wh Display When Integration Overflow Occurs If either of the conditions below is met the integration is stopped and the integration time and integration value are held The integration time reaches the maximum integration time 10000 hours e The integration value of WP q WS or WQ reaches the maximum or minimum integration value given below Maximum Minimum Displayed Integration Value Active power WP 999999 MWh Current q 999999 MAh Apparent power WS 999999 MVAh Reactive power WQ 999999 Mvarh Integration When MAX Hold Function Is Enabled The integration value is determined and displayed by summing the value that is measured a
297. er Method Compensations 5 22 Setting the Equations for Apparent Power Reactive Power and Corrected Power 5 25 Selecting the Display Format of the Phase Difference ccccccesseeeeeeneeeseeeeeeseeeees 5 28 Integratori scorrono aa eaa aaan E aae e a a a aa aeaaaee iiA 5 30 Setting the Manual Integration eceeceeeeeseeeeneeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaeesaaeeeaeesseeeeaeesseeeeieeeeeeesaees 5 35 Setting the Normal Integration and Repetitive Integration eceeseeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 5 38 Setting the Real Time Integration and Real Time Repetitive Integration 8 5 41 Turning ON OFF the Integration Auto Calibration ccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetneeeeaeeeneeeeas 5 45 Chapter 6 Waveform Display 6 1 6 2 6 3 A 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 Waveform DISplay scse csseicccel isani aaa a aa aai aap Eaa aa aa Eiaa iaaah 6 1 Selecting the Waveform to Be Displayed c ceecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeteaeeeeeeteaten 6 3 Setting the Time AXiS eecceesceeeseeeseeteneeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeesaeesaeessaeseaeeesaeeeaeeseeeeeeseaeeeaeess 6 5 Setting the Trigger esceeecceesecseeseeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeaeeseeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeesaeeseaeesieeseaeessaeeeeeenaeee 6 7 Zooming Vertically and Moving the Vertical Position 00 0 eeeeeeneeesneeeeeneeerenneeeneneees 6 12 Waveform Display on Divided WiINdOWS eesseeesneeeeseeeeeeneeeteneeeeeneeeeeeeesenneeeneneees 6 15 Selecting th
298. eral Specifica tions Item Specifications Emission Complying standard EN61326 Class A EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 AS NZS CISPR 11 This product is a Class A for industrial environment product Operation of this product in a residential area may cause radio interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference Cable condition e External sensor input terminal Use the B9284LK External Sensor Cable e EXT CLK MEAS START TORQUE motor version SPEED motor version terminal Use a BNC cable e GP IB interface connector Use a shielded GP IB cable e RS 232 interface option connector Use a shielded RS 232 cable e D A OUTPUT option connector Use a shielded cable e RGB VIDEO OUT option connector Use a 15 pin D sub shielded VGA cable e Devices that are easily affected by noise may be affected by the conducted interference generated from the cables used for measurements that are connected to the WT3000 In such case th user is required to correct the interference e USB port PC option Use shielded USB cables USB port peripheral devices option Use a USB keyboard with a shielded cable Ethernet option connector Use category 5 Ethernet cables or better cables e Immunity Complying standard EN61326 Annex A Influence in the immunity environment Signal input Within 20 of range within 40 of range if the crest factor is set to 6 D A output
299. es When moving the instrument hold the handle on each side of the instrument as shown below When Wiping off Dirt When cleaning the case or the operation panel first turn OFF the circuit under measurement and the instrument and remove the instrument s power cord from the outlet Do not use volatile chemicals since this might cause discoloring and deformation IM 760301 01E sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 2 Installing the Instrument Installation Conditions Install the instrument indoors that meets the following conditions Storage Location Flat Even Surface If the instrument is not installed on a stable horizontal surface the printer s recording quality may degrade and precise measurements may be impeded Well Ventilated Location Inlet Vent holes are located on the top and bottom of the instrument To prevent internal overheating allow at least 20 mm of space around the inlet and vent holes When connecting measurement wires and other various cables or when opening or closing the built in printer cover allow extra space for operation Ambient Temperature and Humidity Ambient temperature 5 to 40 C Ambient humidity 20 to 80 RH when the printer is not used 35 to 80 RH when using the printer No condensation in either case Do not install the instrument in the following places e Indirect sunlight or near heat sources e Where an excessive amount of soot steam dust or corrosive gas is present e
300. es on the corresponding elements are set to the same range 2 10 IM 760301 01E 2 3 Measurement Conditions Scaling For procedures see sections 4 4 and 4 5 When applying current signals via an external current sensor or applying voltage or current signals via the external VT voltage transformer or CT current transformer the transformation ratio or coefficient can be specified e When Applying Current Signals via an External Current Sensor The output of current sensors that output voltage such as shunts and clamps can be input to the current sensor connector EXT and measured Set how many millivolts the current sensor outputs when 1 A of current flows transformation ratio Then the input signal can be made to correspond to the numeric data or waveform display data that are obtained when the current is directly applied to the input terminals Measurement Function Transformation Data before Transformation Ratio Transformation Result Current E Is current sensor output Is E Active power P E Ps Ps E Apparent power S E Ss Ss E Reactive power Q E Qs Qs E Max Min current value Ipk E lpks current sensor output Ipks E e When Applying Voltage or Current Signals via an External VT or CT e VT ratio and CT ratio The input signal can be converted into numeric data or waveform display data of the voltage or current before transformation by setting the VT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient coefficie
301. ess length 1 m measurement lead 366925 1 42 V or less length 2 m External sensor cable B9284LK 1 For connecting the current sensor input connector of the WT3000 length 0 5 m Conversion adapter 758924 1 BNC 4 mm socket adapter rated voltage 500 V Serial port adapter 366971 1 9 pin 25 pin adapter 1 EIA 574 Standard 2 ElA 232 Standard RS 232 Measurement lead 758917 Safety terminal adapter set 758923 kp Alligator clip adapter set Fork terminal Alligator clip adapter set 758922 Pi Safety terminal adapter set 758931 e BNC cable External sensor cable 758929 adapter set 366924 1 m B9284LK BB w 366925 2 m Conversion Serial port adapter adapter 758924 Spare Parts Sold Separately The spare parts below are available for purchase separately Item Model Quantity Note Part No Printer roll paper B9316FX 10 One roll is one set thermal sensitive paper total length 10 m Power fuse A1463EF 2 250 V 6 3 A time lag IM 760301 01E Safety Precautions This instrument is an IEC safety class 01 instrument provided with a terminal for protective earth grounding The general safety precautions described herein must be observed during all phases of operation If the instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual the protection provided by the instrument may be impaired Yokogawa Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these req
302. ess the USB soft key to display the USB menu 3 Press the Keyboard soft key to select ENG or JPN Set the language when entering file names comments and other items from the USB keyboard see section 3 15 on models with the USB port peripheral devices option The following keyboards conforming to USB Human Interface Devices HID Class Ver1 1 can be used e ENG 104 keyboard JPN 109 keyboard The character that is entered through each key of the USB keyboard varies depending on the keyboard type For details see appendix 9 Note For USB keyboards that have been tested for compatibility contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer USB K Device List gt Keyboard PN ENG USB D A Output Items IM 760301 01E 3 43 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 Chapter 4 Measurement Conditions Selecting the Wiring System 4 1 Procedure ELEMENT eer ALL INPUT INFO OO OO VOLTAGE RANGE MEASURING DISPLAY 2 CURRENT RANGE ITEM amp ELEMENT MEASURING SENSOR RATIO 4 OREMOTE rumen WAVE OTHERS ITEM FORM wie S Q A USER ELEMENT UPDATE FDATI HOLD men CAL INTEG LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL 1 Press WIRING to display the Wiring menu Selecting the Wiring System Pattern 2 Pr
303. ess the Wiring Setting soft key to display the Wiring Setting dialog box 3 Press the cursor keys to select the target element Example in which four elements are installed Wiring Settin Element kl I 2J J 41 1P2W 1 1P2w 1 1P2W J 1P2W J LOCAL p 4 Press SET The pattern selection window opens 5 Press the cursor keys to select the pattern 6 Press SET to confirm the new pattern Example in which four elements are installed Wiring Settin Element 1_ Ge 3_ 1 4 C 1p2w 1p2w 1 3P3W 3P4W 3P3Ww 3V3A C 1P2W J E 1P2w J SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 IM 760301 01E 4 1 SUOI IPUOD puswNSeaN gt 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System Explanation e Wiring System Pattern e The five wiring systems below are available Limitations are placed on the wiring systems that can be selected depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument 1P2W single phase two wire 1P3W single phase three wire 3P3W three phase three wire 3P4W three phase four wire and
304. ess the cursor keys to select one of the reservation year month date hour minute and second boxes for specifying when the integration operation will start 13 Press SET to display the entry box 14 Press the cursor keys to set the year month date hour minute or second that you selected in step 12 15 Press SET or ESC to close the box 16 Repeat steps 12 to 15 to set the year month date hour minute and second 17 Press the cursor keys to select one of the reservation year month date hour minute and second boxes for specifying when the integration operation will end 18 Repeat steps 13 to 16 to set the year month date hour minute and second Integ Set M Mode R Normal q Timer Setting Integ Start _2005 _01 01 00 J _00_ _00 Real Time Integ End 2005 pLo y Lo Lo1J LooJ Loo Control y eal Time Control Integ Start 2 2005 a a 00 Integ End 2 01 01 L00 L00 Auto Cal PFF ON Rated Time D A Output 5 42 IM 760301 01E 5 14 Setting the Real Time Integration and Real Time Repetitive Integration Integrating in Real time Normal Integration Mode or Real time Repetitive Integration Mode e Starting the Integration 19 Press INTEG to display the Integ menu 20 Press the START soft key The START indicator to the right of the INTEG key illuminates and the instrument enters the ready condition
305. etting ccceeececeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeseeeeeeeees 5 36 5 39 5 42 top panel total harmonic distortion cee eee eeeeeee teens App 21 Trend C1 Trend C2 x Trend Cursor nei r e e Trend Cursor Setting a Trend Disp homs i ieee isevsliecenecdccecsbecsnctesutveieendehevabcrasnnede Trend Display ssiri iiaaaeaoe rieda saena aiena trend display Trend Scale storage location trigger slope storage medium trigger source storage medium and directory selection Of 9 18 true rms value storage medium information sesesseseeseereeriererrrerrerrrereens 9 5 storage operation stopping of BZ YPE vssesssstsesssesesssesessteeasseeesseenssseessssseasseeessssessseeessseensseas Storage Starting Of ccc eesesessreseseesseeseseeeseeseneerseneeeeeess 8 13 StOFe ee 2 35 8 1 8 11 Store COUNT kirara tle ie r ESEE EE 8 7 St r interval sessie ra erisa aiee satii saben ss 8 8 U SUOLCATOMN carat cee rreo na AEE EEEN EATER IEO AE RIA 8 3 STOLE MOG EETA A EA E A E E EE 8 1 E EEA IPEE AEE ey E E T store reservation TIME ssssneiesisieeinieeisienisnisnrnnsnrenrnnne 8 9 UFPR Toone pin en eenas erae aee riae ENE STORE SET ceecccceeceeeeeee 8 1 8 3 8 7 8 11 8 14 8 21 W Pk iets Ae ee eee ee Store Settings sz a teeta eed eects AE 8 1 8 3 8 7 UPDATE RATE 5 Store tO aaae 8 11 8 14 Upper Stalgas niaii a sto
306. example Input element 1 U1 or 11 Input element 2 U2 or 12 U3 or 13 Input element 3 To measure the input output efficiency with high accuracy without being affected by the synchronization source setting such as in this case or in the power measurement or efficiency measurement of aforementioned devices set the data update rate of the WT3000 to 250 ms 500 ms 1 s or 2 s Because the measured value is computed from the Exponential Average for Measuring Period method described on the next page the period of the input signal does not need to be detected Note The measurement period for the numeric data of the maximum value Peak for voltage and current is the entire span within the data update period regardless of the measurement period specified above Therefore the measurement period for the measurement functions U pk U pk I pk I pk CfU and Cfl that are determined from the maximum value of the voltage and current is also the entire span within the data update period The measurement period of measurement functions of harmonic measurement is from the beginning of the data update interval to 9000 points at the harmonic sampling frequency regardless of the measurement period specified above IM 760301 01E App 31 x pu ddy Appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period When the Data Update Rate Is Set to 250 ms 500 ms 1s or 2 s The measurement period is set equal to the data update interv
307. f range 2 u A x voltage reading 0 1 Hz f lt 30 Hz 0 2 of reading 0 3 of range 30 Hz lt f lt 45 Hz 0 05 of reading 0 05 of range 45 Hz lt f lt 66 Hz Current sensor input Current of a 30 A input element from direct input Current of a 2 A input element from direct input at the 500 mA to 2 A range 0 02 of reading 0 04 of range Current of a 2 A input element from direct input at the 5 mA to 200 mA range 0 05 of reading 0 05 of range 66 Hz lt f lt 1kHz 0 05 of reading 0 05 of range 1 kHz lt f lt 10 kHz 0 15 of reading 0 1 of range 10 kHz lt f lt 50 kHz 0 3 of reading 0 2 of range 50 kHz lt f lt 100 kHz 0 014 x f of reading 0 3 of range 100 kHz lt f lt 500 kHz 0 012 x f of reading 1 of range 500 kHz lt f s 1 MHz 0 048 x f 19 of reading 2 of range The unit of f in the read error equation is kHz For temperature changes after zero level compensation or range change add voltage influence x current influence to the DC accuracy For details on voltage and current influence see page 12 5 For self generated heat caused by current input on an AC input signal add the following values to the power accuracy e 2 A input element e 30 A input element 0 004 x 1 of reading 0 00002 x 1 of reading For self generated heat caused by current input on a DC input signal ad
308. f the crest factor is set to 3 the upper and lower limits of the waveform display screen correspond to three times the measurement range if scaled the range after scaling of the voltage current that is set for each element Likewise if the crest factor is set to 6 the upper and lower limits correspond to six times the measurement range The trigger level setting is void when the trigger source is set to Ext Clk e Measurement range 100 Vrms when the crest factor is 3 50 Vrms when the crest factor is 6 e Trigger level 25 100 300 Vpk T Input zero line Vertical center Trigger level 25 75 V 100 300 Vpk 6 10 IM 760301 01E 6 4 Setting the Trigger Note To prevent erroneous operation caused by noise the trigger function uses approximately 2 hysteresis if the crest factor is set to 3 For example if the trigger slope is set to 4 a trigger occurs if the input signal passes through the trigger level on the rising edge after the input signal level falls approximately 2 below the trigger level The trigger function uses approximately 4 hysteresis if the crest factor is set to 6 The trigger function for waveform display does not work while integration is in progress or is suspended Therefore the start position of the waveform display the signal level at the left end of the screen may not be stable In addition the measurement period of the
309. f the measurement function of the element will be saved When the highlighting of the button is cleared the numeric data of the measurement function of the element will not be saved Proceed to step 10 on page 9 10 Selecting the Waveform Sampling Data e Selecting the Type of Waveform Sampling Data to Be Saved 4 Press the Data Type soft key to display the Data Type menu 5 Press one of the keys from Binary to Float to select the data type File File Item M File Item m LER Data Type Binary utility Utility e Selecting the Input Signals to Be Saved The input signal selection box appears only when you select Float in step 5 When the data type is set to Binary or ASCII the waveform that is displayed on the screen is saved 6 Press the Save soft key to display the Save Menu menu 7 Press the Trace soft key to display the input signal selection box 8 Press the cursor keys to select any of the elements wiring units starting with U1 9 Press SET to select the input signal to be saved Proceed to step 12 on page 9 10 Save Menu 4 File Item File List Acquisition W Data Type Set File Name Binary 7 Utility Save Exec IM 760301 01E 9 9 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes el 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data Numeric Data Waveform Sampling Data Executing Aborting the Save Operation 10 Press ESC to close th
310. f the measurement functions by combining operands The measurement functions that can be assigned to the efficiency equation section 5 7 are fixed to power and motor output However by using the user defined function an equation consisting of measurement functions other than power and motor output can be set up to determine ratios other than efficiency On WT3000s with firmware versions 1 XX or 2 XX equations F1 to F20 cannot be placed inside another equation F1 to F20 On WT3000s with firmware version 3 01 or later user defined equations with a smaller equation number can be used as operands in a user defined equation For example F1 F2 can be defined as an equation for user defined function F3 This allows equations that would otherwise exceed 50 characters in length to be computed For example set equations in F1 and F2 and define F3 as F1 F2 or F1 F2 This feature is also convenient when defining multiple equations that include common operands For example set common operands in F1 and define F4 F3 F1 F5 F4 F1 Note that if you enter an equation number that is greater than equal to its own number correct results will not be obtained For example if you set user defined function F3 to F1 F3 or F1 F4 the computed result displays no data or overflow OF Operators The following operators can be used to create an equation Operator Example Desc
311. f the same wiring system that are grouped Up to two wiring units can be defined each represented by the symbol A and EB For example Urms A represents the true rms value of the average of the voltage of the input elements that are assigned to wiring unit XA Wiring System Pattern The following table shows the relationship between the number of installed input elements the selectable wiring system patterns and the assignment of input elements to wiring units XA or B For example there are seven wiring system patterns on a WT3000 that has four input elements installed The input element assignment to wiring units ZA or B is determined from the wiring system pattern This allows functions of voltage current active power apparent power reactive power power factor phase difference and other parameters to be determined For the relationship between the wiring system and the determination of the function see appendix 1 Installed input elements 1 Wiring system Pattern 1 Installed input elements Wiring system Pattern 1 Wiring system Pattern 2 Installed input elements 1P2W 1 2 1P2W 1P2W 1P3W or 3P3W 2A 1 2 3 Wiring system Pattern 1 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 2 1P3W or 3P3W 3V3A ZA 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 3 1P2W 1P3W or 3P3W 3V3A ZA Wiring system Pattern 4 Installed input elements Wiring system Pat
312. f the terminal comes loose e Use cables with safety terminals that cover the conductive parts for connecting to the current sensor input terminals Using a terminal with bare conductive parts is dangerous if the terminal comes loose When the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current input terminals do not touch the current sensor input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous When connecting measurement cables from an external current sensor to the current sensor input connector remove the cables connected to the current input terminals In addition when the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current sensor input terminal do not touch the current input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous When using the external voltage transformer VT or current transformer CT make sure it has enough withstand voltage with respect to the voltage U being measured 2U 1000 V recommended Also make sure that the secondary side of the CT does not become an open circuit while the power is being applied If this happens high voltage will appear at the secondary side of the CT making it extremely dangerous When using an external current sensor make sure to use a sensor that comes in a case The conductive parts and the case should be insulated and the s
313. fficiency of the device can be measured more accurately Input AC power U1 and I1 Output DC power U2 and 12 Power transformer Synchronization source setup example Input element 1 U1 or 11 Input element 2 Likewise if a device that converts single phase DC power to single phase AC power is measured with input elements 1 DC end and 2 AC end set the synchronization source of input elements 1 and 2 to the voltage or current on the AC power end input element 2 In the example shown in the figure below set the synchronization source of input element 1 and 2 to U2 or 12 Input DC power U1 and l1 Output AC power U2 and I2 Power transformer Synchronization source setup example Input element 1 U2 or 12 Input element 2 Power Transformer with Single Phase DC Input and Three Phase AC Output If the device that converts single phase DC power to three phase AC power is connected and measured as shown on the next page set the synchronization source of all input elements to the same voltage and current of element 2 and 3 on the AC power end In this example set the synchronization source of input elements 1 2 and 3 to U2 or 12 U3 or 13 In effect the measurement periods of the input signal and all output signals match and the power conversion efficiency of the power conversion device can be measured more accurately e Single phase DC power Connect to i
314. ffix code MV G5 G6 B5 DT DA V1 C7 FL or CC User s Manual this manual IM760301 01E Current input protective cover B9318FX Safety terminal adapter set 758931 Vol 3 3 Power cord One of the following power cords is included according to the suffix code Power fuse Be ss A1463EF A1006WD A1009WD A1054WD A1024WD A1064WD D F Q R H POLES Rubber feet A9088ZM VO Printer roll paper 36 pin connector A EF I DP D Communication Interface User s Manual IM760301 17E CD ROM Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51 IM 760301 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Optional Accessories Sold Separately The optional accessories below are available for purchase separately Item Model Quantity Note Part No Measurement lead 758917 1 Two leads in one set used with the separately sold 758922 or 758929 adapter length 0 75 m ratings 1000 V Safety terminal adapter set 758923 1 2 pieces in one set Rated voltage 600 V 758931 1 2 pieces in one set Rated voltage 1000 V Alligator clip adapter set 758922 1 Two pieces in one set for the 758917 measurement lead Rated voltage 300 V 758929 1 Two pieces in one set for the 758917 measurement lead Rated voltage 1000 V Fork terminal 758921 1 Two pieces in one set for the 758917 measurement lead Rated voltage 1000 V rated current 25 A adapter set BNC BNC 366924 1 42 V or l
315. for Saving the Data 5 The procedure is the same as step 5 under Selecting the Data Type for Saving the Data on page 8 15 e Selecting the Storage Medium 6 The procedure is the same as steps 6 to 8 under Selecting the Storage Medium on page 8 15 Selecting the Save Destination Directory 7 The procedure is the same as steps 9 and 10 under Selecting the Save Destination Directory on page 8 15 e Setting the File Name and Comment 8 The procedure is the same as steps 11 to 18 under Setting the File Name and Comment on page 8 15 Starting the Storage Operation 9 Press STORE The storage operation starts see section 8 4 according to various conditions depending on the store mode see section 8 1 e Stopping the Store Operation and Saving the Data 10 If the storage operation is in progress pressing STORE again stops the operation Then the stored data is saved to the directory indicated by Path e Automatically Stopping the Store Operation and Saving the Data 11 The storage operation stops see section 8 4 automatically according to various conditions depending on the store mode Then the stored data is saved to the directory indicated by Pathe e Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box The procedure is the same as step 11 under Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box on page 8 16 e Viewing the Properties The procedure is the same
316. functions WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer IM 760301 17E Explains the functions for controlling the Communication Interface WT3000 using communication User s Manual CD ROM commands Vol 2 3 WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer IM 760301 51E Explains the expansion functions Expansion Function User s Manual motor evaluation function and options Vol 3 3 of the WT3000 and their operating procedures The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions The figures given in this manual may differ from those that actually appear on your screen Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is strictly prohibited The TCP IP software of this product and the document concerning the TCP IP software have been developed created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking Software Release 1 that has been licensed from the University of California Microsoft Internet Explorer MS DOS Windows Windows NT and Windows XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe Acrobat an
317. g Sync Measure aster Slave IM 760301 01E 5 25 JUSWISINSeD JOMOd 5 9 Setting the Equations for Apparent Power Reactive Power and Corrected Power Setting the Equation for Corrected Power 2 A W N O o 11 12 Press the Pc Formula soft key to display the Pc Formula dialog box Selecting the Applicable Standard Press the cursor keys to select the standard for Pc Formula Press SET to select either IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 or IEC76 1 1993 Setting the Coefficient When the applicable standard of the equation is IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 Press the cursor keys to select P1 Press SET A box used to set coefficient P1 appears Press the cursor keys to set P1 Press SET or ESC to close the box Press the cursor keys to select P2 Press SET A box used to set coefficient P2 appears Press the cursor keys to set P2 Press SET or ESC to close the box Measure User Defined Function 4 S Q Formula Type 1 P a Pc Formula i c Formula c Formula T Pc Formula Pc Formula W Pc Formula Pc Formula 1EC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 p c a lEC76 101976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 ECTS 978 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 1EC76 1 1993 Frequency 1EC76 1 1993 1EC76 1 1993 Auto p1 0 5000_ 0 500 P1 0 5000 e p2 0 5000 0 5000_ P2 0 5000 g Phase 180 Lead Lag
318. g a ratio of red R green G and blue B Setting the Key Lock or Shift Lock For procedures see section 10 7 Key lock can be used to prevent inadvertent operation errors Shift lock can be used to reduce the number of times you press the Shift key Help Function For the procedure see section 10 8 A brief explanation on operation or function can be viewed Master Slave Synchronized Measurement For procedures see section 10 9 With the master instrument outputting a measurement start signal and the slave instrument receiving the signal synchronized measurement on two instruments can be achieved Self Test Function For procedures see section 11 3 A self test can be performed to check whether the instrument is operating properly Components such as the internal memory ROM and RAM and the operation keys can be tested 2 38 IM 760301 01E Chapter 3 Before Starting Measurements Handling Precautions 3 1 Read the Safety Precautions Safety Precautions If you are using this instrument for the first time make sure to thoroughly read Safety Precautions given on pages v and vi Do Not Remove the Case Do not remove the case from the instrument Some parts of the instrument use high voltages which are extremely dangerous For internal inspection and adjustment contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Unplug If Abnormal Behavior Occurs If you notice smoke or unusual odors coming from the instrument
319. ge Save File List Path Pc_Card Space 0 byte File Name Size Date Attribute a pccard 1 lw M Format TIFF Color OFF Comment g File List wd File Name fa z 5 IM 760301 01E 9 21 e eq Buipeo pue Burnes el 9 4 Saving the Screen Image Data e Setting the file name 11 Press the File Name soft key to display the File Name dialog box 12 Press the cursor keys to select Auto Naming 13 Press SET to select ON or OFF 14 Press the cursor keys to select File Name 15 Press SET A keyboard appears 16 Use the keyboard to set the file name For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings 17 Press ESC to close the File Name dialog box Image Save Image Save Auto Naming Color CAPS File Name OFF 1 MEIE PELDE g pet lela ICIEL e LHI KELM g Comment ELIN TOTE TOIR IS TULU xT ZT EHE A E E E EA EA LCD e r il A a CEDERE 4 H File List F f cial e Executing or Aborting the Save Operation Display the desired screen and carry out the following procedure Press IMAGE SAVE The screen image data is saved to the directory indicated by Pathe If you press IMAGE SAVE again while the save operation is in progress the operation is aborted An icon appears at the upper left corner of the screen wh
320. gs For pees ir see section 3 14 WP q gt TIME Furm SINGLE v MEM Foru USER ELEMENT LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL A a AA 1 Press INTEG to display the Integ menu 2 Press the Integ Set soft key to display the Integ Set menu oe SHIFT e Selecting Normal Integration Mode or Repetitive Integration Mode Continuous 3 Press the Mode soft key to display the Mode menu 4 Press the Normal or Continuous soft key to select the integration mode Mode Normal Normal Continuous Inter Timer Setting R Normal gt gt R Cont inuous Auto Cal Auto Cal E o PF o g M D A Output D A Output Rated Time Rated Time 5 38 IM 760301 01E 5 13 Setting the Normal Integration and Repetitive Integration e Setting the Integration Timer 5 Press the Timer Setting soft key to display the Timer Setting dialog box 6 Press the cursor keys to select the hour minute or second box 7 Press SET to display the entry box 8 Press the cursor keys to set the hour minute or second that you selected in step 6 9 Press SET or ESC to close the box 10 Repeat steps 6 to 9 to set the hour minute and second Integ Set M Mode Normal i Timer Setting LT imer Settin I Timer Setting m coooa Eo a TS ees Auto Cal
321. he trend to be restarted Changing the trend display target e Changing the time axis horizontal axis setting of the trend 7 16 IM 760301 01E 7 9 Cursor Measurement Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT FENE A numeri wave une s a ial rowo Locau a 0 a gt Ea FU FI n smote CAL ITEM FORM l USER Femen INTEG sHiFT LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above scauna ueFLTER the soft keys MOTOR FREQ oa M z z E 5 LJ MEASURE J SYNCSOURCE In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the eee cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE J IMAGE SAVE STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 print msc rer 1 Press SHIFT MEASURE CURSOR to display the Cursor menu For split display of Wave Trend or Bar Trend proceed to step 3 For all other displays proceed to step 3 2 Press the Trend Cursor Setting soft key to display the Cursor menu for the trend display Cursor Trend Cursor PFEF ON Trendc1 Trac Cursor Bar Cursor DFF ON TI H Trendc2 Traci T
322. he Wiring System e The maximum order for which the harmonic data is saved is the maximum harmonic order to be measured that is specified in the harmonic measurement option menu e Up to 41 characters can be displayed in the path e File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following five file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL and CLOCK The maximum number of files that can fit in one directory is 2500 If you need to save more than 2500 files change the directory or move the existing files to another directory e The header section of the saved file is in a common format used by YOKOGAWA s measuring instruments Therefore data that is not used by the SL1400 is also included e Setup parameters that have been saved on products with firmware version having incompatible data cannot be loaded You can use the File Reader Software to view the following files and convert them into CSV files on your PC e Waveform display data file saved in binary format wvf e Numeric data file saved in float format WTD Setup parameter file SET 2 The software program can be downloaded by accessing the Download and Support page from the following URL http www yokogawa com tm e If you change the extension of the file such as on a PC the file can no longer be loaded into the File Reader Software IM 760301 01E 9 19 ejeq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes el 9 4
323. he advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option Active power for three phase four wire system PS P1 P2 P3 Apparent power for three phase four wire system sy py 4 QF Reactive power for three phase four wire system QS Q1 Q2 Q3 Measurement Mode and Computing Equation The computing equations that can be selected in each measurement mode are as follows S and Q Equations TYPE 2 TYPE 3 Normal Measurement Yes Yes Wide Bandwidth Harmonic Fixed to TYPE3 IEC Harmonic Fixed to TYPE3 Waveform Computation Yes FFT Yes Measurement Mode Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker No Cycle by Cycle Fixed to TYPE2 Yes Selectable No Not selectable 1 Selectable only on models with the advanced computation G6 option 2 The setup menu of the equations of S and Q is not displayed 3 If TYPE1 or 3 is selected and you select wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode or IEC harmonics mode the equation switches to TYPE3 4 If TYPE3 is selected and you select waveform computation mode or FFT mode the equation switches to TYPE1 5 S and Q are not measured in voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement mode Thus the S and Q equation settings are invalid 6 If TYPE1 or 3 is selected and you select cycle by cycle measurement mode the equation switches to TYPE2 Corrected Power For procedures see section 5 9 Depending on the applicable stan
324. he auto print function feeding the paper and etc OREMOTE a A S ole mew Form Ea b resource NULL meng stone i E MISC l HELP SHIFT SINGLE CAL Key See section 10 1 Executes zero level compensation Creates a zero input condition inside the WT3000 and sets the level at that point as the zero level SHIFT SYNC SOURCE NULL Key See section 10 2 When the SHIFT SYNC SOURCE NULL key is pressed and the NULL indicator illuminates the NULL function which subtracts the DC component of the measurement circuit from the sampled data is activated Pressing the SHIFT SYNC SOURCE NULL key again turns OFF the NULL indicator and the NULL function is deactivated MISC Key See section 3 12 3 13 3 17 4 6 10 4 to 10 7 11 3 and 11 4 For details on the D A output RS 232 communication and Ethernet communication see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for setting the date time initializing setup parameters selecting the message language selecting the menu language selecting the crest factor selecting the display font selecting the display brightness setting the display color setting key lock and shift lock setting the self test function checking the system status setting the D A output option setting the remote control functio
325. he crest factor is set to 6 Urms Umn Urmn Irms Imn Irmn and the measurement functions that are determined using these measurement functions display zeroes A or gt displays an error If the measured value of frequency is outside the measurement range fU or fl displays an error If the power factor is greater than 1 and less than or equal to 2 becomes 1 displays zero e Ifthe power factor is greater than 2 and 9 display errors e If the voltage or current mode is not RMS CfU or Cfl displays no numeric data IM 760301 01E zu W INSLE IN JOMOd 5 1 Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the Displayed Items e Changing the Measurement Function e The types of measurement functions that can be selected are the items that are indicated in Types of Measurement Functions during Normal Measurement of section 2 2 User Defined Function and Corrected Power of section 2 5 Measurement Functions of Integration Motor Evaluation Function Motor Version Delta Computation Option and Harmonic Measurement Option in section 2 6 For details see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E You can also select not to display the measurement functions None The number 1 2 3 and 4 that is attached to the measurement function symbol of the delta computation has no relation to the element number The number attached to the user defined function F1 to F20
326. he input signal frequency is less than or equal to 440 Hz Note For details on selecting the line filter for the motor evaluation function see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E IM 760301 01E 4 23 SUOI IPUOD JUSWaINSes y gt 4 9 Selecting the Averaging Function Procedure A Cursor keys a gt AA scarna funerurer ave FILTER CURSOR O NULL F mes store MENU STORE SET print mse rr MENU DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Oneuote uumenic WAVE wwe sane CREE HOLD roca OTHERS REY Furm swave CAL ores e ITEM FORM USER evewenr LOWERITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press AVG to display the Avg menu e Turning ON OFF the Averaging Function 2 Press the Averaging soft key to select ON or OFF e Selecting the Averaging Type 3 Press the Avg Type soft key to select Exp or Lin e Setting the Attenuation Constant or Average Count 4 Press the cursor ke
327. he measurement range However if the data update interval is 50 ms 100 ms 5s 10 s or 20 s the signal level of the synchronization source must satisfy the input signal level of frequency measurement see section 12 5 110 for the maximum range of direct voltage and current inputs The accuracy for 110 to 130 of the measurement range is reading error x 1 5 Lower limit of Same as the lower limit of measurement frequency for voltage and current measurement frequency Power factor 4 influence When 0 5 mA to 200 mA range of a 2 A input element Apparent power reading x 0 1 in the range of 45 to 66 Hz For other frequency ranges see below However the figures are reference values Add apparent power reading x 0 1 0 05 x f KHz e 500 mA to 2 A range of a 2 A input element or 30 A input element Apparent power reading x 0 03 in the range of 45 to 66 Hz For other frequency ranges see below However the figures are reference values Add apparent power reading x 0 03 0 05 x f KHz When 0 lt aA lt 1 Power reading x power reading error power range error x power range apparent power indication value tan ox influence when A 0 where gis the phase angle between the voltage and current Line filter influence When the cut off frequency is 500 Hz 45 Hz lt f lt 66 Hz Add 0 3 of reading f lt 45Hz Add 1 of reading When the cut off frequency is 5 5 kHz f lt 66 Hz Add 0
328. he product e Zoom Vertical Direction Only You can expand or reduce each displayed waveform voltage current You can select the zoom factor from the following 0 1 0 2 0 25 0 4 0 5 0 75 0 8 1 1 14 1 25 1 33 1 41 1 5 1 6 1 77 2 2 28 2 66 2 83 3 2 3 54 4 5 8 10 12 5 16 20 25 40 50 and 100 e Moving the Position Vertical Direction Only The displayed position of the waveform can be moved vertically to the desired position such as when you wish to view the mutual relationship between the voltage and current waveforms or when the section of the waveform you wish to view goes out of the display frame e The position can be set in the range from 0 000 to 130 000 e When the zoom factor is 1 half of the total vertical span of the waveform display screen equal to measurement range x 3 or measurement range x 6 when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively is considered to be 100 The span between the vertical center of the screen to the upper limit of the screen is 100 the span between the vertical center of the screen to the lower limit of the screen is 100 100 7 P Move the position by 50 gt Move the position by 50 100 _ 2 e When the zoom factor is not 1 the value equal to the measurement range x 3 100 or measurement range x 6 100 when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6
329. he range of 0 to 5 V to the external clock input connector EXT CLK can damage the instrument IM 760301 01E Aejdsiq uuozaneM al 6 4 Setting the Trigger e Input Circuit for the External Trigger Signal and Time Chart 5 V EXT CLK 199 9 External trigger WA 2 gt signal External trigger Minimum pulse width when set to 1 k Trigger delay time Internal trigger e Selecting the Trigger Slope The up and down movement of a signal level is called a slope When the slope is used as one of the trigger conditions it is called a trigger slope You can select the trigger slope from the following e The trigger occurs when the trigger source signal rises above the trigger level from a lower level e 4 The trigger occurs when the trigger source signal falls below the trigger level from a higher level e 4 Trigger occurs on both the rising and falling cases e Setting the Trigger Level Trigger level refers to the level through which the trigger slope passes When the slope of the trigger source passes through the specified trigger level on a rising or falling edge a trigger occurs The level can be set in the range of 0 0 to 100 0 e Half of the total vertical span of the waveform display screen is considered to be 100 With the vertical center of the screen taken to be the input zero line the upper and lower limits of the waveform display screen are 100 and 100 respectively I
330. he rms value The instantaneous value i of the sinusoidal alternating current is expressed by Imsinwt where Im is the maximum value of current is the angular velocity defined as w 2nf and f is the frequency of the sinusoidal alternating current The thermal action of this alternating current is proportional to i and varies as shown in the figure below The phenomenon in which electric energy is converted to heat energy due to the current flowing through the resistor i Imsinot The rms value effective vale is the DC value that generates the same thermal action as the alternating current If we denote the DC value of the same thermal action as we get 2 is V The average ofi overonecycle Because this value corresponds to the root mean square of the instantaneous values over 1 period normally the effective value is denoted using the abbreviation rms App 16 IM 760301 01E Appendix 4 Power Basics Power Harmonics and RLC of AC Circuits In the case of the mean value simply taking the average over 1 period of the sine wave results in zero Therefore the average is taken over 1 period of absolute values As with the rms value if we denote the average value of the current of instantaneous values i Imsinwt as Imn we obtain 2m 1 2 Imn i The average of i over one cycle lildot Im 0 These relationships also apply to a sinusoidal voltage The maximum value rms value
331. his allows values and waveforms to be displayed on a large screen Initialization For procedures see section 3 13 The settings entered using keys and soft keys can be restored to factory default settings For details on the initial settings see appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data Selecting the Message Language For procedures see section 3 17 The language of the error messages displayed on the screen during operation can be set to English or Japanese Selecting the Menu Language For procedures see section 3 17 The language of the software menus displayed on the screen can be set to English or Japanese Checking the System Conditions For procedures see section 11 4 The instrument configuration such as the model firmware version ROM version input element configuration and installed options can be checked Zero Level Compensation For procedures see section 10 1 Zero level compensation refers to creating a zero input condition inside the WT3000 and setting the level at that point as the zero level Zero level compensation must be performed in order to satisfy the specifications of this instrument see chapter 12 Zero level compensation is automatically performed when the measurement range or input filter is changed However if the measurement range and input filter are not changed over an extended time the zero level may change due to the changes in the environment su
332. ile the save operation is in progress s5 9 22 IM 760301 01E 9 4 Saving the Screen Image Data Explanation The screen image data can be saved e Data Format and Extension The data in the following formats can be saved The extension that is automatically added and the data size are indicated below Data Format Extension Data Size Reference Value Unit Bytes OFF Color Color data compression TIFF TIF Approx 40 K Approx 310K BMP BMP Approx 40 K Approx 310 K Approx 30 K Post Script PS Approx 80 K PNG PNG Approx 5 K Approx 10 K JPEG JPG Approx 40 K Approx 50 K e Color Mode The color mode can be selected when the data format is TIFF BMP PNG or JPG e Color Color 256 colors e Reverse White background black text color waveforms e Gray 16 gray levels e OFF Black and white e Turning ON OFF Data Compression The data compression can be turned ON OFF when the data format is BMP and the color mode is Color Reverse or Gray OFF Do not compress the data e ON Compress the data with RLE e File Name and Comment The explanation is the same as that given in File Name and Comment in section 9 3 However only the first 20 characters of the comment appears on the screen Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory The explanation is the same as that given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory in section 9 3 e Auto Naming Function
333. ime 1 See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E 2 See the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760301 17E Error in Setting Code Message Corrective Action Reference Section 800 Illegal date time Set the correct date and time 3 12 801 Illegal file name The file name contains characters which are not 9 3 allowed or the file name is not a valid MS DOS file name Enter another file name 802 Cannot be set or executed in the Normal measurement mode 803 Cannot be set or executed in the IEC Harmonics measurement mode 804 Cannot be set or executed in the Wide Band Harmonics measurement mode 805 Cannot be set or executed in the Math measurement mode IM 760301 01E Ey uonsedsu pue ooueuajuleyy HunooysajqnoiL 11 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Code Message Corrective Action Reference Section 806 Cannot be set or executed in the FFT measurement mode 807 Cannot be set or executed T in the Cycle by Cycle measurement mode 808 Cannot change this parameter during a numerical display 809 Cannot change this parameter during vector display 810 Cannot change this parameter during bar graph display l 812 Cannot be set while storing recalling of data being performed 813 Cannot be set while integration is running Reset Integration 5 14 820 Cannot be set or executed in the Flicker
334. imer 0000h00m00s to 10000h00m00s Count overflow When the integration time reaches its maximum 10000 hours or the integration value reaches its maximum or minimum the integration time and integration value at that point are held and the integration is stopped 1 WP 999999 MWh q 999999 MAh WS 999999 MVAh WQ 999999 Mvarh 12 10 IM 760301 01E 12 5 Functions Item Specifications Accuracy Power accuracy or current accuracy timer accuracy Timer accuracy 0 02 of reading Computation Item Specifications User defined function Computes numeric data of equations up to 20 equations that are created by combining the measurement function symbols and operators Average active power setting Set with the user defined function Efficiency equation setting Computes numeric data of equations up to four equations that are created by combining the measurement function symbols Compensation setting Computes wiring compensation efficiency compensation and two wattmeter compensation Equation for apparent Select TYPE1 TYPE2 or TYPE3 TYPE3 is selectable only in normal measurement mode on power and reactive power models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option Corrected Power Correction of active power as defined by the applicable standard IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 and IEC76 1 1993 Phase difference display Select whether t
335. immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord In addition turn OFF the power to the circuit under measurement that is connected to the input terminals If these symptoms occur contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Do Not Damage the Power Cord Nothing should be placed on top of the power cord The power cord should also be kept away from any heat sources When unplugging the power cord from the outlet never pull by the cord itself Always hold and pull by the plug If the power cord is damaged check the part number indicated on page iii and purchase a replacement General Handling Precautions Do Not Place Objects on Top of the Instrument Never stack the instruments or place other instruments or any objects containing water on top of the instrument This may damage the recorder Keep Electrically Charged Objects Away from the Instrument Keep electrically charged objects away from the input terminals They may damage the internal circuitry Do Not Damage the LCD Since the LCD screen is very vulnerable and can be easily scratched do not allow any sharp objects near it Also do not apply vibration or shock to it Unplug during Extended Non Use Turn OFF the power to the circuit under measurement and the instrument and remove the power cord from the outlet Carry the Instrument Properly First turn OFF the circuit under measurement and remove the measurement cables Then turn OFF the instrument and remove power and other cabl
336. ing the Settings isea e a a a eaa aee A A a e SEAE aas 3 26 Entering Values and Character Strings c cccsceseceeeseeeeneeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeneees 3 28 Entering Character Strings on the USB Keyboard c ceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeteeeeeatens 3 32 Switching the Measurement Mode and Display cecceeeceeseeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 3 34 Displaying the Setup Parameter List ec ceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeaeess 3 39 Selecting the Message Language eccceeceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeteaeeeaeeteaeeseeteaeesteeenaeensaee 3 41 Setting the USB Keyboard Language cesccesceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeseeeeeaeesseeeeeesaaee 3 43 IM 760301 01 Contents Chapter 4 Measurement Conditions 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 A 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 Selecting the Wiring System cceeccseeseeceeeeeteeeeaeecseeseaeeeaeeeeaeeeeeseaeesaeeeaeeseaeeeeeteaees 4 1 Selecting Independent Setting of Input Elements eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeeeen 4 4 Setting the Measurement Range for Direct INDUt ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeeeeeteaeeeaeeteneens 4 6 Setting the Measurement Range When Using the External Current Sensor 4 12 Setting the Scaling Function When Using VT CT eccceesceeeceeeneeeeeeeeneeseeeeeaeetsaeeeeeraes 4 15 Selecting the Crest Factor ecceesecseeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaee
337. ing the numeric values of the measurement functions the numeric data of the new equation can be determined It is convenient to use a USB keyboard option when entering an equation or string with many characters e Limitation on the User Defined Functions by Measurement Mode There are limitations on the user defined functions in measurement modes other than normal measurement mode e IEC Harmonics Measurement Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker Measurement and Cycle by Cycle Measurement Modes The user defined function cannot be used e Wide Bandwidth Harmonic Measurement Mode Waveform Computation Mode and FFT Mode Some operands cannot be computed For details see appendix 12 e Turning ON OFF the User Defined Function Computation You can select whether to perform the specified user defined function computation ON Executes the computation e OFF Does not perform the computation e Setting the Unit e Number of Characters Eight characters or less However not all eight characters can be shown on the numeric data display This depends on the number of displayed items see section 5 1 e Types of Characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces IM 760301 01E 5 13 JUSWISINSeD JOMOd 5 4 Setting the User Defined Function Equation Types The combination of the measurement function and element number Urms1 for example can be used as an operand to create up to 20 equations F1 to F20 There can be up t
338. inis aiias memory test Memory to File EXx 6 vsstiausiscidauisainsitiannniinesa 8 16 message language ceeecesseeseeseesesneneaneeaeecseeerseesseeseaes 3 41 LN lo a T TT E recy 6 24 MINIMUM Gisplay siiiiriiirispiiiiissiiriisisraiidssssisaasiiaa aas 12 6 MISO eiry edariari pidana diaa r a 1 9 N normal integration mode normal measurement value Normal Mode Tr seis ccvetrcissisneesteictsissitecsinssisscccdesacnsianerses INE cece t cases tee lacan sacevesscradecetevssncecusst sats evcevnet TA NULL function NUMERIC orei n a E E numeric data display order of numeric data saving Of essssseesssessssesinssrrnserennerenssrens ONE year ACCUFACY oe eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneceaeteeeeeteeeeeeees Operating altitude 2 0 ces seesesseeseeeeseesseessseessseteseeeseese operating conditions ss OR CN ALOIS EPA ARETE EE TEE satvsuscavestate ODUOMNS secieececdeseeseccsccccessesazsceacyeaseeevetvaacna sczszscateaieenecaeesecsietcs ii overflow OVENTANGE sceseicissscccecacsne sete casesavnedsscvessveesd parteti nE EEES P Page P aiiora araara A E anir a anaa aaea aiaa anh iia EREE 5 6 package contents of dj page jumping of aa D4 page scroll aap PG aiscin an 0 6 PO Gal siiri we 9 1 PC card formatting Of ccccccecceeeseeeeeeseeeeeteeseeeeseeeeeaeees 9 3 phase ANIC cess tisiscccsticesceustiasrereeciecncentiediaaveecsenen ean App 17 phase difference a
339. ion e Example in Which Eight Items Are Displayed Urms1 0 10639 w S Irms1 1 6741 amp vy 8 P41 0 1651 w Zj s4 0 1781 wa c ay 0 0669 we Eya 0 92688 S g D 22 046 iu 4 1004 wr e Example in Which All Items Are Displayed Element and wiring system Pa Element1 Element2_ Element3_ Element4 c Voltage l Hobe f pomares L drs L sm Ke re 50OmArms 500mArms 500mArms 500mArms D U 105 715 e A i 569 215m 585 ea a A t pa P wo 55 8692 55 5459 0 0000 0 0000 S va 1 60 1748 59 8274 0 0000 0 0000 Q age 22 3526 22 2255 0 0000 0 0000 o A l1 0 92845 0 92844 Error E eee aeee Error s o ftu Hz 1 50 000 0 000 50 000 Error 5 fi Cuz 1 1 7288k 1 9361k Error Error a g Utpk y 1 148 617 148 676 148 509 0 119 o U pkly 1 148 622 148 669 148 506 0 104 I pkCa 1 1 04405 1 04036 0 000m 6 537m y i pkfa 1 1 04668 1 04046 0 000m 5 616m ctu E 1 1 406 1 406 1 406 Error CfE 1 839 1 839 4 105 Pe Cw 55 9683 55 6440 0 0000 Error IM 760301 01E 2 15 uondioseqg jeuonounes 2 4 Power Measurement e Changing the Displayed Items By selecting a displayed item the numeric data value that is displayed at the position can be changed Urms1 0 10496 w Urms1 0 10513 w Irms1 1 6946 Change the measurement Irms1 1 6929 P1 0 1650 w function of the third item A1 0 92791 S1 0 1779 wa S1 0 1780 iva Urms1 0 10476 w Change the element ea
340. ion Selecting the Copy Source Destination Storage Medium and Directory The explanation is the same as that given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory in section 9 3 Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box The explanation is the same as that given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 Properties The explanation is the same as that given in Properties in section 9 6 Selecting the File Attribute The explanation is the same as that given in Selecting the File Attribute in section 9 6 Selecting the Copy Source Files e By placing asterisk marks to the left of the file names those files can be copied e There are two methods in selecting the files to be copied e Selecting the files one at a time Press the Set Reset soft key to place an asterisk mark to the left of the files one at a time e Selecting the files at once Press the All Set soft key to place asterisk marks to the left of the selected file names at once There are three methods in selecting the files at once If you select a file and press the All Set soft key asterisk marks are placed by the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory Ifyou select a directory and press the All Set soft key asterisk marks are placed by the selected directory and all the files in the directory Ifyou select a storage medium and press the All Set soft key asteri
341. ion can be saved However setup parameters such as the date time and communications are not saved e Data Size The data size of a single set of setup parameters is approximately 20 KB e Extension The SET extension is automatically added to the file name 9 12 IM 760301 01E 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data Numeric Data Waveform Sampling Data e Saving the Waveform Display Data Select Wave from the File Item menu to save waveform display data Relationship between the Waveform Display Data That Can Be Saved and Measurement Modes There are limitations on waveform display data that can be saved depending on the measurement mode as indicated below Set the item to be saved to waveform sampling data Acquisition for FFT waveforms Waveform Display Data wt ey om dienes Normal Measurement Waveform Computation FFT 1 Applicable only to products with the motor evaluation function motor version 2 Applicable only to products with the advanced computation G6 option Selecting the Data Type Select the data type from below The extension is automatically added e Binary The following two files are created in the directory e Waveform display data file wvf ASCII header file hdr e Waveform display data is saved in binary format For details on the ASCII header file see appendix 3 e Either file cannot be loaded into the WT3000 e ASCII Saved in A
342. ional 2 0 0 ce eeseseeseeeeseseseesseesseeesseeeseteseeees v accessories standard ssseeseesseerieriesirerreriisrrerrnerrerrerene iv accuracy active POWET ssssssssssssersrrssrusireeriseneeenrensennreasrustene 5 6 App 20 adapta aes visecavscnsccsacccsesteduni cvscnasseeseescdsesavt cansevevescsdieautenveenes 3 10 aliasing PAWN GNU 2 nates ci cad chen Pac cesar Sedetes deste tedascecqaskeeesseetediancio tise 5 2 A RESET irisaren 9 31 9 34 All Set alternating current vector display Of e ee App 17 ambient humidity 00 0 eee eee eee eeeee eee eeeeeeeeteeeeeaeeseaes ambient temperature angular VelOCHY icsscctccsststesssncssetsconseenenisinecisasceianncuaares Apparent POWEL oes eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeaeeees apparent power equation for ASG E cease attenuation constant Attribute 2 2 cece eecceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeteeaeeeteaaes Auto Call E A AT TE auto calibration Auto Naming auto naming function auto range esee auto scaling average ACTIVE POWET 0 eee cece eee e eee eeteeteeeteeeteaeeneeees 5 19 AVOTAQS COUNL ssisicctsscccvssseiessvaczsscsaccessnsraissctsecteccatesenedevssbect 4 24 Average for the Synchronous Source Period App 33 AVEMAGING secvsscesscsesectestetaresvescatecsccvesuesnsecasseestacs 2 13 4 24 averaging type Selection Of ceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeesenees 4 24 PANG 2 cach PEE EN T E ETTET
343. ions 666 File is now being accessed Execute after access is made 671 Save data not found Check for presence of data 9 3 9 4 674 Initializing file system Please wait 9 2 675 Cannot load this file Model options do not conform 679 Printer error Maintenance service is required 680 Close the cover of the printer unit 681 Paper empty Load a roll chart See the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760301 17E 11 2 IM 760301 01E 11 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Code Message Corrective Action Reference Section 682 Printer over heat Power off immediately 683 684 No built in printer on this model Check the specifications to see whether or not Page ii the optional printer is provided 685 Printer time out Maintenance service is required z 705 Can not operate while accessing medium Wait until access has completed 706 Can not operate during hard copy Wait until output has completed 710 File not found Check the file 711 File operation not allowed during hard copy Wait until the hard copy completes 712 Can not compress this hardcopy image Turn off compression switch 9 4 750 Cannot connect to the ftp server Confirm the network settings and connection 751 Has not connect with ftp server yet Confirm the network settings and connection 1 752 This ftp function in not supporte
344. is expendable itOMS sessssssssressrsrrerssrrnsneerusensernrrnseenrneses 11 11 Exponential Average for Measuring Period Ext Ol Kereste roeas era ana E E A rare EXT SENSOR 1 0 ceceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeaeeneeaees EXTENSION ceeeseeeeeeseseeeeeeeeees external current sensor range external current sensor transformation ratio 0 4 13 external dimensions cceeeeeceeeeeeeesteeeeeeeeeees 12 16 12 18 external trigger Signal cee cece see eeeeeeeeeeseeteeeeeaes 6 10 F Page falling Zero Crossing e ee eee eee eee eeeeeeteeeteaeeneees App 27 RET ace nea ciek Sind E teed ite sk eS 2 33 flita aranista e ala enied he eae 5 6 FIL Eirin 9 3 9 6 9 27 9 30 9 33 9 37 file attributes 20 0 eeeecsecsseeeseeseneseseeeeseeeseecsseesseeseaneesneees 9 27 file deletion of 9 30 FilQ MOM i resad eeina ada naaie iaa na iai 9 6 File Lists inanarak 8 15 9 21 file name set 9 23 file properties oo eee eeseeseeseeeseseeseseeeseecseeessenseaeeeseeses 9 27 file SPECIFYING Of sieisen anae 9 27 files COPYING Of is ceanscccazacchsecescansidecereccesaseenipetiaceacstndarestiendae 9 33 files renaming Of sisindiran Filter filter Float henian deuia Pontare AN da AA KA aaa Stele ae a tert ete form factor Format E E E E T formatat ea aare i ean FOPMAUEXC Cs voc cedecscvaceeoeesvettscesoubesascdesesvoeceeasdesticdentevtaseeteees 9 4 FREQ
345. is Exp exponential averaging exponential averaging is performed using the selected attenuation constant 2 4 8 16 32 or 64 Wide Bandwidth Harmonic Measurement Mode When averaging is turned ON exponential averaging is performed using the attenuation constant that you select from 2 4 8 16 32 and 64 IEC Harmonic Measurement Mode You cannot select the attenuation constant Averaging is performed using the attenuation constant that is defined by the standard e Measurement Functions That Are Averaged The measurement functions that are directly averaged are indicated below Other functions that use these functions in their computation are also affected by the averaging For details regarding the determination of each measurement function see appendix 1 U k I k P k S k and Q k A k and k are computed from the averaged P k and Q k Z Rs Xs Rp Xp Uhdf Ihdf Phdf Uthd Ithd Pthd Uthf Ithf Utif Itif hvf and hcf k harmonic order Note When averaging is turned ON the average value of multiple measurements is determined and displayed Therefore if the input signal changes steeply the response for the measured value to follow up on the change is slow The larger the value of the attenuation constant of exponential averaging or the average count of moving average the more stable the measured value response to the input change is slow The following measurement functions are not affecte
346. is a portion of the measurement function symbol It is not related to the element number e Changing the Element Wiring Unit You can select the element wiring unit from the choices below The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements Element1 Element2 Element3 Element4 XA and B If there are no elements that are assigned to the selected wiring unit there is no numeric data Thus no data is displayed in this case For example if elements are assigned to 2A and no elements are assigned to B then the measurement function for B shows no data Urms1 0 10496 w Urms1 0 10513 w Irms1 1 6946 a Change the measurement rms1 1 6929 P1 0 1650 w function of the third item gt 1 0 92791 S1 0 1779 wa S1 0 1780 iva Urms1 0 10476 w Change the element Irms1 1 7020 of the third item P2 0 0000 1 0 1783 iva Resetting the Order of Display Items You can reset the displayed order of numeric data to a preset order For details on the reset items see appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data Note For the meanings of the measurement function symbols that are displayed see section 2 2 Measurement Functions and Measurement Periods 2 5 Computation 2 6 Integration appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions and chapter 6 Delta Computation in the Expansion Function User s Manu
347. is set to a setting other than OFF the LINE FILTER key illuminates e Selecting OFF disables the line filter Line Filter and Measurement Mode e The line filter setting is common to all measurement modes except cycle by cycle measurement mode The initial setting is OFF e The line filter setting in cycle by cycle measurement mode is independent of the setting in other measurement modes The initial setting is 50 kHz Selecting the Frequency Filter Because the frequency filter is inserted into the frequency measurement input circuit it affects frequency measurements In addition if the display update interval of the WT3000 is set to 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or 20 s it affects the detection of the measurement period for voltage current and power measurements See appendix 6 and 7 In this case the filter also acts as a filter for detecting the zero crossing of the synchronization source signal see section 2 2 more accurately The frequency filter is not inserted into the voltage and current measurement input circuit Therefore the measured values include high frequency components even when the frequency filter is turned ON e The WT3000 detects the zero crossing point with a hysteresis of approximately 5 of the measurement range e If the line filter described above is ON the line filter affects the frequency measurement even when the frequency filter is OFF e It is recommended that the frequency filter be turned ON when t
348. is temporarily stored in the internal memory Moves the cursor upward Entry box Moves the cursor downward eh oO s Switches between upper case and lower case m INSERT REESE HUMLAN WEDEL S Deletes the character before the entry position Switches between insert and overwrite mode LAIALI Recalls the temporarily stored string D z 5 Enters the string 3 30 IM 760301 01E 3 14 Entering Values and Character Strings e Keys Other Than the Character Keys BS Deletes the character before the entry position INS Switches between insert and overwrite mode During insert mode the INSERT indicator on the keyboard illuminates When a new character is entered in insert mode the new character is placed at the entry position and all following characters are moved backward CLR Clears all displayed characters On the keyboard used to enter the file name and comment RESET on the front panel can also be used to achieve the same result CAPS Switches between uppercase and lowercase SPACE Enters a space ENT Enters the displayed characters Number of Characters and Types That Can Be Used Item Number of Characters Characters That Can Be Used Date Time Specified number 0 to 9 Equation 1 to 50 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces Unit 1 to 8 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard
349. isplay Data When the retrieval of waveform display data is OFF during normal measurement the numeric data of measurement functions that are determined for each data update rate is P P compressed for each display segment raster and made into trend display data When the retrieval of waveform display data is ON during normal measurement the numeric data of measurement functions that are determined each time a trigger occurs is P P compressed for each display segment raster and made into trend display data In some cases P P compression is not performed e Horizontal Time Axis For procedures see section 7 4 The time per division can be set in the range of 3 s to 1 day e Setting the Scale For procedures see section 7 5 Auto scaling is provided in which the upper and lower limits of the screen are determined automatically from the maximum and minimum values of the trend display data Manual scaling is also available in which the upper and lower limits can be set arbitrarily as necessary e Split Display Display and Assignments For procedures see section 7 6 Up to 16 lines T1 through T16 of trends can be displayed You can select the measurement function of any element to be assigned to T1 through T16 During harmonic measurement you can also specify the harmonic The screen is divided up to 4 windows and the trends that are turned ON are assigned to the divided windows in order from T1 through T16 e Display Inte
350. isplay the Wave Items menu If the waveform display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT ITEM LOWER ITEM 2 Press the Wave Display soft key to display the Wave Display dialog box Wave gui u2 u3 u4 Displa all on all OFF 1 12 13 14 Speed Torque Wave Display V Zoom amp Position g Frequency Meas Item Selecting the Waveform to Be Displayed To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 IM 760301 01E 6 3 Aejdsiq uuozaneM al 6 2 Selecting the Waveform to Be Displayed Explanation e Turning ON OFF the Display the Input Signal Waveforms Collectively Displaying the Waveforms Collectively 3 Press the cursor keys to select All ON 4 Press SET All the buttons to the left of the input signal are highlighted and all the waveforms are displayed Hiding the Waveforms Collectively 3 Press the cursor keys to select All OFF 4 Press SET The highlighting of all the buttons to the left of the signal is cleared and the waveforms are no longer displayed e Turning ON OFF the Input Signal Waveforms One at a Time 3 Press the cursor keys to sel
351. isplaying the Help Window Press HELP to display the help window Press the key or soft key that you wish to review e Clearing the Help Window Press HELP again The help window disappears 3 e Displaying the Help Window When you press HELP a help window containing information about the soft key menu that was displayed immediately before HELP was pressed appears If you press a key while the help window is displayed a help window containing information about the key appears e Clearing the Help Window If you press the HELP key again while a help window is displayed the help window closes IM 760301 01E 10 13 suonouny 19410 10 9 Master Slave Synchronization Measurement a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Sse A rumen WAVE U LIP sane CREE HOLD roca C 4 ve OTHERS Neig FU FI suave 0 omens TIME 2 ITEM FORM USER ELEMENT INTEG SHIFT e Se ce Scauna ine FER AVG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above UOTOR FRE the soft keys HRM SET weasuRe sucs In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the CURSOR NULL H z cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE m
352. its AC Power Because there is phase difference between the voltage and current due to the load AC power cannot be determined as easily as DC power If we denote the instantaneous voltage as u Umsinot and the instantaneous current as i Imsin wt p the instantaneous power of AC power p is as follows p u xi Umsinot x Imsin wt p Ulcos Ulcos 2at gt U and I represent the rms voltage and current respectively p is the sum of the time independent term Ulcos and the AC component term of the voltage or current at twice the frequency Ulcos 2ut p AC power refers to the average power over 1 period By taking the average over 1 period AC power P becomes P Ulcos W The power varies even with the same voltage and current depending on the phase difference The section above the horizontal axis in the figure below represents positive power power supplied to the load and the section below the axis represents negative power power fed back from the load The difference between the positive and negative powers is the power consumed by the load As the phase difference between the voltage and current increases the negative power increases At 7 2 the positive and negative powers are equal and the load consumes no power When the phase difference between voltage and current is 0 Average power P UI 2x gt ot When the phase difference between voltage and current is p Average p
353. itude of the input signal The different ranges used in the auto range are the same as those available for fixed range e Range Increase e When the data of measurement function Urms or Irms exceeds 110 of the current measurement range the measurement range is increased When the peak value of the input signal exceeds 330 or 660 of the current measurement range when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively the range is increased e Range Decrease When the data of the measurement function Urms or Irms is less than or equal to 30 of the measurement range and Upk and Ipk is less than or equal to 300 or 600 of the next lower range when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively the range is decreased Power Range The measurement ranges power ranges of active power apparent power and reactive power are determined by the wiring method voltage range and current range as shown below For the actual values of the power range see section 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input Wiring System Power Range 1P2W single phase two wire voltage range x current range 1P3W single phase three wire voltage range x current range x 2 3P3W three phase three wire when the voltage and current ranges on the corresponding elements are set to the same range 3P3W 38V3A three voltage three current 3P4W three phase four wire voltage range x current range x 3 when the voltage and current rang
354. iv to 2 s div However less than or equal to 1 10 of the data update rate Trigger e Trigger type Edge type Trigger mode Select auto or normal Trigger automatically turns OFF when integration is in progress Trigger source Select from the voltage or current applied to the input element and external clock Trigger slope Select from f rising falling or f t rising and falling Trigger level e When the trigger source is a voltage or current applied to the input element Set in the range of 100 to the top or bottom edge of the screen from the screen center Resolution 0 1 e When the trigger source is Ext Clk external clock TTL level For the specifications of the external clock see section 6 3 Vertical zoom on the Zoom in out vertically for each voltage or current applied to the input element Set the zoom rate in waveform the range from 0 1 to 100 times Waveform display ON OFF Select ON OFF for each voltage or current applied to the input element Waveform display format 1 2 3 and 4 split window displays are possible IM 760301 01E 12 11 suoleoyioeds Ey 12 5 Functions Item Specifications Display interpolation of the Select dot or linear display waveform Graticule Select the grid and cross scale display Auxiliary display ON OFF Turn ON OFF the upper and lower limits scale value and the waveform label Cursor measurement Measure the value at the point where the c
355. k the element and the lower limit 300 0 cos omie coms of the displayed waveform Time at the right end of the screen time span of the screen Wave Mapping Time at the left end of the screen fixed to 0 s Number of data points displayed in the range from the left to the right end of the screen e When P P is displayed waveform is displayed using P P compression see section 2 7 e Selecting the Display Mode Select the waveform display format from the following Displaying the Waveform on the Entire Screen Press the WAVE key to display the waveform on the entire screen Displaying the Waveform by Dividing the Display into Halves Split Display e Numeric Wave The numeric data and waveform are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on how to set the numeric data display see section 3 15 and chapter 5 e Wave Bar The waveform and bar graph are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on how to set the bar graph display see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E e Wave Trend The waveform and trend are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on how to set the trend see chapter 7 In addition the measurement period of the numeric data and that of the waveform data may not be synchronized Measurement Mode during Waveform Display When waveforms are displayed the measurement mode indication at the upper left corne
356. k value of the input signal must be less than or equal to the maximum allowable input If the crest factor of the measured signal is greater than the specifications of the measurement instrument the crest factor defined at the rated input the signal can be measured by setting a greater measurement range For example even if CF is set to 3 measurement is possible for signals with a crest factor greater than 5 when the measured value rms value is less than 60 of the measurement range If the minimum effective input 1 of the measurement range is being applied at CF 3 measurement for CF 300 is possible The voltage range current range effective input range and measurement accuracy vary depending on the crest factor setting For details see chapter 12 Specifications Input Filter For procedures see section 4 8 There are two types of input filters The WT3000 makes measurements by synchronizing to the input signal Therefore the frequency of the input signal must be measured accurately Line Filter The line filter is inserted into the voltage current and power measurement input circuit and directly affects the voltage current and power measurements see the block diagram in section 2 1 When the line filter is turned ON the measured value does not contain high frequency components Measurement of voltage current and power is possible by eliminating high frequency components from inverter waveforms strain wav
357. lamp type current sensor Power meter Vv g n Voltage input terminal LOAD External current sensor Input connector IM 760301 01E 3 10 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the Current Sensor The following wiring examples are for connecting shunt type current sensors When connecting a clamp type current sensor that outputs voltage substitute the shunt type current sensor with the clamp type In addition the assignment of elements to the input terminals in the following figure varies depending on the number of installed input elements For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 2 3 Measurement Conditions Shunt type current sensor Clamp type current sensor that outputs voltage l OUT H B OUTL gt z Input terminal z Input terminal External current sensor External current sensor input connector input connector EXT EXT Wiring Example of a Single Phase Two Wire System 1P2W Using a Shunt Type Current Sensor SOURCE LOAD I Input terminal External current sensor input connector EXT Wiring Example of a Single Phase Three Wire System 1P3W Using a Shunt Type Current Sensor SOURCE l LOAD OUT H Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 External current sensor External current sensor input connector input connec
358. lay 3 Same as the procedure given in Turning ON OFF the Scale Value Display in section 6 8 e Turning ON OFF the Waveform Label 3 Same as the procedure given in Turning ON OFF the Waveform Label in section 6 8 7 14 IM 760301 01E 7 7 Selecting the Display Interpolation and Graticule and Turning ON OFF the Scale Value and Waveform Label Explanation Trend Form M Format K Format Single Single Trend T div S Trend 1 div 3s div 3s div Clear Trend erea Trend Exec l L EXEC g p SULUINYS ay S_q es 4 Interpolate Display Settings gt tes Y Selecting Whether to Interpolate the Display Same as the explanation given in Selecting Whether to Interpolate the Display in section 6 7 e Changing the Graticule Same as the explanation given in Changing the Graticule in section 6 7 e Turning ON OFF the Scale Value Display Same as the explanation given in Turning ON OFF the Scale Value Display in section 6 8 e Turning ON OFF the Label Display Same as the explanation given in Turning ON OFF the Label Display in section 6 8 Note The settings in this section are common with the waveform display see chapter 6 Changing these settings in the trend display also changes the waveform display settings For example if you turn the scale value display OFF in the trend disp
359. lay the scale value display in the waveform display is also turned OFF IM 760301 01E 7 15 Aejdsig pualy si 7 8 Procedure Restarting the Trend INPUT INFO DISPLAY sem VOLTAGE RANGE OO MEASURING CEDO mone auro CURRENT RANGE E ITEM amp ELEMENT ASURING Bisel RATIO A Ww wone AUTO OREMOTE numeri l WAVE OTHERS ITEM LOWER ITEM FORM U I P S Q A WP q Fur USER ELEMENT RE Do sor CAL INTEG OWER FORM USER SET O AL LOCAL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press FORM to display the Trend Form menu If the trend display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM 2 Press the Clear Trend Exec soft key to restart the trend Format Single Fy Trend T div ce Trend ce Display Settings Explanation When the trend is restarted the trend up to that point is cleared In addition to pressing the Clear Trend Exec soft key the following operations cause t
360. lected e Measurement Functions of Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker Measurement Mode and Cycle by Cycle Measurement Mode Averaging is not performed The average setting is invalid IM 760301 01E 2 13 uondioseqg jeuonounes 2 3 Measurement Conditions Data Update Interval For the procedure see section 4 10 e Limitation on the Data Update Rate by Measurement Modes Normal Measurement Mode Waveform Computation Mode and FFT Mode The data update rate setting is valid However the display update interval in waveform computation mode and FFT mode is the data update rate computation time e Wide Bandwidth Harmonic Measurement Mode and IEC Harmonic Measurement Mode The data update rate setting is invalid The data update rate is automatically determined by the fundamental frequency and the number of periods of the PLL source e Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker Measurement Mode The data update rate is fixed to 2 s e Cycle by Cycle Measurement Mode The data update rate setting is invalid The data update rate is automatically determined by the fundamental frequency and the number of measurement cycles of the synchronization source e Data Update Rate in Normal Measurement Mode Waveform Computation Mode and FFT Mode You can select the value from 50 ms 100 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s 10s and 20 s The numeric data is updated at the selected interval To capture relatively fast load fluctuations in the power system s
361. lement 4 Press one of the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element to select the target element 5 Press the cursor keys to set the power coefficient 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set the SF ratio for all elements Scalini Scaling Bt E V u i N Scaling Item Avr crt BF aN E a d Element 2 1 0000 gt Element 3 1 0000 Element 4 1 0009 4 16 IM 760301 01E 4 5 Setting the Scaling Function When Using VT CT Explanation Set the VT ratio when applying the output from the secondary side to the voltage input terminal Then set the voltage range according to the maximum value of the VT output see section 4 3 In addition set the CT ratio or the transformation ratio of the current sensor that outputs current when applying the secondary output of the CT or clamp type current sensor that outputs current to the current input terminal Then set the current range according to the maximum value of the current sensor output For details see section 2 3 e Turning ON OFF the Scaling Function You can select whether to multiply the applicable measurement function by the VT ratio CT ratio or power coefficient When reading the measured value directly using VT or CT or current sensor select ON The SCALING key illuminates when ON is selected Applicable measurement function Voltage U current power P S and Q maximum and minimum voltages U pk and U pk and maximum
362. lue reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value The integration time and value are held at that point e Setting the Integration Timer The time in units of hour minute second can be set in the following range 00000 00 00 to 10000 00 00 Note If you set the integration timer time to 00000 00 00 in real time normal integration mode the integration starts at the specified start date time The integration is stopped at the specified time when the maximum integration time of 10000 hours is exceeded or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value The integration time and value are held at that point e Setting the Reservation Time Set the time to start stop the integration in year month day hour minute second Make sure the reservation time for stopping the integration is after the reservation time for starting the integration The selectable range of the values is as follows Year 4 digit year Hour minute second 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 Note The reservation time allows up to 31 days to be specified for February In this case an error message is displayed at the time of execution of the integration operation section 5 13 Reset the reservation time Leap years are recognized at the time of execution of the integration operation For a description of starting stopping and resetting the integration and other items see section 5 11 5 44 IM 760301 01E 5 15
363. ly on an unbalanced three phase circuit it is recommended that a three phase three wire system three voltage three current system 3P3W 3V3A be used to make the measurement The following wiring examples are for connecting CTs When connecting a clamp type current sensor that outputs current substitute the CT with the clamp type current sensor The assignment of elements to the input terminals in the following figure varies depending on the number of installed input elements For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 2 3 Measurement Conditions Wiring Example of a Single Phase Two Wire System 1P2W Using VT and CT SOURCE LOAD SOURCE LOAD Input terminal Input terminal Wiring Example of a Single Phase Three Wire System 1P3W Using VT and CT SOURCE LOAD i SS SS A Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 ad 3 22 IM 760301 01E 3 11 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the VT CT Wiring Example of a Three Phase Three Wire System 3P3W Using VT and CT R SOURCE LOAD S T 9 QL Or g OV LO QL ICT OVIVT 1 w 1 i 1 WW 1 l 000 1 0900 1 000 f 1 O Ol i Ovi 10 Ol 1 OM ay Serer Saree BS rey EN See Ones Ce ee eee E
364. m SINGLE CAL ITEM Foru USER ELEMENT INTEG sHiFr 7 LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL e Selecting the Target Element 1 Press ELEMENT to select the target element The corresponding element indicator above of the key illuminates To select all elements press SHIFT ELEMENT ALL e Selecting the External Current Sensor Input Connector 2 Press EXT SENSOR to turn ON the EXT SENSOR key If it is already illuminated proceed to step 3 e Setting the External Current Sensor Range 3 Press the current range selection key UP and DOWN keys to set the external current sensor range The specified range is displayed with the current range indicator to the left of the keys and on the upper right corner of the screen where the elements are displayed e Press the current range UP key to increase the external current sensor range Press the current range DOWN key to decrease the external current sensor range e Press AUTO to specify auto range The AUTO key illuminates 4 Repeat steps 1 and 3 to set the external current sensor range of all elements 4 12 IM 760301 01E 4 4 Setting the Measurement Range When Using the External Current Sensor Setting the External Current Sensor Transformation Ratio 1 Press SHIFT EXT SENSOR SENSOR RATIO to display the Sensor Ratio menu Only the installed elements are displayed e Selecting the Target Element 2 Press one of
365. memory PC Numeric display data Waveform display data Waveform sampling data Recall Store ASCII format csv Numeric display data Waveform display data Waveform sampling data Float format Numeric display data wtd Waveform display data fld Waveform sampling data fld Binary format wvf Waveform display data Waveform sampling data 1 Applies only to advanced computation G6 option 2 Numeric display data cannot be saved to binary format 3 Data acquisition via the Ethernet GP IB RS 232 USB interface 4 Data retrieval via the storage medium 5 The software program can be downloaded by accessing the Download and Support page from the following URL http www yokogawa com tm PC alain tain a a E ai kn a I HS SRS SRR Se Sere 1 Save i i WT Viewer boo Binary format E i wta ea aap ma gt CSV format csv File reader Save H i software gt I IM 760301 01E 2 35 uondioseq jeuonounes 2 11 Saving and Loading Data and Other Functions Printing on the Built in Printer The screen image and numeric data list can be printed on the built in printer optional For details see chapter 2 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Built in printer option Ethernet Communication Option The numeric data waveform displa
366. memory before storing 851 Stored file and measurement mode are z 8 3 different Set the appropriate measurement mode before recalling 852 Stored file is illegal 8 4 Initialize memory before storing 853 Cannot be executed set during Recall mode 8 1 Set the Mode to Store 854 Waveform display data not found 855 Storing momory is full 8 4 Storing has been stopped 856 An error has occured while storing Storing has been stopped 857 Cannot be set while Master Slave 10 9 Synchronized Measurement is set to Slave 858 Store Recall process is in progress now Execute or set setting again 8 4 8 6 860 Cannot be set or executed while accessing Wait until access has completed Aquisition memory 861 Acquisition data not found 862 Numeric data not found om 864 This wiring cannot be set as the first 4 1 selected element 865 Cannot be set while integration is running Stop or reset Integration 866 Cannot be set or executed while Auto Print Turn off Auto Print from the PRINT MENU is operating SHIFT PRINT menu 867 Auto Print is not in operation Start Auto Print from the PRINT MENU SHIFT PRINT 868 Print out destination must be set to Built in Set Print to to Built in from the PRINT MENU Printer in order to start Auto Print SHIFT PRINT menu 869 Auto Print funciton is not supported in the current measurement mode or settings 870 Auto Print Interval setting is invalid Se
367. ment Modes The NULL function cannot be used in the following measurement modes Wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode IEC harmonic measurement mode Voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement mode Cycle by cycle measurement mode IM 760301 01E 10 3 suoljoun y 48410 10 3 Selecting the Sampling Frequency Procedure Explanation scarna merren _ave MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER HRM SET MEASURE J fsvne source CURSOR NULL F mes store MENU STORE SET print msc Herr MENU DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT wumenic WAVE U 1 P sane l UPDATE RATE HOLD ore WPiq TIME ruin SINGLE ITEM FORM LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER eeuen USERSET O ALL CAL l INTEG OREMOTE sen E To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu 2 Press the Sampling Frequency soft key to display the Sampling Frequency menu 3 Press any of the soft keys from Auto Clock A to C to sele
368. n USER ELEMENT SINGLE CAL INTEG Message Language ENG Menu Language Crest Factor LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL OREMOTE LOCAL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 Press MISC to display the Misc menu Press the Config soft key to display the Config menu Press the Font soft key to display the Font menu Press the Gothic or Roman soft key to select the display font Contig Message Language ENG Menu Language Key Lock Sas ON PFF ON Shift Lock Shift Lock ON PFF ON Crest Factor CF6 EF3 cr6 IM 760301 01E 10 5 suonouny 19410 10 4 Selecting the Display Font Explanation The font used to display characters and numbers can be selected e Gothic A font with constant line width e Roman A font in which the vertical lines are thicker than horizontal lines with emphasis at the beginning and end of the stroke Note Both the Gothic and Roman fonts used on the WT3000 are original fonts designed by YOKOGAWA Therefore the details of each font may differ from that of other devices
369. n Common to Cursor for Wave Cursor for FFT displayed on models with the advanced computation G6 option Trend Cursor Trend C1 Trace Trend C2 Trace Trend C1 Trend C2 x Off T1 T2 100 900 HRM SET Freq Band PLL Source Min Order Max Order Thd Formula Normal U1 1 100 1 Total STORE Store Status Off STORE SET Mode Store To Store Settin Mode Count Store Interval Store Item List Item Store Memory Manual 100 00 00 00 Numeric Elementi U I P S Q 4 Frequ Freql FILE File Item Setup IMAGE SAVE Format Color AUTO Naming TIFF off ON NULL Null Off App 8 IM 760301 01E Appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data Item Setting MOTOR SET displayed on models with the motor evaluation function on the motor version Scaling Speed Scaling Torque Scaling Pm Unit Speed Unit Torque Unit Pm Analog Auto Range Speed Auto Range Torque Range Speed Range Torque Line Filter Sync Source Pulse Range Upper Range Upper Range Lower Range Lower Rated Upper Rated Upper Rated Lower Torque Rated Lower Rated Freq Pulse N Speed Sync Speed Pole Source Speed Torque Speed Torque Torque Rated Freq anana annann 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 rpm Nm Ww Off Off 20V 20V Off None 10000 0000 50 0000 0 0000 50 0000 50 0000 15000 Hz 50 0000 500
370. n through the communication protocol of GP IB RS 232 option Ethernet option using communication commands setting the Ethernet communication LAN function option etc HELP key See section 10 8 Displays a help window that provides information about the setup menu that is displayed LOCAL Key See the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760301 17E CD ROM Switches the WT3000 from remote mode REMOTE indicator illuminated to local mode enable front panel key operation on the WT3000 However the key is invalid when the WT3000 is in local lockout mode IM 760301 01E 1 9 syed JO suonouny pue sowen 1 3 Display Screen Screen Example When Measuring Power Numeric Display in Normal Measurement Mode For a description of the screens in other measurement modes and display modes other than power measurement numeric display see the respective chapters covering each mode Measurement mode see section 3 16 Display of various settings Display indicating that the Measurement range see section 4 3 display items can be changed Data update rate section 4 10 directly see section 5 1 Synchronization source see section 4 7 Input peak over range Integration status see section 5 11 indicator see section 5 1 Page bar see section 5 1 Normal Mode Uover m Spd 1 4 1Arms Iover Trq Integ Reset amp change items PAGE _ Elementi _ U1 100Vrms Urms1 1
371. n mode and FFT mode is the data update rate computation time 4 28 IM 760301 01E 4 11 Hold and Single Measurement Procedure VOLTAGE RANGE eer ALL INPUT INFO a Explanation MEASURING DISPLAY S CURRENT RANGE MEASURING ITEM amp ELEMENT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys SENSOR RATIO In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For 1808 AUTO OREMOTE ITEM rumen WAVE FORM wie S Q A USER SINGLE CAL ELEMENT LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL e Holding the Numeric Data Display 1 Press HOLD The HOLD key illuminates and the numeric data display is held e Performing a Single Measurement 2 Press SINGLE The measurement is performed once and the instrument enters the hold condition e Releasing the Hold Operation 3 Press HOLD while the values are held The HOLD key turns OFF and the numeric data display is updated e Hold UPDATE RATE HOLD A INTEG details on the procedures see section 3 14 c Q Q gt rr SHIFT This function aborts the measurement and display operations that are performed at the data u
372. n n PZB PZA x 100 On models with the motor evaluation function motor version the energy conversion efficiency of the motor can be computed by setting the equation n Pm PZA x 100 or Pm P B x 100 Setting the Efficiency Compensation For procedures see section 5 8 Compensates for the measurement loss that occurs due to the wiring used for measurement or the internal impedance of the power meter There are two functions used to compensate for the loss caused by the measurement instrument For details see appendix 8 e Wiring Compensation Compensates for the loss caused by the wiring system of each element e Efficiency Compensation The power measurement on the secondary side of a power transformer such as an inverter includes loss caused by the measurement instrument This loss appears as error in the efficiency computation This function compensates for this loss IM 760301 01E 2 17 uondioseg jeuonounes 2 5 Computation Setting the Compensation for Two Wattmeter Method For procedures see section 5 8 In the two wattmeter method an error results when current flows through the neutral line This function computes the current the flows through the neutral line for measurements using the two wattmeter method with a three phase three wire 3V3A system and adds the compensation value to the measured power For details see appendix 8 This function can be set on models with the delta computation option
373. n time is set in relative time When the specified time elapses the operation is automatically reset and restarted Integration is repeated until STOP is pressed When the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value the integration time and value are held Hold Integration value Hold Integration time Timer Timer Timer lt e gt lt gt value value value Reset Start Press STOP 2 22 IM 760301 01E 2 6 Integration Real Time Normal Integration Mode The date and time of start and stop of the integration operation are set The integration is stopped at the specified time or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value The integration time and value are held at that point Hold Integration value Hold Integration time Start date time Stop date time Reset Real Time Repetitive Integration Mode Continuous Integration The start and stop of the integration operation are set with the date and time The integration is repeated at the specified timer setting during that time When the time specified by the timer elapses the operation is automatically reset and restarted The integration is stopped at the specified time or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value The integration time and value are held at that point Integration Hold value Integration Hold time Timer Timer Timer gt l
374. n your PC for analysis e The file cannot be loaded into the WT3000 Float e Saved in 32 bit floating format e The file cannot be loaded into the WT3000 9 16 IM 760301 01E 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data Numeric Data Waveform Sampling Data e Extension and Data Size Data Type Extension Data Size Bytes Binary wvt Approx 8K 4 x the number of waveform sampling data points x Tw where Tw is the number of displayed waveforms hdr Approx 1 K condition when there is one displayed waveform ASCII CSV Approx 150 K condition when there is one displayed waveform with the data update rate set to 50 ms Float fld 4 x the number of waveform sampling data points The number of waveform sampling data points of U1 to 14 Speed Torque Math1 Math2 in waveform computation mode Data Update Rate Number of Waveform Sampling Data Points 50 ms 10 000 points 100 ms 20 000 points 250 ms 50 000 points 500 ms 100 000 points 1s 200 000 points 2s 400 000 points 5s 1 000 000 points 10s 2 000 000 points 20s 4 000 000 points The number of waveform sampling data points of U1 to 14 Speed Torque Math1 Math2 in FFT mode FFT Points Number of Waveform Sampling Data Points 200 k 200 000 points 20 k 20 000 points The number of waveform sampling data points do not depend on the data update rate The number of waveform sampling data points of FF1 and FF2 in FFT mode
375. nation of Measurement Functions 3 20 IM 760301 01E 3 11 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the VT CT Connect a measurement cable from an external voltage transformer VT or current transformer CT to the voltage or current input terminal of the input element Wire according to the procedure in this section also when using a clamp type current sensor that outputs current To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the precautions given in section 3 5 Wiring Precautions An external VT can be connected to the voltage input terminal to make measurements when the maximum voltage of the circuit under measurement exceeds 1000 Vrms If the maximum current of the circuit under measurement exceeds the maximum range of the input element as described below measurement can be made by connecting an external CT or a clamp type current sensor that outputs current to the current input terminal 2 Ainput element When the maximum current exceeds 2 Arms 30 A input element When the maximum current exceeds 30 Arms Connecting to the Input Terminal e Voltage Input Terminal The terminal is a 4 mm safety banana jack female Insert the safety terminal the conductive parts are not exposed into the voltage input terminal When using the 758931 Safety Terminal Adapter that comes with the package see section 3 6 e Current Input Terminal When the voltage of the circuit unde
376. nctions during Normal Measurement Table 1 3 Measurement Functions during Normal Measurement Method of Determination Equation For details on the symbols in the equation see the Note on page App 3 True rms value Urms Urms Umn Udc Urmn Volt Rectified mean value calibrated oltage 5 the rms value UMN T UIV Simple average Udc of avGlu n ava Acilu l AVG u n AVGI u n Rectified mean value Urmn True rms value Irms Irms Imn Idc Irmn Rectified mean value calibrated Current to the rms value Imn T gt g Simple average Idc 4 AVG i n 2 V2 AVG i n l AVG i n AVG i n Rectified mean value Irmn Active power P W AVG u n i n Apparent power S VA TyPE1 TYPE2 ail TYPE3 P Q Reactive power TYPE1 Q var TYPE2 s 4 S P s is 1 or 1 for lead phase or lag phase respectively TYPE3 alk k min Q k Ur k l k Uj k Ir k Ur k and Ir k are the real part components of U k and I k Uj k and Ij k are the imaginary part components of U k and I k Valid only when harmonics are being measured correctly Power factor P S Phase difference cos 2 S The phase angle can be switched between lead D lag G display and 360 display See section 5 10 Voltage frequency fU FreqU Hz Current frequency fl Freql Hz The voltage frequency fU and current frequency fl are measured using zero crossing de
377. nd bypasses the measurement circuit of the WT3000 This prevents damage to the measurement circuit Because current does not flow through the measurement circuit of the WT3000 the measured value may become 0 A but the input peak over range indicator at the top section of the screen illuminates in red If this happens the measured value is approximately 0 A but current is actually flowing through the circuit under measurement Therefore do not disconnect the wires to the measurement terminals sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 IM 760301 01E 3 9 3 6 Assembling the Adapter to Be Connected to the Voltage Input Terminal Assembling the 758931 Safety Terminal Adapter When connecting a measurement cable to the voltage input terminal of the WT3000 use the 758931 Safety Terminal Adapter that comes with the package or the 758923 Safety Terminal Adapter that is sold separately When using the 758931 Safety Terminal Adapter assemble it according to the following procedure e Assembling the Safety Terminal Adapter 1 Remove approximately 10 mm of the covering from the end of the cable and pass it through the internal insulator Internal insulator Attachable cable Cable Covering Max diameter 3 9 mm Core wire Max diameter 1 8 mm 2 Insert the tip of the cable into the plug Fasten the cable in place using the hexagonal wrench Hexagonal wrench Plug Insert the hexagonal wrench into the plug and tighten 3 Insert the plug int
378. nd object Bitrend object T1 p n A ti Scaling f A Scaling Manual Auto Upper Scale WE Scaling oN Manual Upper Scale 1 000E 0 1 000E 0 1 000E 02 Lower Scale Lower Scale Lower Scale 1 000E 0 1 000E 0 1 000E 02 Explanation e Setting the Scale Set the upper and lower limits of the display frame when displaying the trend You can select the scaling mode from below e Auto Set to auto scaling The upper and lower limits on the screen display are automatically determined from the maximum and minimum values of the trend display data e Manual Set to manual scaling The upper and lower limits can be set arbitrary as necessary e Setting the Upper and Lower Limits for Manual Scaling You can set the limits in the range of 9 999E 30 to 9 999E 30 IM 760301 01E 7 11 Aejdsig pualy f 7 6 Displaying Trends on Divided Windows Procedure To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENTRANGE E operation press ESC OO located above the soft O G Qa fress In the procedural A CY explanation below the MEASURING ae phrase press the cursor COED e MODE AUTO wove AUTO keys may be used This INPUT INFO phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT orme and character strings For umeri wave
379. ng randane aiai rE cycle by cycle measurement ssesesserrerrierierrerrerrerreers 2 34 cycle by cycle measurement mode eee eee eeeees 3 34 D Page D A OUtDUL sepiii eirissado 2 37 data compression zt data format cccceeceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeneeeeeeee 9 23 ata S Z siar eina arn iinr kaasi EEs 8 18 9 12 9 14 data type oo 8 15 8 18 9 7 9 8 9 13 9 14 data update rate Date Time DG waht OC AEEA Delete Delete Exec delta computation directories directories creation of directory display color display interpolation 0 00 eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees display reSOLULIOMN 2 sscvsccscscecsesenssevecccseceesatsvsesnseccdoceverteveneses displayed items number of ii displayed items resetting the order of 0 0 eee 5 5 dist red WAVE sissi asmenea eani Errani ni distortion factor Dual tdp eaaa eene ae aE T ANARE D al Lists aa AS IM 760301 01E Index 1 E Page EAMP iire a Nara eee App 33 Off CIENCY eee cas caecutaceayscvess cusscssasdiiescdacecbee ceudavuctedeocestinedenebas 5 20 Efficiency Compensation cceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeneeeees 5 23 efficiency equation for 5 20 Element Independent sessssssesressrsrresrrrnsennrrnsrnerrnsensernsenee 4 4 elements independent setting Of eee eeeeeeeeeeeee 4 4 error messages Fr Ethernet sinetin ven earra
380. ng through a USB hub Do not connect USB devices other than a USB keyboard or a USB memory to the USB PERIPHERAL connector Do not connect multiple keyboards Holding down a key on the keyboard does not enter the character or value repetitively Do not connect and disconnect multiple USB devices repetitively To do so allow at least 10 s between connection and disconnection Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable after the power is turned ON until key operation is ready approximately 20 to 30 s Confirming the Keyboard That Is Connected To confirm the keyboard that is connected to the WT3000 carry out the procedure below 1 Press MISC 2 Press the USB soft key 3 Press the Device List soft key to display the USB Device List Check the USB keyboard that is connected USB Device List ev Ce Address Product Name Keyboard 2 Dell USB Keyboard Mass Storage 3 USB Flash Disk Yo gt gt Network D A Output Items Entering File Names Comments Etc When a keyboard is displayed on the screen you can enter the file name comment and other items using a USB keyboard The character that is entered through each key of the USB keyboard varies depending on the keyboard type Executing functions corresponding to the keys on the front panel of the WT3000 The functions corresponding to the front panel keys of the WT3000 are assigned to the keys on the USB keyboard By pre
381. nged and the function can be executed only when the measurement status is reset 10 Requires the motor version MV 11 Requires the built in printer option If an item that is not measured or computed in the respective measurement mode NAN data is printed 12 Only the screen image can be printed The list cannot be printed 13 Integration synchronization Synchronize cannot be set It is fixed to timer 14 Requires the D A output option 15 Requires the delta computation option 16 Requires the Ethernet communication option App 40 IM 760301 01E Appendix 11 Measurement Functions That Can Be Measured in Each Measurement Mode The measurement functions that can be measured in each measurement mode that is selectable on models with the advanced computation G6 option are as follows Table 1 2 Measurement Mode Measurement Item i i Normal Wide Bandwidth IEC Harmonic Waveform Measurement Harmonic Computation All rms values and each harmonic component Harmonic phase angle FreqU Freql Z k Rs k Impedance Xs k Rp k Xp k Pc Uhdf k Ihdf k Phdf k Uthd Ithd Harmonics Pthd Uthf Ithf Utif Itif hvf hef U pk Frequency x pu ddy Integration IM 760301 01E App 41 Appendix 11 Measurement Functions That Can Be Mea
382. nguage to use to display these messages and help messages see section 10 8 from the choices below The error codes for the error messages are the same for both English and Japanese For details on the error messages see section 11 2 e JPN Japanese e ENG English e Selecting the Menu Language The language used on the menu can be selected from the following e JPN Japanese e ENG English 3 42 IM 760301 01E 3 19 Setting the USB Keyboard Language Procedure Explanation ITEM amp ELEMENT OnEuoTE DISPLAY a NUMERIC wave un sone RRE HOLD Locau a a gt omens EA ruven snare CAL ITEM FORM USER evemenr INTEG sHiFr 7 LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys scana funeruter Lave _ MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER SYNC SOURCE CURSOR NULL In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE iuace save STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 print _misc HELP 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Pr
383. noise riding on the DC signal crosses level zero that point is detected as a zero crossing As a result sampled data is averaged over an unintended period and the measured values such as voltage and current may be unstable If the synchronization source is set to None these types of erroneous detection can be prevented All of the sampled data in the data update interval is used to determine the measured values Set the synchronization source according to the measurement signal and the measurement objective App 28 IM 760301 01E Appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period Data update interval i D Data update interval Measurement period Measurement period S a E Synchronization source setting OFF Unintended zero crossing caused by pulse noise Setting the Synchronization Period When Measuring a Three Phase Device If a three phase device is measured with input elements 1 and 2 using three phase three wire system set the synchronization source of input elements 1 and 2 to the same signal For example set the synchronization source of input element 1 and 2 to U1 or I1 the same synchronization source In effect the measurement periods of input elements 1 and 2 match and the voltage current and power of the three phase device can be measured with high accuracy Likewise if a three phase device is measured with input elements 1 2 and 3 using three phase four wire system set th
384. nput element 1 e Three phase AC power Connect to input elements 2 and 3 using three phase three wire system App 30 IM 760301 01E Appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period AC power U2 and 12 DC power U1 and I1 AC power U3 and I3 Power transformer Synchronization source setup example Input element 1 Input element 2 U2 or 12 U3 or 13 Input element 3 Power Transformer with Single Phase AC Input and Three Phase AC Output If the device that converts single phase AC power to three phase AC power is connected and measured as shown in the figure below set the synchronization source of input elements on the input end to the same signal and do the same for the input elements on the output end In this example set the synchronization source of input element 1 to U1 or 11 and set the synchronization source of input elements 2 and 3 to U2 or 11 U3 or 13 In this case AC signals of different frequencies are measured If the synchronization source of all input elements is set to the same signal the measurement period of either the input signal or the output signal will not be an integer multiple of the signal which is undesirable Single phase AC power Connect to input element 1 e Three phase AC power Connect to input elements 2 and 3 using three phase three wire system AC power U2 and I2 AC power U1 and l1 AC power U3 and I3 Power transformer Synchronization source setup
385. ns to setting equations for apparent power and reactive power depending on the measurement mode For details see page 2 19 For example if you set the equation to TYPE1 in normal measurement mode and switch to IEC harmonic measurement mode the equation automatically switches to TYPE3 If you switch the measurement mode back to normal measurement the equation automatically reverts to TYPE1 Setting the Equation for Corrected Power Depending on the applicable standard when the load that is connected to the potential transformer is extremely small the active power of the potential transformer that is measured needs to be compensated In such cases set the compensating equation and the coefficient Corrected power Pc is a measurement function in the normal measurement mode e Selecting the Applicable Standard Select the standard from below For the equations of each applicable standard see section 2 5 e IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 e IEC76 1 1993 e Setting the Coefficient Coefficients P1 and P2 can be specified Set the coefficients in the range of 0 0001 to 9 9999 Note Corrected power is computed only when the voltage mode is RMS or MEAN IM 760301 01E 5 27 JUSWIDINSeD JOMOd 5 10 Selecting the Display Format of the Phase Difference Procedure a Cursor keys O gt MES scarna merren _ave goar Fika Fe
386. nt in section 12 5 Input waveform 50 duty ratio rectangular wave When Used as a PLL Source Ext Clk during Harmonic Measurement Item Specifications Frequency range Harmonic measurement G5 option 10 Hz to 440 Hz Advanced computation G6 option 10 Hz to 2600 Hz Input waveform 50 duty ratio rectangular wave When Used as an External Sampling Clock Smp Clk during Wide Bandwidth Harmonic Measurement Mode Item Specifications Frequency range Frequencies that are 3000 times 0 1 Hz to 66 Hz Input waveform 50 duty ratio rectangular wave When Used as a Trigger Item Specifications Minimum pulse width tus Trigger delay time Within 1 u s 1 sample interval IM 760301 01E 12 13 suoleoyioeds Ey 12 8 Storage PC Card Interface Item Specifications Number of slots 1 Type TYPE II flash ATA card USB Storage Device Item Specifications Supported USB mass storage devices USB memory USB Mass Storage Class For specification details see the next section USB PERIPHERAL Interface 12 9 USB PERIPHERAL Interface Item Specifications Connector type USB type A connector receptacle Electrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to USB Rev 1 1 Data rate 12 Mbps maximum Supported keyboards 104 keyboard US and 109 keyboard Japanese conforming to USB HID Class Ver 1 1 Supported USB mas
387. nt multiplied to the power determined from the voltage and current e Power factor You can multiply a coefficient to the measured active power apparent power and reactive power to be displayed by setting a power factor SF Measurement Function Data before Transformation Transformation Result Voltage U U2 secondary output voltage of the VT UexV V VT ratio Current l2 Secondary output of the CT loxC C CT ratio Active power P Po PoxVxCxSF SF Power coefficient Apparent power S S2 S2xVxCxSF Reactive power Q Q2 QoxVxCxSF Max Min voltage value Upk Upke secondary output of the VT UpkexV Max Min current value Ipk lpk2 secondary output of the CT IpkoxC Crest Factor For procedures see section 4 6 The crest factor is defined as the ratio of the peak value of the waveform to the rms value Crest factor CF Peak value Rms value Peak value Rms value Input signal waveform The crest factor on the WT3000 is determined by the maximum peak value that can be applied for rated input in terms of a multiplication factor Peak value that can be input Crest factor CF PF Measurement range IM 760301 01E 2 11 uondioseg jeuonounes 2 3 Measurement Conditions The crest factor can be set to 3 or 6 on the WT3000 The measurable crest factor is as follows Crest factor CF measurement range x CF setting 3 or 6 Measured value rms value However the pea
388. numeric data and that of the waveform data may not be synchronized IM 760301 01E Aejdsiq wiojonejy fo 6 5 Position Procedure Zooming Vertically and Moving the Vertical OO VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE DOD a w MEASURING MEASURING wre Aus WeAn 0c JAMEN MODE SENSOR RATIO oe To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT WPiq TIME Furm SINGLE ITEM LOWER ITEM FORM LOWER FORM USER USER SET ELEMENT O ALL CAL INTEG OREMOTE son 1 Press ITEM to display the Wave Items menu If the waveform display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 SHIFT ITEM LOWER ITEM 2 Press the V Zoom amp Position soft key to display the V Zoom amp Pos menu e Selecting the Target Element 3 Press the Element soft key to display the Element menu Only the installed elements are displayed 4 Press one of the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element to select the target element Element i U Position e L Element 2 Wave
389. o 16 operands in one equation Some operands cannot be computed in measurement modes other than normal measurement mode For details see appendix 12 Measurement Functions for Computation The operators for the measurement functions are shown below in the form measurement function operand U U Urms URMS Umn UMN I I P P S S Q Q A LAMBDA o PHI fU FU fl FI U pk UPPK U pk UMPK l pk IPPK l pk IMPK CfU CFU Cfl CFI Pc PC ni ETA1 n2 ETA2 13 ETA3 n4 ETA4 Wp WH Wp WHP Wp WHM q AH q AHP q AHM WS SH WQ QH Time TI The following measurement functions can also be specified on models with the motor evaluation function motor version Speed SPEED Torque TORQUE Pm PM Slip SLIP SyncSp SYNC The following measurement functions can also be specified on models with delta computation option AF1 DELTA1 AF2 DELTA2 AF3 DELTA3 AF4 DELTA4 The measurement functions below can be computed on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option pU UPHI ol IPHI Z Z Rs RS Xs XS Rp RP Xp XP Uhdf UHDF lhdf IHDF Phdf PHDF Uthd UTHD Ithd ITHD Pthd PTHD Uthf UTHF Ithf ITHF Utif UTIF Itif ITIF hvf HVF hef HCF oU1 U2 PHIU1U2 pU1 U3 PHIU1U3 pU1 11 PHIU111 oU1 l2 PHIU112 U1 13 P
390. o display the phase difference using 180 lead and lag format or 360 format Delta computation Computes other numeric data of the measured circuit from the computed results of the difference of the instantaneous values Applicable only on models with the delta computation option Equation for distortion Set the denominator of factor the equation to the total waveform or fundamental waveform Applicable only to models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option Numeric Display Item Specifications Displayed items Displays the measurement functions of section 12 3 and those of the motor evaluation function delta computation and harmonic measurement options as described in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Display resolution 600000 Number of displayed items Select from 4 8 16 ALL single list dual list Applicable only to models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option Scrolling of displayed items Displays up to nine pages of the numeric data of the measurement functions by page scrolling Display reset Resets the display order of the numeric data to default Waveform Display Item Specifications Number of display rasters 501 Display format Peak Peak compressed data Sample rate Approx 200 kS s Waveforms can be reproduced accurately up to approximately 10 kHz Time axis In the range of 0 5 ms d
391. o move the cursor Cursor Cursor Cursor Trend Cursor Trend Cursor Trend Cursor bran BF o E o l M TrendC1 Traca T1 i Set Ea T2 Tset yi 4 T3 T4 TrendC1 Trace M Trendc1 Trac T1 M Trendc2 Traci T2 Ri T8 Trend ct F 111 T12 Trend c2 X 5 Trend C1 E Trend c1 gt Trend C2 X gt Trend c2 X S 5 7 18 IM 760301 01E 7 8 Cursor Measurement Explanation ON OFF A cursor can be placed on the displayed trend to measure and display the value at any point It can be used to measure the data on the vertical axis Y axis and horizontal axis X axis of various sections of the trend e ON Performs cursor measurement e OFF Does not perform cursor measurement Item under Measurement Select the target trend for the cursor measurement from T1 to T16 Moving the Cursor e Cursors move on the selected trend Specify the number of points from the left end of the screen to move the cursor with the left and right ends of the screen assumed to be point 0 and 1001 respectively e The cursors moves along the data points displayed on the screen one point at a time Measurement Item e Y Vertical value of cursor Y axis value e Yx Vertical value of cursor x Y axis value AY The difference between the Y axis values of cursor and cursor x e X X axis value of cursor from the left end of the screen In
392. o the internal insulator 4 4 Attach the external cover Check that the cover does not come off Cover Note Once the cover is attached disassembly is difficult Use care when attaching the cover Below is an illustration of the adapter when the work is completed 3 10 IM 760301 01E 3 6 Assembling the Adapter to Be Connected to the Voltage Input Terminal Explanation Use the adapters that come with the WT3000 or the adapters and various sensors sold separately for the WT3000 according to the object being wired as follows e Wiring to the Voltage Measurement Terminal Voltage measurement target 758921 Bb 758917 A 758922 J lt L gt Voltage input terminal Er of the WT3000 758929 758923 AC gt By Ze 758931 6B dn r When using the clamp on probe that is sold separately use it as follows Wiring to the Current Measurement Terminal Current measurement target 96001 voltage output type EXT input terminal 758924 of the WT3000 758921 A Current input terminal of the WT3000 Connecting the clamp on p
393. oaded information and cannot be undone It is recommended that you first save the current setup parameters and then load the setup parameters from a file e Setup parameters such as the date and time and communications are not saved Therefore loading setup parameters from a file will not change these settings e Setup parameters that have been saved on products with firmware version having incompatible data cannot be loaded e Setup parameters saved on models with a different product version element configuration or options as well as models with a different firmware ROM version of incompatible data cannot be loaded 9 26 IM 760301 01E 9 6 Specifying the File to Be Displayed Displaying File Properties and Selecting File Attributes Procedure fa Cursor keys a 0 MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER SYNC SOURCE CURSOR NULL a FILE _ macesave STORE MENU STORE SET prt msc herr CAUTION Do not remove the PC card or USB memory or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the PC card or USB memory is blinking This can damage the PC card or USB memory or destroy the data on the it DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT OREMOTE NUMERIC WAVE re rem LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM U I P sone UPDATE RATE HOLD WP q TIME FU FI n E
394. od while flicker measurement is not ready 831 Processing now Retry setting or execution again 836 Cannot be set or executed while Cycle by Reset the cycle by cycle measurement Cycle measurement is not reset 841 Attempted to start integration after Reset Integration 5 14 integration time has reached its preset value 842 Attempted to start integration while 5 14 integration is in progress 843 Measurement stopped due to overflow Reset Integration 5 14 during integration or due to a power failure 844 Attempted to stop integration even though 5 14 integration was not in progress 845 Attempted to start integration while 5 14 integration was in progress or integration mode was not selected 846 Attempted to start integration while 5 14 measurement of peak overflow was in progress 847 Attempted to start integration in continuous 5 11 integration mode when integration preset time was set to 0 11 4 IM 760301 01E 11 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Code Message Corrective Action Reference Section 848 Attempted made to start integration in real 5 12 time counting integration mode when the end time had already passed 849 Attempted made to start storing in real 8 3 time counting storing mode when the end time had already passed 850 Stored file already exists 8 4 Initialize
395. of the voltage and current is also the entire span within the data update period The measured value may fluctuate or may not be correct if the synchronization source is not set correctly Refer to appendix 6 when setting the synchronization source For the list of measurement period synchronization source settings of all input elements see section 3 17 Displaying the Setup Parameter List You can change the measurement period synchronization source with the list displayed IM 760301 01E 4 21 SUOI IPUOD JUSWaINSeS y gt 4 8 Selecting the Input Filter Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT et A women WAVE U I P s a ale tle HOLD LOCAL OKO E v l ITEM FORM USER evewenr INTEG f sur J T My LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL a y M aa TO exit the menu during operation press ESC located above NOTOR FREQ the soft keys SET ILTER Hrm set measure snes in the procedural explanation below the phrase press the ene 2 cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE IMAGE SAVE STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 MENU e Selecting the Line Filter 1 Press LINE FILTER to display the LINE FILTER menu Only the in
396. oltage or peak current is the entire span within the data update interval Therefore the measurement period for the measurement functions U pk U pk I pk l pk CfU and Cfl that are determined from the maximum value of the voltage and current is also the entire span within the data update period The rising or falling edge is automatically selected for the one that allows the interval to be longer If the number of rising slope or falling slope is less than or equal to 1 within the data update interval the measurement period is set to the entire span within the data update interval You can select which input signal will be the synchronization source synchronized to the zero crossing point of the input signal for each element You can set the synchronization source signal to the voltage current or external clock that is input to the element For details see appendix 6 Trigger slope refers to the movement of the signal from a low level to a high level rising edge or from a high level to a low level falling edge The data update interval is the interval by which the data is sampled for determining the measurement functions This is equivalent to the value you can specify in Data Update Rate of section 2 3 Data update interval Data update interval A Yy Measurement period Measurement period Synchronization 5 source ARAN Rising edge zero crossing O Falling edge zero crossing
397. om direct input e Current of a 2 A input element from direct input at the 500 mA to 2 A range e Current of a 2 A input element from 0 03 of reading 0 05 of range direct input at the 5 mA to 200 mA range 66 Hz lt f lt 1 kHz 0 03 of reading 0 05 of range 1 kHz lt f lt 10 kHz 0 1 of reading 0 05 of range 10 kHz lt f lt 50 kHz 0 3 of reading 0 1 of range 50 kHz lt f lt 100 kHz 0 012 x f of reading 0 2 of range 100 kHz lt f lt 500 kHz 0 009 x f of reading 0 5 of range 500 kHz lt f lt s 1 MHz 0 022 x f 7 of reading 1 of range The unit of f in the read error equation is kHz Add 3 of range reference value to the above accuracy figure for the accuracy of the waveform display data Upk and Ipk However for external sensor input add 3 of range 5 mV reference value The effective input range is within 300 of the range within 600 of the range if the crest factor is set to 6 For temperature changes after zero level compensation or range change add 50 ppm of range C to the DC accuracy of the voltage For temperature changes after zero level compensation or range change add the following values to the DC accuracy of the direct current input e 2 Ainputelement 3 uA C e 30 A input element 0 2 mA C For temperature changes after zero level compensation or range change on the external current sensor input add 0 02 mV C to the DC accuracy of the ex
398. on in the range of 3 s to 1 day The data update interval of the trend is determined by the data update rate and the time axis T div For example if the data update rate and T div are set to 50 ms and 3 s div respectively the trend display is updated every second If the data update rate and T div are set to 10 s and 3 s div respectively the trend display is updated every 10 s and the trend data is shown as a line graph at 10 s intervals If T div is set to 1 day the data update interval of the trend is 1728 s regardless of the data update rate setting Note ____ e Ifthe time axis is changed the retrieval of trend waveform data restarts The trend display up to that point is cleared and the trend starts from the right end e One division on the trend display corresponds to 50 rasters For example if T div is set to 1 day 1 raster is equal to 1728 s 1 day 50 In this case the data update interval of the trend is 1728 s and the data is displayed P P compressed For a description of rasters and P P compression see section 2 7 Aejdsig pualy f IM 760301 01E 7 9 7 5 Setting the Scale Procedure ELEMENT O OO ALL INPUT INFO VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE MEASURING MEASURING ao DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT OREMOTE l WAVE U I P S Q A USER ELEMENT PRE eo sor CAL INTEG
399. opy File List M Function Path PC_Card pct Space 123592704 byte Copy File Name Size Date Attribute a pc_card Set Reset lt 2004705721 17 46 27309 2004705721 17 53 R E AIT Set Property Filter Item AJ Attribute K Dest Dir Selecting the Copy Source Files at Once 9 10 11 co M Function File List M Function Path PC_CardNpct Copy Space 123389952 byte Copy File Name Size Date Attribute Press the cursor keys to select a file directory or storage medium Press the All Set soft key Asterisks appear to the left of the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory the selected directory and all the files in the directory or all the directories and files in the selected storage medium The corresponding items will be copied At the same time the All Set soft key changes to the All Reset soft key Press the All Reset soft key Asterisks to the left of the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory the selected directory and all the files in the directory or all the directories and files in the selected storage medium disappear The corresponding items will not be copied At the same time the All Reset soft key changes to the All Set soft key Copy a Set Reset pccard 1 Set Reset Sa gt 2004705721 17 46 200470
400. or e Setting User Colors Press the User Color soft key to display the Graph Color dialog box Press the cursor keys to select the item you wish to set Press SET A box used to set the color level appears Press the cursor keys to set the color level Press SET or ESC to close the box Oy Ol a E Graph Color Mode k Default Graph Color 1 User color R R o _ 13 Speed U4 Torque 14 e Setting the Text Color e Selecting Preset or User 3 Press the Text Color soft key to display the Text Color menu 4 Press the cursor keys to select a value between Preset1 and User K User Color K D A Output Items e Setting User Colors Press the User Color soft key to display the Text Color dialog box Press the cursor keys to select the item you wish to set Press SET A box used to set the color level appears Press the cursor keys to set the color level Press SET or ESC to close the box Oy Ol OI IM 760301 01E 10 9 suoljoun 19410 10 6 Setting the Display Color Text Color i gt Preset 1 GAA Explanation Text Color i User Color R G B 5 Menu Fore ee 4 7 Menu Back Select Box Sub Menu Selected Key The display color for each item can be specified Set the color using a ratio 0 7 of red R green G and bl
401. or 2 A storage medium that is already partitioned can be selected and formatted as a separate storage media but the separate storage media cannot be partitioned further Executing OK Aborting Cancel the Format Operation 9 Press the Format Exec soft key An Alert dialog box appears 10 Press the cursor keys to select OK or Cancel 11 Select OK and press SET to execute the format operation Select Cancel and press SET to not carry out the format operation Format M Function Format W Function Format M Function Format Format Format 4 g A Media Info Media Info Media Info lert EE 5 7 a N ATE Real ly Format K j gt Partition Format 2 All data in selected device will be erased K i Do you want to execute f a v Format Exec Format Exec a 9 4 IM 760301 01E 9 2 Formatting the Storage Media Explanation e Storage Medium Information Lists the information about the selected storage medium e Media Name Storage medium name e Media Size Total size e Used Space Size of the used area e Vacant Space Size of the free area e Partition Size Number of partitions e Formatting the PC Card USB Memory The PC card or USB memory is formatted to FAT format Number of Partitions You can set partitions on the PC card However PC cards that are handled
402. or February If an erroneous date is specified an error message is displayed at the time of execution of the storage operation section 8 4 Reset the reservation time in this case Leap years are recognized at the time of execution of the storage operation 8 10 IM 760301 01E 8 4 Storing Data Procedure f DISPLAY a humen WAVE vie save UPDATE o Locau v ITEM FORM LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL a AA ITEM amp ELEMENT OREMOTE lt gt weg Fwa SINGLE INTEG sarr USER ELEMENT scaunc mereen ave To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above FREG the soft keys SET FILTER MEASURE In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the ae ON cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE J IMAGE SAVE STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 8 14 HELP print msc MENU If you are storing data for the first time after turning the power switch ON start from step 1 If you stored the data before and the data is stored in the internal memory proceed to step 6 to clear the internal memory To set or execute the storage operation set the m
403. orner of the screen During integration synchronization mode The WT3000 enters store ready state The STORE key blinks and Store Ready is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen When integration starts the first storage operation starts The STORE key illuminates and Store Start is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen IM 760301 01E 8 11 eea paiojs oy Burnes pue eeg Bulyjesey pue Buros e 8 4 Storing Data SN Store Set P ara Mode Btore Recall Is yy pati ea Setting Memory to File Init Memory Alert M OFF S Alert Ms tal ofr bal d Setting gt Memory to File Init Memory Stopping the Storage Operation 5 If the storage operation is in progress pressing STORE again stops the operation The STORE key turns OFF e Automatically Stopping the Storage Operation 5 The storage operation stops automatically according to the following conditions depending on the store mode The STORE key turns OFF During manual mode The storage operation stops when the specified store count of data is stored or when the data is stored up to the internal memory size approx 30 MB Store Stop is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen During real time mode The storage operation stops when the specified store count of data is stored when the reservation time for stopping the storage o
404. ote on page App 3 Integration Integration time Time from integration start to integration stop h m s iw u n i n Time N Watt WP n 1 hour tit N is the number of samples over the integration time and c is the number of samples in 1 hour Wh g WP is the sum of positive and negative watt hours WP is the sum of positive P consumed watt hours WP is the sum of negative P watt hours returned to the power supply 4 N n Time RMS N z MEAN I n is the nth measured current value RMEAN N is the number of data updates Ampere hour The time unit is h Ah ie q i n Time q N os q i n is the nth sampled data of the current signal N is the number of data samples q is the sum of positive and negative ampere hours q is the sum of positive i n ampere hours q is the sum of negative i n ampere hours The time unit is h N 1 Volt ampere hour N X S n Time WS VAh n 1 S n is the nth measured apparent power value and N is the number of data updates 4 N Var hour N lan Time WQ varh n 1 Q n is the nth measured reactive power value and N is the number of data updates function Single phase Three phase Three phase three wire three voltage Three phase Wiring system two wire 1P3W three wire 3P3W three current 3P3W 3V3A four wire 3P4W Ux V U1 U2 2 U1 U2 U3 3 IZ A 11 12 2 11 12
405. ou can select the measurement range from the following e Auto Enables auto mode e Ifa trigger occurs within the timeout time approx 100 ms the display is updated using that trigger e Ifa trigger does not occur within the timeout time the display is automatically updated when the timeout time elapses e When the trigger signal period is greater than or equal to 100 ms the two conditions above are met alternately and the display is updated In this happens use normal mode e Normal Enables normal mode e The display is updated when the trigger occurs e The display is not updated if the trigger does not occur Selecting the Trigger Source Select the target to which the trigger condition is applied trigger source from below The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements U1 11 U2 12 U3 13 U4 14 and Ext Clk external clock If the trigger source is set to Ext Clk apply a signal according to the following specifications If the trigger source is set to Ext Clk the trigger level settings are void When Setting the Trigger Source to Ext Clk Apply a trigger signal to the external clock input connector EXT CLK on the rear panel according to the following specifications EXT CLK A Item Specifications Connector type BNC connector Input level TTL Minimum pulse width 1 us Trigger delay time Within 1 us 1 sample interval CAUTION Applying a voltage outside t
406. ower P Ulcosp Negative power Average power P Ulcos 5 0 The positive and negative powers are the same App 19 x pu ddy Appendix 4 Power Basics Power Harmonics and RLC of AC Circuits Active Power and Power Factor In alternating electrical current not all of the power calculated by the product of voltage and current UI is consumed The product UI is called apparent power S The unit is VA volt ampere The apparent power is used to express the electrical capacity of a device that runs on AC electricity The true power that a device consumes is called active power P or effective power and this corresponds to the aforementioned AC power S UI VA P Ulcos W coso indicates the ratio of the apparent power that becomes the true power and this is called power factor A Reactive Power If current lags voltage U by current can be broken down into a component in the same direction as voltage U Icoso and a perpendicular component Ising Active power P Ulcosg is the product of voltage U and current component Icos On the contrary the product of voltage U and current component Ising is called the reactive power Q and the unit is var Q Ulsing var gt C Below is the relationship between the apparent power S active power P and reactive power Q S P Q App 20 IM 760301 01E Appendix 4 Power Basics Power Harmonics and RLC of AC Circuits Harmoni
407. owing No interpolation is performed e When the area is not an interpolation area e When the area is an interpolation area e e Linearly interpolates between two points e When the area is not an interpolation area Connects the dots vertically e When the area is an interpolation area IM 760301 01E Aejdsiq wuozaneM al 6 7 Selecting the Display Interpolation and Graticule e Changing the Graticule Select the grid or cross scale to display on the screen from the choices below Grid display E No grid or cross scale display HH Cross scale display 6 20 IM 760301 01E 6 8 Turning ON OFF the Scale Value and Waveform Label To exit the menu during ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE erso operation press ESC OO located above the soft Sfo Ca ee ELEMENT In the procedural ALL Cv CY explanation below the o fii COMPEN MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor ina COH mode Auto COE cen keys may be used This INPUT INFO phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT orme and character strings For A toca details on the procedures CAL D gt S 0 see section 3 14 gt WPIq OTHERS dal Fumin sr v mem V
408. pdate rate and holds the data display of various functions The D A output the numeric data list that the built in printer prints the communication output and other values are set to the held numeric data e Single Measurement While in the hold condition the measurement is performed once at the specified data update rate and enters the hold condition If you press the SINGLE key when not in hold condition measurement is restarted from that point Note For details on the hold function during integration see section 5 14 IM 760301 01E 4 29 SUOI IPUOD JUSWaINSeS y gt Chapter 5 Power Measurement 5 1 Displayed Items Procedure ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE OO OO ELEMENT ALL MEASURING WIRING INPUT INFO CURRENT RANGE EXT SENSOR NSOR RATIO o fii MEASURING o G MODE ie 0 a o DISPLAY ITEM Sr FORM LEM amp ELEMEN l we USER ELEMENT tiar eow Eg INTEG LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM d USER SET O ALL Function select key OREMOTE LOCAL SHIFT Displaying Numeric Data on the Entire Screen 1 Press NUMERIC to display numeric data Displaying Numeric Data by Dividing the Display into Halves Split Display 1 Press OTHERS to display the Others menu 2 Press any of the soft keys from Numeric wave Numeric Bar
409. pen 50 60Hz 0 01 of range or less Up to 200 kHz reference value Voltage 3 range x f of range or 3 whichever is less or less Direct current input and external current sensor input maximum range range x 0 001 x f of range or less Except 0 01 or greater The unit of frequency f is kHz The maximum range in an equation is 30 Aor 10 V Line filter Select OFF 500 Hz 5 5 kHz or 50 kHz Frequency filter Select On or Off A D converter Simultaneous conversion of voltage and current inputs Resolution 16 bits Conversion rate sampling interval Approx 5 u s For the measurement functions of harmonic measurement see chapter 7 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Range switching Can be set for each element Auto range function Range Increase When U or exceeds 110 of the rated range When the peak value of the input signal exceeds approximately 330 of the rated range approximately 660 when the crest factor is set to 6 Range decrease When U or is less than or equal to 30 of the rated range and Upk or Ipk is less than or equal to 300 of the lower range approximately 600 when the crest factor is set to 6 12 2 Display Item Specifications Display 8 4 color TFT LCD monitor Display resolution of the entire screen 640 H x 480 V dots Display resolution of the waveform display 501 H x 432 V dots Display update interval See section 12 5
410. peration is reached or when the data is stored up to the internal memory size Store Stop is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen During integration synchronization mode The storage operation stops when the specified store count of data is stored when integration stops or when the data is stored up to the internal memory size Store Stop is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen e Initializing Clearing the Internal Memory The procedure to clear the internal memory varies depending on the store mode This section describes the procedures when the store mode is store For the procedures when the store mode is recall see section 8 6 6 While the storage operation is stopped press STORE again If the alert indication for internal memory initialization section 8 3 is ON the Alert dialog box appears Proceed to step 7 If the indication is OFF the data in the internal memory is cleared without displaying the Alert dialog box Press the cursor keys to select OK or Cancel Select OK and press SET to clear the data in the internal memory Select Cancel and press SET to not clear the data in the internal memory Real ly Store memory will be initialized Do you want to execute 8 12 IM 760301 01E 8 4 Storing Data Explanation To store data parameters such as the store mode the store count the store interval and the store reservation time must be specified before executing
411. play e Changing the Element Wiring Unit 7 Press ELEMENT to select the element wiring unit e Changing the Element Wiring Unit Collectively 8 Press SHIFT ELEMENT ALL ALL LED illuminates and the element wiring unit of all the displayed items on the displayed page can be changed collectively This completes the procedure for changing the displayed items using the function select keys Changing Using the Function Select Key USER Key By assigning measurement functions to the USER key up to four measurement functions can be directly displayed e Assigning Measurement Functions to the USER Key 9 10 11 12 Press SHIFT USER USER SET to display the User Reserved menu Press any of the soft keys from Function 1 to 4 to select the desired Function The measurement function selection box appears Press the cursor keys to select any of the measurement functions starting with None Press SET The symbol for the selected measurement function is displayed at the highlighted position e Changing the Measurement Function with the USER Key 13 Press USER to select the measurement function in the same fashion as step 6 d Set None Xs Ithd hef e A Fantin 1 u 1 P sS Q A Utpeak ou ol FreqU Freql z Rs a ae Rp Xp Uhdf thdf Phdf Uthd U peak Pthd Uthf Ith Utif Itif hvf Function 3 U peak I peak I peak cfu cfi I peak Time uP wet uP q qt Function 4 v I peak
412. play the File menu 2 Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List dialog box appear 3 Press the Function soft key to display the Function menu N PeTete i W Function File M File Item a Setup Delete Set Reset All Set D Property Filter lite all Attribute HE 1 Utility Delete Exec e eq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes eo IM 760301 01E 9 3 9 2 Formatting the Storage Media e Selecting the Storage Medium to Be Formatted 4 Press the Format soft key A storage media list is displayed in the File List dialog box 5 Press the cursor keys to select the storage medium to be formatted Net Work drive cannot be formatted e Viewing the Storage Media Information 6 Press the Media Info soft key The information about the storage medium that was selected in step 5 is displayed Function Format File List Function Delete File Name Size Space Media Info Format Pc_card 5 USB2 Media Name PC_Card fi Copy Media Size 127029248 byte Media Info Used Space 2807808 byte Vacant Space 124221440 byte Partition Size 1 a oe Rename MakeDir attribute g Format Selecting the Number of Partitions 7 Press the Format soft key to display the Format menu 8 Press the cursor keys to select 1
413. play the list of D A output settings The relation table of D A output channels and measurement functions is displayed 2 Displayed only on models with the D A output option Closing the List of Setup Parameters 3 Press SHIFT WIRING INPUT INFO The list of setup parameters closes The setup parameter list is shown as in the example on the next page Note The relation table of elements and measurement ranges and the relation table of the measurement ranges of the motor evaluation function show the settings that existed when the measurement was carried out If you change the parameters such as the measurement range while the hold function is ON the change is not reflected in the relation table IM 760301 01E 3 39 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 17 Displaying the Setup Parameter List e Relation Table of Elements and Measurement Ranges Page 1 The following figure shows an example when the crest factor is set to 3 Power Element Settings Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 Wiring 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W Voltage 1000Vrms 1000 rms 1000Vrms 1000Vrms Current 30Arms 30Arms 30Arms 30Arms Sensor Ratio 10 0000 10 0000 10 0000 10 0000 Giza Line Filter off off off off Freq Filter off off off off Scaling off off off off VT Ratio 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 CT Ratio 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 Scaling 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 Factor Sync Source 11 12 13 4 e Relation Table of the
414. played see section 2 2 Measurement Functions and Measurement Periods 2 5 Computation 2 6 Integration and appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions e For details on the wiring units expressed as XA and B see section 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System e The trend is not displayed where the measurement function is not selected or where no numeric data is present e The measured order can be set to normal measured value or from dc Oth order up to 100th order However the numeric data up to the upper limit of the measured order see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E that is automatically determined from the minimum measured order Min Order to the PLL source frequency is the data determined by the harmonic measurement e Ifthe trend display target is changed all past trend displays are cleared and the trend display starts from the right end In wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode on models with the advanced computation G6 option the total value is displayed in place of the normal measured value for the order setting However the trend of the total value cannot be displayed because trends cannot be displayed in wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode If the mode is switched to normal measurement in this condition the normal measured value is displayed as the order 7 7 Aejdsig pualy si 7 4 Setting the Time Axis Procedure
415. power and harmonics in a simplified manner To strictly evaluate whether the device complies with the IEC standard you can use the IEC harmonic measurement mode When measuring the harmonics of a high frequency power supply whose fundamental frequency is in the order of hundred Hertz use the wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode 2 4 IM 760301 01E 2 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Functions Measurement Functions The physical values such as rms voltage average current power and phase difference that the WT3000 measures and displays are called measurement functions Each measurement function is displayed using a symbol corresponding to the respective physical value For example Urms represents the true rms value of the voltage Elements Element refers to a set of input terminals that can input a single phase of voltage and current to be measured The WT3000 can contain up to four elements which are numbered from 1 to 4 An element number is appended to the measurement function symbol for the measured data that the WT3000 displays so that the correspondence between the numeric data and the element can be seen For example Urms1 represents the true rms value of the voltage of element 1 Wiring System You can specify five wiring systems single phase two wire single phase three wire three phase three wire three phase four wire and three phase three wire three voltage three current on the WT3000
416. ppendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data c eee App 4 Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format 0 0 0 0 cceescece cece eee ceee ee teae eee eeaeseeeeaeseeeeaeeeaeeaes App 13 Appendix 4 Power Basics Power Harmonics and RLC of AC Circuits eee App 16 Appendix 5 For Making Accurate Measurement cceecceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseeeteneeeeseneeeeaes App 24 Appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period cccccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeneeeeeeeeeeeenes App 26 Appendix 7 Data Update Rate and Computing Equation cceeceeseeseeeeeeesseeeeneeeeeees App 33 Appendix 8 Compensation FUNCTION eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeaeetaeeseaeeseeeeaeessaeeteeeeeeeeaes App 34 Appendix 9 Key Assignments of the USB Keyboard ceecceeeceeeeseeeeeteeeeeesneeeeneeennees App 36 Appendix 10 Measurement Modes and Functional Limitations 00 00 eee App 40 Appendix 11 Measurement Functions That Can Be Measured in Each Measurement Mode eccccesseeeeeeececeeeeeseseeeeesaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeenaeeeseeeeeeseasenenes App 41 Appendix 12 Operands of User Defined Functions That Can Be Used in Each Measurement Mode eeccccesseecessecereeeeeseseeeeenaneeseneeseaeesenaeeeseeeeeeseaeenenes App 43 Appendix 13 Parameters in the Operands of User Defined Functions cceeeeeeees App 45 Index IM 760301 01 xiii Chapter 1 Names and Functions of Parts 1 1 Front Panel ESC ke
417. procal of the difference between the X axis values of cursor and cursor x e Movement Path of the Cursor Since the WT3000 P P compresses the sampled data see section 2 7 two data points maximum and minimum values are displayed at the same time axis position Therefore you can select the path on which the cursor moves and the data on which to perform cursor measurements from the following e Max Moves along the maximum values on the time axis and measures the value at each point e Min Moves along the minimum values on the time axis and measures the value at each point e Mid Moves along the middle of the maximum and minimum values on the time axis and measures the value at each point e Moving the Cursor e Cursors move on the selected waveform e The range of movement of cursors is from the left end to the right end of the screen e The movement step of cursors is the time corresponding to one screen 500 Note e if immeasurable data exists is displayed in the measured value display area e AY is measured even if the unit is different The result has no unit in this case e Ifthe crest factor is set to 3 the allowed range of cursor measurement vertically is 300 of the range If the crest factor is set to 6 it is 600 of the range IM 760301 01E 6 25 Aejdsiq wiojonejy al Chapter 7 Trend Display 7 1 Procedure Trend Display VOLTAGE RANGE MEASURING DISPLAY CURRENT RANG
418. put element selectable only for the 760301 selectable only for the 760301 selectable only for the 760302 selectable only for the 760302 selectable only for the 760303 selectable only for the 760303 selectable only for the 760304 selectable only for the 760304 on ee Version SV Standard version Motor version Power cord D UL CSA standard power cord VDE standard power cord BS standard power cord AS standard power cord GB standard power cord CCC compatible Options G5 G6 BS DT FQ DA N1 C2 012 C5 C7 FL CC Harmonic measurement With the release of the G6 option the G5 option has been discontinued in July 2006 Advanced computation Harmonic measurement in normal measurement mode wide bandwidth harmonic measurement IEC harmonic measurement waveform computation FFT and saving of waveform sampling data Built in printer Delta computation Frequency measurement add on simultaneous measurement on all input elements possible 20 channel D A output VGA output RS 232 communications USB port PC USB port peripheral device Ethernet communications Voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement Cycle by cycle measurement 1 The relationship between the firmware version of the WT3000 and G5 or G6 is as follows G5 Firmware version 1 01 or later G6 Firmware version 3 01 or later The description in this manual assumes the G6 option The
419. quired ASSP Average for the Synchronous Source Period EAMP Exponential Average for Measuring Period App 32 IM 760301 01E Appendix 7 Data Update Rate and Computing Equation AC signals fluctuate repetitively when viewed instantaneously The power of AC signals can be measured by taking the average of the repeating periods or computing the average by filtering the data of several periods The WT3000 automatically selects the computing method from the two averaging computations above according to the data update interval When the Data Update Rate Is 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or 20 s Computation is performed using ASSP Average for the Synchronous Source Period on the sampled data within the data update interval to calculate the measured value However integrated power Wp as well as integrated current q during DC mode are excluded This method detects the period of the input signal assigned to be the synchronous source using the frequency measurement circuit and sets the measurement period to be an integer multiple of the input signal period Computation including simple average is performed based on the sampled data in this measurement period This method requires that the period of the assigned synchronous source signal be detected accurately The synchronization source must be set when using this method The period of the assigned synchronization source signal must also be detected accurately Check to se
420. r details on the procedures see section 3 14 Displaying the Waveform by Dividing the Display into Halves Split Display 2 Press OTHERS to display the Others menu 3 Press any of the soft keys from Numeric Wave Wave Bar Wave Trend and Wave FFT to select the display mode 1 Displayed only on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option 2 Displayed only to products with the advanced computation G6 option Others Trend E Vector Numeric Wave Numeric Bar Numeric Trend Press the Next1 3 soft key 1 3 gt il Next Others Math f Numeric Math Bar Trend FFT IEC Harmonics Press the Next2 3 i Numeric FFT Wave FFT soft key z3 gt Next Next w X 3 IM 760301 01E 6 1 Aejdsiq wiojonejy al 6 1 Waveform Display Explanation For functional details see section 2 7 A display example is shown below For the procedure to change the displayed items and contents of waveforms see sections 6 2 to 6 8 Normal Mode Trg Uoveri Spdi U1 100Vrms YoKOGAWA Distinction of voltage or current m toverin m mm Trgit IntegiReset Format the element and the upper limit Single of the displayed waveform Time7div Sms Trigger Trigger level oa Display Settings Ground level Distinction of voltage or current
421. r measurement is being applied to the current input terminals do not touch the current sensor input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous e When connecting measurement cables from an external current sensor to the current sensor input connector remove the cables connected to the current input terminals In addition when the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current sensor input terminal do not touch the current input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous e The screws used on the terminal binding post are M6 screws Use one of the following methods wind the wire around the screw use the 758921 Fork Terminal Adapter that is sold separately or pass the crimp on lugs through the screw axis Then tighten firmly by holding the terminal knob For the dimensions of the parts of the terminal see section 3 9 Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems The selectable wiring systems vary depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 2 3 Measurement Conditions General Handling Precautions of the VT and CT Do not short the secondary side of the VT as it may damage the VT Do not open the secondary side of the CT as it may damage the CT
422. r of the screen is set to Normal Mode Trg This mode in normal measurement mode normal mode allows a measurement to be made after a trigger see section 6 3 is detected for each update interval Note If the trigger is not set correctly the start position the signal level at the left end of the screen of the waveform display may be unstable or waveforms may not be displayed While integration is in progress or is suspended the measurement mode indication at the upper left corner of the screen is set to Normal Mode even when waveforms are displayed In this mode the sampled data is automatically updated for each interval In this case the trigger function for waveform display does not work Therefore the start position of the waveform display the signal level at the left end of the screen may not be stable In addition the measurement period of the numeric data and that of the waveform data may not be synchronized 6 2 IM 760301 01E 6 2 Procedure VOLTAGE RANGE eer ALL D INPUT INFO a MEASURING DISPLAY CURRENT RANGE MEASURING ITEM amp ELEMENT SENSOR RATIO 1808 AUTO OREMOTE rumen WAVE OTHERS wie S Q A USER ELEMENT SINGLE CAL LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL UPDATE RATE HOLD INTEG c Q Q gt rr SHIFT 1 Press ITEM to d
423. r than the commercial power supply frequency e IEC Harmonic Measurement Mode IEC Harmonics Mode G6 Option This mode in combination with the Harmonic Flicker Measurement Software 761922 sold separately allows you to perform harmonic measurement conforming to IEC61000 3 2 Use this mode to check that the harmonics of electric home appliances and office automation equipment comply with the IEC standards e Waveform Computation Mode Math Mode G6 Option This mode allows you to perform various computations on the waveform sampling data of the input signal For example the waveform sampling data of the voltage and current input signals can be multiplied together to display the waveform of instantaneous power e FFT Mode G6 Option This mode allows the power spectrum of the input signal to be displayed through FFT fast Fourier transform Use this mode to check the frequency distribution of the input signal e Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker Measurement Mode Flicker Mode FL Option This mode allows you to perform voltage fluctuation and flicker measurements conforming to IEC61000 3 3 You can use the Harmonic Flicker Measurement Software for the WT3000 761922 to execute measurements or set measurement conditions from a PC and create a report of measurement results e Cycle by Cycle Measurement Mode CC Option This mode allows the voltage current power and other parameters for each cycle of the AC input signal to be measured
424. r the selection For models with the motor evaluation function motor version the input signals of Speed and Torque are also selectable items e Saving the Numeric Data Select Numeric from the File Item menu to save numerical data e Selecting the Data Type Select the data type from below The extension is automatically added The data type is fixed to ASCII for the cycle by cycle measurement e ASCII e Saved in ASCII format The file can be used on your PC for analysis e The file cannot be loaded into the WT3000 e Float e Saved in 32 bit floating format The file cannot be loaded into the WT3000 e Extension and Data Size Normal Measurement Example Data Type Extension Data Size Bytes ASCII CSV Approx 2 K condition number of elements 1 saved item Preset1 Float WTD When integration is not performed Approx 8 K 4 x Dn When integration is performed Approx 8K 4 x Dn 16 x Ti Dn Number of numerical data to be saved Number of measurement functionsx number of elements number of wiring units Ti Number of integration time to be saved 9 14 IM 760301 01E 9 3 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data Numeric Data Waveform Sampling Data e Selecting the Numeric Data Select the numeric data items that are to be saved e Installed elements and wiring units are applicable for the selection Measurement functions can be selected as follows For measurement modes other than
425. r the loss caused by the wiring of each element For details see appendix 8 Set the compensation according to the setting specified for Effects due to the Amplitude of the Measured Voltage and Current in section 3 7 e If wiring for When the Measurement Current Is Relatively Small is used U I e If wiring for When the Measurement Current Is Relatively Large is used U e When Set to U I The measured voltage is determined by subtracting the voltage applied to the current terminal from the voltage value of each element The voltage applied to the current terminal is derived by the equation the measured current x the input resistance of the current terminal e When Set to I U The measured current is determined by subtracting the current that flows through the voltage terminal from the current value of each element The current that flows through the voltage terminal is derived by the equation the measured voltage the input resistance of the voltage terminal e When Set to OFF Neither of the above compensation is performed IM 760301 01E 5 23 5 8 Setting the Wiring Efficiency and Two Wattmeter Method Compensations e Efficiency Compensation The power measurement on the secondary side of a power transformer such as an inverter includes loss caused by the measurement instrument This loss appears as error in the efficiency computation This function compensates for this loss For details see appendix 8
426. rase press the MO cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE J IMAGE SAVE STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 print msc re MENU To set or execute the storage operation set the measurement mode to normal measurement mode or wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode There are limitations on the setting and execution of the storage operation in measurement modes other than normal measurement mode Can be set on models with the advanced computation G6 option 1 Press SHIFT STORE STORE SET to display the Store Set menu 2 Press the Mode soft key to select Store 3 Press the Store Setting soft key to display the Store Setting menu 4 Press the Mode soft key to display the Mode menu 5 Press any soft key from Manual to Integ Sync to select the store mode Sa Store Set Mode l Mode Btore Recall Recall Store to i ik Store f Store Setting Setting to File to File M Mode Manual Manual Real Time 100 r Interval Setting M Store Item M Store Item Numeric Numeric Init Memory Init Memory 4 List Item 4 List Item Alert Msi Alert Ms OFF il OFF bl i K Optimize Optimize Store Count Store Count eea paiojs y Burnes
427. red Measurement method Reciprocal method Measurement range Data update rate Measurement range 50 ms 45 Hz lt f lt 1MHz 100 ms 25 Hz lt f lt 1 MHz 250 ms 10 Hz lt f lt 500 kHz 500 ms 5 Hz lt f lt 200 kHz 1s 2 5 Hz lt f lt 100 kHz 2s 1 5 Hz lt f lt 50 kHz 5s 0 5 Hz lt f lt 20 kHz 10s 0 25 Hz lt f lt 10 kHz 20s 0 15 Hz lt f lt 5 kHz Accuracy 0 05 of reading When the input signal level is greater than or equal to 25 mV current sensor input 150 mA direct current input to the 30 A input element or 1 5 mA direct current input to the 2 A input element and the signal is greater than or equal to 30 0 1 Hz to 440 Hz with frequency filter ON 10 440 Hz to 500 kHz or 30 500 kHz to 1 MHz of the measurement range Except input greater than or equal to 50 of the measurement range when the frequency is less than or equal twice the lower limit of frequency described above Add 0 05 of reading when the external current sensor input is 50 mV or less Twice these values for the input signal level when the crest factor is set to 6 Display resolution 99999 Frequency measurement filter Frequency filter see section 12 1 Integration Item Specifications Mode Select from manual normal repetitive real time normal and real time repetitive Measurement function See section 12 3 Integration timer Automatic stop of integration by setting a t
428. red data SAVING Of ee ssseseesseeserssrrrseriresrrrssrrserresne 8 14 USB keyboard sssessiessieeieieisirrierisrrrisrnrierserseees stored Item en 8 3 USB memory stray CAPACITANCE 00 0 eee eeeeeeneseseeeeeeseaeeeseesennerseenesnees App 25 User Defined Function cee cee cee eeee cece eeseeeeaeeneaes 5 12 SUFFIX ii USER KCY 42 tesearenacuneaneiedvedenaateniedntientes 5 3 symbols LU 11s iniinis 9 3 9 27 9 30 9 33 9 37 SYNC Measure ou eee eeeeceeseeeeeteeeeceteeeceeseeeeeeaeeeaeeaeeeeteaees SYNC SOURCE v synchronization SOULCE eseieeeieeresernee 4 19 App 26 Mo Page synchronization source filter eee App 28 V ZOOM amp Position 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeatees 6 12 synchronized measurement 7 value entry of 3 28 system Condition ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteneeeeeeneeeeeenee NAO Ua Soe eee elec ec eed eae me 5 6 SYSTEM Conditions eee e cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee vectors 2 32 system configuration Vent holeSwvictisev lan Mancini aati Ages 3 2 SYSTOM CMTOMS p Pupae kerpena arn Sae aaia ianea iai VOPSION AEA E EE EA ETT EEEE ii System OVEWVICW csasiseri iinan ipa iie vertical axis 2 24 VGA t vice ceaceessess we 2 37 volt ampere hour cc ecvececceeencececccenseseracertenectcensoascneententeceese 5 6 Index 4 IM 760301 01E Index VONAGE cecccccssccisccesccccssecsstevscesacoeesserosesavats
429. required 919 Module installation condition and setup The system has been initialized parameters do not match Maintenance service is required 921 System Failed to Draw Display Maintenance service is required 922 Failed in communication with DSP Maintenance service is required 923 Transmit data abnormality from DSP Maintenance service is required 926 The USB device s power consumption 12 9 exceeded the capacity of the USB hub Note If the system is not operating correctly or if servicing is necessary try initializing the WT3000 The WT3000 may recover IM 760301 01E 11 3 Self Test Procedure fa Cursor keys ae amp DOA scaunc merren _ave_ MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER CURSOR NULL FE _ mes store MENU STORE SET print _wisc_ Her DISPLAY numeri WAVE ITEM amp ELEMENT l U I P S Q A UPDATE RATE HOLD OREMOTE LOCAL WPiq TIME FU FI n SINGLE CAL ITEM FORM LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER l ELEMENT USERSET O ALL INTEG SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and charac
430. ress the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List dialog box appear Press the Function soft key to display the Function menu Press the Delete soft key to display the Delete menu L Delete al f Function D Function Delete Delete a E M File Item Setup 7 Set Reset Copy All Set Rename gt g Property MakeDi r Filter aul Attribute Attribute Delete ee Exec e Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory 5 The procedure is the same as that given inin Selecting the Storage Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 9 3 7 Format BE e lt 9 30 IM 760301 01E 9 7 Deleting Files Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box 6 The procedure is the same as that given inin Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 Viewing the Properties 7 The procedure is the same as that given inin Viewing the Properties in section 9 6 Selecting the File Attribute 8 The procedure is the same as that given inin Selecting the File Attribute in section 9 6 Selecting the File to Be Deleted One at a Time 9 10 Press the cursor keys to select the file Press the Set Reset soft key If an asterisk is displayed to the left of the file name in the File List window the file will be deleted
431. ress the voltage range selection key UP A and DOWN keys to set the voltage range The specified range is displayed with the voltage range indicator to the left of the select keys and on the upper right corner of the screen where the element is displayed Press the voltage range UP key to increase the voltage range Press the voltage range DOWN key to decrease the voltage range e Press AUTO to specify auto range The AUTO key illuminates Setting the Current Range Selecting the Current Input Terminal 3 Check that the EXT SENSOR key is not illuminated If it is press EXT SENSOR The EXT SENSOR key turns OFF e Setting the Current Range 4 Press the current range selection key UP A and DOWN keys to set the current range The specified range is displayed with the current range indicator to the left of the select keys and on the upper right corner of the screen where the element is displayed Press the current range UP key to increase the current range Press the current range DOWN key to decrease the current range e Press AUTO to specify auto range The AUTO key illuminates Repeat steps 1 and 4 to set the measurement range of all elements IM 760301 01E 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range for Direct Input Explanation Display Position of the Target Element and Specified Range When a voltage or current range selection key is pressed the element is displayed in the voltage or current range indic
432. rget Element 2 Press ELEMENT to select the target element The selected element is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen if you selected element 1 Sync Src1 are displayed To select all elements press SHIFT ELEMENT ALL Setting the Synchronization Source 3 Press the Item Up Exec or Item Down Exec soft key to set the synchronization source The specified synchronization source is displayed by the element displayed in the upper right corner of the screen Element Object Element 1 Item Up Exec Item Down Exec Ad IM 760301 01E 4 19 SUOI IPUOD JUBWaINSeS y gt 4 7 Setting the Measurement Period Explanation The measurement period is determined by the data update rate and the synchronization source specified by carrying out the procedure in this section For details see appendix 6 During normal measurement the numeric data is measured computed from the data sampled within the measurement period e Display Position of the Target Element and Synchronization Source The target element and the synchronization source are displayed in the upper right corner of the screen when SYNC SOURCE is pressed Target element displayed as 1 4 when all elements are selected collectively Synchronization source example in which the current of Element 1 is specified Sync Src1 11 yokocaw Element1 U1 1000 Vrms 11 30Arms Element2 u2 1000 rms Selecting the Target Element to Be Spe
433. ription U E1 0R1 U E2 OR1 Basic arithmetic of the measurement functions ABS ABS P E1 ORT P E2 ORT Absolute value of the measurement function SQR SQR I E1 OR0 Square of the measurement function SQRT SQRT ABS I E1 OR3 Square root of the measurement functions LOG LOG U E1 OR25 Natural log of the measurement functions LOG10 LOG10 U E1 OR25 Common log of the measurement function EXP EXP U E1 0R12 Exponent of the measurement function NEG NEG U E1 OR12 Negation of the measurement function Number and Type of Characters That Can Be Used in the Equation e Number of characters 50 characters or less e Types of characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces Equation Examples When determining the rms value of the harmonic components of the voltage signal of input element 2 4 Total rms value of the voltage Rms value of the fundamental wave of the voltage SQRT SQR U E2 ORT SQR U E2 OR1 Note If an operand in the equation is undetermined the computation result displays no data For example this occurs if a measurement function of a delta computation is in the equation but the delta computation is turned OFF or a measurement function of an element that is installed is in the equation IM 760301 01E 5 5 Setting MAX hold a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Sian A numeri WAVE l U LIP s a ial HOLD Locau Cursor keys lt gt WPIq C OTH
434. rminal from the voltage value of each element The voltage applied to the current terminal is derived by the equation the measured current x the input resistance of the current terminal souno Loap l U This is used when the current measurement circuit is connected to the load side The measured current is determined by subtracting the current that flows through the voltage terminal from the current value of each element The current that flows through the voltage terminal is derived by the equation the measured voltage the input resistance of the voltage terminal SOURCE Tea S Compensation Details The measured value is determined by substituting the compensated instantaneous values u n and i n below into the respective equation in appendix 1 For U I Wiring Compensated instantaneous voltage u n u n Rixi n The instantaneous current is i n For I U Wiring Compensated instantaneous current i n i n u n Ru The instantaneous voltage is u n In the equations above u n Measured instantaneous voltage sampled data of the voltage signal i n Measured instantaneous current sampled data of the current signal Ru Compensation value for the input resistance 10 MQ of the voltage input terminal Ri Compensation value for the input resistance 5 5 mQ of the direct current input terminal App 34 IM 760301 01E Appendix 8 Compensation Function
435. rning the Shift Lock ON OFF You can select whether the shifted condition is released after selecting a setup menu marked in purple below the key in the shifted condition condition in which the Shift key is pressed e OFF Releases the shifted condition e ON Does not release the shifted condition You can continue to select the setup menus marked in purple To release the shifted condition press the Shift key 10 12 IM 760301 01E 10 8 Help Function Procedure Explanation Cu A f SCALING MOTOR fa rsor k o O aU LINE FILTER FREQ FILTER MEASURE CURSOR y ORO AVG SYNC SOURCE NULL rue IMAGE SAVE store MENU STORE SET MISC HELP 1 2 DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT OREMOTE numeric WAVE l U I P S Q A o UPDATE RATE HOLD l WP q TIME FU FI n SINGLE ITEM LOWER ITEM FORM LOWER FORM USER evewenr USER SET O AL INTEG LOCAL oer To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft k eys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 D
436. robe The current input terminal and EXT input terminal cannot be wired used simultaneously IM 760301 01E 3 11 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 7 Wiring for Making Accurate Measurements To make accurate measurements wire the voltage input terminal and current input terminal by referring to the items below e Effects of Stray Capacitance When measuring a single phase device the effects of stray capacitance on the measurement accuracy can be minimized by connecting the current input terminal of the instrument to the side that is close to the earth potential of the power source SOURCE e Easily affected e Not easily affected IT Nar U U _ SOURCE LOAD SOURCE Loap TV l ka e Effects due to the Amplitude of the Measured Voltage and Current e When the measurement current e When the measurement current is relatively large is relatively small Connect the voltage measurement Connect the current measurement terminal to the load side terminal to the load side Loap SOURCE LOAD SOURCE O ery 2 Explanation For details on the effects of stray capacitance and the effects due to the amplitude of the measured voltage and current see appendix 5 For Making Accurate Measurements 3 12 IM 760301 01E 3 8 Guide for Selecting the Method Used to Measure the Power Select the measurement method according to the amplitud
437. rpolation Graticule and Label Display For procedures see sections 6 6 and 6 7 The settings specified for waveform display are used IM 760301 01E 2 31 uondioseg jeuonounes 2 8 Trend Bar Graph and Vector Displays Bar Graph Display of Harmonic Data See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E On models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option the amplitude of each harmonic can be displayed on the bar graph The horizontal axis represents harmonic order and the vertical axis represents the amplitude of each harmonic Bor UT T 0007 Tips Scale i 50 Bar graph of voltage U1 Bar graph of current I1 Vector Display of Harmonics See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E During harmonic measurement on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option vectors can be displayed to show the relationship between the phase difference and amplitude rms value of the fundamental signals U 1 and I 1 of each element that is assigned to the selected wiring unit Wiring A 303A PLL Src Frequency qu1 uz gu1 U3 qui Ii gui lz gui 13 185 73 U Vector of wiring unit XA 5542kU 559 6016kUA ELGB 0 560 2342kvar 0 9211 ail z 22 91 2 32 IM 760301 01E 2 9 Waveform Computation and FFT Waveform Computation See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301
438. rrounding the instrument In such cases you can manually perform zero level compensation There is also a function that automatically performs zero level compensation during integration IM 760301 01E 2 37 2 11 Saving and Loading Data and Other Functions NULL Function For procedures see section 10 2 When the NULL function is turned ON the Udc and Idc numeric data of the simple average of the voltage and current during normal measurement are set as NULL values The NULL values are subtracted from the sampled data of voltage and current Hence all measurement functions are affected by the NULL values Selecting the Sampling Frequency For procedures see section 10 3 The WT3000 has three types of sampling frequencies at approximately 200 kHz to prevent the input waveform from being measured as a DC signal due to aliasing see section 2 7 The sampling frequency can be automatically switched or fixed to one of three types Setting the Display Font For procedures see section 10 4 The text font that is displayed can be selected from two types of fonts Setting the Brightness of the Screen For procedures see section 10 5 The brightness of the LCD monitor can be adjusted Setting the Display Colors For procedures see section 10 6 The colors for graphical elements such as the waveform background scale and cursor and text elements such as the menu and the menu background can be selected Set the color usin
439. rsor keys to select the wiring compensation of the desired element from element 1 to 4 4 Press SET A wiring compensation selection box appears 5 Press the cursor keys to select a value between OFF and I U Wiring Wiring Element Compensation Efficiency Compensation Wiring Setting C 430 21310 3130 4421 E 1p2w E 1P2w 1P2Ww 1P2wW 1 Formula Compensation ELSES Independent PFF jorr__ OFF__ 4 Measure 5 22 IM 760301 01E 5 8 Setting the Wiring Efficiency and Two Wattmeter Method Compensations e Turning ON OFF the Efficiency Compensation 3 Press the cursor keys to select Efficiency Compensation 4 Press SET to select ON or OFF Turning ON OFF the Compensation for Two Wattmeter Method This appears only when the wiring system is set to 3P3W 3V3A on models with the delta computation option 3 Press the cursor keys to select 3P3W 3V3A 2A Compensation 4 Press SET to select ON or OFF Wiring Wiring Setting Element C 4120 2130 3130 43 E IPIWC3V3A Z A 1 1P2wW 1 Formula Wiring A gt Compensation or Cor Cor Cory f j Compensation EN Compensation 3P3W 3V3A ZA Compensation Independent DFF ON Corr pn J 4 Measure zu W INSLE N JOMOd Explanation Wiring Compensation Compensates fo
440. rst stored data for example set Recall No to 1 The Recall No and store count are also displayed at the upper left corner of the screen For example the information is displayed as Recall 3 100 In this example the Recall No is 3 and the store count is 100 If there is no stored data the store count is 0 Note Only the data stored in the internal memory can be recalled e Display Related to Recall Normal Data Data stored in normal measurement mode Wide Band Hrm Data Data stored in wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode Recall No store count Normal Data 100Vrms Recall 37100 E amp change items Uover Spd U1 4 loveri Trq umet 403 2664 y i mst 553016 Pt 531890w 7 M1 F 0 92986 2005712708 19 00 54 2005 12 08 19 03 30 Date time of storage e Initializing Clearing the Internal Memory To start the storage operation again you must clear the internal memory 8 22 IM 760301 01E Chapter 9 Saving and Loading Data 9 1 PC Card and USB Memory PC Cards That Can Be Used The WT3000 supports flash ATA cards PC card TYPE II and compact flash using the PC card TYPE II adapter For details contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Note To use the PC card on the PC use a PC that supports the PC card Depending on the PC that you are using the PC cards indicated above may not operate properly Check it beforehand Inserting
441. s The displayed value Dj at the first time is M1 Dn 1 Displayed value that has been exponentially averaged n 1 times Mn Measured data at the n time K Attenuation constant select from 2 4 8 16 32 and 64 e Moving Average The numeric data can be linearly averaged using a specified average count Averaging is performed according to the following equation Mn m 1 yoke Mn 2 Mn 1 Mn Dn m Dn Displayed value obtained by linearly averaging m points of numeric data from the n m 1 to nt time Mn m 1 Measured data at the n m 1 time Mn 2 Measured data at the n 2 time Mn 1 Measured data at the n 1 time Mn Measured data at the n time m Average count select from 8 16 32 64 128 and 256 e Measurement Functions of Harmonic Measurement e Harmonic Measurement in Normal Measurement Mode When averaging is turned ON averaging is performed on the measurement functions of harmonic measurement when exponential averaging above is specified If averaging is set to moving average averaging is performed only on the measurement functions of normal measurement and not the measurement functions of harmonic measurement e Measurement Functions of Wide Bandwidth Harmonic Measurement Mode Performs exponential averaging The attenuation constant can be selected from above e Measurement Functions of IEC Harmonic Measurement Mode Performs exponential averaging The attenuation constant cannot be se
442. s see the referenced sections in the selection guide above and check the wiring method of the three phase three wire system WT3000 WT2000 WT1600 WT1000 PZ4000 The wiring system of three phase WT230 three wire system differs WT130 2533 2532 etc For example if you replace the WT2000 used in a three phase three wire system with the WT3000 and leave the wiring unchanged the measured power of each element is different between the WT2000 and the WT3000 Refer to this manual and wire the system correctly IM 760301 01E 3 13 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 9 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement for Direct Input The measurement cable is wired directly from the circuit under measurement to the voltage current input terminal To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the precautions given in section 3 5 Wiring Precautions Connecting to the Input Terminal e Voltage Input Terminal The terminal is a 4 mm safety banana jack female Insert the safety terminal the conductive parts are not exposed into the voltage input terminal When using the 758931 Safety Terminal Adapter that comes with the package see section 3 6 e Current Input Terminal e When the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current input terminals do not touch the current sensor input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected in
443. s storage devices USB memory USB Mass Storage Class Power supply 5 V 500 mA per port Number of ports 2 1 For details on the compatible USB devices contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 2 Devices whose maximum current consumption exceeds 100 mA cannot be connected simultaneously to the two ports 12 14 IM 760301 01E 12 10 GP IB Interface Item Specifications Devices That Can Be Used NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS AT GPIB PCI GPIB and PCI GPIB PCMCIA GPIB and PCMCIA GPIB Driver NI 488 2M Ver 1 60 or later Electrical and mechanical Conforms to IEEE Std 488 1978 JIS C 1901 1992 specifications Functional specifications SH1 AH1 T6 L4 SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DT1 and CO Protocol Conforms to IEEE Std 488 2 1992 Code used ISO ASCII code Address 0 to 30 Clear remote mode Remote mode can be cleared by pressing LOCAL except during Local Lockout For details on the specifications of the GP IB interface see the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760301 17E 12 11 Safety Terminal Adapter Item Specifications Maximum allowable current 36 A Withstand voltage 1000 V CAT III Contact resistance 10 mQ orless Contact section Nickel plating on brass or bronze Insulator Polyamide Core wire Maximum diameter 1 8 mm Insulation thickness Maximum diameter 3 9 mm IM 760301 01E 12 15 suoleoyioeds Ey 12 12 General Spe
444. s Grouped as a Wiring Unit If the independent setting of input elements is OFF and a wiring system other than 1P2W is selected when the measurement range or synchronization source setting of each input element is different these settings are changed as follows The measurement range is set to the maximum range on all input elements included in the wiring unit The external sensor input range has precedence over the direct input range for the current range e The voltage current mode and auto range settings are changed to match the settings of the input element with the maximum measurement range If multiple input elements with maximum measurement range exist the settings of the input element with the smallest input element number takes precedence e The synchronization source setting is changed to match the setting of the input element with the smallest input element number among the input elements included in the wiring unit When you press the ELEMENT key to select the element to be configured the LEDs of input elements in the wiring unit illuminate simultaneously IM 760301 01E 4 3 SUOI IPUOD JUBWaINSeS y gt 4 2 Elements Procedure ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE MEASURING WIRING INPUTINFO 7 a D Ccoupen CURRENT RANGE SENSOR RATIO a Ww MEASURING DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT E Furm RATE SINGLE
445. s OFF the integration time and integration value are reset and the display of integration measurement functions such as WP shows no data 5 36 IM 760301 01E 5 12 Setting the Manual Integration Explanation Inte CEL d Start Stop Reset Integ Set For functional details see section 2 6 To perform integration the integration mode and integration time must be set before starting the operation e Selecting the Integration Mode and Setting the Integration Timer If the integration mode is set to normal integration and the integration timer is set to 00000 00 00 the integration is performed in manual integration mode For a description of starting stopping and resetting the integration and other items see section 5 11 Note Integration cannot be started stopped or reset in measurement modes other than normal measurement mode IM 760301 01E 5 37 JUSWIDINSeD JOMOd 5 13 Setting the Normal Integration and Repetitive Integration Procedure ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE OO a D To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the COMPEN e MEASURING MEASURING phrase press the cursor mano MODE keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT omme and character strin
446. s analog that were measured the previous time when the voltage current mode is set to DC and the NULL function is turned ON If the previously measured Udc and Idc as well as Speed and Torque values do not exist such as when the NULL function is turned ON without making a measurement after turning ON the power Udc and Idc are set to zero To subtract the DC offset using the NULL function when making measurements with the voltage current mode set to RMS MEAN or RMEAN activate the NULL function with the voltage current mode set to DC and then change the voltage current mode to RMS MEAN or RMEAN Note e The NULL function is automatically released when the range or filter setting is changed or integration is started If you perform the procedure of releasing the NULL function while in the hold condition the NULL function is actually released and the NULL indicator turns OFF when the hold is released or when a single measurement is made If the crest factor is set to 3 a NULL value of approximately 50 is set for a signal that exceeds 50 of the range If the crest factor is set to 6 a NULL value of approximately 100 is set for a signal that exceeds 100 of the range 10 2 IM 760301 01E 10 2 NULL Function e Measurement Functions Affected by the NULL Function The NULL value is subtracted from the sampled data Hence all measurement functions are affected by the NULL values e Limitations on the NULL Function by Measure
447. screen see section 11 2 when the power switch is turned ON If this message appears frequently the battery must be replaced quickly The user cannot replace the battery Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer to have the battery replaced For information regarding battery life see section 11 6 3 6 IM 760301 01E 3 5 Wiring Precautions To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the warnings below A WARNING Employ protective earth ground before connecting measurement cables The power cord that comes with the instrument is a three pin type power cord Connect the power cord to a properly grounded three prong outlet Turn OFF the power to the circuit under measurement when wiring or disconnecting the circuit Connecting or removing measurement cables while the power is ON is dangerous e Take special caution not to wire a current circuit to the voltage input terminal or a voltage circuit to the current input terminal Strip the insulation cover of the measurement cable so that when it is wired to the input terminal the conductive parts bare wires do not protrude from the terminal Also make sure to fasten the input terminal screws securely so that the cable does not come loose Use cables with safety terminals that cover the conductive parts for connecting to the voltage input terminals Using a terminal with bare conductive parts such as a banana plug is dangerous i
448. scssssscescracsccessepiszccasesaisncsscisasecancetecsndercence 3 7 Wiring SOttinG isinasara nE EENS 4 1 WITIMG SYSLOM x cseccasssheurcadscestecsisidsatssscsncetesncenssabeasasnten 2 9 4 1 WiN UN ciiise casseevoresecrecevevebnwavereeceecesneeencsredtee 4 2 Z Page zero crossing App 27 Zoro SUDPIOSSION ci62i cs2eszcensszcetedetcs teh caredsncercssseceensstecencecets 12 6 ZEFO CFOSSING Filter ee eesseeseeseceseeseaeeesneesenerseeseaeees App 28 Zero level COMPENSATION eee ee cee tee eeeeeeteeteeeeeneeeee 10 1 ZOOM wisesesd sues iaps cise E ET nade cae 2 28 6 13 IM 760301 01E Index 5
449. section 4 11 While in the hold condition a measurement is performed once at the specified data update rate and enters the hold condition 2 14 IM 760301 01E 2 4 Display Resolution Power Measurement The measured data of voltage current power and so on can be displayed by setting the screen to numeric display By dividing the screen into top and bottom halves waveform section 2 7 trend section 2 8 bar graph section 2 8 waveform computation section 2 9 and FFT section 2 9 can be displayed simultaneously 1 Only on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option 2 Only on models with the advanced computation G6 option The display resolution for voltage current active power apparent power reactive power and so on is 600000 When the range rating rated value of the specified range is applied the function of voltage current active power apparent power reactive power and so on is set to the decimal point position and unit of the element with the lowest display resolution of the target elements For the display resolution during integration see section 5 13 Numeric Display Related to Power Measurement For procedures see section 5 1 Selecting the Number of Displayed Items The number of items can be selected from 4 8 16 All Single List and Dual List 3 Only on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 opt
450. seeeseaeessaeeeaeessaeesieeenaeenaaes 4 18 Setting the Measurement Period cceeceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseneeteaeesaeeseaeeseaeeeeesaes 4 19 Selecting the Input Filter sisi ieee iain eisai nani dane 4 22 Selecting the Averaging Function eccceeceeeseeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeteaeeseeeeeaeeteaeeeeetaaee 4 24 Selecting the Data Update Rate 2 0 eceeesccceesesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeseaeeeeeseaeeseeseaeessees 4 27 Hold and Single Measurement ecceeeeeeeseeseeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeseaeeseaeeeeeeseatens 4 29 Chapter 5 Power Measurement 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 Displaying Numeric Data and Changing the Displayed Items cecceeseeeeeeeteeeeeeeaes 5 1 Selecting the Voltage Current Mode RMS MEAN DC or RMEAN sesser 5 9 Selecting the Frequency Measurement Source eccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeneeeaees 5 10 Setting the User Defined Function ceceeeceeeseeeseeteaeeeseeseaeesaaeseaeesseeeeaeeesaeeeaeeseaeeenees 5 12 Setting MAX hold 0 0 0 eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeecaeeeaeeseeeeeaeeenaeeseeseaeeeneeseeeteeeeeaes 5 17 Measuring the Average Active POWED ceeeseeeseeeseneeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeneeeeenneeeeeneeteeeeergas 5 19 Setting the Equation for Efficiency ccecececeseseeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeseeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeeeseneeeaees 5 20 Setting the Wiring Efficiency and Two Wattmet
451. side the instrument this act is dangerous e When connecting measurement cables from an external current sensor to the current sensor input connector remove the cables connected to the current input terminals In addition when the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current sensor input terminal do not touch the current input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous e The terminal is a binding post and the screws are M6 Either wind the wire around the screw or pass the crimp on lugs through the screw axis then tighten firmly by holding the terminal knob Us 2 1 Unit mm Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems Limitations are placed on the wiring systems that can be selected depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument For example three phase four wire 3P4W cannot be selected on models with two input elements For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 2 3 Measurement Conditions 3 14 IM 760301 01E 3 9 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement for Direct Input The assignment of elements to the input terminals in the figures of the wiring examples below varies depending on the number of installed input elements For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 2 3 Measurement Conditions
452. sk marks are placed by all the directories and files in the selected storage medium Note You cannot copy files if files with the same file name exist at the copy destination e You cannot copy the same files to another directory after copying the files Select the files to be copied again and copy them e If an error occurs while copying multiple files the files after the error occurrence are not copied The number of directories and files that can be displayed in the file list is 2500 If the number of directories and files in a directory exceeds 2500 the file list randomly displays 2500 of the directories and files Files that do not have an archive attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not remove the archive attribute of the files saved by the WT3000 using your PC e Up to 41 characters can be displayed in the path If the path exceeds 41 characters is displayed at the end of the character string 9 36 IM 760301 01E 9 9 Renaming Files or Directories and Creating Directories CAUTION Do not remove the PC card or USB memory or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the PC card or USB memory is blinking This can damage the PC card or USB memory or destroy the data on the it Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT De A m l A m N NUMERIC WAVE U 1 P S Q A RATE HOLD LOCAL lt 4 gt WPa 9 omens ed ruven e
453. sni sicaedtnessscivusiiiesaasettcesctseanntestienciess 1 1 recall l a 2 35 8 21 rectified mean value ssessesssesrreserrisrsrsrrereerrnsense 5 9 App 1 rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value 5 9 App 1 PROMAIMNG ie ccsvsectssecvecsctesasesaiteaesecoedeestecsicctactecvedhevandevessiees 9 38 repetitive integration MOE eee eee eee eeeeeee 5 30 5 38 reservation time Roset WGMSsEXOG iss isic acevssnssvecincsinsd iiscsasvantstesiessssceasttbataias 5 5 FOSISLANCO iis ccescisscsecsicesszcvestsnseesstecassecostansstnecsersasseezsnenss response time RGB Video Signal z cssis carncisteeeiisteatstinitecccasiates 2 37 TISING Zero COSSING secseseeeseeceseeeseeseeeeseeseneeseaeseaes App 27 RMEAN NINA AET A T E E RMS irian caved enseversteati ce eenein arn erence roll paper ROMAN ainsin ieser onene a aeeaiei safety terminal adapter Sample WAL sic cave cssteascccseceesevs satetievnscwsassensarecsideatiess cevetiees sampled data Sampling Frequency IM 760301 01E Index 3 Index SAVE E E EE ER A E sees Save Exec SCAG R EE T cee ae eee scale value scaling Bs scaling TACION 2 ccessccestecssceesccestiscasesssapesetvecttcescessttnrterscedens 4 16 screen brightness ccsievceehcesenceresecaressccncenecsteatenenneneereees 10 7 screen brightness Of cccceeseeeeeeneeeseeeeeeteneeeeseneeeeseaees 2 38 screen divisions number of 6 15 7 13
454. source Therefore the frequency filter is sometimes called the synchronization source filter or zero crossing filter Frequency filter ON gt When Measuring a Signal with No Zero Crossing due to DC Offset Superposed on the AC Signal The measured values may be unstable if the period of the AC signal cannot be detected accurately Change the synchronization source to a signal that allows more stable detection of the period change from voltage to current or from current to voltage The frequency detection circuit is AC coupled The period of AC signals with no zero crossing due to an offset can be detected if the AC amplitude is greater than or equal to the detection level of the frequency measurement circuit See section 12 5 With this feature the measurement period is set to an integer multiple of the period of the AC signal q Data update interval Data update interval a e gt Signal Measurement period gt AC coupling s PAAA When Measuring a DC Signal If ripple exists on the DC signal and its level is greater than or equal to the detection level of the frequency measurement circuit see section 12 5 and the period can be detected accurately and stably a more accurate DC measurement becomes possible If a large AC signal is superposed on the DC signal a more stable measurement can be achieved by detecting its period and taking the average In addition if a small fluctuating pulse
455. splays option see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for selecting the display format according to the display type selected with the NUMERIC WAVE or OTHERS key on the previous page SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM Key See section 5 1 6 2 6 3 6 6 to 6 8 7 4 7 5 and 7 8 For details on bar graphs and vector displays option see the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Displays a menu for selecting the display format for the bottom half of the display when two types of displays are displayed simultaneously on the top and bottom halves of the display using the setup menu shown with the OTHERS key on the previous page The menu configuration is the same as when the bottom half of the display is shown by itself full screen e U I P Key S Q p Key WP q TIME Key FU FI y Key See section 5 1 Each time the U I P key is pressed the measurement function of the displayed item at the cursor switches in the following order U gt gt P gt the measurement function before the U I P key was pressed gt U and so on The numeric data of the selected measurement function is displayed e The above operation is carried out when numeric data is displayed and the menu is not displayed or the ITEM key has been pressed e Only the measurement function switches e The measurement function of U and varies depending on the voltage mode or current mode For example if the voltage mode is set to
456. sponding items will not be deleted At the same time the All Reset soft key changes to the All Set soft key Set Reset pc_card J Set Reset con gt 2004705721 17 46 Paini x 0001 27309 2004705721 17 53 R p 0000 27309 2004 05 21 17 50 RY All Set All Reset i gt 7 Property Property Filter Filter item ALI Item AJ Attribute Attribute HE Delete Exec Delete Exec HE IM 760301 01E 9 31 e eq Buipeo 7 pue Burnes el 9 7 Deleting Files Explanation Executing the Delete Operation 12 Press the Delete Exec soft key All files with asterisk marks are deleted Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory The explanation is the same as that given in Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory in section 9 3 Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box The explanation is the same as that given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 Properties The explanation is the same as that given in Properties in section 9 6 Selecting the File Attribute The explanation is the same as that given in Selecting the File Attribute in section 9 6 Selecting the Files to Be Deleted e By placing asterisk marks to the left of the file names those files can be deleted e There are two ways to select the files to be deleted
457. ssing the keys on the keyboard you can operate the WT3000 in a similar fashion The assignment of functions varies depending on the keyboard type For details see appendix 9 IM 760301 01E 3 33 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 16 Switching the Measurement Mode and Display Procedure DI A ioe ITEM amp ELEMENT U 1 P sane l UPDATE RATE HOLD ore WPiq TIME Fun SINGLE LOWER ITEM AVG MOTOR FREQ SET SYNC SOURCE O NULL FE mesa STORE MENU 3 14 STORE SET print msc HELP MENU FORM LOWER FORM USER erevent USER SET O ALL CAL l INTEG OREMOTE sen To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section Measurement modes other than normal measurement mode can be used on models with the advanced computation G6 voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement FL or cycle by cycle measurement CC option e Switching between Normal Measurement Wide Bandwidth Harmonic
458. st 1 7020 4 of the third item P2 0 0000 1 0 1783 iva e Scrolling the Page The numeric display consists of up to nine pages The number pages varies depending on the installed options and the number of displayed items The displayed items can be assigned for each page The page can be scrolled to switch the page and the displayed items can be changed collectively Irms1 Display example Displays the voltage current power and power factor of elements 1 to 4 on pages 1 to 4 orms 100 945 v Irms2 SSL P1 Urms3 P2 Irms3 ums 101 071 V ms4 0 56615 4 E 53 139 w i 0 92865 e Resetting the Numeric Display If the number of displayed items is set to a value other than All the display order of measurement functions can be reset to a default order 1 default set P3 Page bar The current page is highlighted TOA Numeric Display Related to Harmonic Measurement See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Single list or dual list can be displayed on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option 2 16 IM 760301 01E 2 5 Computation By using the data of measurement functions the following computations can be performed In addition a function is provided in which the equation used to determine the measurement function data can be selected
459. st Factor Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT a A fumer WAVE W 1 P same CRE HOLD LOCAL a gt omens Weg Fun sma v l ITEM l FORM USER Erevent l INTEG srir 7 LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL AA scarna neruTen AVG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above MOTOR FREQ the soft keys SET FILTER HRM SET measure snese In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the fens Oe cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE mace save STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET prt q_ misc HELP MENU 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Config soft key to display the Config menu e Selecting the Crest Factor 3 Press Crest Factor to select CF3 or CF6 Config Message System Language Overview ENG M Menu Language ENG 4 Alphabet Remote Font Control Gothic lea LCD Brightness 2 Key Lock Shift Lock Selftest Crest Factor EF3 cr6 Explanation For details see section 2 3 Selecting the Crest Factor The crest factor is a ratio of the amplitude with respect to the rms val
460. stalled elements are displayed e Selecting the Target Element 2 Press one of the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element to select the target element e Selecting the Line Filter 3 Press the cursor keys to select a value between OFF and 50 kHz If any of the target elements is set to a setting other than OFF LINE FILTER illuminates Element 4 e Selecting the Frequency Filter 4 Press SHIFT LINE FILTER FREQ FILTER to display the Freq Filter menu Only the installed elements are displayed 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the target element to select ON or OFF 4 22 IM 760301 01E 4 8 Selecting the Input Filter Explanation inti f Element 1 ON Element 2 PFF ON Element 3 PFF ON Element 4 PFF ON There are two types of input filters line filter and frequency filter Selecting the Line Filter Because the line filter is inserted into the voltage and current measurement input circuit it directly affects the voltage current and power measurements see the block diagram in section 2 1 When the line filter is turned ON the measured value does not contain high frequency components Therefore measurement of voltage current and power is possible by eliminating high frequency components from inverter waveforms strain waveforms etc e The cutoff frequency can be selected from the list of choices below OFF 500 Hz 5 5 kHz and 50 kHz lf any of the target elements
461. stortion of current waveforms is smaller than voltage waveforms set the synchronization source to the current signal vorge TILL TNT NW WO Current waveform Synchronization source setting Current signal e Zero Crossing e Rising or falling zero crossing refers to the time when the synchronization source passes through level zero center of the amplitude on the rising or falling slope The measurement period on the WT3000 is between the first rising or falling zero crossing and the last rising or falling zero crossing in the data update interval e The rising or falling zero crossing is automatically selected for the one that allows the interval to be longer Data update interval Measurement period Synchronization source Zero crossing of the rise ramp Zero crossing of the fall ramp e When the Period of the Synchronization Source Cannot Be Detected If there are less than two rising or falling zero crossings of the input signal set as the synchronization source in the data update interval the period cannot be detected In addition the frequency cannot be detected if the AC amplitude is small For details on the detection level for frequency measurement circuit see section 12 5 If this happens the entire data update interval becomes the measurement period and the sampled data of the entire period are averaged Data update interval Measurement period x pu ddy The mea
462. sured in Each Measurement Mode Efficiency Table 2 2 Measurement Mode Measurement Item Normal Wide Bandwidth IECH Waveform Measurement Harmonic C Harmonic Computation Delta computation Phase angle of the fundamental component between phases Motor User defined function Yes Can be measured No Cannot be measured i 2 3 4 6 7 8 Variable k is the harmonic order and total value The maximum order for which the harmonic data is measured is the maximum harmonic order to be measured that is specified in the harmonic measurement option menu The data is set to no data for harmonic orders without data The total value is not measured in normal measurement mode The measured data for the frequencies of input signals that are not specified for the frequency measurement are set to no data If the voltage or current mode is not RMS the data of CfU or Cfl is set to no data If there are no integrated values because integration is not performed the data is set to no data The data is set to no data also for integration time The delta computation option DT is required The motor version MV is required The advanced computation option G6 or the harmonic measurement option G5 is required to meas
463. sured values of voltage and current may be unstable due to causes described above In such case lower the data update rate so that more periods of the input signal fit within the data update interval IM 760301 01E App 27 Appendix 6 Setting the Measurement Period e When the Waveform of the Synchronization Source Is Distorted Change the synchronization source to a signal that allows more stable detection of the period change from voltage to current or from current to voltage Also turn ON the frequency filter For the setup procedure of the frequency filter see section 4 8 The WT3000 applies hysteresis to the zero crossing detection to reduce the effects of noise If the synchronization source is distorted or harmonic or noise is superposed on the signal to a level exceeding this hysteresis zero crossing detection due to high frequency components occur frequently and the zero crossing of the fundamental frequency cannot be detected stably Consequently this may cause the measured values of voltage and current to be unstable Also when high frequency components are superposed on the current waveform such as in the aforementioned inverter example turn the frequency filter ON to stably detect the zero crossing The validity of setting the filter can be verified by a more accurate and stable frequency measurement result In this way the frequency filter also functions as a filter for detecting the zero crossing of the synchronization
464. surement mode Store Mode You can select the timing used to start or end the storage operation from the choices below Manual This is the manual mode When you press STORE the numeric data or waveform display data can be stored at the specified store interval for the specified store counts Real Time This is the real time mode When you press STORE the numeric data or waveform display data can be stored from the specified reservation time for starting the storage operation at the specified store interval for the specified store counts or until the reservation time for ending the storage operation Integ Sync e This is the integration synchronization mode When you press STORE the numeric data or waveform display data can be stored when the integration starts at the specified store interval for the specified store counts or until the integration is stopped e By setting the time of the integration timer see section 5 11 or 5 12 to an integer multiple of the store interval the integrated values at integration start and integration stop that are repeated according to the time setting of the integration timer can be stored IM 760301 01E 8 2 Procedure fa Cursor keys w amp 9 Scano mereen ave MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER MEASURE SYNC SOURCEJ CURSOR O NULL Fe ace save MENU print msc
465. t gt lt value value value Reset Start date time Stop date time IM 760301 01E 2 23 uondioseg jeuonounes 2 7 Waveform Display The WT3000 displays waveforms based on the data sampled within the data update rate Selecting the Waveform to Be Displayed For procedures see section 6 2 You can select whether to show or hide the voltage and current waveforms of each input element This feature enables easy viewing of waveforms as only the required waveforms can be displayed Vertical Amplitude Axis The vertical display range is determined based on the specified measurement range For example if the crest factor is set to 3 and the voltage measurement range is set to 100 Vrms then the display range is set so that the top of the screen is 300 Vpk 100 Vrms x 3 and the bottom is 300 Vpk 100 Vrms x 3 with the zero input line at the center If the crest factor is set to 6 and the voltage measurement range is set to 50 Vrms then the display range is set so that the top of the screen is 300 Vpk 50 Vrms x 6 and the bottom is 300 Vpk 50 Vrms x 6 with the zero input line at the center The waveform clips if this range is exceeded When measured at the measurement When the same signal is measured at range of 100 Vrms the measurement range of 300 Vrms 300 Vpk 900 Vpk Input zero lines J
466. t Interval time to an appropriate amount from the PRINT MENU SHIFT PRINT gt Auto Print Settings menu 871 Attempted made to start Auto Print when Set End Time to a future date amp time from the the end time had already passed PRINT MENU SHIFT PRINT gt Auto Print Settings menu 872 Auto print s print out has been canceled The printer or file system is in action See the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760301 17E IM 760301 01E Ey uonsedsu pue ooueuajuley HunooysajqnoiL 11 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Error in System Operation Code Message Corrective Action Reference Section 901 Failed to backup setup data The system has been initialized 3 4 Maintenance service is required 902 System RAM failure Maintenance service is required 903 System ROM failure Maintenance service is required 904 System RAM failure Maintenance service is required 906 Fan stopped Power off immediately Maintenance service is required 909 Illegal SUM value Maintenance service is required 910 RAM read write error Maintenance service is required 911 Memory bus error Maintenance service is required 912 Fatal error in Communication driver Maintenance service is required 914 Time out occurs in Communications 915 EEPROM SUM error EEPROM may be damaged Maintenance service is
467. t Circuit for the External Start Signal and Time Chart 5 V 100 Q Start input signal WW 2 gt Minimum pulse width Start input lt gt signal Measurement start Input delay time t Trigger occurrence A CAUTION When the instrument is set to master do not apply external voltage to the external start signal input output connector START If you do the instrument may malfunction Applying a voltage outside the 0 to 5 V range to the external start signal input output connector when the instrument is set to slave may cause damage to the instrument e Limitations on the Synchronized Measurement by Measurement Modes Synchronized measurement cannot be used in the following measurement modes Wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode IEC harmonic measurement mode Waveform computation mode FFT mode Voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement mode Cycle by cycle measurement mode 10 16 IM 760301 01E Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection 11 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting f a message is displayed on the screen read the following pages If servicing is necessary or if the instrument is not operating correctly after performing the corrective actions contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Problem and Corrective Action Reference Section Nothing shows up on the display when the power switch is turned ON
468. t cables See sections 3 8 to 3 11 External current sensor input connector Used to connect the external sensor cable from the external current sensor See Power switch See section 3 4 Built in printer option Used to print screen images See the Expansion Function The keys enter the shifted state when you press the SHIFT key and the SHIFT key illuminates In this state the setup menu marked in purple User s Manual IM760301 51E below the panel keys can be selected GP IB connector RS 232 connector or USB port for the PC See the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760301 17E CD ROM Input element 1 See section 2 3 Input element 2 Input element 3 Selectable option See the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760301 17E CD ROM External clock input connector e Receives the synchronization source Input element 4 signal that defines the measurement computation period See section 4 7 e Receives the external PLL source signal for harmonic measurement See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Ethernet port option See the Expansion Function User s Ire O che b TS riley w O O lO 6 IP Dew eb Q Q Q Q OF MOT KOT MOL bead N ore a os oo i Tu Manual
469. t every display update rate irrespective of the MAX hold function section 5 5 Integration When the Measured Value Exceeds the Measurement Limit If the instantaneous voltage or current of the sampled data exceeds 300 of the measurement range when the crest factor is set to 3 the value is considered to be the value corresponding to 300 for the purpose of integration If the instantaneous voltage or current of the sampled data exceeds 600 of the measurement range when the crest factor is set to 6 the value is considered to be the value corresponding to 600 for the purpose of integration Integration When Current Input Is Small Integration is performed assuming a current of zero when the current input with respect to the measurement range is as indicated below e When the crest factor is set to 3 When Irms is less than or equal to 0 3 or Imn or Irmn is less than or equal to 2 e When the crest factor is set to 6 When Irms is less than or equal to 0 6 or Imn or Irmn is less than or equal to 4 Backup during Power Failures If a power failure occurs when integration is in progress the integration result is held When the power recovers the integration result calculated up to the point when the power failure occurred is displayed with the integration operation stopped e Ifthe integration is reset after the power recovers integration can be started once again IM 760301 01E 5 33 JUSWIDINSeD JOMOd 5 11 Integration
470. t key to change the data update rate The specified data update rate is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen Pressing the Update Rate Up Exec soft key increases data update rate e Pressing the Update Rate Down Exec soft key decreases data update rate SUOI IPUOD JUSWaINSeS y a Update Rate Up Exec Update Rate Down Exec IM 760301 01E 4 27 4 10 Selecting the Data Update Rate Explanation For details see section 2 3 Excluding the cases when the screen is set to the displays listed below the selected interval is used pass the numeric data to the D A output and communication output as well as storing the numeric data to the internal memory Waveform display e Split display including a waveform display e Display Position of the Data Update Rate The data update rate is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen when the UPDATE RATE key is pressed Data update rate Computing method Update 500msec EAMP yoKocaAWA Element1 U1 1000Vrms 11 30Arms Element2 u2 1000 rms e Limitation on the Data Update Rate by Measurement Modes Normal Measurement Mode Waveform Computation Mode and FFT Mode Select from the choices below The numeric data is updated at the selected interval To capture relatively fast load fluctuations in the power system select a fast data update rate To capture relatively low frequency signals select a slow dat
471. t key to display the Copy menu Sy Funct ton M Function M File Item Delete Setup Delete l Set Reset Copy all Set Rename gt gt Property MakeDir Filter Item Bil Attribute Attribute i 7 Utility Exec Delete Exec UJ Format HE oo e Selecting the Copy Source Storage Medium or Directory 5 The procedure is the same as that given inin Selecting the Storage Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 9 3 IM 760301 01E 9 33 ejyeq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes el 9 8 Copying Files Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box 6 The procedure is the same as that given inin Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 Viewing the Properties 7 The procedure is the same as that given inin Viewing the Properties in section 9 6 Selecting the File Attribute 8 The procedure is the same as that given inin Selecting the File Attribute in section 9 6 Selecting the Copy Source Files One at a Time 9 10 Press the cursor keys to select the file Press the Set Reset soft key If an asterisk is displayed to the left of the file name in the File List dialog box the file will be copied If the asterisk to the left of the file name disappears the file will not be copied Proceed to step 12 C
472. t the right end of the screen Time at the left end of the screen 6 22 IM 760301 01E 6 9 Cursor Measurement Procedure a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT oi A numeri WAVE l U LIP s a ial HOLD Locau Ca gt l WE FU FI n smote D G ITEM FORM l USER Femen INTEG swt LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O AL scanna INE FILTER AVG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above MOTOR FREG the soft keys HRM SET MEASURE J SINCSORCEY In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the CURSOR O NULL 3 5 cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE J IMAGE SAVE STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 print msc re 1 Press SHIFT MEASURE CURSOR to display the Cursor menu e Turning ON OFF Cursor Measurement 2 Press the Wave Cursor soft key to select ON or OFF If ON is selected the result of the cursor measurement is displayed Aejdsiq wiojonejy IM 760301 01E 6 23 6 9 Cursor Measurement e Selecting the Target Waveform for Cursor Measurement e Selecting the Target Waveform for Cursor 3 Press the Wave C1 Trace soft key A box used to sel
473. te 3P4W or 3P3W 3V3A XA 3P4W or 3P3W 3V3A ZA 1P2W e Select the wiring system to match the circuit under measurement that is actually wired The method in which the function is determined varies depending on the wiring system If the selected wiring system does not match the actual circuit measurements and computation will not be correct e For the relationship between the wiring system and the determination of the function see appendix 1 4 2 IM 760301 01E 4 1 Selecting the Wiring System e Wiring System Display The wiring system configuration is displayed at the right side of the screen Because it is displayed behind the menu press the ESC key to hide the menu allowing the configuration to be viewed Below are examples showing the wiring systems ona model with four input elements installed When elements 1 to 4 are set to single phase two wire _ Elementi U1 1000 rms 11 30Arms _ Element _ U2 1000 rms 12 30Arms _ Element3 U3 1000Vmean 13A 30Arms _ Element4 U4 1000Vmean 144 30Arms When elements 1 and 2 are set to single phase three wire and elements 3 and 4 are set to three phase three wire _ aCiP3w U1 1000 rms 11 30Arms U2 1000 rms 12 30Arms _ BC3P3W U3 1000 mean 13A 30Arms U4 1000Vmea 144 30Arms Wiring unit and wiring system Displays the elements that compose the wiring unit with a frame Settings of Element
474. te L o Explanation Turning ON OFF the Date Time display You can select whether or not to display the date and time in the lower right corner of the screen e OFF Do not display the date and time e ON Display the date and time e Setting the Date Time e Setting the Date You can set the date in the form YY MM DD year month day Set the lower two digits of the year e Setting the Time You can set the time in the form HH MM SS hour minute second The hour is set using a 24 hour clock e Setting the Time Using the SNTP Server You can use the SNTP server time to set the date and time on the instrument This function is available if the Ethernet interface option is installed For details on the SNTP and GMT see section 5 7 Setting the Time Difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time Setting SNTP in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E The time difference from GMT specified here is linked to the setting of 5 7 above Note The date and time information is backed up with the lithium battery when the power is turned OFF e The instrument contains leap year information The instrument determines the leap year calendar when the new settings are confirmed If you enter 2 29 on a non leap year an error message will be displayed IM 760301 01E 3 25 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 13 Initializing the Settings a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Gmie A fumer WAVE W 1 P same CRE HOLD LOCAL
475. tection Two frequencies from the fU and fl of all installed elements including the PLL source frequency can be measured simultaneously On the model with the frequency measurement add on option the fU and fl of all elements can be measured simultaneously Maximum voltage U pk V The maximum u n for every data update interval Minimum voltage U pk V The minimum u n for every data update interval Maximum current I pk A The maximum i n for every data update interval Minimum current I pk A The minimum i n for every data update interval Voltage crest factor CfU Upk_ Current crest factor Cfl ipk Urms Irms Voltage crest factor CfU Upk U pkl or IU pkl whichever is greater Ipk II pkl or Il pkl whichever is greater Current crest factor Cfl Displays when the voltage mode Displays when the current mode is not RMS is not RMS IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 IEC76 1 1993 P 2 Corrected Power Pc W P1 P2 p 4 Umn Urms Umn Umn Coefficients defined in the applicable standard Displays when the voltage mode is not RMS or MEAN Continues to the next page IM 760301 01E App 1 x pu ddy Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions Table 2 3 Measurement Functions during Normal Measurement Method of Determination Equation For details on the symbols in the equation see the N
476. ter strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Selftest soft key to display the Selftest menu 3 Press the Test Item soft key to display the Test Item menu 4 Press the Memory or Key Board soft key to select the test item If you select Memory proceed to Testing the Memory on the next page If you select Key Board proceed to Testing the Keys and the Keyboard on the next page System Overview ze gs Remote Control Date Time Note Test Exec Test Exec The time display at the lower right corner of the screen may not be updated during the self test Testing the Memory 5 Press the Memory Test soft key to display the Memory Test menu 6 Press the System or ACQ RAM soft key to select the memory to be tested 7 Press the Test Exec soft key to execute the memory test IM 760301 01E Ey uonsedsu pue ooueuajuley HunooysajqnoiL 11 3 Self Test Explanation Test Item W Test Item Key Board Key Board I12ZGbE4B EP ESL WELT K Soft Key P Tela BICIE HIKA gt gt LINO PORS UUU MEDAD seal Dieu Ld Ld Sel ftest Selftest Sel ftest 4 Test Item M Test Item 4 Test Item _ Memo Memory Ewemory rest A Syston Memory Test M Memory Test System System a Test Exec Test Exec Test Exec Testing th
477. tern 1 3P4W or 3P3W 3V3A ZA 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 2 1P3W or 3P3W 2A 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 3 Wiring system Pattern 4 1P2W P3W or 3P3W B 1P2W 1P2W 1P3W or 3P3W 2A Wiring system Pattern 5 1P3W or 3P3W 2A 1P3W or 3P3W B Wiring system Pattern 6 Wiring system Pattern 7 3P4W or 3P3W 3V3A ZA 1P2W 3P4W or 3P3W 3V3A ZA IM 760301 01E 2 9 uondioseg jeuonounes 2 3 Measurement Conditions Measurement Range For procedures see section 4 3 Set the measurement range using an rms level When directly applying voltage or current signals to the input element two types of measurement ranges is available fixed range and auto range When waveforms are displayed the vertical display range corresponds to 3 or 6 times the measurement range when the crest factor see section 4 6 is set to 3 or 6 respectively For details on waveform display see section 2 7 Waveform Display Fixed Range Select each range from a number of choices The selected range does not switch even if the amplitude of the input signal changes For voltage the maximum and minimum selectable ranges are 1000 V and 15 V respectively when the crest factor is set to 3 When the crest factor is set to 6 the maximum and minimum selectable ranges are 500 V and 7 5 V respectively Auto Range The measurement range switches automatically depending on the ampl
478. ternal current sensor input For self generated heat caused by current input on an AC input signal add the following values to the current accuracy e 2 Ainputelement 0 004 x I of reading 30 A input element 0 00002 x I of reading For self generated heat caused by current input on a DC input signal add the following values to the current accuracy e 2 A input element 0 004 x 1 of reading 6 x I uA e 30 A input element 0 00002 x I of reading 3 x I uA lis the current reading A The influence from self generated heat continues until the temperature of the shunt resistor inside the WT3000 lowers even if the current input changes to a small value When the data update interval is 50 ms add 0 1 of reading to all accuracy figures When the data update interval is 100 ms add 0 05 of reading to all accuracy figures IM 760301 01E 12 5 suoleoioeds Ey 12 4 Accuracy Item Specifications All accuracy figures for 0 1 to 10 Hz are reference values The voltage accuracy figures for 30 kHz to 100 kHz when the voltage exceeds 750 V are reference values e The voltage accuracy figures for 100 kHz to 1 MHz when the voltage V exceeds 2 2 x 104 f kHz are reference values e The current accuracy figures for DC 10 Hz to 45 Hz and 400 Hz to 200 kHz when the current exceeds 20 A are reference values The current accuracy figures for 200 kHz to 500 kHz when the current exceeds 10 A are reference val
479. th respect to the voltage of each element You can select the display mode from below 180 Lead Lag If the current phase is in the counterclockwise direction with respect to voltage the current is leading D the voltage If the current phase is in the clockwise direction with respect to the voltage the current is lagging G the voltage The phase difference is expressed by an angle between 0 to 180 360 Degrees The phase difference is expressed using an angle between 0 and 360 in the clockwise direction Note If the measured value of the voltage or current input is zero Error is displayed e When both the voltage and current are sinusoids and the ratio of the voltage and current inputs do not differ greatly with respect to the measurement range the phase difference p of lead and lag are detected and displayed correctly If the computation result of power factor exceeds 1 is displayed as follows e If the power factor is greater than 1 and less than equal to 2 p displays zero e If the power factor is greater than 2 displays and error e The phase difference fU and fl of harmonic order 1 to 100 of the voltage and current on the harmonic measurement option is always displayed using an angle between 0 and 180 no sign for lead and negative sign for lag IM 760301 01E 5 29 JUSWISINSBD JOMOd 5 11 Integration The integration function has the following five modes Repetitive Opera
480. the The color changes from green to red when the input signal level exceeds displayed item can be approx three or six times the specified measurement range when the changed using the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively The first and second lines function select key correspond to voltage and current respectively The conditions of the The item to be input signals of elements 1 to 4 are displayed in order from the left changed is i highlighted Displayed only on models with the motor evaluation function motor version The color changes from green to red when the analog revolution torque signal level exceeds approx 150 of the specified measurement range For pulse revolution signal the color changes from green to red when approx 5 V is exceeded The first and second lines correspond to the conditions of rotating speed and torque respectively fl Normal Mode Uover een Spdi ul 1000Vrms YoKocAWA Mitchie a a z Page bar PAGE _ Element A c s a furi 1000vrms The Current page is highlighted 2 Urms1 0 10639 w 8 q t sams If page scrolling is possible g Irms1 1 6741 2 fur toes USINg PAGE W or PAGE A the B Hemm top and bottom sections of the E P1 0 1651 ryf oment3 page bar shows A V If page 5 S1 0 1781 wa L3 30ans Scrolling is not possible A V 5 yur stove 1S Shown a Q1 0 0669 kvar 7 14 30Arms o M 0 92688 Spd 20v LTrg 20v
481. the Ethernet interface option is installed If the Ethernet interface option is not installed Date Time ate Time Initialize Settings g Remote Control A Date Time EEE Selftest Display OFF Type Manual __sntp__ Date 05 12 Time Display 2006 L06 14N 3 24 IM 760301 01E 3 12 Setting the Date Time Setting the Time Using the SNTP Server Available when the Ethernet interface option is installed To obtain the time from the SNTP server you must first connect to the network and then to the SNTP server For details see section 5 2 Setting TCP IP and section 5 7 Setting the Time Difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time Setting SNTP in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E 5 After step 4 press the cursor keys to select Type 6 Press SET to set Type to SNTP 7 Press the cursor keys to select Time Hour under Time Difference from GMT 8 Press SET An entry box appears 9 Press the cursor keys to set the hour 10 Press SET to confirm 11 Likewise set the minute 12 Press the cursor keys to select Set and press SET The time is obtained from the SNTP server and the date and time calculated from the specified GMT time difference are set ate Time Display Type Manual ENTP _ Time Difference From GMT Time Hour L 9 Minu
482. the PC Card Insert the PC card into the PC card drive with the front side of the card facing right Note Be sure to insert the PC card all the way in If it isn t the WT3000 may not detect it correctly Ejecting the PC Card Check that the PC card is not being accessed and press the eject button below the PC card slot Normally the eject button is retracted To eject the PC card press the eject button once to pop the button out and press it again Press the eject button once to pop Front side the button out and press it again CAUTION e The WT3000 may malfunction if the PC card is inserted and ejected within 1 second time period Do not remove the PC card or turn OFF the power while it is being accessed If you do the data on the PC card may be destroyed e An access icon is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen while the PC card is being accessed General Handling Precautions of PC Cards For the general handling precautions of the PC card read the instruction manual that came with the PC card IM 760301 01E 9 1 e eq Buipeo7 pue Burnes el 9 1 PC Card and USB Memory USB PERIPHERAL Interface Specifications Item Specifications Connector type USB type A connector receptacle Electrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to USB Rev 1 1 Data rate 12 Mbps maximum Power supply 5 V 500 mA per port Number of ports 2 Devices whose maximum current consumption
483. the Y axis conversion equation of each waveform VOffset Value of coefficient VOffset of the Y axis conversion equation of each waveform VDataType Type of binary waveform display data of each waveform VUnit Unit used on the Y axis of each waveform no effect on the data VPlusOverData Error data when the binary data of each waveform is greater than or equal to this value VMinusOverData Error data when the binary data of each waveform is less than or equal to this value VMaxData Maximum value of the binary data of each waveform VMinData Minimum value of the binary data of each waveform HResolution Value of coefficient HResolution of the X axis conversion equation of each waveform HOffset Value of coefficient HOffset of the X axis conversion equation of each waveform HUnit Unit used on the X axis of each waveform no effect on the data Date Date when the trigger occurred Time Time when the trigger occurred e Privatelnfo Model Specific Information ModelVersion Version No of the instrument 1 Endian mode when saving data Big Motorola 68000 family data 2 Storage format of the binary waveform display data Trace Format in which each block contains a waveform 3 Start position of the binary waveform display data Offset from the beginning of the file Always 8192 on the WT3000 4 Maximum number of blocks in the group Maximum number of blocks when the number of blocks varies for each waveform Always 1 on the WT3000
484. the instruction manual that comes with the memory 9 2 IM 760301 01E 9 2 Formatting the Storage Media CAUTION e Do not remove the storage medium or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon is blinking Such acts can damage the storage medium or destroy the data on it e If the WT3000 fails to detect a formatted storage medium reformat the storage medium on the WT3000 Note that all the data on the storage medium are cleared when the storage medium is formatted Be sure to back up important data beforehand a DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT oie a A UPDATE Ea eve NuMERIc wave u l P sane FDAT HOLD Locau a oTHERs werg Furm SINGLE CAL Ce v G mem FORM USER evemenr INTEG sniet LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET ALL AA a To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above SCALING uneruteR ava ihe con eve MOTOR FREQ SET FILTER HRM SET In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the ee OE cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE lace save STORE J character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 print msc me MENU 1 Press FILE to dis
485. the left end of the screen Time at the right end of the screen fixed to 0 s time span of the screen 6 6 IM 760301 01E 6 4 Procedure Setting the Trigger DISPLAY OO VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE OG a ES D MEASURING MEASURING Ce a MODE GEC EH MODE ITEM amp ELEMENT SENSOR RATIO AUTO EKO OREMOTE NUMERIC T OTHERS ITEM WAVE FORM UPDATE POAT HOLD wa CAL INTEG wie S Q A USER ELEMENT LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL c Q Q gt rr SHIFT lig Press FORM to display the Wave Form menu If the waveform display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM 2 Press the Trigger soft key to display the Trigger menu Wave For Format Single ied Time div Sms Display Settings Wave Mapping Trigger Wave Form Format Single gt Time div Level Wave Mapping Slope tn x To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 IM 760301 01
486. the maximum current Um i sinwt Imsinot R If expressed using rms values the equation is U R There is no phase difference between a current flowing through a resistive circuit and the voltage I R IN l Ju Inductance Current i when AC voltage of instantaneous value u Umsinot is applied to a coil load of inductance L H is expressed by the equation below Um i sin Imsin XL p p ot 5 ot 5 If expressed using rms values the equation is U XL X is called inductive reactance and is defined as X L The unit is Q Inductance works to counter current changes increase or decrease and causes the current phase to lag the voltage i L ir U nja Capacity Current i when AC voltage of instantaneous value u Umsinot is applied to a capacitive load C F is expressed by the equation below 1 ot Imsin 2 __ Um i x Sin aie oo If expressed using rms values the equation is U Xc Xc is called capacitive reactance and is defined as Xc 1 wC The unit is Q When the polarity of the voltage changes the largest charging current of the same polarity as the voltage flows through the capacitor When the voltage decreases discharge current of opposite polarity as the voltage flows Thus the current phase leads the voltage c U nja App 22 IM 760301 01E Appendix 4 Power Basics Power Harmonics and RLC of AC Cir
487. thin a specified amount of time about 100 ms referred to as the timeout period the waveform display is updated If a trigger does not occur within the timeout time the display is automatically updated when the timeout time elapses e Normal Mode The display is updated only when the trigger occurs The display is not updated if the trigger does not occur Trigger Source Trigger source refers to the signal that is used in checking the trigger condition Trigger Slope Trigger slope refers to the movement of the signal from a low level to a high level rising edge or from a high level to a low level falling edge When the slope is used as one of the trigger conditions it is called a trigger slope Trigger Level Trigger level refers to the level through which the trigger slope passes When the slope of the trigger source passes through the specified trigger level on a rising or falling edge a trigger is activated You can select the input signal of each element or external clock input signal as a trigger source Trigger level I I Trigger source l I When set to rising 4 the trigger occurs here trigger point Trigger Point Trigger point refers to the point at which a trigger occurred The trigger point is always at the left end of the screen The waveform after the trigger point is displayed from the left to the right of the screen as the time progresses Trigger point gt Time IM 760301 01
488. tion Reference Integration Mode Manual integration mode The WT3000 keys are used to start stop the integration Key Key f Section 5 12 operation operation Normal integration mode A WT3000 key is used to start the integration When a specified timer value elapses the integration is stopped Key Stopped by A Section 5 13 operation a timer Repetitive integration mode A WT3000 key is used to start the integration When a specified timer value elapses the integration value is reset and restarted The above operation is repeated until STOP is pressed Real time normal integration mode Integration start and stop are Date time Date time Section 5 14 specified by date time Key Key Repeated by yi Section 5 13 operation operation a timer Real time repetitive integration mode Integration start and stop are specified by date time When a Date time Date time Repeated by specified timer value elapses the a timer integration value is reset and restarted Section 5 14 For details on each integration mode see section 2 6 e Starting Stopping and Resetting the Integration e The integration can be started stopped or reset from the front panel keys or through communication commands The following figure shows the relationship between the integration operation and start stop and reset Pressing RESET after the integration has stopped resets the integration value and the int
489. to measure the power of various single phase and three phase power transmission systems For details see section 2 3 Wiring Unit A wiring unit refers to a set of two or three input elements of the same wiring system that are grouped to measure three phase power Depending on the wiring system pattern see section 2 3 up to two wiring units can be constructed which are represented by symbols ZA and B The measurement function of a wiring unit is called a function For example UrmsA represents the true rms value of the average of the voltage of the input elements that are assigned to wiring unit A e Configuration example of wiring systems and wiring units Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 Voltage O O input Current O input CoO 0O0 oOo Xx a v J x p three wire Three phase three wire A eee B Wiring system Wiring unit IM 760301 01E 2 5 uondioseg jeuonounes 2 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Functions Types of Measurement Functions during Normal Measurement The data numeric data of measurement functions is measured or computed from the sampled data described in Measurement Period on page 2 7 1 The WT3000 samples the instantaneous values of the voltage and current signals at a specified sample rate The sampled data is processed as numeric data or data used to display waveforms on the screen waveform display data
490. tor EXT EXT IM 760301 01E 3 19 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 el 3 10 Wiring the Circuit under Measurement When Using the Current Sensor Wiring Example of a Three Phase Three Wire System 3P3W Using a Shunt Type Current Sensor SOURCE I LOAD Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 External current sensor External current sensor input connector input connector EXT EXT Wiring Example of a Three Phase Three Wire System Three Voltage Three Current System 3P3W 3V3A Using a Shunt Type Current Sensor SOURCE i LOAD OUT H OUT L Input O Jit O l Input terminal 1 4 terminal 2 OS terminal 3 tL O External current sensor External current sensor External current sensor input connector input connector input connector EXT EXT EXT Wiring Example of a Three Phase Four Wire System 3P4W Using a Shunt Type Current Sensor SOURCE LOAD Input Input Input terminal 1 terminal 2 terminal 3 External current sensor External current sensor External current sensor input connector input connector input connector EXT EXT EXT Note For the relationship between the wiring systems and the method of determining the measured values or computed values see Appendix 1 Symbols and Determi
491. tor is set to 6 Select 25 mV 50 mV 100 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1 V 2 5 V or 5 V e Auto Range When AUTO is pressed the AUTO key illuminates and auto range is enabled The range changes automatically depending on the amplitude of the input signal The switching conditions and precautions are the same as the descriptions given in section 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input The different ranges used in the auto mode are the same as those available for fixed range e Setting the External Current Sensor Transformation Ratio The transformation ratio can be set in the range of 0 0001 to 99999 9999 e Configuration Example of the External Current Sensor Range and Transformation Ratio When measuring a current with a maximum value of 100 A using a current sensor that outputs 10 mV when 1 A of current is flowing the maximum voltage that the current sensor outputs is 10 mV A x 100 A 1 V Therefore set 1 V for the external current sensor range and 10 mV A for the external current sensor transformation ratio Note ____ When attempting to directly read the current of the circuit under measurement by multiplying the output of the external current sensor by the transformation ratio turn OFF the external VT CT scaling function see section 4 5 If it is turned ON the value will be multiplied by the CT ratio When measuring a signal other than a sine wave such as a distorted wave accurate measurements can be obtained by sel
492. tore to emor File 2005705724 13 07 lt Power_T3 2005705724 13 00 Data Type Data Type lt Power_T2 2005 05 24 13 00 lt Power_T1 2005705724 12 58 fsg Float Float Memory to File J Init Memory Alert Msi OFF Fe Memory to Memory to File Exec File Exec e Setting the File Name and Comment 11 Press the File Name soft key to display the Save dialog box 12 Press the cursor keys to select Auto Naming 13 Press SET to select ON or OFF 14 Press the cursor keys to select File Name 15 Press SET to display the keyboard 16 Use the keyboard to set the file name For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings 17 Enter the Comment in a similar fashion 18 Press ESC to close the Save dialog box E emory to File emory to File Save Auto Naming File name C meent IZCEEEVECELINEEME comet P opal CIEL FIG H ITJ KIL ML Property EE BEI O EA CLEA ES E C C C EA KA EA MA SS NEAN A ai Filter Item AIT Item Memory to Mel ENT File Exec Fi IM 760301 01E 8 15 eea paiojs y Burnes pue eeg Buljjesey pue Bunos fe 8 5 Saving the Stored Data e Executing the Save Operation 19 Press the Memory to File Exec soft key The stored data is saved to the directory indicated by Pathe
493. tory in section 9 3 e Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box 6 The procedure is the same as that given inin Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 e Viewing the Properties 7 The procedure is the same as that given inin Viewing the Properties in section 9 6 e Selecting the File Attribute 8 The procedure is the same as that given inin Selecting the File Attribute in section 9 6 e Renaming a Directory or File 9 Press the cursor keys to select the directory or file 10 Press the File Name soft key A keyboard appears The name of the selected directory or file is displayed in the entry box of the keyboard 11 Use the keyboard to enter the directory or file name For keyboard operations see section 3 14 Entering Values and Strings Rename Rename M Function Ful Rename Rl A a File Name Fi 0000 SET CAPS mince g p 4 Property Pri Bs Filter F Item All 1 tend Attribute all EGUGEE ful 2 m 9 38 IM 760301 01E 9 9 Renaming Files or Directories and Creating Directories Creating a Directory MakeDir M Function MakeDir 4 Dir Name ql Property Filter Item All Attribute 4 Press the MakeDir soft key to display the MakeDir menu Function Delete copy lt
494. tup parameters from the storage medium 2 1 Selectable on models with the advanced computation G6 option 2 PC card USB storage and network drive The USB port for peripheral devices and Ethernet interface are options Printing of the Screen Image and Numeric Data List Print the screen image and numeric data list on the built in printer The built in printer is an option 12 12 IM 760301 01E 12 6 Input Output of the Master Slave Synchronization Signal Item Specifications Connector type BNC connector Common to the master and slave I O level TTL Common to the master and slave Output logic LJNegative logic falling edge Applicable to the master Measurement start delay Within 1 u s 1 sample period Applicable to the master time Output hold time Low level 500 ns or more Applicable to the master Input logic LI Negative logic falling edge Applicable to the slave Minimum pulse width Low level 500 ns or more Applicable to the slave Input delay time During HOLD ON Within 1 us 1 sample period Applicable to the slave During HOLD OFFWithin 63 u s 1 sample period Applicable to the slave 12 7 External Clock Input Common Item Specifications Connector type BNC connector Input level TTL When Used as a Synchronization Source Ext Clk during Normal Measurement Item Specifications Frequency range Same as the measurement range of Frequency Measureme
495. ue B Setting the Graphic Color Select default color or a user color For user color the display color can be specified for each item Back Set the background color within the waveform display frame Grid Set the color of the grid within the waveform display frame and the waveform display frame Cursor Set the display color of the cursor U1 to 14 Speed and Torque Set the display color of the waveform 13 and Speed are set to the same display color The same hold true for U4 and Torque Applicable only to products with the motor evaluation function motor version Setting the Text Color Select from Preset1 to 3 and user setting For user color the display color can be specified for each item Menu Fore Set the color of the text on the menu dialog box window and other screens Menu Back Set the background color of the waveform display frame Select Box Set the background color of the background within the selected menu frame and box Sub Menu Set the display color of the selected dialog box or window Selected Key Set the display color of the selected soft key or item 10 10 IM 760301 01E 10 7 Setting the Key Lock and Shift Lock Function Procedure fa Cursor keys Ga gt OMV scaunc merren _ave_ MOTOR FREQ ET FILTER CURSOR O NULL Fue mes store MI ENU STORE SET print msc er
496. ue You can select CF3 or CF6 Note e Ifthe crest factor is selected the voltage range and current range are set to the maximum range on all elements e Ifthe crest factor is set to 6 the measurement conditions of crest factor 5 and higher required by IEC62018 are met e When measuring waveforms whose crest factor is less than or equal to 3 accurate measurements can be achieved by setting the crest factor to 3 4 18 IM 760301 01E 4 7 Procedure Setting the Measurement Period ELEMENT VOLTAGE RANGE To exit the menu during operation press ESC SENSOR RATIO CURRENT RANGE O O10 located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the D MEASURING INPUT INFO MEASURING Gene e MODE AUTO phrase press the cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the AO Cursor keys Ca gt 9 Q MOTOR FRE SET FILTER a Tz CURSOR 8 Lt procedures for selecting items and entering values and character strings For details on the procedures see section 3 14 DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT umere WAVE l U I P sane m ITEM FORM USER LOWERITEM LOWER FORM USER SET E r mez CAL INTEG ELEMENT O ALL no i 4 1 Press SYNC SOURCE to display the Sync Src menu Selecting the Ta
497. ues The current accuracy figures for 500 kHz to 1 MHz when the current exceeds 5 A are reference values Effective input range 0 to 130 of the measurement range for Udc and Idc 1 to 130 of the measurement range for Urms and Irms 2 to 130 if the crest factor is set to 6 10 to 130 of the measurement range for Umn and Imn 10 to 130 of the measurement range for Urmn and Irmn However if the data update interval is 50 ms 100 ms 5 s 10 s or 20 s the signal level of the synchronization source must satisfy the input signal level of frequency measurement see section 12 5 110 for the maximum range of direct voltage and current inputs The accuracy for 110 to 130 of the measurement range is reading error x 1 5 Maximum display 140 of the rated voltage or current range Minimum display Down to 0 3 of the measurement range for Urms and Irms 0 6 if the crest factor is set to 6 Down to 2 of the measurement range for Umn Urmn Imn and Irmn 4 if the crest factor is set to 6 Values lower than these figures are fixed to zero suppressed to zero The integrated current q is dependent on the current value Lower limit of measurement frequency 50ms 100ms 250ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s 10s 20s 45Hz 25Hz 20Hz 10Hz 5Hz 2Hz 0 5Hz 0 2 Hz 0 1 Hz Data update interval Lower limit of measurement frequency Line filter influence When the cut off frequency is 500 Hz 45 Hz lt f lt 66 Hz Add
498. uirements The following symbols are used on this instrument A Handle with care To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to the explanation in the User s Manual or Service Manual Electric shock danger gt Alternating current Both direct and alternating current ON power OFF power ON power state OFF power state pppoe Grounding vi IM 760301 01E Safety Precautions Be sure to observe with the precautions below Not complying might result in injury or death e Use the Correct Power Supply Before connecting the power cord ensure that the source voltage matches the rated supply voltage of the instrument and that it is within the maximum rated voltage of the provided power cord e Use the Correct Power Cord and Plug To prevent the possibility of electric shock or fire be sure to use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA The main power plug must be plugged into an outlet with a protective earth terminal Do not disable this protection by using an extension cord without protective earth grounding e Connect the Protective Ground Terminal Be sure to connect the protective earth to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power The power cord that comes with the instrument is a three prong type power cord Connect the power cord to a properly grounded three prong outlet Do Not Impair the Protective Grounding Never cut off th
499. um of WP WP sum of WP WP sum of WP q Sum of q q sum of q q sum of q WS sum of SZ and WQX sum of Q Integration Mode For procedures see sections 5 11 and 5 12 There are five moves in the integration function manual integration mode normal integration mode repetitive integration mode real time integration mode and real time repetitive integration mode e Manual Integration Mode Integration continues from the point when it is started to the point it is stopped However when the integration time reaches its maximum 10000 hours or the integration value reaches its maximum or minimum see section 5 11 the integration is stopped and the integration time and integration value at that point are held Hold Hold When the maximum Integration a value value Hold Hold Integration time f e l Start Stop Reset Start Reset When STOP is pressed or the maximum integration time is reached IM 760301 01E 2 21 uondioseqg jeuonoune4 2 6 Integration e Normal Integration Mode The integration time is set in relative time The integration is stopped after the specified time elapses or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value The integration time and value are held at that point Hold Integration value Hold Integration time f Timer value f iaz gt Start Reset e Repetitive Integration Mode Continuous Integration The integratio
500. um store count that is displayed the actual store count is also changed to that value e You can change the store count in the range of 1 to the maximum store count that is calculated e Setting the Store Interval Set the interval at which the data is to be stored e The time in units of hour minute second can be set in the following range If the interval is set to 00 00 00 the data is stored in sync with the updating of the numeric data or waveform display data 00 00 00 to 99 59 59 e By setting the time of the integration timer see section 5 11 or 5 12 to an integer multiple of the store interval the integrated values at integration start and integration stop that are repeated according to the time setting of the integration timer can be stored e Setting the Store Reservation Time e The reservation time is set in units of year month date hour minute second e Set the year month and day e Set the hour minute second in the following range 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 e Make sure the reservation time for stopping the storage operation is after the reservation time for starting the storage operation e Turning ON OFF the Alert Indication for Internal Memory Initialization You can select whether to display a message when the internal memory is about to be initialized e ON Displays the alert message e OFF Initializes the memory without displaying the alert message Note N The reservation time allows up to 31 days to be specified f
501. umeric Data Waveform Sampling Data e File Name and Comment A file name must be assigned Comments are optional e You cannot save data to a file name that already exists in the same directory overwriting not allowed Number and Types of Characters That Can Be Used Item Number of Characters Characters That Can Be Used File Name 1 to 8 characters 0 9 A Z _ parentheses minus sign Comment O to 25 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces e Auto Naming Function When Auto Naming is turned ON files with a four digit number from 0000 to 2499 are automatically created when saving the data You can specify a common name up to 4 characters specified through Filename that is placed before the number e Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box The explanation is the same as that given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box in section 9 6 e Properties The explanation is the same as that given in Properties in section 9 6 Note For the meanings of the measurement function symbols that are displayed see section 2 2 Measurement Functions and Measurement Periods 2 5 Computation 2 6 Integration appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions and Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E e For details on the wiring units expressed as XA and B see section 4 1 Selecting t
502. une same RAF Hou Loca details on the procedures see section 3 14 Ce CAL a Vy mem f FoRM USER ELEMENT INTEG srr I LOWER ITEM OWER FORM USER SET O AL 1 Press FORM to display the Trend Form menu If the trend display is at the lower section of the screen on the split display press SHIFT FORM LOWER FORM 2 Press the Format soft key to display the Format menu 3 Press any of the keys from Single to Quad to select the number of windows E Form Format Single Clear Trend Exec 7 12 IM 760301 01E 7 6 Displaying Trends on Divided Windows Explanation The trends can be assigned to the divided windows Selecting the Number of Screen Divisions Select the number of divisions of the screen from the choices below This is the same as with the waveform display section 6 6 Single No division e Dual 2 divisions e Triad 3 divisions Quad 4 divisions The number of displayed points in the vertical direction of one divided window varies depending on the number of divisions as follows Single 432 points Dual 216 points Triad 144 points Quad 108 points Waveform Mapping The trends that are turned ON see section 7 2 are assigned in order according to the trend number T1 to T16 to the divided windows This corresponds to the Auto setting for the waveform display
503. ure the items related to harmonics and impedance Only the specialized measurement functions can be measured in voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement and cycle by cycle measurement modes For the measurement functions that can be measured see sections 12 1 and 13 1 in the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E App 42 IM 760301 01E Appendix 12 Operands of User Defined Functions That Can Be Used in Each Measurement Mode The operands of user defined functions that can be used in each measurement mode that is selectable on models with the advanced computation G6 option are as follows The user defined function cannot be used in voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement and cycle by cycle measurement modes Table 1 2 Measurement Mode Measurement Item Normal Wide Bandwidth Waveform Measurement Harmonic EC Harmonic computation U URMS All rms values UMN and each harmonic P component S Q LAMBDA PHI FU FI UPPK UMPK IPPK IMPK CFU CFI PC ETA1 ETA2 ETA3 ETA4 WH WHP WHP Frequency Integration TORQUE PM SLIP SYNC DELTA1 Delta DELTA2 computation DELTA3 DELTA4 Harmonic UPHI phase angle xipueddy Impedance IM 760301 0
504. urement circuit measures the sum of current iL flowing through the load of the circuit under measurement and the current iv flowing through the voltage measurement circuit Because the current flowing through the circuit under measurement is iL iv is the amount of error The input resistance of the voltage measurement circuit of the instrument is approximately 10 MQ If the input is 1000 V iv is approximately 0 1 mA 1000 V 10 MQ If the load current iL is 1 A or more load resistance is 1 kQ or less then the effect of iv on the measurement is 0 01 or less If the input is 100 V and 1 A iv 0 01 mA 100 V 10 MQ then the effect of iv on the measurement accuracy is 0 001 0 01 mA 1 A SOURCE S U SOURCE Jtoan C gt D LOAD WT3000 As a reference the relationship of the voltages and currents that produce effects of 0 01 0 001 and 0 0001 are shown in the figure below 0 01 Effect 0 001 Effect 1000 ae peak a 800 600 400 200 Pads Effect A 86e 0A painseayy _ gt Measured current A e When the Measurement Current Is Relatively Small Wire so that the current measurement circuit is connected to the load side In this case the voltage measurement circuit measures the sum of the load voltage eL and voltage drop e across the current measurement circuit e is the amount of error in this case The input resistance of the
505. urns OFF the integration time and integration value are reset and the display shows no data IM 760301 01E 5 43 JUSWISINSeD JOMOd 5 14 Setting the Real Time Integration and Real Time Repetitive Integration Explanation For functional details see section 2 6 To perform integration the integration mode and integration time must be set before starting the operation e Selecting the Real time Normal Integration Mode or Real time Repetitive Integration Mode In this mode integration is performed between the times specified by integration start and stop This mode consists of the following two types Real Time Normal Integration Mode The date time and integration timer time of start and stop of the integration operation is set The integration is stopped at the specified time when the maximum integration time of 10000 hours is exceeded or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value see section 5 11 The integration time and value are held at that point Real Time Repetitive Integration Mode Continuous Integration The start and stop of the integration operation is set through date and time and the integration timer time The integration is repeated at the specified timer setting during that time When the time specified by the timer elapses the operation is automatically reset and restarted The integration is stopped at the specified time or when the integration va
506. ursor is placed on the waveform Vector Display and Bar Graph Display Item Specifications Vector display Displays vectors of the phase difference of the fundamental waveforms Applicable on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option Bar graph display Displays the bar graph of the amplitude of each harmonic Applicable on models with the the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option Trend Display Displays the trend of the numeric data of the measurement function on a graph The maximum number of displayed items is 16 Simultaneous Display Displays a combination of two displays from numeric waveform bar graph and trend in the top and bottom halves of the divided screen Data Store and Recall Store Store the numerical data and waveform display data in the internal memory Save the stored data to a storage medium Internal memory Approx 30 MB Storage interval 50 ms when waveform is OFF to 99 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds Recall Recall the stored data from the internal memory 2 1 PC card USB storage and network drive The USB port for peripheral devices and Ethernet interface are options 2 Cannot recall the data from a saved file Saving and Loading of Data Save setup parameters numeric data waveform display data waveform sampling data and screen image data to a storage medium Loads the saved se
507. ut resistive voltage divider Current Floating input shunt input Measurement range rated value Voltage When the crest factor is set to 3 15 V 30 V 60 V 100 V 150 V 300 V 600 V and 1000 V e When the crest factor is set to 6 7 5 V 15 V 30 V 50 V 75 V 150 V 300 V and 500 V Current 2 A input element e Direct input 5mA 10 mA 20 mA 50 mA 100 mA 200 mA 500 mA 1 A or 2 A when the crest factor is set to 3 2 5 mA 5 mA 10 mA 25 mA 50 mA 100 mA 250 mA 500 mA 1 A when the crest factor is set to 6 e External sensor input When the crest factor is set to 3 50 mV 100 mV 200 mV 500 mV 1 V 2 V 5V and 10 V When the crest factor is set to 6 25 mV 50 mV 100 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1 V 2 5 V and 5V Current 30 A input element e Direct input When the crest factor is set to 3 500 mA 1 A 2 A 5 A 10 A 20 A and 30 A When the crest factor is set to 6 250 mA 500 mA 1 A 2 5 A 5 A 10 A and 15 A e External sensor input When the crest factor is set to 3 50 mV 100 mV 200 mV 500 mV 1 V 2 V 5 V and 10 V When the crest factor is set to 6 25 mV 50 mV 100 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1 V 2 5 V and 5 V Input impedance Voltage Input resistance Approx 10 MQ input capacitance Approx 5 pF Current 2 A input element e Direct input Approx 500 mQ approx 0 07 u H e External sensor input Input resistance Approx 1 MQ input capacitance Approx 40 pF Current 30 A input element
508. value is set using the user defined function The operators for the measurement functions are shown below in the form measurement function MAX value equation for defining the MAX hold U UMAX Urms URMSMAX Umn UMEANMAX l IMAX P PMAX S SMAX Q QMAX U pk UPPEAKMAX U pk UMPEAKMAX l pk IPPEAKMAX _ I pk IMPEAKMAX To hold the MAX value of U enter UMAX in the equation for the user defined function e One symbol from E1 to E6 can be entered in the parentheses for UMAX IMAX PMAX SMAX and QMAX e One symbol from E1 to E4 can be entered in the parentheses for URMSMAX and UMEANMAX e One symbol from E1 to E4 can be entered in the parentheses for UPPEAKMAX to IMPEAKMAX e The maximum value of the data above is held while the MAX hold function is enabled e Values are substituted in URMSMAX and UMEANMAX only when the voltage mode is RMS and MEAN respectively e The D A output the numeric data list that the built in printer prints the communication output and other values are set to the maximum held values e Limitations on the MAX Hold Function by Measurement Modes The MAX hold function cannot be used in IEC harmonics measurement voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement and cycle by cycle measurement modes Note In wide bandwidth harmonic measurement mode the total value the total value of each harmonic component is substituted in the equation
509. vcetessesessecsvtsviiduenaia 5 6 voltage and current determination Of s es 2 7 voltage fluctuation and flicker measurement mode 3 34 voltage function and flicker measurement 2 34 voltage input terminal eee 3 14 voltage MOE iccccsccecessissssvsscsacsencitessesaveccasscnssesessenstesvsdsrenass 5 9 voltage range Setting Of 00 0 eeseseeseessseeeseeseseerseessaeeesees 4 6 VT Wat siisii niais aora Ir Erana EEREN ENEE 4 15 W Page WAMU UME lt csecdascesaxresdssncshecsledaseceodesocstsitisascecaetiandequana 12 16 warranty items not covered by ou eee eee eeeeeeeeeee 11 11 warranty SCOPE Of eee cece eee eeneeeeeeeteeeeaeeeeeeee 11 11 watt hour WAVE oaiae Wave C1 Wave C1 Trace Wave C2 Trace Wave C2 x Wave Cursor Wave Display Wave Mapping ssicsscevesisstestiseseescniacdetseiseasssceanadensaesdeestacies Wave Lacoa anra AE EEE EE ANETE AAEE CRASS waveform Waveform Computation cc eceeceeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 2 33 waveform display data Saving Of 0 0 eee cetera 9 13 waveform MAPPING cceeeeseeeeseeeseeeneesseeseeessseeeneeeseee 7 13 Waveform Sampling Data 9 9 9 15 waveform ZOOMING Of cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeeee 2 28 WGIQMM scssicssccsseesecectestersescesccavsecaetevescessssestenscecreatessesreseps see 12 16 WIRING eiiieaenii dct neces en 4 1 wiring compensation 5 22 Wining PIECAUTIONS
510. veform Trend Display Bar graph Vector Waveform computation FFT Auto range Flicker Averaging Cycle by Cycle Exponential average Moving average Data update rate Voltage Current mode Peak measurement User defined function MAX hold Efficiency computation Compensation Integration Store File save Setup Wave Numeric Acquisition Zero level compensation NULL Synchronized measurement Motor Print Print Auto Limits Limit Limit D A output Yes Yes Yes Delta computation No Yes Yes Mail transmission Yes Yes Yes Yes Can be used Limit Limitation on some functions No Cannot be used 1 The rms values of voltage and current are total values not the normal measurement values 2 Can be monitored using the IEC harmonic measurement software 3 The attenuation constant cannot be selected 4 Fixed to 2 s 5 The efficiency compensation and the compensation for the two wattmeter method are invalid 6 Integ Sync cannot be selected because there is no integration function Waveform data is set to NAN no data if Wave Trace is selected because there is no waveform data 7 Save FFT waveforms using Acquisition not Wave 8 If an item that is not measured or computed in the respective measurement mode NAN data is saved 9 The settings can be cha
511. verage and either one is selected depending on the data update interval For details on the measurement period and the averaging method see appendix 7 Data Update Rate and Computing Equation PZA and PZB denote the active power of the wiring units ZA and B respectively The assignment of input elements to wiring units ZA and B is determined by the number of input elements that are installed in the WT3000 and the selected wiring system pattern For details see section 2 3 The numbers 1 2 and 3 in the equations UX IZ PZ SX QZ Pc WP2 and qz indicate the case when input elements 1 2 and 3 are set to the wiring system shown in the table If elements 2 3 and 4 are set to the wiring system shown in the table replace the numbers 1 2 and 3 with 2 3 and 4 respectively Equation TYPE 3 for SX and Q can be selected only on models with the advanced computation G6 or the harmonic measurement G5 option S Q and p on the WT3000 are derived through the computation of the measured values of voltage current and active power except Q is calculated directly from the sampled data when TYPES is selected If distorted signal is input the value obtained on this instrument may differ from that obtained on other instruments using a different measurement principle For Q var computation when the current leads the voltage the Q value is displayed as a negative value when the current lags the voltage the Q value is displaye
512. vert the data into a CSV file 2 The software program can be downloaded by accessing the Download and Support page from the following URL http Awww yokogawa com tm If you change the extension of the file such as on a PC the file can no longer be loaded into the File Reader Software 8 20 IM 760301 01E 8 6 Recalling the Stored Data Procedure DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Oneuote a uvene WAVE U 1 P sono UPDATE HOLD LOCAL c CAL gt MG ITEM FORM USER Femen INTEG f suet LOWER ITEM LOWER FORM USER SET O ALL O c o e O lt a amp j Scauna feren AG To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above MOTOR FREQ the soft keys SET FILTER ram ser measure mesu In the procedural explanation below the phrase press the ae OM cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE ace savel store Character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 14 PRINT MISC HELP MENU e Recalling the Data 1 Press SHIFT STORE STORE SET to display the Store Set menu 2 Press the Mode soft key to select Recall 3 Press the cursor keys and set the Recall No number of the data to be recalled The corresponding data is displayed Store Set Mo
513. w the phrase press the aia 5 bia cursor keys may be used This phrase refers to the procedures for selecting items and entering values and FILE MAGE SAVE STORE character strings For details on the procedures see section MENU STORE SET 3 1 4 print wisc_ er MENU aiii 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Config soft key to display the Config menu sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 e Selecting the Message Language 3 Press the Message Language soft key to display the Message menu 4 Press the ENG or JPN soft key to select the message language e Selecting the Menu Language 3 Press the Menu Language soft key 4 Press the JPN or ENG soft key to select the menu language Message Config Message Message System Language JPN Language Overview enu Language ENG JPN g Font Remote ENG Control Gothic S L0 j Lc Brightness Brightness Brightness 2 2 2 Key Lock Key Lock Key Lock DEF oN PFF ON PFF ON Shift Lock Shift Lock Shift Lock PFF ON PFF ON PFF ON Crest Factor Crest Factor Crest Factor CF6 EF3 cr6 EF3 cr6 IM 760301 01E 3 41 3 18 Selecting the Message Language Explanation e Selecting the Message Language An error message is displayed when an error occurs Select the la
514. wave to the rms value of the fundamental wave or all waves Harmonic order Integer ratio of the harmonic frequency with respect to the fundamental frequency Total harmonic distortion The ratio of the rms value of all harmonics to the rms value of the fundamental wave or all waves Interference Caused by Harmonics Below are some of the effects on electric devices and equipment caused by harmonics Condenser and series reactor Harmonic current reduces the circuit impedance causing excessive current to flow This results in vibration beat overheat or burnout Cable Harmonic current flows through the neutral line of a three phase four wire system causing the neutral line to overheat Transformer Causes magnetostrictive noise of the iron core and increases iron loss and copper loss Breaker and fuse Excessive harmonic current causes erroneous operation and fuse to blow Communication line Electromagnetic induction causes noise voltage Controller Distorted control signal causes erroneous operation Audio visual equipment Causes degradation of performance and service life flickering of video caused by noise and malfunction of parts IM 760301 01E App 21 x pu ddy Appendix 4 Power Basics Power Harmonics and RLC of AC Circuits RLC of AC Circuits Resistance Current i when AC voltage of instantaneous value u Umsinot is applied to load resistance R Q is expressed by the equation below Im denotes
515. will press the SHIFT key to turn ON the SHIFT key followed by the operation key The setup menu marked in purple below the panel key that you pressed appears on the screen k Denotes 1000 Example 12 kg 100 kHz K Denotes 1024 Example 459 KB file data size viii IM 760301 01E Flow of Operation The figure below is provided to familiarize the first time user with the general flow of the WT3000 operation For a description of each item see the relevant section or chapter In addition to the sections and chapters that are referenced in the figure below this manual also contains safety precautions for handling the instrument and performing wiring work Keep them in mind and make sure to observe them Operation of Operation of Basic Functions Expansion Functions mm Describes the flow of operation of the basic For the operation of expansion ms functions of the instrument from measurement functions see the Expansion EE preparation to measurement execution display Function User s Manual EE of measured results and data acquisition IM760301 51E Use the expansion functions as necessary for your application Measurement Preparation Install the instrument Section 3 2 Connect the power supply and _ Sections 3 3 and 3 4 turning co the power switch Select the measurement method gt Section 3 8 Wire the circuit under b Sections 3 9 to 3 11 measurement Connect the wires after reading
516. x 6 Press the cursor keys to select the hour minute or second box 7 Press SET to display the entry box 8 Press the cursor keys to set the hour minute or second that you selected in step 6 to 0 9 Press SET or ESC to close the box 10 Repeat steps 6 to 9 to set the hour minute and second to 00000 00 00 Integ Set M Mode SLL Timer setin h L Timer Settin Timer Setting o Cooma Co 0 Auto Cal PFF ON M D A Output Rated Time e Performing Integration in the Manual Integration Mode e Starting the Integration 11 Press INTEG to display the Integ menu 12 Press the START soft key The START indicator to the right of the INTEG key illuminates and the integration is started Holding the Integration 13 Press HOLD The HOLD key illuminates and the numeric data display is held Integration continues inside the WT3000 e Releasing the Hold Operation 14 Press HOLD while the values are held The HOLD key turns OFF and the numeric data display is updated In the hold condition the display can be updated by carrying out single measurements by pressing SINGLE e Stopping the Integration 15 Press the STOP soft key The START indicator turns OFF and the STOP indicator illuminates The integration time and integration value are held Integration continues if you press START at this point e Resetting the Integration 16 Press the RESET soft key The STOP indicator turn
517. xipueddy Appendix 2 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numeric Data ALL Item Display Display Page 2 3 4 5 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 1 U ni l U pk Wp n2 F2 I k I k Ithd pU1 U3 P l pk WP n3 F3 P k P k Pthd oU1 l4 S l pk WP n4 F4 S k Q k Uthf Q CfU q AF1 F5 Q k Z k Ithf A Cfl q AF2 F6 A k Rs k Utif 0 Pc q AF3 F7 o k Xs k Itif AF4 F8 fl Freql Speed F9 Torque F10 SyncSp 1 F141 Slip 1 Pm 1 1 Displayed only on models with the motor evaluation function motor version 2 Displayed only on models with the advanced computation G6 or harmonic measurement G5 option App 12 IM 760301 01E Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format When waveform display data Wave is saved the following two files are automatically created in the directory e e The ASCII header files explained here cannot be viewed on the WT3000 Use the data in Waveform display data file wvf ASCII header file hdr such cases as when analyzing the waveforms on your PC INOKOGAWA ASCII FILE FORMAT Publicinfo FormatVersion 1 11 Model WT3000 Endian Big DataFormat Trace GroupNumber 3 TraceTotalNumber 10 DataOffset 8192 Group1 TraceNumber 4 BlockNumber 1 TraceName U1 l1 U2 12 BlockSize 1002 1002 1002 1002 VResolution 1 0000000E 00 1
518. y Clear a setup menu or dialog box Soft keys Selects items on the setup menu that appears on the screen PC card slot Used when saving data to a PC card See section 9 1 Front Panel Rear Panel and Top Panel Cursor keys Sets values includes the movement between digits moves the cursor and selects items in setup operations SET key Enters Confirms the item or value set using the cursor keys RESET key Resets the value entered using the cursor keys to default PAGE key Because all measurement items cannot fit on one screen the WT3000 displays the measurement items on separate pages The PAGE key and the PAGE A key is used to switch the displayed page See section 5 1 Handle Use the handles both sides when moving the instrument See section 3 1 Setup Menu Display Key and ExecutionKey Keys that are pressed first when entering a setting or executing an operation Press the setup menu display key to open various setup menus Press an execution key to execute the operation assigned to that key See section 1 2 SHIFT key USB port Connect a USB memory or USB keyboard Rear Panel Voltage input terminal Used to connect voltage measuremen
519. y x Functions User Defined Function Four efficiency functions n1 to n4 are available 20 user defined functions F1 to F20 are available See section 2 5 Measurement Functions of Integration See section 2 6 Delta Computation Option Four delta functions AF1 to AF4 are available See the Expansion Function User s Manual IM760301 51E Types of Measurement Functions for Harmonic Measurement Option Harmonics can be measured on models with the advanced computation G6 option Harmonic measurement consists of three types harmonic measurement in normal measurement mode wide bandwidth harmonic measurement and IEC harmonic measurement In addition the rms voltage and current consist of two types normal measurement value and total value For details see the Extension Function User s Manual IM760301 51E 2 6 IM 760301 01E 2 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Functions Types of Measurement Functions of the Motor Evaluation Function Motor Version By using the motor evaluation function motor version the rotating speed torque and output of a motor can be determined from the DC voltage analog signal or pulse count signal received from a revolution sensor which is proportional to the rotating speed of the motor and the DC voltage analog signal or pulse count signal received from a torque meter which is proportional to the motor s torque In addition the synchronous speed and slip of a motor can be determined
520. y data screen image data and setup parameters can be saved to a device connected via the Ethernet interface or information about the WT3000 can be transmitted e Saving and Loading from an FTP Server on the Network FTP Client Function The numeric data waveform display data screen image data and setup parameters can be saved to an FTP server on the network in the same fashion as the PC card The saved setup parameters can also be loaded as necessary PC or workstation on which the FTP server function is running PC e Accessing the WT3000 from a PC or Workstation FTP Server Function You can access the WT3000 from an FTP client on the network and retrieve the files on the PC card of the WT3000 or USB storage optional The FTP server function can be used when a PC card or USB storage is connected to the WT3000 APC or workstation on which the FTP client function is running e Printing on a Network Printer LPR Client Function The screen image can be printed on a network printer in the same fashion as the built in printer Printer e Sending Mail SMTP Client Function The information of the WT3000 can be transmitted periodically to a specified mail ad
521. ys to select any of the measurement functions starting with U T Press SET to confirm e Selecting the Element Wiring Unit 8 Press the Element Z soft key to display the element wiring unit selection box 9 Press the cursor keys to select any of the elements wiring units starting with Elementi 10 Press SET to confirm Arend Ttems T Trend Items rend object STrend Object Strend Object t1 Sa T14 x Function M Function u Lu 1 P s Q A E A y M Element ou ol FreqU Freq z Rs FSet OM Element7 Element 1 Rp xp Uhdf Ihdf Phdf Uthd Ithd Element 1 Element 1 Order Pthd Uthf ithf utif atif hvf hct Order Element 2 Na Utpeak U peak I peak I peak CfU cfi Pe gt Element 3 _ Time P wp uP q q q Element 4 ws wo m y2 23 n AF1 ZA F2 AF3 ar4 ui uj ui uk gui ii ui ij zB X Selecting the Harmonic Order Applicable Only on Models with the Advanced Computation Option or the Harmonic Measurement Option 11 Press Order soft key 12 Press the cursor keys to select the order from normal measured value and 0 to the maximum measured order see section 7 5 in the Expansion Function User s Manual Trend tems Strend object T1 M Function A Element dement gam ase Order To check the trend display settings use the setup parameter list function see section 3 16 7 6 IM 760301 01E 7
522. ys to set the attenuation constant or the average count If the averaging type is Exp exponential averaging set the attenuation constant If the averaging type is Lin moving averaging set the average count Averaging q 4 24 IM 760301 01E 4 9 Selecting the Averaging Function Explanation For functional details see section 2 3 The averaging function is effective when reading of the numeric display is difficult due to fluctuations This occurs when the fluctuation of the power supply or the load is large or when the input signal frequency is low Measurement Functions of Normal Measurement e Turning ON OFF Averaging You can select whether to perform the specified averaging operation e ON Performs averaging e OFF Does not perform averaging Selecting the Averaging Type Select one of the choices below For the equation of each type see section 2 3 Exp Performs exponential averaging e Lin Performs moving averaging Setting the Attenuation Constant or Average Count If the averaging type is Exp exponential averaging set the attenuation constant If the averaging type is Lin moving averaging set the average count For Exp Select the attenuation constant from 2 4 8 16 32 and 64 For Lin Select the average count from 8 16 32 64 128 and 256 e Measurement Functions That Are Averaged The measurement functions that are directly averaged are indicated below Other functions that us

WT3000 Precision Power Analyzer User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents